General Catalog 2015: Controls & Instrumentation

GENERAL CATALOG 2015
CONTROLS &
INSTRUMENTATION
Cover Backcover 2015.indd 1 12/8/14 12:03 PM

2015 Catalog
Controls and Instrumentation
In order to consistently bring you the highest quality, full-featured products,

we reserve the right to change our specifications and designs at any time.
MURPHY products and the Murphy logo are registered and/or common law trademarks
of Enovations Controls, LLC. This document, including textual matter and illustrations, is copyright protected
by Enovation Controls, LLC, with all rights reserved. (c) 2015 Enovation Controls, LLC.
A copy of the warranty may be viewed or printed by going to www.fwmurphy.com/warranty.
Notes
How To Use The Catalog
The 2015 Murphy Catalog features a new look and style For more information on any product, please visit
to assist you in finding the right product for your needs. our website at www.fwmurphy.com.
Here are some of the key elements, you will find on If you have questions, please call us at
most of the bulletins included. (918) 317-4100.
Document Number
Every bulletin has a document
number. This number can
be helpful when speaking
with a sales representative to
Brief Description ensure you are referring to the
Each bulletin has a same product. Some bulletins
brief description of reference these numbers to
the product and its indicate products that can be
features. For more used in conjunction with other
information on any parts.
product, please visit
our website.
Section Sidebar
This convenient bar identifies
the section each bulletin is in
and allows for quick location of
each section.
Important
Features
Quickly find
the features
pertinent to
your job with
easy-to-find
headers.
How To Order
Most bulletins will feature a list of
product numbers to assist you in
ordering. Others may have a matrix to
guide you through creating the specific
part you require. All combinations may
not be available. Please call Enovation
Controls for more information and
availability.
In order to consistently bring you the highest quality, full-featured products, we reserve the right to change our specifications and designs at any time.
MURPHY products and the Murphy logo are registered and/or common law trademarks of Enovations Controls, LLC. This document, including textual matter and
illustrations, is copyright protected by Enovation Controls, LLC, with all rights reserved. (c) 2015 Enovation Controls, LLC. A copy of the warranty may be viewed or
printed by going to www.fwmurphy.com/warranty.
Section 05 Pressure/Vacuum
2” and 2.5” Swichgage® and Murphygage® Instruments

96023 2” and 2.5” Vacuum Swichgage® — 20, 25, A20 and A25 Series ��3
96014 2” and 2.5” Differential Pressure Gage for Filter Restriction
20DP, 25DP, A20DP and A25DP Series ��5
94116 2” and 2.5” Pressure Swichgage® — 20 and 25 Series ��9
94030 Pressure Swichgage® Instrument — A20 and A25 Series ��13
96012 B-Series Murphygage® Instrument��17
9104 Direct Mount Pressure Switch — Model PSB��21
4.5” Swichgage® and Murphygage® Instruments

96001 Pressure Gage and Swichgage® Instruments
OPL Series 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) Diameter Dial��23
00029 Pressure Switchgage® — 45APE Series��29
96107 Lead Line Pressure Swichgage® Instrument
Model PT167EX 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) Diameter Dial��31
Pressure Transmitters
1211009 Pressure Transmitters — PXT-K Series��33
Section 10 Temperature

95026 Temperature Swichgage® — A20 and A25 Series ��39
94031 20 and 25 Series Temperature Swichgage®
2 and 2-1/2 inc. (51 and 64 mm) Dial��43
9137 Direct Mount Temperature Switch — Model TSB��47
Accessories for 2” and 2.5” Gages

8428 Sensing Bulb/Scale/Capillary Length Combinations for 20, 25, A20 and A25 Series
Temperature Swichgage® and Murphygage® Instruments��49
Pyrometers
9011 Exhaust Pyrometers for Diesel Engines — Models 10705146 and 10705147��51
SDB Series Temperature Swichgage® Instruments

7543 Direct Mount Temperature Swichgage® — SDB Series ��53

94117 4.5 in. (114 mm) Dial Temperature Swichgage® — SPL and 45TE Series ��55
Digital Temperature Swichgage® Instrument

8911 Dual Temperature Swichgage® — Model Series MDTM89��59
Temperature Scanners
9106 Temperature Swichgage® — Scanner/Pyrometer Model TDX6 ��63
00064 Temperature Scanner/Pyrometer — TDXM Model��65
Temperature Sensors
96084 Thermocouple, RTD, and RTD Transmitter with Thermowell
TC, RTD, and RTDT Series��67
0610107 Thermocouple, Stainless Steel Tube Type — 1/4 in. Diameter��69
0910430 Air Temperature Sensor — Model 12 ��71
Section 15 Fluid Level
Level Switch System - Bilge

95107 Bilge Level Switch System — BLSK1 Series ��75
Level Switches - Tank Level

94124 Hydrostatic Head Level Switches — DF Series ��77
Level Swichgage® Instruments - Coolant

00072 Level Swichgage® Instrument for Engine Liquids — L150/EL150K1 Series��81
Level Maintainers
1010627 Lube Level Maintainer — LM500/LM500-TF ��83
92149 Level Maintainer — LM300 Series ��85
96121 Oil Level Regulators for Lubricators — LR500 Series��87
7225 Maintain Lube Level — Model LR857��89
Level Swichgage® Instruments - Oil

0710176 Float Actuated Oil Level Swichgage® for Small Engines and Pumps��91
Level Swichgage® Instruments - Lube

6572 Lube Level Swichgage® Instrument — L129��93
Level Switches - Crankcase

7229 Crankcase Level Switch — L971 Series��95
Level Switches - Scrubber

1010629 Liquid Level Switches — MLS Series��97
0600009 Liquid Level Switches — LS200 Series ��99
Level Valves - Scrubber

01069 Dump Valves — DVU Series��103
Level Swichgage® Instruments - Tank Level

94122 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) Dial Level Swichgage® — OPLH/OPLHACS Series��105
Section 20 Vibration, Time and Overspeed
Tachometers - Digital
9004 Selectronic® Digital Tachometer — MT90 Model��111
96115 Digital Tachometer and Hourmeter with Adjustable Overspeed Set Point — MTH6��113
97050 Digital Tachometer/Hourmeter with Adjustable Overspeed Trip Point
SHD30 and SHD30-45 Models��115
Speed Switches
97118 Electronic Speed Switches — HD9063 Series, OS77D Series and SS300 Series��117
Hourmeters - Electromechanical
97030 Hourmeters — TM Series��121
Timers - Mechanical
96095 Time Switches — Models 5T, 15T, 12T and 24T��123
Vibration Switches
96013 Shock and Vibration Switch — VS2 Series��125
94092 Shock and Vibration Switch — VS94 Model��129
Section 25 Magnetic Switches & Annunciators
Remote Alarm / Annunciators

95046 Selectronic® Tattletale® Remote Alarm Annunciators — ST Series ��133
Magnetic Switches
78793 Tattletale® Annunciators and Magnetic Switches��139
Section 30 Engine Panels
Engine Panel Accessories

8904 Selectronic® Flasher Alarm and Mini-siren — TL7 and SAH Series��147
94032 Swichgage® Shutdown Panels for Mobile Equipment of All Kinds — WAI Series��149
8198 Swichgage® Kits for Engines — WD100 Series ��153
03061 Swichgage® Shutdown Panels with Open Back for Diesel Engines — WD300 Series��155
04001 Electric Gage Shutdown WDU Series Panels
for Deutz 1011/2011, 912/913 and 914 Engines ��157
03062 WHB Series Swichgage® Shutdown Panels
for High Plains and Other Irrigation Engines��163
94100 Shutdown Panel Kits for Deutz and Other Engines — W0156 and W0169 Series��165
8426 Swichgage® Shutdown Panel Kit — W0168 and WO241��167
92226 Swichgage® Shutdown Panel Kit — Model WO270��169
MurphyLink® PowerView™ Panels

1211014 ML25 Panel — MurphyLink® Series ��171
1211030 Murphy Industrial Harnesses —MurphyLink® Series ��183
Marine Engine Panels

1211179 Marine Engine Panel Series — Local and Remote��185
Section 40 Engine and Motor Controls
Engine and Generator Controls

0810288 Keystart 9620 Series — Engine/Generator Controls��189
0810330 CANstart™ 9630 Series — Engine/Generator Controls��191
Auto Start Controllers

05195 Cascade Controller — Auto-Start/Stop ��193
0910438 Automatic Engine Controller — Model AEC101��195
Digital Engine Controller

1411425 PowerCore™ MPC-20��197
1411441 ML 2000 Panel — MurphyLink® Series��199
1010554 EMS Pro — Engine Monitoring System Controller��201
1110770 EMS Pro Lite — Engine Monitoring System Controller��203
Electric Motor Controllers

0910462 Murphymatic® TR Series — Transformer Relay Assemblies��205
Ignition Controls
1311391 IntelliSpark™ — Ignition Controller System��209
0910517 601 Series CD Ignition — Ignition Control Systems��211
0910515 Detonation Sensing Interface System — Model DSI ��213
0910513 Ignition Coils — Ignition Control Systems ��215
0910514 Murphy Brushless Alternators — Power Supply��217
Air/Fuel Ratio Controls

0910476 AFR-1R — Rich Burn Air/Fuel Ratio Control System��219
0910477 AFR-9R — Rich-Burn Air/Fuel Ratio Controller ��221
0910475 AFR-64R — Rich Burn Air/Fuel Ratio Control System��223
0910491 AFR-64L — Lean Burn Air/Fuel Ratio Control System��225
1010670 EICS — Engine Integrated Control System ��227
Rack Pullers
00092 Pull/Push DC Solenoids for Diesel Engines — RP Series��229
95028 Rack Puller for Diesel Engines — Model RP75��233
Throttle Controller
04052 Murphymatic® Engine Throttle Controller— Model AT03069��237
Clutch Controller
01035 Electric Motor Driven Clutch Operator for Engine Automation Systems ��239
Section 50 Compressor Controls and Panels
Annunciators
8535 LCDT Selectronic® Tattletale® System ��243
0910435 TTD™ Series — Configurable Fault Annunciator��245
96122 SeriesS1501 Selectronic® Microcontroller/Annunciator��249
Controllers
0910434 Centurion™ Configurable Controller ��251
0910452 Centurion™ PLUS Full-Featured Controller��255
Panels
0910471 TTD Annunciator Panel��259
0910472 Centurion™ Configurable Control Panel ��261
0910492 Centurion™ PLUS Control Panel��265
1210950 Control Systems & Services��269
Section 55 Valves
Check/Relief Valves — Diesel Fuel

7867 Diesel Fuel Check Valves — CKV/PRV Series ��273
Shutoff Valves
99026 Diesel Fuel Shutoff Valves — SV Series��275
94134 Electromechanical Fuel Shutoff Valves — M25 and M50 Series ��277
94129 Pneumatic Valves for Fuel Gas Shutoff — Models M2582-P and M5180-P��281
Pulsation Dampener Valves

95145 Pulsation Dampener — PD8100 Series ��283
Section 70 Electric Gauges
Electric Gages
95090 EG Series — Electric Gage and Swichgage® Instrument��287
Senders
1411577 Fuel Senders��291
1411607 Pressure Senders ��293
1411608 Temperature Senders ��295
Annunciators
0910469 Four Function Tattletale® Annunciator — EN204 Series��299
Tachometers - Analog
97026 Tachometers and Tach/Hourmeters — AT and ATH Series��301
Section 75 Genset Controls

0810288 Keystart 9620 Series — Engine/Generator Controls��305
0810330 CANstart™ 9630 Series — Engine/Generator Controls��307
05195 Cascade Controller — Auto-Start/Stop ��309
1211127 EMS-GC10 — Genset Controller Unit��311
0910470 Murphy Generator Control Panels (MGC)��313
1311257 MGC400 — Murphy Generator Control Panel ��315
Battery Chargers
1010704 Sentinel 150 Series — Automatic Battery Charger��317
1010705 Sentinel 300P — Programmable Switch Mode Battery Chargers ��321
Section 78 MurphyLink® J1939
PowerView™ Displays
1110920 PowerView™ PV25 — Engine and Diagnostic Display ��327
1110823 PowerView™ PV101— Engine and Diagnostic Display��329
1411568 PowerView™ PV101-A-HAZ & PV101-C-HAZ��331
HelmView™ Displays
1211117 HelmView™ HVS450— Commercial Marine Display��341
1110871 HelmView™ HV750 — Commercial Marine Display��343
1211184 HelmView™ HVS780 — Commercial Marine Display ��345
PowerView™ PVA Gages and Accessories

1010612 PowerView™ CAN Gages ��347
02125 PowerView™ Analog Gages — PVA Series��349
03020 Wiring Harness Accessories — PowerView™ PV101 Module and PVA Analog Gages��353
PowerView™ — PVM Gages and Accessories

0710178 PowerView™ Gages — PVM Series��355
0710179 Wiring Harness Accessories — PowerView™ PV101 and PVM Gages��359
PowerView™ PVM Gages and Accessories

0910389 PVS-5 Power Supply��361
Section 80 CAN I/O Modules
CAN/IO Modules
0810313 SenderCAN™ — SAE J1939 Input/Output Module��367
0810332 MeCAN™ — Mechanical Engine to J1939 CAN Interface��369
0810308 FuelCAN™ — Fuel Level Sender to J1939 Transmitter��371
1311322 PowerCore™ Intelligent Xpansion™ — IX3212 Power Distribution Module��373
0710175 XM500 — I/O Module��375
0610067 CANdrive™ — CAN bus J1939 to Electric Gage Interface ��377
Terms and Conditions of Sale��379

Enovation Controls Limited Warranty��380
5
Section 05 Pressure/Vacuum
10
96023 2” and 2.5” Vacuum Swichgage® — 20, 25, A20 and A25 Series �� 3
96014 2” and 2.5” Differential Pressure Gage for Filter Restriction
20DP, 25DP, A20DP and A25DP Series �� 5
94116 2” and 2.5” Pressure Swichgage® — 20 and 25 Series �� 9
15
94030 Pressure Swichgage® Instrument — A20 and A25 Series �� 13
96012 B-Series Murphygage® Instrument�� 17
9104 Direct Mount Pressure Switch — Model PSB�� 21
20
96001 Pressure Gage and Swichgage® Instruments
OPL Series 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) Diameter Dial�� 23
00029 Pressure Switchgage® — 45APE Series�� 29
25
96107 Lead Line Pressure Swichgage® Instrument
Model PT167EX 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) Diameter Dial�� 31
1211009 Pressure Transmitters — PXT-K Series�� 33
30
40
50
55
70
75
78
1
80
This Page Has Intentionally Been Left Blank
2
5
sect. 05 96023
rev. 2014/10/04
2” and 2.5” Vacuum Swichgage ®
10
20, 25, A20 and A25 Series
The 20 Series (2 inch/51 mm dial) and the 25 Series
(2 1/2 inch/64 mm dial) Swichgage instruments are
15
diaphragm-actuated, vacuum-indicating gages with
built-in electrical switches. These switches are used for
tripping alarms and/or shutdown devices.
The 20 and 25 series gage mechanism is enclosed in a
steel case coated to resist corrosion.
20
A-Series gages have a polycarbonate case and are
sealed from the environment. All gages feature a
polycarbonate, break-resistant lens and a polished,
stainless steel bezel to help protect these rugged, built-
to-last instruments.
25
The gage pointer acts as a pressure indicator and
as one switch pole which completes a circuit when it
touches the adjustable limit contact. Contacts have a
self-cleaning motion to ensure electrical continuity.
Gage-only models, without contacts (Murphygage®
30
instruments) are also available.
A pulsation dampener (PD2160) is included with each
Swichgage to help eliminate pointer flutter. When
monitoring intake manifold vacuum, the PD2160 is
mounted in the manifold. The PD2160 has a 1/8-27
40
NPT connection. Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/
Commonly used to measure loading of spark-ignition EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.
engines through intake manifold vacuum, the gages
also can serve as overspeed protection from sudden
loss of load on these engines. Use anywhere the
50
vacuum source is compatible with port materials.
Specifications
Dial: White on black, dual scale; U.S.A. standard scale is Inches of Unit Weight:
Hg/kPa 20 Series: 8 oz. (0.23 kg)
55
Case (mounting clamp included): 25 Series: 11 oz. (0.31 kg)
20 and 25 Series: Plated steel A20 Series: 6 oz. (0.17 kg)
A20 and A25 Series: Polycarbonate/glass filled A25 Series: 10 oz. (0.28 kg)
Bezel: Polished stainless steel, standard; others are available (see Unit Dimensions:
How to Order) 20 and A20 Series: 3 x 3 x 3 in. (76 x 76 x 76 mm)
Lens: Polycarbonate, high-impact 25 and A25 Series: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. (121 x 121 x 70 mm)
70
Process Connection: 1/8-27 NPTM brass
Sensing Element: Beryllium copper diaphragm
Gage Accuracy: ±2% of scale in operating range (mid 1/3 of scale)
Adjustable Limit Contacts:
2-SPST contacts; pilot- duty only, 2 A @ 30 VAC/DC. Contacts
are gold flashed silver.
75
Limit Contact Adjustment: by a 1/16 in. hex wrench

Limit Contact Wire Leads (20 and 25 Series):
18 AWG (1.0 mm2) x 12 in. (305 mm)
Limit Contact Terminals: A20 Series number 4 screw terminals;
A25 Series number 6 screw terminals
78
3
80
Dimensions
20 Series Models 25 Series Models
A20 Series Models A25 Series Models
How to Order
Part Number Model and Description Notes

05703194 20V-20: Vacuum Swichgage 20 Series Model
05704330 A20V-30: Vacuum Swichgage A20 Series Model
05704394 A25V-30: Vacuum Swichgage A25 Series Model
4
5
sect. 05 96014
rev. 2014/10/04
2” and 2.5” Differential Pressure Gage
10
for Filter Restriction
20DP, 25DP, A20DP and A25DP Series
15
The 20DP and A20DP Series (2 inch/51 mm dial)
and the 25DP and A25DP Series (2-1/2 inch/64 mm
dial) Swichgage instruments are diaphragm-actuated,
differential pressure-indicating gages with a built-
in electrical switch. This switch is used for tripping
20
alarms and/or shutting down equipment. These gages
are intended to monitor and indicate oil, fuel or water
filter restriction and can reduce the risk of dangerously
high pressure which may rupture the filter, resulting in
contaminants entering the system.
25
The 20DP and 25DP series mechanism is enclosed
in a steel case coated to resist corrosion. The A20DP
and A25DP series have a polycarbonate case
and are sealed from the environment. All feature a
polycarbonate, break-resistant lens and a polished,
30
stainless steel bezel to help protect these rugged, built- Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/
to-last instruments. EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.
The gage pointer acts as a pressure indicator and
as one switch pole which completes a circuit when it Specifications
touches the adjustable limit contact. Contacts have
self-cleaning motion to ensure electrical continuity.
40
Dial: White on black, dual scale; U.S.A. standard scale is psi/kPa.
Additional features: Other scales available
• Constant visual indication of the condition of your Case: 20DP and 25DP Series: plated steel. A20DP and A25DP
filter is shown on the dial. Series: polycarbonate
• Two instruments in one with an accurate indicating Bezel: Polished stainless steel, standard; others are available.
Lens: Polycarbonate, high-impact
gage and adjustable p.s.i.d. limit switch reduces
50
Temperature Range:
inventory and installation time. Ambient: -40° to 150° F (-40° to 66° C)
• Adjustable contact lets you set the monitoring range Process: -40° to 250° F (-40° to 121° C)
of the gage. The contact is tamper proof and can be Process Connection: 1/8-27 NPTM brass
set only with a 1/16 Allen-head wrench. Sensing Element: Beryllium copper diaphragm
Gage Accuracy: ±3% maximum across scale
• All gages are made of durable materials allowing
55
Snap-Switch Rating (DPE models): SPDT, 3 A @ 30 VDC
them to withstand rugged applications. inductive; 4 A @ 125 VAC inductive
• Early filter changes cost you money and increase Adjustable Limit Contact: SPST contact; pilot duty only, 2 A @
the risk of contaminants entering the system. A Murphy 30 VAC/DC; closed when the low limit is met, open when pointer is
filter restriction Swichgage instrument will let you know in normal operating range. Contacts are gold flashed silver.
Limit Contact Adjustment: by 1/16 in. hex wrench through 100%
when to change the filter and maintain peak efficiency.
70
of scale.
Limit Contact Wire Leads (20DP and 25DP Series): 18 AWG (1.0
Base Models mm2) x 12 in. (305 mm)
Limit Contact Terminals: A20DP Series #4 screw terminals.
20DP, 25DP, A20DP and A25DP Swichgage instrument A25DP Series #6 screw terminals
The gage pointer makes with an adjustable contact to complete a Unit Weight: 20DP and A20DP Series: 9 oz. (0.25 kg); 25DP and
75
pilot-duty circuit. A25DP Series: 11 oz. (0.29 kg)

20DPE, 25DPE, A20DPE and A25DPE Swichgage instrument Unit Dimensions: 20DP and A20DP Series: 3 x 2-3/4 x 2-3/4 in.
20DPE (was 20DPEO), 25DPE (was 25DPEO), A20DPE (was (76 x 70 x 70 mm). 25DP and A25DP Series: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 2-3/4
A20DPEO) and A25DPE (was A25DPEO). in. (121 x 121 x 70 mm)
Features an internal snap-acting SPDT switch, instead of the single
pole/pointer contacts. When the switch closes on rising pressure, it
78
becomes set, as pressure falls the switch resets. 20DPG, 25DPG,

A20DPG and A25DPG Murphygage instrument gage without con-
tact(s).
5
80
Dimensions
20P A20DP 25DP A25DP

Series Series Series Series
A 2-7/32 (56) 2-9/64(54) 2-1/8 (54) 1-51/64 (46)
B 2-15/64 (57) 2-1/4 (57) 3-1/8 (79) 2-29/32 (74)
C 1-5/16 (33) 1-27/64 (36) 1-3/8 (35) 1-27/64 (36)
D 2-1/16 (53) 2-1/16 (53) 2-11/16 (68) 2-11/16 (68)
Note: 20 and 25 Series have 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) wire. A20 Series has #4 screw
terminals, and A25 Series has #6 terminals. Dimensions are inches and (millime-
ters).
Operating Characteristics
Port A connects to the input side of the filter. Pressure

pushes diaphragm C forward thus pushing the button
D which turns the crank arm E which in turn moves
pointer F to register the amount of pressure on dial G.
Port B connects to the outlet side of the filter. Pressure
is exerted through tube H and pushes on the diaphragm
thus applying pressure on both sides of the diaphragm.
The pointer displays pressure in the amount that the input
pressure is greater than the outlet pressure. As the filter
is restricted by contaminants and the pressure difference
reaches the critical point, the pointer touches the preset
limit contact and shuts down the system or activates a
visual or audible signal to alert the operator.
Internal Wiring Ranges and Factory Settings
Ranges* Max. Static Max. Contact

Available Pressure Differential Setting
Pressure
0-15 50 (345) [3.4] 30 (207) [2.0] 10 (69) [0.8]
(0-103) [0-1.0]
0-30 150 (1.0) [10] 60 (414) [4.0] 20 (138) [1.0]
(0-207) [0-2.0]
0-50 300 (2.1) [20] 100 (690) [7.0] 30 (207) [2.0]
(0-345) [0-3.5]
0-75 300 (2.1) [20] 150 (1.0) [10] 50 (345) [3.5]
(0-517) [0-5.0]
0-100 300 (2.1) [20] 200 (1.4) [14] 60 (414) [4.0]
(0-690) [0-7.0]
* Values are shown in psi, (kPa/MPa) and [bar]. Values in kPa/MPA and bar are
mathematical conversions from psi. They do not reflect actual second scale change.
6
How to Order
5
Options listed at right. All
configurations may not be available.
Call your sales representative
10
or Enovation Controls for more
information.
15
20
25
30
40
50
55
70
75
78
7
80
8
5
sect. 05 94116
rev. 2014/10/04
2” and 2.5” Pressure Swichgage ®
10
20 and 25 Series
The 20 Series (2 inch/51 mm dial) and the 25 Series
(2-1/2 inch/64 mm dial) Swichgage models are
diaphragm-actuated, pressure-indicating gages with
15
built-in electrical switches. These switches exceed
SAE standards and are used for tripping alarms and/or
shutdown devices.
Ranges are available from 0-15 psi (103 kPa) [1.0 bar]
through 0-400 psi (2.8 MPa) [28 bar].
20
The gage mechanism is enclosed in a steel case
coated to resist corrosion. A polycarbonate, break-
resistant lens and a polished, stainless steel bezel help
protect this rugged, built-to-last instrument. Accuracy
and protection from moderate overpressure is assured
25
by a unique, unitized diaphragm chamber. A built-in
pulsation dampener helps eliminate pointer flutter and
is removable for cleaning. For models 20P and 25P, the
gage pointer acts as a pressure indicator and as one Products covered in this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/
switch pole which completes a circuit when it touches EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.
30
the adjustable limit contact. Contacts are grounded
through the case and have self-cleaning motion to
Specifications
ensure electrical continuity.
Models 20PE and 25PE have internal snap-acting Dial: White on black, dual scale; U.S.A. standard scale is psi/kPa;
SPDT switches. U.K. standard scale is psi/bar; others available (see How to Order).
40
Case: Plated steel; mounting clamp included (except for direct
Gage-only models, without the switches mount models)
(Murphygage®) are also available. Bezel: Polished stainless steel, standard; others are available.
The Swichgage was specifically designed to protect Lens: Polycarbonate, high-impact
engines/equipment in oil field, marine, irrigation, Oil: Silicon Oil
construction and trucking applications to monitor Temperature Range:
50
Ambient: -40° to 150° F (-40° to 66° C)
engine lube pressure, water pump pressure, hydraulic Process: -40° to 250° F (-40° to 121° C)
pressure, air pressure, etc. Process Connection: 1/8-27 NPTM brass
Gage Accuracy (% of Full Scale):
Base Models
Range Lower 1/4 Middle 1/2 Upper 1/4
55
20P and 25P Series Swichgage ≤300 psi (20 Bar) ±3% ±2% ±3%
The gage pointer makes with an adjustable contact to complete a
400psi (28 Bar) ±3% ±3% ±5%
pilot-duty circuit.
Maximum Pressure: See Pressure Ranges and Factory Settings
20PE and 25PE Swichgage table next page
20PE (was 20EO) and 25PE (was 25EO) Adjustable Limit Contact (20P and 25P): SPST contact; pilot-
Features internal snap-acting SPDT switches, instead of the single
pole/pointer contacts. When the switch closes on falling pressure, it
duty only, 2 A @ 30 VAC/DC; Normally Close (NC) when the low
limit is met. Normally Open (NO) when pointer is in normal operating 70
becomes set, as pressure rises the switch resets. range. Contacts are gold flashed silver.
20PABS and 25PABS Swichgage Limit Contact Adjustment: By a 1/16 in. hex wrench through
Same as 20P and 25P with internal SPDT snap-switch for pre- 100% of the scale
alarm. Limit Contact Wire Leads: 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) x 12 in. (305 mm)
75
Snap-Switch Rating (20PE and 25PE): SPDT, 3 A@ 30 VDC

20P7 and 25P7 Lockout Swichgage inductive; 4 A @ 125 VAC inductive
Same as 20P and 25P Series. They also include a front, semi-au- Snap-Switch Wire Leads: 20 AWG (0.75 mm2) x 12 in. (305
tomatic lockout for startup override. This built-in device holds the mm)
pointer away from the contact on startup. When pressure exceeds Unit Weight: 20 Series: 8 oz. (0.23 kg); 25 Series Models: 11 oz.
the set point, the lockout is automatically disengaged (see following (0.31 kg)
78
pages for details). Unit Dimensions: 20 Series: 3 x 3 x 3 in. (76 x 76 x 76 mm); 25

Series Models: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. (121 x 121 x 70 mm)
20PG and 25PG Murphygage
Gage without contact(s)
9
80
Dimensions
Pressure Ranges and Factory Settings
Ranges Standard High Settings 20PABS and 25PABS Settings

Available Maximum Settings Low Alarm
psi (kPa) [bar] Pressure psi (kPa) [bar] psi (kPa) [bar] psi (kPa) [bar] psi (kPa) [bar]
0-15 (103) [1.0] 2 x scale 3 (21) [0.2] 12 (83) [0.8] 3 (21) [0.2] 6 (41) [0.3]
0-30 (103) [1.0] 2 x scale 7 (48) [0.4] 24 (165) [1.6] 7 (48) [0.4] 10 (69) [0.6]
0-50 (345) [3.5] 2 x scale 10 (69) [0.8] 40 (276) [2.8] 10 (69) [0.8] 13 (90) [1.0]
0-75 (517) [5.0] 2 x scale 15 (103) [1.0] 60 (414) [4.0] 15 (103) [1.0] 18 (124) [1.5]
0-100 (690) [7.0] 2 x scale 20 (138) [1.5] 80 (552) [5.5] 20 (138) [1.0] 23 (159) [1.5]
0-150 (1.0 MPa) [10] 2 x scale 30 (207) [2.0] 120 (827) [8.0] 30 (207) [1.5] 33 (228) [2.0]
0-200 (1.4 MPa) [14] 2 x scale 50 (345) [3.0] 150 (1 MPa) [10] 50 (345) [3.0] 53 (365) [4.0]
0-300 (2.1 MPa) [20] 1-2/3 x scale 75 (517) [5.0] 225 (1.6 MPa) [15] 75 (517) [5.0] 78 (538) [5.0]
0-400 (2.8 MPa) [28] 1-1/4 x scale 150 (1.0 MPa) [7.0] 300 (2.1 MPa) [20] 75 (517) [5.0] 150 (1 MPa) [10]
Features
A. Process Connection and Port: Machined from brass bar stock; to-
gether with the diaphragm forms the diaphragm chamber.
B. Diaphragm: Beryllium copper; material is die formed and heat treated to
very close physical and metallurgical specifications.
C. Pulsation Dampener: Designed to minimize undesirable pointer chatter.
It is removable for cleaning.
D. Dial: White letters on a black background, dual scale (psi & kPa) standard;
others available on request (see How to Order).
E. Case: Steel with zinc and iridite; mounting clamp included (except for
direct mount models).
F. Bezel: Polished stainless steel standard, black bezel also available
G. Lens: Made of polycarbonate glass, high-impact treated
H. Pointer: Tempered nickel silver for continuity and corrosion resistance. It
is mounted on a machined brass post.
I. Limit Contact: SPST contact; N.C. when low limit is met. N.O. when
pointer operates above limit.
J. Limit Contact Adjustment: By 1/16 in. hex type wrench through 100%
of the scale. Easy adjustment knob available.
K. Wire Leads: 12 in. (305 mm) long, 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) for face-adjust-
able contacts. 20 AWG (0.75 mm2) for snap-switches models.
Warranty — A limited warranty on materials and workmanship is given with this Murphy product.
A copy of the warranty may be viewed or printed by going to www.fwmurphy.com/support/warranty.htm
10
Magnetic Switch
5
INDUCTIVE AND HIGH CURRENT LOADS REQUIRE THE USE OF A MAGNETIC SWITCH. The Swichgage contacts are for
light-duty electrical switching to operate alarms or control devices. Enovation Controls manufactures the Magnetic Switch for protection of
the light-duty Swichgage limit contacts. Tattletale® Magnetic Switches show the cause of shutdown for applications that include: capacitor
discharge or magneto ignitions, battery systems and electric motor driven equipment. Typical wiring diagrams are shown.
10
15
20
25
Start-Up Lockout (P7 Versions)
The Swichgage low limit contact can be bypassed on start-up by
pushing this optional lockout button. It holds the pointer away from
the shutdown contact while the engine starts. The lockout will disen-
gage automatically on rising pressure.
30
40
50
55
70
75
78
11
80
How to Order
Options listed below. All configurations may not be available. Call your sales representative or Enovation Controls
for more information.
12
5
sect. 05 94030
rev. 2014/10/10
Pressure Swichgage ® Instrument
10
A20 and A25 Series
The A20 Series (2 inch/51 mm dial) and the A25 Series
(2-1/2 inch/64 mm dial) Swichgage instruments are
diaphragm-actuated, pressure-indicating gages with
15
built-in electrical switches for tripping alarms and/or
shutdown devices.
Ranges are available from 0-15 psi (103 kPa) [1.0 bar]
through 0-400 psi (2.8 MPa) [28 bar].
These rugged, built-to-last instruments are face sealed A20 Series
20
from the environment by the unique combination of
a polycarbonate case and lens, a polished stainless
steel bezel and O-ring seals. Ranges above 30 psi (207
kPa) [2 bar] are sealed from the external environment
(except PE Series). Ranges of 30 psi and lower have a
25
small weep hole in the bottom of the case. Accuracy
and protection from moderate overpressure is assured
by a unique, unitized diaphragm chamber. A built-in A25 Series
pulsation dampener helps eliminate pointer flutter and is Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive
removable for cleaning. 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.
30
For series A20P and A25P, the gage pointer acts as
a pressure indicator and as one switch pole which Specifications
completes a circuit when it touches the adjustable limit
contact. Contacts have self-cleaning motion to ensure Dial: White on black, dual scale; U.S.A. standard scale is psi/kPa;
electrical continuity. U.K. standard scale is psi/bar.
40
Models A20PE and A25PE have internal snap-acting Case: Polycarbonate/glass filled, corrosion-resistant; steel mounting
SPDT switches for three wire control and can be wired clamp included
Bezel: Polished stainless steel, standard; others are available.
to make or to break a circuit. Pointer: Tempered nickel silver; Red tip
Gage-only models, without switches (Murphygage Lens: Polycarbonate, high-impact
instrument) are also available. Oil: Silicone Oil
50
A20/A25 Series applications include: engines/ Temperature Range:
equipment in oil field, marine, irrigation, construction Ambient: -40° to 150°F (-40° to 66°C)
Process: -40° to 250°F (-40° to 121°C)
and trucking for lube oil pressure, water pump pressure,
Process Connection: 1/8-27 NPTM brass
hydraulic pressure, air pressure, etc. Sensing Element: Beryllium copper diaphragm
Gage Accuracy (% of Full Scale):
Base Models
55
Range Lower 1/4 Middle 1/2 Upper 1/4
A20P and A25P Series Swichgage ≤ 300psi (20 Bar) ±3% ±2% ±3%
The gage pointer makes with an adjustable contact to 400psi (28 Bar) ±3% ±3% ±5%
complete a pilot duty circuit.
A20PE and A25PE Swichgage Maximum Pressure: See Pressure Ranges and Factory Settings
70
A20PE (was A20EO) and A25PE (was A25EO). table.
Features internal snap-acting SPDT switches, Adjustable Limit Contact (A20P and A25P): SPST contact;
instead of the single pole/pointer contacts. pilot-duty only, 2A@30 VAC/DC; Closed when the low limit is met.
When the switch closes on falling pressure, it becomes Open when pointer is in normal operating range. Contacts are gold
flashed silver. Limit Contact Adjustment: by a 1/16 in. hex wrench
set, as pressure rises the switch resets (refer to wiring through 100% of the scale.
75
diagram). Wiring: A20P: Number 4 screw terminals; A25P: Number 6 screw

Model A25PE is CSA listed for non-hazardous areas. terminals
Model A25PE-EX is CSA listed for Class I, Division 1, Snap-Switch Rating (A20PE and A25PE): SPDT, 3 A@ 30 VDC
Groups C and D hazardous areas. inductive; 4 A @ 125 VAC inductive
Wiring: A20PE: Number 4 screw terminals; A25PE: Number 6
A20PABS and A25PABS Swichgage instrument screw terminals.
78
Same as A20P and A25P with internal SPDT snap- Unit Weight: A20 Series: 8 oz. (0.23 kg); A25 Series Models: 11
switch for pre-alarm oz. (0.31 kg).
A20PG and A25PG Murphygage instrument Unit Dimensions: A20 Series: 3 x 3 x 3 in. (76 x 76 x 76 mm);
Gage without contact(s) A25 Series Models: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. (121 x 121 x 70 mm)
13
80
Dimensions
A20 Series Models A25 Series Models
Pressure Ranges and Factory Settings

NOTES • For models A20PE and A25PE, the switch trip point
• Values in ( ) are mathematical conversions from psi cannot be set at either the low or high extreme of the
to kPa/MPa — they do not reflect actual second scale scale. The trip point must allow for the reset differential.
range. U.S.A. standard scale is psi/kPa; U.K. standard Only certain models are adjustable.
scale is psi/bar — exact set-point shown. Consult • For adjustable switch models, the trip point is
factory for other scales. adjustable only over the lower half of the scale.
Ranges Standard High Settings 20PABS and 25PABS Settings

Available Maximum Settings Low Alarm
psi (kPa) [bar] Pressure psi (kPa) [bar] psi (kPa) [bar] psi (kPa) [bar] psi (kPa) [bar]
0-15 (103) [1.0] 30 psi (207) 3 (21) [0.2] 12 (83) [0.8] 3 (21) [0.2] 6 (41) [0.3]
0-30 (207) [2.0] 60 psi (413) 7 (48) [0.4] 24 (165) [1.6] 7 (48) [0.4] 10 (69) [0.6]
0-50 (345) [3.5] 100 psi (690) 10 (69) [0.8] 40 (276) [2.8] 10 (69) [0.8] 13 (90) [1.0]
0-75 (517) [5.0] 150 psi (1.0 MPa) 15 (103) [1.0] 60 (414) [4.0] 15 (103) [1.0] 18 (124) [1.5]
0-100 (690) [7.0] 200 psi (1.4 MPa) 20 (138) [1.5] 80 (552) [5.5] 20 (138) [1.0] 23 (159) [1.5]
0-150 (1.0 MPa) [10] 300 psi (2.1 MPa) 30 (207) [2.0] 120 (827) [8.0] 30 (207) [1.5] 33 (228) [2.0]
0-200 (1.4 MPa) [14] 400 psi (2.8 MPa) 50 (345) [3.0] 150 (1 MPa) [10] 50 (345) [3.0] 53 (365) [4.0]
0-300 (2.1 MPa) [20] 500 psi (3.4 MPa) 75 (517) [5.0] 225 (1.6 MPa) [15] 75 (517) [5.0] 78 (538) [5.0]
0-400 (2.8 MPa) [28] 500 psi (3.4 MPa) 150 (1.0 MPa) [7.0] 300 (2.1 MPa) [20] 75 (517) [5.0] 150 (1 MPa) [10]
Features
A. Process Connection and Port: Machined from brass bar stock.
Together with the diaphragm forms the diaphragm chamber.
B. Diaphragm (not shown): Beryllium copper die formed and
heat treated to very close physical and metallurgical specifications.
C. Pulsation Dampener: Designed to minimize undesirable pointer
chatter. It is removable for cleaning.
D. Dial: White letters on a black background, dual scale; others
available on request.
E. Case: Polycarbonate/glass filled, corrosion resistant;
mounting clamp included.
F. Bezel: Polished stainless steel standard, black bezel also available.
G. Lens: Made of high-impact resistant treated polycarbonate.
H. Pointer: Tempered nickel silver for continuity and corrosion
resistance—mounted on a machined brass post. Red tip.
I. Limit Contact: SPST contact; N.C. when low limit is met. N.O. when
pointer operates above limit.
J. Limit Contact Adjustment: by 1/16 in. hex type wrench through 100%
of the scale. Easy adjustment knob available.
K. Electrical Connections: Number 4 screw terminals for A20 Series; and
number 6 screw terminals for A25 Series models.
14
Magnetic Switch
5
INDUCTIVE AND HIGH CURRENT LOADS REQUIRE Tattletale® Magnetic Switches show the cause of
THE USE OF A MAGNETIC SWITCH. The Swichgage shutdown for applications that include: capacitor
contacts are for light-duty electrical switching to discharge or magneto ignitions, battery systems
operate alarms or control devices. Enovation Controls and electric motor driven equipment. Typical wiring
10
manufactures the Magnetic Switch for protection of the diagrams are shown below.
pilot-duty Swichgage limit contacts.
15
20
25
Pre-Alarm Using A20/A25PABS
The A20PABS and A25PABS feature a standard limit the shutdown circuit will be completed (see the typical
contact for equipment shutdown on low pressure. They diagram below for reference).
also have an internal SPDT snap-switch to signal an The front contact shutdown limit setting (which is
30
alarm before shutting down. When the snap-switch trips adjustable) and the snap-switch are preset at the
(preset point) on falling pressure, the switch completes factory. Refer to Pressure Ranges and Factory Settings
a circuit to activate an alarm. If the pressure continues table. For alternative alarm before shutdown, see
to fall, the face-adjustable pointer contact will make and Magnetic Switch model 760A or 761APH.
40
50
55
Typical Internal Wiring Diagrams
Pointer shown in the shelf position. Pointer type contact rating: pilot-duty 2 A @ 30 VAC/VDC resistive.
Snap-acting switch rating: 3 A @ 30 VDC inductive. 4 A @ 125 VAC inductive.
70
75
78
15
80
How to Order
Part Number Description Notes

05702176 A20 Series Clamp Lite Assembly; 12V
Illumination — Order Separately
N/A A25 Series
16
5
sect. 05 96012
rev. 2014/10/10
B-Series Murphygage ® Instrument
10
The B-Series Murphygage® instrument is a high-
quality, diaphragm-actuated indicating gage. Built by
Enovation Controls with the same heavy-duty design
as the standard 20 series and 25 series Swichgage®
15
instrument, the B-gage is more compact and is the
optimum instrument for gage-only applications. It has a
high impact polycarbonate lens, sturdy steel case and
a polished, low-profile stainless steel bezel. Accuracy
and protection from moderate over-pressure/over-
20
temperature are assured by a unique, unitized diaphragm
chamber, superior quality materials and the design of the
gage movement.
Pressure Murphygage instrument
Pressure changes at the diaphragm convert to accurate
25
mechanical movements that are indicated on an easy-to-
read analog dial. A pulsation dampener in the pressure
port helps eliminate pointer flutter. It can be removed for
cleaning to maintain the gage’s response and accuracy.
Vacuum Murphygage instrument Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/
30
Available in 0 to 20 or 0 to 30 in. Hg. (0 to -68 or 0 to EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.
-102 kPa) vacuum.
Temperature Murphygage instrument
Specifications
As temperature rises, the fluid in the sensing bulb
vaporizes to apply pressure on the diaphragm. The
40
movement translates this vapor pressure to a calibrated Dial: White on black; U.S.A. standard scale is dual scale; others
reading of temperature on the dial. The standard capillary available.
is copper with a PVC armor. Optional armor covering is Gage Accuracy:
galvanized steel or 316 stainless steel (specify). Optional Pressure/Vacuum (% of Full Scale):
bulb types, adaptor nuts and thermowells are available.
50
The B-Series can be utilized in industrial engines and Range Lower 1/4 Middle 1/2 Upper 1/4
equipment in the oil field, marine, irrigation, construction ≤ 300 psi (24 bar) ±3% ±2% ±3%
and trucking industries as well as monitoring engine 400 psi (28 bar) ±3% ±3% ±5%
coolant, crankcase oil and transmission oil.
Temperature: See chart.
Temperature Range:
55
Pressure/Vacuum:
Ambient: -40° to 150° F (-40° to 66° C)
Process: -40° to 250° F (-40° to 121° C)
Temperature: See chart on reverse side.
Maximum Panel Thickness: 1/4 in. (6 mm)
Port: Brass
Case: Plated steel; mounting clamp included (except for direct
70
mount models)
Bezel: Polished stainless steel, standard; optional bezels are avail-
able.
75
Pointer: White (black dial); black (white dial)

Lens: Polycarbonate, high-impact
78
17
80
Comparison of Murphy Gages to Most Other Gages
The basic difference between the Murphygage
instrument and most other gages is the internal design.
The Murphygage instrument does not rely on the
gage case to serve as part of the sensing chamber.
The diaphragm (A) which must expand and contract
consistently with changing pressures and temperatures,
is held firmly in place by the back plate (B) and the
mounting plate (C). In most other gages, the diaphragm
(D) and an expansion retarding plate (E) are soldered
directly into the case port and held in place by a
locater ring (F). Should the case receive any damage
in this area the diaphragm operation could be affected.
being used with liquids which might cause clogging.
However, in the Murphygage instrument, the diaphragm
Other gages are usually equipped with a non-removable
is protected and securely locked in position.
dampener (H).
Another feature of the Murphygage instrument is the
NOTE: For optional temperature capillary lengths, engine
removable pulsation dampener (pressure instruments adaptors,sensing bulbs and range combinations, see Murphy
only) (G) which provides for periodic cleaning when bulletinT-8428B.
Dimensions
Temperature Accuracy/Range Chart
Celsius measurements are shown in parentheses.
Range Lower 1/3 Scale Middle 1/3 Upper 1/3 Range Maximum Process
32-120 (0-49) ±12° (±6°) ±5° (±2.4°) ±6° (±3°) Temperature
32-160 (0-71) ±20° (±10°) ±8° (±4.4°) ±7° (±4°) ≤250° (120°) 120 % of Full Scale
130-220 (54-104) ±6° (±3°) ±13° (±1.6°) ±4° (±2°) 300° (140°) 350° (198°)
130-250 (54-121) ±9° (±5°) ±5° (±2.4°) ±4° (±2°) ≤320° (160°) 120% of Full Scale
140-300 (60-149) ±10° (±5.2°) ±6° (±3°) ±5° (±2.4°)
160-320 (71-160) ±10° (±5.2°) ±5° (±2.4°) ±5° (±2.4°)
180-350 (82-177) ±12° (±6°) ±5° (±2.4°) ±5° (±2.4°)
300-440 (149-227) ±9° (±5°) ±5° (±2.4°) ±4° (±2°)
18
How to Order
5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
55
70
75
78
19
80
20
5
sect. 05 9104
rev. 2014/10/11
Direct Mount Pressure Switch
10
Model PSB
The PSB switch is a direct-mount switch for critical
pressure points. It has one limit contact that can be
used to activate an alarm, actuate indicator lights or
15
shutdown equipment.
The construction of this instrument is the same as
Murphy’s time-proven Swichgage® instrument. A
precision machined brass mounting plate and port
captures a high-quality, stamped beryllium copper
20
diaphragm. The single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) snap-
switch is operated directly from the diaphragm for quick
acting and positive switching. Trip point is factory preset
according to your specifications. Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive
Housing is weather sealed to prevent entry of moisture, 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.
25
dust, etc. A glass-filled nylon terminal block with screw
terminal connections gives the PSB switch a real
Specifications
advantage in industrial engine applications. The PSB is
ideal when reading is not desired, but pressure is critical
to operational efficiency. Intended for use in general Housing: Plated steel
30
purpose non-classified areas. Pressure Connection: 1/8-27 NPT, brass
Applications include: Diaphragm: Formed beryllium copper (heat treated)
Engine lubrication Water pumps Pulsation Dampener: Brass (removable for cleaning)
Compressors Oil field systems Terminal Block: Three #4-40 screws
Irrigation systems Construction equipment Accuracy: Trip point: ±3% of full scale
40
Marine engines Generators Switch reset differential: ±7% of full scale
Light-duty mobile equipment Repeatability: ±1% of full scale
Features include: Contact Rating: SPDT 3 A @ 30 VDC inductive
• Fits all engine applications
Maximum Pressure: See Trip Point Chart
• SPDT snap-switch
50
Temperature Range:
• Activates indicator lights, alarms or shuts
down equipment Ambient= -40° to 150° F (-40° to 66° C)
• Time-proven Swichgage® construction Process= -40° to 250° F (-40° to 121° C)
• Easy wiring terminal block Factory Trip Point Setting: See Trip Point Chart
• Steel housing specially coated to resist corrosion Pressure Range: Specify from 15-400 psi (0.21 kPa- 2.76 MPa)
55
• Factory preset to your specifications [1.03-27.58 bar]. See Trip Point Chart
Contact: Operates on rising or falling pressure (specify)
Dimensions Shipping Weight: 8 oz. (0.25 kgs)
Shipping Dimensions: 3 x 2-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. (76 x 70 x 70 mm)
NOTE: No customer replacement parts
70
75
78
21
80
Base Model
Ranges available Factory setting Maximum pressure

psi (kPa/MPa) [bar] psi (kPa/MPa) [bar] Falling psi (kPa/MPa) [bar]
0-15 (0-103) [0-1.03] 3 (21) [.21] 30 (207) [2.07]
0-30 (0-207) [0-2.07] 7 (48) [.48] 60 (414) [4.14]
0-50 (0-345) [0-3.45] 10 (69) [.69] 100 (0-689) [0-6.89]
0-75 (0-517) [0-5.17] 15 (103) [1.03] 150 (0-1.03) [0-10.34]
0-100 (0-689) [0-6.89] 20 (138) [1.38] 200 (0-1.38) [0-13.79]
0-150 (0-1.03) [0-10.34] 30 (207) [2.07] 300 (0-2.07) [0-20.70]
0-200 (0-1.38) [0-13.79] 50 (345) [3.45] 400 (0-2.76) [0-27.60]
0-300 (0-2.07) [0-20.70] 75 (517) [5.17] 500 (3.45) [34.50]
0-400 (0-2.76) [0-27.60] 150 (1.03) [10.34] 500 (3.45) [34.50]
How to Order
Options listed at right. All configurations may

not be available. Call your sales representative
or Enovation Controls for more information.
22
5
sect. 05 96001
rev. 2014/10/15
Pressure Gage and Swichgage® Instruments
10
OPL Series 4-1/2 in. (114mm) Diameter Dial
The OPL-series pressure Swichgage instruments are
combination pressure indicating gages with adjustable
15
low and high limit switches. Limit switches can be
wired directly to electric pilot circuits to operate alarms,
shutdown or the start/stop of engines and electric
motors. Surface mount or panel mount enclosure is
available for most versions. All versions feature a 4-1/2
20
in. (114 mm) dial for easy viewing. Adjustable limit
switches are accessible from the front of the Swichgage
instrument. Limit contacts have self-cleaning motion to
enhance electrical continuity.
Other versions available (details on next page):
25
• Gage only without contacts (Murphygage
instrument);
• Swichgage instrument with built-in latching relay for
start-stop operations.
Specifications 1 3
30
2
Case: Die cast aluminum; weatherproof

Contacts: See details in the Electrical section, for contact ratings.
Dial: 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) white on black, dual scaled psi /kPa
Other dial configurations available. Consult factory
1 Selected configurations are third-party listed. Consult factory for details.
Gage Accuracy: ±2% for the first and last quarters of the scale,
40
the middle half is ±1%. 2 Options not available on all models or configurations.
Geared Movement: 302 and 304 stainless steel 3 Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive
Lens: Optically clear polycarbonate 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility as noted.
Pointer: High visibility with a pointer calibration hub
Process Connection: Available in 1/4 NPT and 1/2 NPT. See
Table B.
50
Sensing Element: Select from bronze or 316 stainless steel
bourdon tube. See Table B for bourdon tube/socket combina-
tions.
55
Product Selection Information
WARNING: Selection of the proper gage/Swichgage instrument should include
consideration for the service application, the medium being measured, electrical
70
ratings, hazardous area requirements and general operating conditions. Improper
selection and/or application may be detrimental to the gage/Swichgage
instrument and could cause failure in the operating system and possibly personal
injury or property damage. If in doubt, consult our sales/engineering staff.
75
78
23
80
Base Models
OPLC, OPLCE and OPLG

The OPLC is a surface mount, indicating pressure gage and switch. Adjustable
high and low limit, ungrounded contacts are used to operate alarm, shutdown
or start-stop circuits. Pointer closure against either of the adjustable contacts
completes the pilot-duty circuit. An SPST toggle switch is provided to override
the low limit contact for equipment startup. Suitable for engines or electric motors
with appropriate Murphy magnetic switch or transformer relay assembly.
The OPLCE features a panel mount square case. It has all the features of the
OPLC except the low limit contact lockout.
The OPLG is an indicating-only pressure Murphygage instrument. Same as the

OPLC except without switch (limit) contacts.
1 2 3
OPLFC and OPLFG

The OPLFC is a panel mounting version of the OPLC. It has all of the features
of the OPLC except the low limit contact lockout. The lockout must be done
externally through the control circuit. The OPLFC is typically used in control panels
for compressors, pumps, etc. This version can be environmentally sealed with
either the ES or OS options. Contact lead termination is by pigtail wires.
The OPLFG is an indicating only pressure Murphygage instrument. Same as the

OPLFC except without switch (limit) contacts.
1 3
OPLBP and OPLBPE

The OPLBP is a specialized version of the OPL series designed for start-stop
operation of engines and electric motors. The pilot-duty limit switches are
connected to an internal latching control relay for ON/OFF automation. Available
for various voltages.
The OPLBPE is the same as the OPLBP except it has a panel mount square
case.
1 2
1 Selected configurations are third party listed. Consult factory for details.
2 Options not available on all models or configurations.
3 Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility as noted.
24
5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 55 70 75 78 80
Dimensions
25
Electrical
Options and Accessories
P4 and P6 Options
The P4 (was PT147) option provides a remote seal mechanism
to protect the Swichgage instrument sensing element from line
pressures of highly viscous and mildly corrosive fluids. Ranges
are 100 through 5,000 psi (689 kPa through 34.5 MPa) [6.9
through 344.7 bar]. A sealed stainless steel capillary tube with
stainless steel armor transmits the pressure from the diaphragm
seal to the Swichgage instrument. Standard capillary length
is 5 ft. (1.5 m). Optional lengths to 50 ft. (15 m) in 5 ft. (1.5
m) increments are available. Oil well lead lines and pumps
with highly viscous liquids are typical applications. If required,
customer should provide a pulsation dampener.
The P6 (was PT167) option is a diaphragm sealed to a 2

NPT housing which attaches directly to the pressure gage
connection. The gage sensing element and the diaphragm
chamber are filled with a silicone fluid so that pressure against
the diaphragm causes the gage to respond. The diaphragm
housing is plated machined steel. Typical application is for oil
well lead lines. Ranges are 100 through 1,000 psi (689 kPa
through 6.8 MPa) [6.89 through 68.9 bar]. The P4 and P6 can be
ordered as optional features to the Swichgage or indicating-only
Murphygage instrument. See How to Order.
Tamper-proof Contact Accessory Pulsation Dampener

• Eliminate pointer contact flutter on pressure Swichgage and
Murphygage instruments which are subject to pulsating
pressure from reciprocating pumps or compressors.
• Allow close high-low contact settings for more accurate
pressure indication and equipment control.
• Decrease wear on internal
geared movement and
increase the life of your
instrument by eliminating
excessive strain and
unnecessary pointer
movement.
• Available in brass, carbon
steel and stainless steel.
• Must be ordered
separately.
26
How to Order
5
Selecting a Model: OPLBP - S - 2 - 1000 -
10
1. Select a Base Part Number from Table A
2. Select Bourdon Tube and Socket code from Table B
3. Select BP Relay Voltage code (applies to BP models only)
15
from Table C
4. Select Range code from Table D1
5. Select Options from Table E2
20
1 - For metric only dials specify scale and unit of measure; example: kPa or bar.
2 - List options in alphabetical order (A to Z) followed by numeric in ascending order. Place a dash (-) between each option. See example above.
Table A: Base Models Table C: BP Relay Voltage
25
Model Description Code Voltage
OPLC Swichgage, surface mount, with low limit lockout switch Blank3 120 VAC
OPLCE Swichgage, panel mount square case 2 12 VDC
OPLFC Swichgage, panel mount 4 24 VDC
30
OPLBP* Swichgage, surface mount, with latching control relay NOTE: Relay Voltage applies to BP models only.
3: No code is required for 120 VAC voltage.

OPLBPE* Swichgage, panel mount square case, with latching control relay
OPLG Murphygage, surface mount
OPLFG Murphygage, panel mount
40
*This version not covered by the CE mark.
Table B: Bourdon Tube and Socket
50
Code Process Tube Range Selection Bourdon Tube and Socket
Connection Type Limits Tip Material (all Material
psi (MPa) [bar] joints TIG welded
except A)
55
A4 1/4 NPT Drawn Through 1,000 psi Grade A Phosphor Bronze Brass
C-Tube (6.89 MPa) [68.95 bar] Tube
(Brass Tip, Silver Brazed)
70
S5,6 1/4 NPT Drawn Through 1,000 psi 316 Stainless Steel 316 Stainless
C-Tube (6.89 MPa) [68.95 bar] Steel
1/2 NPT Drawn 1,500/10,000 psi

Helical (10.3/68.9 MPa)
75
[103.42/700 bar]
4
Standard through 1,000 psi (6.89 MPa) [68.95 bar]
5
Standard 1,500 psi (10.3 MPa) [103.42 bar] through 10,000 psi (68.9 MPa) [700 bar]
6
Optional all ranges
78
27
80
Table D: Ranges
Code Vacuum/psi kPa/MPa bar
30HV60H 30” Hg/Vac–60” Hg/Press. -101 kPa–203 kPa -1.01–2.03 Dials
All dials are dual scaled psi and kPa/MPa. Single scale
30V 30” vac–0 psi -101 kPa–0 kPa -1.01–0
dials and custom dials available. Additional charges may
30V15 30” vac–15 psi -101 kPa–103 kPa -1.01–1.03 apply.
30V30 30” vac–30 psi -101 kPa–207 kPa -1.01–2.07
30V100 30” vac–100 psi -101 kPa–689 kPa -1.01–6.89
Gages
30V200 30” vac–200 psi -101 kPa–1.38 MPa -1.01–13.79
All 4-1/2 inch (114 mm) Swichgage instruments are
30V300 30” vac–300 psi -101 kPa–2.07 MPa -1.01–20.68 available for Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D hazardous
15 0–15 psi 0–103 kPa 0–1.03 applications.
30 0–30 psi 0–207 kPa 0–2.06
Division 2 locations can also be covered by our Non-
60 0–60 psi 0–414 kPa 0–4.13
Incendive or Intrinsically Safe systems. Contact any
100 0–100 psi 0–689 kPa 0–6.89 Enovation Controls representative for complete details.
160 0–160 psi 0–1.10 MPa 0–11
200 0–200 psi 0–1.38 MPa 0–14
300 0–300 psi 0–2.07 MPa 0–20
400 0–400 psi 0–2.76 MPa 0–28
600 0–600 psi 0–4.14 MPa 0–40
1000 0–1000 psi 0–6.89 MPa 0–70
1500 0–1500 psi 0–10.34 MPa 0–100
2000 0–2000 psi 0–13.79 MPa 0–140
3000 0–3000 psi 0–20.68 MPa 0–200
5000 0–5000 psi 0–34.48 MPa 0–350
10000 0–10,000 psi 0–68.95 MPa 0–700
Table E: Options7
Option Description Option Description
BC Back connected bourdon tube P6 (PT167) PT167 pressure transmitter, direct mounting
ES Environmentally sealed TA (TCA) Tickler contact
Explosion-proof: Swichgage® enclosed within explosion-proof
EX
case; Class I, Div. 1, Groups C & D
EL (EXLC) Explosion-proof less case
LC Less case
OS Oil sealed case
(PT147) Pressure transmitter with 5 ft. (1.5m) capillary* (Pulsation
dampener no longer supplied.)
P4L
*For capillary greater than 5 ft., specify in 5 ft increments
following designator; example: P4L15
7
Options not available on all models or configurations.
Shipping Information*
Shipping Weights: Shipping Dimensions:

OPLC, OPLG and OPLFG:
OPLC: 5 lbs 9 oz (2.5 kg) 9-1/2 x 9-1/4 x 5-3/4 in. (241 x 235 x 146 mm)
OPLG: 5 lbs 6 oz (2.4 kg) OPLFC and OPLCE:
OPLFC and OPLCE: 3 lbs 4 oz (1.5 kg) 9-1/4 x 8-1/4 x 5-1/2 in. (235 x 210 x 140 mm)
OPLFG: 3 lbs 4 oz (1.5 kg) OPLBP and OPLBPE:
OPLBP and OPLBPE: 5 lbs 11 oz (2.6 kg) 9-1/4 x 8-1/4 x 5-1/2 in. (235 x 210 x 140 mm)
* Some options could alter shipping weights and dimensions. Consult factory.
28
5
sect. 05 00029
rev. 2014/10/11
Pressure Swichgage ®
10
45APE Series
The 45APE Series Swichgage instrument is a
mechanical gage for pressure indication. It includes
15
two adjustable SPDT switches. These snap-acting
switches can be used for start and stop, to trip alarms
and to shut down equipment. Ranges are available
from 30” VAC (-100 kPa) [-1 bar] thru 10,000 psi (138
MPa) [1379 bar].
20
The 45APE Series utilizes a bourdon tube sensing unit
with a stainless steel dual-sector geared movement.
Each of the sectors drives separate pointers when Certain models listed for non-hazardous locations. Pending for haz-
pressure is applied to the bourdon tube. The indicating ardous location.
25
pointer (visible pointer) shows actual pressure reading, Basic Models
including below and beyond the low and high trip 45APE Series Swichgage instrument
points. The low and high trip points are adjustable Surface mount (square case) version
independently on the gage front lens. The switch
45APEF Series Swichgage instrument
30
operator pointer (behind the dial) is calibrated to Panel mount (round case) version
follow the indicating pointer. The low and high trip
45APEBP Latching Control Relay Series
point indicators arrest the switch operator pointer. As
These models have a latching control relay for
pressure decreases or increases through the principal automatic ON/OFF control. They are designed to start
of lost motion, the respective snapswitch is tripped. and stop electric motor driven equipment.
40
The 45APE Series models are widely used in
45APEE and 45APEBPE
applications requiring pressure indication and Form C
These models (square case) have the same features
low and high pressure switches. as the 45APE/45APEBP but are suitable for panel
mounting.
50
Specifications
Dial: White on black, dual scale, psi and kPa standard, 4-1/2 in. Snap-Acting Switches: 2-SPDT; 2 A @ 250 VAC
(114 mm) diameter Dry Relay Contact (BP Models): 10 A @ 28 VDC or 10 A @ 120
Case: Die cast aluminum, surface or panel mount VAC
55
Overrange: Do not exceed 10% FS above full range Wire Connections (Surface Mount): 1/2 NPTF conduit/ terminal
Process Connection: 1/4 NPTM thru 1000 psi; 1/2 NPTM 1500 - block
10,000 psi; back connection optional Wire Connections (Panel Mount): Wire leads, 18 AWG
Sensing Element: Bronze or 316 stainless steel bourdon tube (1.0 mm2) x 9 in. (229 mm) long
Gage Accuracy: Indicating pointer within switch points with hys- Wire Connections (-ES, -OS): 1/2 NPTM conduit and wire leads,
70
teresis of <1%: ±2% for first and last quarters of scale; middle half of 24 AWG (0.22 mm2) x 30 in. (762 mm) long
scale is ±1%. Indicating pointer above or below trip point: Weight: 5 lbs 6 oz (2.4 kg) approximately
Range Accuracy (+/-) above & below to trip point only Explosion-proof models: 21 lb. (9.5 kg) approx.
< 100 (except 15 psi) 10 Dimensions: 10 x 9 x 6 in. (254 x 229 x 152 mm) approximately
15 15 Explosion-proof models: 12 x 12 x 9 in (305 x 305 x 229 mm)
75
100-300 4 approximately
400-1500 2 CSA Certified Models: 45APE Series models with pressure range
2000 12 thru 5000 psig (34.4 MPa) [344 bar] are CSA approved for non-haz-
3000-5000 8 ardous locations, except options BC, ES, LC and OS. Explo-
Reading based on testing performed with switch point at mid scale sion-proof EX models with pressure range thru 5000 psig (34.4
78
which represents worst case. Switch accuracy ±1.5%. MPa) [344 bar] are CSA approved for Hazardous locations
Pressure Relief Disc: Back of case (except EX models) Class I, Groups, C & D. 45APEBP and 45APEBPE models are not
Switch Reset Deadband: Approximately 10% FS CSA certified.
29
80
Dimensions Typical Wiring Diagram
Surface Mount Models
Panel Mount Models
How to Order
30
5
sect. 05 96107
rev. 2014/10/11
Lead Line Pressure Swichgage ® Instrument
10
Model PT167EX 4-1/2 In. (114 mm) Diameter Dial
The Murphy PT167EX is a pressure Swichgage
instrument connected to a threaded pressure diaphragm
15
housing. The Swichgage instrument is enclosed in
an explosion-proof case and is CSA rated for Class I,
Division 1, Groups C and D.
A Swichgage instrument is a pressure-indicating gage
with adjustable low and high pressure limit switches.
20
When the gage pointer touches the low or high limit
switches, an electrical circuit is completed which can
operate alarms and/or shut down equipment.
The 2 NPT, sealed diaphragm housing is attached
directly to the Swichgage connection. The diaphragm
25
housing is filled with a silicone fluid so that pressure
against the diaphragm causes the Swichgage
instrument to respond. The housing seals the
Swichgage sensing element from the medium being * †
measured.
30
Applications include highly viscous liquids such as
crude oil on lead line applications. Other applications * The PT167EX is CSA listed for ranges 100 to 5000 psi (689 kPa to 34.5
have included asphalt, sludge, abrasive materials, etc. MPa) [6.89 to 344.74 bar].
† Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive
89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility as noted.
Dimensions
40
Specifications
Case: Explosion-proof, sand cast aluminum. Lens is removable.

CSA Listed for Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D.
50
Contact Rating: 1 A, 125 VAC
Dial: 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) white on black, dual scaled psi/kPa. Other
dial configurations available. Consult factory.
Ranges: See How to Order
Gage Accuracy: ±3% full scale
55
Process Connection: 2 NPT
Maximum Pressure: 30% overpressure
Diaphragm Housing: Plated steel, Ni-Span®; silicon filled
Diaphragm Fluid: Silicone 200
Shipping Weight: 16.5 lb (7.5 kg)
Shipping Dimensions: 12 x 12 x 9 in. (305 x 305 x 229 mm)
70
75
78
31
80
Typical Installation Internal Wiring
This photo shows

the PT167EX
installed in a lead
line. For optimum
effectiveness,
the PT167EX
should be installed
ahead of all other
devices or valves.
By positioning
it immediately
adjacent to the
well outlet, the
Swichgage instrument monitors the entire lead line,
sensing any blockage whether build up of sludge in
the line or an accidental closed valve. The pressure
transmitter threads into a 2 NPT T on the lead line.
How to Order

05000610 Tamper-proof Contact Accessory
32
5
sect. 05 1211009
rev. 2015/01/13
10
PXT-K Series
The PXT-K Series pressure transmitters are state-
of-the-art instruments providing 4-20 mA output.
Each Piezoresistive Pressure Transmitter contains a
15
transducer comprised of a piezoresistive silicon chip
mounted on a glass-metal feed-through header welded
into a stainless steel housing and filled with silicone
oil. The very thin laser-welded stainless steel isolation-
diaphragm completes the front side. Media pressure is
20
transferred from the stainless steel isolation-diaphragm
Specifications
via the oil inside the cell to the silicon measuring
chip. This construction, combined with the advanced
Operating Pressure Range: See How to Order under the
internal signal conditioning circuitry, results in a rugged
PXT-K Series Model Number Matrix.
instrument with extremely small temperature error and
25
Operating Temperature: -40 to 180° F (-40 to 82° C)
class-leading EMI/RFI resistance. Compensated Temp Range: -20 to 160° F (-29 to 71° C)
The enclosure and all wetted parts are made of 316L Physical Characteristics
stainless steel to comply with NACE MR0175. Process Connection: 1/4 NPT female with 7/8” Hex nut
PXT-K Series Pressure Transmitters can be used in Electrical Connection (PXT-K-XXX): 1/2” NPT male conduit
applications such as compressors, engines, process connection with 60” long cable, vented
30
control, liquid level and pumps. Enclosure: NEMA 4/IP65 or better
Body: 316L stainless steel. Complies with NACE MR0175
Wetted Parts: 316L stainless steel
Operating Range Environmental Effect (Humidity): No effect for 0-95%,
non-condensing
Mounting: Transmitter can be installed in any axis. Transmitter
40
Supply voltage for the PXT-K must be within range of
8-30 VDC. The graph below shows the minimum supply position has negligible effect on performance as long as it is per-
voltage (VDC) required for a given load resistance (R). pendicular to the flow being monitored.
Shock Resistance: 1000g per IEC 60068-2-6 (Mechanical
Shock)
Vibration Resistance: 20G per IEC 60068-2-6 (Vibration under
50
resonance)
Wiring Protection: Protected against reverse polarity and short
circuit, 48 VDC Maximum
Supply Voltage: 8 - 30 VDC (Typically 24 VDC)
Transmitter Output: 4-20mA, two wire configurations with load
characteristics
55
Insulation: Greater than 10MΩ @ 300 VDC
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC): Standards; EN 61000-
6-2:2005, EN 61000-6-3:2007, EN 61326-2-3:2006
Voltage Surge/Spike Protection: Protection against a 600 volt
spike per IEC 60-2
70
Shipping Weight: 6.5 ounces
Applicable Standards
NACE MR0175 Compliant with the requirements
CSA (c/us): Class I / II / III, Div 1, Groups A-F T4
Class I / II / III, Div 2, Groups A-D,F,G T4
ATEX: IBExU 10 ATEX 1124 X
75
II 1G Ex ia IIC T6-T4
II 3G Ex nA IIC T6
Accuracy:
% of Span (BFSL) +/- 0.25% of span*
Zero/Span Setting Tolerance +/- 2.5% of full scale* max. (30V30WC only)
+/- 0.25% of span* typical,
78
+/-0.5% of span* max (all other ranges)

Operating Temperature +/- 2.5% of span T.E.B.
Compensated Temperature +/- 1.7% of span T.E.B.
Response Time <5mS * Accuracy Tolerance to be applied at 25°C.
33
80
PXT and PXT-K Series Transmitter Cabling Identification
The PXT Series Pressure Transmitters have been changed. Previous pressure transmitters in this series were
identified as PXT Pressure Transmitters. The newest version is the PXT-K Series Pressure Transmitters.
Identification of electrical cable color is NOT interchangeable between the two series of pressure transmitters.
This section contains information to assist you in identifying the pressure transmitter unit you have and the correct
electrical cable colors to avoid wiring mistakes.
PXT Series PXT-K Series
Cable Color Connection Cable Color Connection

RED POWER RED POWER
BLUE SIGNAL BLUE N/A
BLACK CASE GROUND BLACK SIGNAL
ORANGE, YELLOW, WHITE N/A ORANGE, YELLOW, WHITE N/A
Installation Instructions 00020475 Installation Manual 00020840
Installation Diagram 05-08-0754 Installation Diagram 05-08-0763
Shield drain wire is isolated from case. Shield drain wire is common to case.
Dimensions
34
How to Order
5
Options listed a right. All
configurations may not
Output Signal
be available. Call your
10
sales representative or 4-20 mAdc BLANK
Enovation Controls for
more information.
Murphy two wire
Pressure Transmitter with K PXT (Flying Lead) 30V30WC (-30” H2O TO +30” H20)
15
Flying Lead Connection, KM PXM (M12 x 1 Connector) 30V30 (-30” Hg to +30 psig)
0-600psig range, 4-20
KD PXD (DIN 43650 Connector) 30V100 (-30” Hg to +100 psig)
mAdc output. If no digit
follows the pressure 15 (psig)
range, it is automatically a 60
20
4-20mAdc output signal. 100
200
300
400
25
600
1000
2000
3000
30
5000
6000
10000
40
50
55
70
75
78
35
80
36
5
Section 10 Temperature
10
95026 Temperature Swichgage® — A20 and A25 Series �� 39
94031 20 and 25 Series Temperature Swichgage®
2 and 2-1/2 inc. (51 and 64 mm) Dial�� 43
9137 Direct Mount Temperature Switch — Model TSB�� 47
15
Accessories for 2” and 2.5” Gages
8428 Sensing Bulb/Scale/Capillary Length Combinations for 20, 25, A20 and A25 Series
Temperature Swichgage® and Murphygage® Instruments�� 49
20
Pyrometers
9011 Exhaust Pyrometers for Diesel Engines — Models 10705146 and 10705147�� 51
SDB Series Temperature Swichgage® Instruments

7543 Direct Mount Temperature Swichgage® — SDB Series �� 53
25
94117 4.5 in. (114 mm) Dial Temperature Swichgage® — SPL and 45TE Series �� 55
Digital Temperature Swichgage® Instrument

8911 Dual Temperature Swichgage® — Model Series MDTM89�� 59
30
Temperature Scanners
9106 Temperature Swichgage® — Scanner/Pyrometer Model TDX6 �� 63
00064 Temperature Scanner/Pyrometer — TDXM Model�� 65
40
Temperature Sensors
96084 Thermocouple, RTD, and RTD Transmitter with Thermowell
TC, RTD, and RTDT Series�� 67
0610107 Thermocouple, Stainless Steel Tube Type — 1/4 in. Diameter�� 69
50
0910430 Air Temperature Sensor — Model 12 �� 71
55
70
75
78
37
80
38
5
sect. 10 95026
rev. 2014/11/08
Temperature Swichgage ®
10
A20 and A25 Series
The A20 Series (2 inch/51 mm dial) and the A25
Series (2-1/2 inch/64 mm dial) Swichgage models are
diaphragm-actuated, temperature-indicating gages,
15
with built-in electrical switches for tripping alarms and/
or shutdown devices.
Ranges are available from 32°-120°F (0°-45°C) through
300°-440°F (160°-220°C).
All models of these rugged, built-to-last instruments
20
are fully sealed from the environment by the unique A20T Series
combination of a polycarbonate case and lens, a
polished stainless steel bezel and O-ring seals.
Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/
These vapor/pressure actuated gages feature a sealed
EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.
capillary tube and a sensing bulb. When subjected to
25
heat, the liquid in the sensing bulb changes to vapor
creating pressure against a diaphragm mechanism. Specifications
The diaphragm translates this vapor pressure into a
mechanical gage reading. Dial: White on black; U.S.A. standard scale is dual scale °F/°C;
For series A20T and A25T, the gage pointer acts as others available
30
Case: Glass filled/Polycarbonate, corrosion-resistant; steel mounting
a temperature indicator and as one switch pole which clamp included
completes a circuit when it touches the adjustable limit Bezel: Polished stainless steel, standard; others are available.
contact. Contact(s) are isolated from ground. They have Pointer: Tempered nickel silver; red tip
a self-cleaning motion to enhance electrical continuity. Lens: Polycarbonate, high-impact
Models A20TE and A25TE have internal snap-acting Sensing Element: Beryllium copper diaphragm
40
Capillary: PVC armored copper; 4 ft. (1.2 m).* Stainless steel armor
SPDT switches. optional
Gage-only models, without contacts (Murphygage®) Sensing Bulb: Copper*
are also available. Gage Accuracy: See accuracy chart
Applications for A20 and A25 Series temperature Maximum Temperature:
Swichgage instruments include: engines and equipment See Temperature Ranges and Factory Settings table
50
Maximum Ambient Temperature:
in the oil field, marine, irrigation, construction and -40°F (-40°C) through 150°F (66°C)
trucking industries, monitoring engine coolant Adjustable Limit Contact (A20T and A25T): SPST contact;
temperature, crankcase oil, transmission oil. pilot-duty only, 2 A @ 30 VAC/VDC; isolated from case ground
Closed when the high limit is met. Normally Open when pointer is
Base Model in normal operating range. Contacts are gold flashed silver.
55
Limit Contact Adjustment: by a 1/16 in. hex wrench through 100%
of the scale.
Coolant or Oil Temperature Wiring: A20T: Number 4 screw terminals; A25T: Number 6 screw
A20T and A25T Series Swichgage: For these models the gage terminals.
pointer makes with an adjustable contact to complete a pilot-duty Snap-Switch Rating (A20TE and A25TE): SPDT, 3 A@ 30 VDC
circuit. inductive; 4 A @ 125 VAC inductive
A20TL and A25TL Swichgage: For use on Ford Worldwide engines.
70
Wiring: A20TE: Number 4 screw terminals; A25TE: Number 6
Supplied with special sensing bulb.
screw terminals
A20TE and A25TE Swichgage: A20TE (was A20ESR)
Unit Weight: A20 Series: 11.9 oz. (0.370 kg); A25 Series Models:
and A25TE (was A25ESR). Models with internal
SPDT snap-switches, instead of the single pole/pointer
13.3 oz. (0.413 kg)
contact(s). When the switch closes on rising temperature, it becomes Unit Dimensions: A20 Series: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 3 in. (121 x 121 x
set. As temperature decreases the switch resets. Model A25TE is 76 mm); A25 Series Models: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. (121 x 121 x
70 mm)
75
CSA listed for non-hazardous areas. Model A25TE-EX is CSA listed

for Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D hazardous areas. *For optional capillary lengths, engine adapters, sensing bulbs and
A20TABS and A25TABS Swichgage: Same as A20 and A25T with range combinations, see Murphy bulletin 8428.
internal SPDT snap-switch for pre-alarm.
Cylinder Head Temperature

A20TH and A25TH Swichgage: A20TH (was A20TL8133) and A25TH
78
(was A25TL8133). For use on air-cooled engines.
Gage–Only Models
A20TG and A25TG Murphygage: Gage without contact(s).
39
80
Dimensions
A20 Series Models (typical) A25 Series Models (typical)
Temperature Ranges and Factory Settings

NOTES
1. Values in ( ) are mathematical conversions from °F to °C — they do not reflect actual second scale range. U.S.A.
standard scale is °F/°C.
2. For models A20TE and A25TE; the switch trip point cannot be set at either the low or high extreme of the scale. The
trip point must allow for the reset differential. Only certain models are adjustable.
3. For adjustable switch models, the trip point is adjustable only over the upper half of the scale.
Ranges Available Max Std. Settings* Hi/Lo Settings 20TABS and 25TABS Settings
Dual Scale Dial Single Scale Temp. Low High Alarm† Shutdown
°F (°C) °C only °F (°C) °F (°C) °C only °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) °C only °F (°C) °C only
32-120 (0-49) ---- 185 (85) 110 (43) ---- 32 (0) 110 (43) 100 (38) ---- 110 (43) ----
32-160 (0-71) 0-70 215 (102) 150 (66) 66 32 (0) 150 (66) 140 (60) 60 150 (66) 66
130-220 (54-104) 45-100 260 (127) 210 (99) 85 160 (71) 210 (99) 200 (93) 80 210 (99) 85
130-220 (54-121) 50-120 310 (154) 210 (99) 97 160 (71) 210 (99) 200 (93) 95 210 (99) 100
140-300 (60-149) 60-140 340 (173) 275 (135) 130 200 (93) 275 (135) 265 (129) 125 275 (135) 130
160-320 (71-160) 70-160 370 (192) 300 (149) 150 200 (93) 300 (149) 290 (143) 145 300 (149) 150
180-350 (82-177) ---- 400 (209) 330 (166) ---- 240 (116) 330 (166) 320 (160) ---- 330 (166) ----
300-440 (149-227) ---- 500 (260) 400 (204) ---- 300 (149) 400 (204) 390 (199) ---- 400 (204) ----
* Standard setting for A20T, A25T, A20TE and A25TE models. SPDT snap-switch is the alarm switch.
†
Temperature Accuracy Chart
Temperature Range Lower 1/3 of Scale Middle 1/3 of Scale Upper 1/3 of Scale
32° - 120°F (0° - 49°C) ±12°F (±6°C) ±5°F (±2.4°C) ±6°F (±3°C)
32° - 160°F (0° - 71°C) ±20°F (±10°C) ±8°F (±4.4°C) ±7°F (±4°C)
130° - 220°F (54° - 104°C) ±6°F (±3°C) ±3°F (±1.6°C) ±4°F (±2°C)
130° - 250°F (54° - 121°C) ±9°F (±5°C) ±5°F (±2.4°C) ±4°F (±2°C)
140° - 300°F (60° - 149°C) ±10°F (±5.2°C) ±6°F (±3°C) ±5°F (±2.4°C)
160° - 320°F (71° - 160°C) ±10°F (±5.2°C) ±5°F (±2.4°C) ±5°F (±2.4°C)
180° - 350°F (82° - 177°C) ±12°F (±6°C) ±5°F (±2.4°C) ±5°F (±2.4°C)
300° - 440°F (149° - 227°C) ±9°F (±5°C) ±5°F (±2.4°C) ±4°F (±2°C)
40
Magnetic Switch
5
INDUCTIVE AND HIGH CURRENT LOADS REQUIRE THE USE OF A MAGNETIC SWITCH. The Swichgage
contacts are for light-duty electrical switching to operate alarms or control devices. Enovation Controls
manufactures the Magnetic Switch for protection of the pilot-duty Swichgage limit contacts.
10
Tattletale® Magnetic Switches show the cause of shutdown for applications that include: capacitor discharge or
magneto ignitions, battery systems and electric motor driven equipment. Typical wiring diagrams are shown.
15
20
25
Pre-Alarm using A20/A25TABS
The A20TABS and A25TABS feature a standard limit contact for equipment shutdown on high temperature and an
internal SPDT snap-switch to signal an alarm before shutting down. When the snap-switch trips (preset point) on
rising temperature, the switch completes a circuit to activate an alarm.
30
If the temperature continues to increase, the face-adjustable pointer contact will make and the shutdown circuit
will be completed (see the typical diagram). The front contact shutdown limit setting (which is adjustable) and the
snap-switch are preset at the factory. Refer to Temperature Ranges and Factory Settings table for settings. For
alternative alarm before shutdown, see Magnetic Switch model 760A or 761APH.
40
50
55
Pointer shown in the shelf position. Pointer type contact rating: pilot-duty 2 A @ 30 VAC/VDC resistive. Snap-
acting switch rating: 3 A @ 30 VDC inductive. 4 A @ 125 VAC inductive.
70
75
78
41
80
How to Order

N/A A25 Series
42
5
sect. 10 94031
rev. 2014/11/13
20 and 25 Series Temperature Swichgage ®
10
2 and 2 1/2 in. (51 and 64 mm) Dial
The 20 Series (2 inch/51 mm dial) and the 25 Series (2-
1/2 inch/64 mm dial) Swichgage models are diaphragm-
actuated, temperature-indicating gages with built-in
15
electrical switches for tripping alarms and/or shutdown *
devices.
Ranges are available from 32°-120°F (0°-45°C) through
300°-440°F (160°-220°C).
The gage mechanism is enclosed in a steel case
20
coated to resist corrosion. A polycarbonate, break
resistant lens and a polished, stainless steel bezel help
protect this rugged, built-to-last instrument.
These vapor-actuated gages feature a sealed
capillary tube and a sensing bulb. When subjected to
25
heat, the liquid in the sensing bulb changes to vapor
creating pressure against the diaphragm mechanism.
The diaphragm translates this vapor pressure into a
mechanical gage reading.
For series 20T and 25T, the gage pointer acts as a
30
temperature indicator and as one switch pole which * Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive
completes a circuit when it touches the adjustable 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility as noted.
limit contact. Contact(s) are grounded through the
Swichgage case. They have a self-cleaning motion to
enhance electrical continuity.
40
Models 20TE and 25TE have internal snap-acting
SPDT switches. Gage-only models without contacts
(Murphygage® instrument) are also available.
These instruments are used on industrial engines and
equipment in oil field, marine, irrigation, construction
50
and trucking industries and for monitoring engine
coolant, crankcase oil and transmission oil.
Base Models
55
Coolant or Oil Temperature Cylinder Head Temperature
20T and 25T Series Swichgage 20TH and 25TH Swichgage instrument
For these models the gage pointer makes with an 20TH (was 20TL8133) and 25TH (was 25TL8133). For
adjustable contact to complete a pilot-duty circuit. use on air-cooled engines.
20TL and 25TL Swichgage instrument Direct Mount Models
For use on Ford Worldwide engines. Supplied with
special sensing bulb.
20TD Swichgage instrument
Same as 20T. Available ranges: 220°F (104°C) or 250°F
70
20TE and 25TE Swichgage instrument internal (121°C). Includes 1/4 x 4 in. (6 x 102 mm) sensing
snap-switch bulb.
20TE (was 20ESR) and 25TE (was 25ESR) 20SD Swichgage instrument
75
Models with internal SPDT snap-switches, instead of Same as 20T. Available ranges: 220°F (104°C) or 250°F
the single pole/pointer contact(s). When the switch (121°C). Includes 11/32 x 1-1/2 in. (9 x 38 mm) sensing
closes on rising temperature, it becomes set. As bulb.
temperature decreases, the switch resets. Gage–Only Models
20TABS and 25TABS Swichgage instrument 20TG and 25TG Murphygage
78
Same as 20/25T with internal SPDT snap-switch for Gages without contact(s).
pre-alarm.
43
80
Specifications
Dial: White on black; U.S.A. standard scale is dual scale °F/°C; others Adjustable Limit Contact (20T and 25T): SPST contact; pilot duty only,
available (see How to Order) 2 A @ 30 VAC/ VDC; Ground path through encasement. Normally Closed
Case: Plated steel; mounting clamp included (except direct mount models) (NC) when the high limit is met. Normally Open (NO) when pointer is in normal
Bezel: Polished stainless steel, standard; others available (see How to Order) operating range. Contacts are gold flashed silver.
Pointer: Tempered nickel silver Limit Contact Adjustment: By a 1/16 in. hex wrench through 100% of the
Lens: Polycarbonate, high-impact scale
Sensing Element: Beryllium copper diaphragm Limit Contact Wire Leads: 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) x 12 in. (305 mm)
Capillary: PVC armored copper; 4 ft. (1.2 m). Stainless steel armor optional Snap-Switch Rating (20TE and 25TE):
Sensing Bulb: Copper* SPDT, 3 A @ 30 VDC inductive; 4 A @ 125 VAC inductive
Gage Accuracy: See Temperature Accuracy Chart Snap-Switch Wire Leads: 20 AWG (0.75 mm2) x 12 in. (305 mm)
Maximum Temperature: Unit Weight: 20 Series: 12.7 oz. (0.39 kg); 25 Series Models: 13.8 oz. (0.43
See Temperature Ranges and Factory Settings Table kg)
Maximum Ambient Temperature: Unit Dimensions:
-40°F (-40°C) through 150°F (66°C) 20 Series: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. (121 x 121 x 70 mm)
25 Series Models: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 3 in. (121 x 121 x 76 mm)
* For optional capillary lengths, engine adaptors, sensing bulbs and range
combinations, visit www.fwmurphy.com.
Temperature Ranges and Factory Settings

NOTES
• Values in ( ) are mathematical conversions from °F to °C – they do not reflect actual second scale range. U.S.A.
standard scale is °F/°C.
• For models 20TE and 25TE; the switch trip point cannot be set at either the low or high extreme of the scale.
The trip point must allow for the reset differential. Only certain models are adjustable.
• For adjustable switch models, the trip point is adjustable only over the upper half of the scale.
Ranges Available Hi/Lo Settings 20TABS and 25TABS Settings

Dual Scale Dial Single Max. Low High Alarm+ Shutdown
Scale Temp. Std. Settings*
°Fahrenheit (°Celsius) °Celsius °F (°C) °F (°C) °C only °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) °C only °F (°C) °C
only only
32 – 120 (0 – 49) –– 185 (85) 110 (43) –– 32 (0) 110 (43) 100 (38) –– 110 (43) ––
32 – 160 (0 – 71) 0 – 70 215 (102) 150 (66) 66 32 (0) 150 (66) 140 (60) 60 150 (66) 66
130 – 220 (54 – 104) 45 – 100 260 (127) 210 (99) 85 160 (71) 210 (99) 200 (93) 80 210 (99) 85
130 – 250 (54 – 121) 50 – 120 310 (154) 210 (99) 97 160 (71) 210 (99) 200 (93) 95 210 (99) 100
140 – 300 (60 – 149) 60 – 140 340 (172) 275 (135) 130 200 (93) 275 (135) 265 (129) 125 275 (135) 130
160 – 320 (71 – 160) 70 – 160 370 (192) 300 (149) 150 200 (93) 300 (149) 290 (143) 145 300 (149) 150
180 – 350 (82 – 177) –– 400 (209) 330 (166) –– 240 (116) 330 (166) 320 (160) –– 330 (166) ––
300 – 440 (149 – 227) –– 500 (260) 400 (204) –– 300 (149) 400 (204) 390 (199) –– 400 (204) ––
* Standard setting for 20T, 25T, 20TE and 25TE models.

+ SPDT snap-switch is the alarm switch.
Temperature Accuracy Chart
Temperature Range Lower 1/3 of Scale Middle 1/3 of Scale Upper 1/3 of Scale
32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C) ± 12°F (± 6°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C) ± 6°F (± 3°C)
32 to 160°F (0 to 71°C) ± 20°F (± 10°C) ± 8°F (± 4.4°C) ± 7°F (± 4°C)
130 to 220°F (54 to 104°C) ± 6°F (± 3°C) ± 3°F (± 1.6°C) ± 4°F (± 2°C)
130 to 250°F (54 to 121°C) ± 9°F (± 5°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C) ± 4°F (± 2°C)
140 to 300°F (60 to 149°C) ± 10°F (± 5.2°C) ± 6°F (± 3°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C)
160 to 320°F (71 to 160°C) ± 10°F (± 5.2°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C)
180 to 350°F (82 to 177°C) ± 12°F (± 6°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C)
300 to 440°F (149 to 227°C) ± 9°F (± 5°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C) ± 4°F (± 2°C)
44
Dimensions
5
10
15
20
Magnetic Switch
INDUCTIVE AND HIGH CURRENT LOADS REQUIRE THE USE OF A MAGNETIC SWITCH. The Swichgage contacts
25
are for light-duty electrical switching to operate alarms or control devices. Enovation Controls manufactures the
Magnetic Switch for protection of the light-duty Swichgage limit contacts. Tattletale® Magnetic Switches show the
cause of shutdown for applications that include: capacitor discharge or magneto ignitions, battery systems and
electric motor driven equipment. Typical wiring diagrams are shown below.
30
40
50
Pre-Alarm using 20/25TABS
55
The 20TABS and 25TABS feature a standard limit contact for high temperature equipment shutdown and an internal
SPDT snap-switch to signal an alarm before shutting down. When the low side of the snap-switch trips (preset
point), on rising temperature, the switch completes a circuit to activate an alarm. If the temperature continues to
increase, the face-adjustable pointer contact will make, and the shutdown circuit will be completed (see the typical
diagram below for reference). The front contact shutdown limit setting (which is adjustable) and the snap-switch
are preset at the factory. Refer to Temperature Ranges and Factory Settings table for settings. For alternative alarm
70
before shutdown, see Magnetic Switch model 760A or 761APH.
75
78
45
80
Pointer shown in the shelf position. Pointer type contact rating: pilot duty 2 A @ 30 VAC/VDC.
Snap-acting switch rating: 3 A @ 30 VDC inductive. 4 A @ 125 VAC inductive.
How to Order
46
5
sect. 10 9137
rev. 2014/11/08
Direct Mount Temperature Switch
10
Model TSB
The TSB switch is a direct-mount switch for
temperature sensing. It has one limit contact that can
15
be used to activate an alarm, actuate indicator lights or
shut down equipment.
The construction of this instrument is the same as
our time-proven Swichgage®. A precision machined
brass mounting plate and port captures a high quality
20
stamped beryllium copper diaphragm. The single-pole,
double-throw (SPDT) snap-switch is operated directly
from the diaphragm, for quick acting and positive *
switching. Trip point is factory preset according to your
specifications.
25
Housing is weather sealed to prevent entry of moisture,
dust, etc. A glass-filled nylon terminal block with quick- *Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive
screw terminal connections gives the TSB switch a real 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.
advantage in industrial engine applications. The TSB is
ideal when reading is not desired, but temperature is
Specifications
30
critical to operational efficiency.
Intended for use in general purpose non-classified Housing: Plated steel
Connections: Popular NPT and metric (specify)
areas. Applications include: Diaphragm: Formed beryllium copper (heat treated)
• Engine coolant • Irrigation systems Sensing Bulb: Copper
• Compressors • Oil field systems Terminal Block: Three # 4-40 screws
40
• Engine lubrication • Construction equipment
Switch Trip Point Range
• Mobile equipment • Marine engines Accuracy
150°-295°F (66°-146°C)
• Generators • Electric motors
Trip Point ±3°F (1.7°C)
Dimensions Switch Reset Differential ±15°F (9°C)
50
Repeatability ±3°F (1.7°C)
Contact Rating: SPDT 3 A @ 30 VDC inductive

Maximum Temperature: See chart
Factory Trip Point Setting: 210°F (99°C) Rising. Other trip point
setting must be specified at time of order.
Contact: Operates on rising or falling temperature (specify)
55
Approximate Shipping Weight: 10 oz. (0.31 kg)
Approximate Shipping Dimensions: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 2-5/8 in.
(121 x 121 x 67 mm)
NOTE: No customer replacement parts
70
75
78
47
80
How to Order
48
5
sect. 10 8428
rev. 2014/11/08
Sensing Bulb/Scale/Capillary Length Combinations
10
for 20, 25, A20 and A25 Series Temperature
Swichgage® and Murphygage® Instruments
15
APPLICATION NOTE: Murphy vapor pressure actuated temperature Swichgage and NOTES:
• Bulb Type A, B, E & K are
Murphygage instruments indicate the temperature as measured at the sensing bulb. provided as standard on T & TE
If the sensing bulb is not fully immersed in the medium being measured, an series based on scale and capillary
inaccurate reading will occur. This is particularly important when applying bulb types length.
• Bulb Type D is provided as stan-
C, F and H since the attaching nut can be positioned at various depths along the dard on TL & TH series based on
20
length of the sensing bulb. For best results, be sure that the sensing bulb is fully scale and capillary length.
immersed. For further important details see appropriate installation sheet for Murphy • Any bulb used where it is
standard, based on model, scale
temperature devices or contact a representative. and capillary length, must not be
specified in the model number. Any
bulb used where it is not standard
25
must be specified in the model
number.
Bulb Bulb Dimensions Part Adaptor Thermowell Capillary Tube Temperature Ranges
Type Number Nut Group Group Length °F °C
130-220, 130-250, 54-104, 54-121,
30
2-30 feet
140-300, 160-320, 60-149, 71-160,
(0.61-9.14 meters)
180-350, 300-440 82-177, 149-227
A 10050166 1 I
2-7 feet
32-120, 32-160 0-49, 0-71
Standard bulb 20BTG, 20/25T, A20/25T (0.61-2.13 meters)
130-220, 130-250 54-104, 54-121,
31-80 feet
140-300, 160-320, 60-149, 71-160,
40
(9.45-24.39 meters)
180-350, 300-440 82-177, 149-227
B 10010061 2 II
8-23 feet
Standard bulb 20BTG, 20/25T, A20/25T 32-120, 32-160 0-49, 0-71
(2.43-7.01 meters)
130-220, 130-250, 54-104, 54-121,

2-25 feet
140-300, 160-320, 60-149, 71-160,
50
(0.61-1.21 meters)
180-350 82-177
C 10010060 3 —
2-4 feet
300-440 149-227
(0.61-1.21 meters)
Optional bulb
130-220, 130-250, 54-104, 54-121,
2-16 feet
140-300, 160-320, 60-149, 71-160,
55
(0.61-4.88 meters)
180-350 82-177
D1 10000286 4 IV
2-4 feet
300-440 149-227
(0.61-1.21 meters)
Standard bulb 20/25TL, A20/25TL, 20/25TH, A20/25TH
24-35 feet
32-120, 32-160 0-49, 0-71
(7.32-10.67 meters)
E
70
10010084 2 III 130-220, 130-250 54-104, 54-121,
81-110 feet
140-300, 160-320, 60-149, 71-160,
(24.69-33.53 meters)
Standard bulb 20BTG, 20/25T, A20/25T 180-350, 300-440 82-177, 149-227
16-25 feet 130-220, 130-250, 54-104, 54-121,

F 10000577 3 —
75
(4.88-7.62 meters) 140-300, 160-320 60-149, 71-160

Optional bulb
17-25 feet 130-220, 130-250, 54-104, 54-121,

G 10002466 4 —
(5.18-7.62 meters) 140-300, 160-320 60-149, 71-160
Optional Bulb
78
1 Standard bulb for air-cooled engine models (example 20TH) and Ford worldwide engines (example 20TL)
49
80
Bulb Bulb Dimensions Part Adaptor Thermowell Capillary Tube Temperature Ranges
Type Number Nut Group Group Length °F °C
130-220, 130-250, 54-104, 54-121,
2-25 feet
140-300, 160-320, 60-149, 71-160,
(0.61-7.62 meters)
H 10002466 3 IV 180-350 82-177
2-4 feet
Optional bulb 300-440 149-227
(0.61-1.21 meters)
3 and
2-12 feet
J 10051153 part number —
(0.61-3.66 meters)
130-250 54-121
85030447
Standard bulb 20/25TJD, A20/25TJD
36-50 feet 32-120 0-49

K 10004886 2 —
(10.97-15.24 meters) 32-160 0-71
Standard bulb 20/25T, A20/25T

10050167 1/4-18 NPT
10050069 3/8-18 NPT
10050284 3/8-19 BSPT
10050131 1/2-14 NPT
10050330 1/2-14 BSPT
10050068 5/8-18 UNF
10050105 3/4-14 NPT
Optional Adaptor Group 1
10050093 7/8-9 UNC
10002442 14 mm x 1.5
10002444 16 mm x 1.5
10002443 18 mm x 1.5
10002446 20 mm x 1.5
10002445 22 mm x 1.5
10002449 24 mm x 1.5
10050103 3/8-18 NPT
10050107 1/2-14 NPT
10050827 3/4-14 NPT Optional Adaptor Group 2
10050695 7/8-9 UNF
10002447 22 mm x 1.5
10010052 1/8-27 NPT
10010051 10 mm x 1.5 Optional Adaptor Group 3
10005235 10 mm x 1.0
10050912 1/8-27 NPT
10002450 10 mm x 1.5 Optional Adaptor Group 4
10002451 12 mm x 1.5
10010009 1/2-14 NPT, Carbon Steel, Nickel Plate
10050128 1/2-14 NPT, 304 Stainless Steel
Optional Thermowells Group I
10000425 7/8-9 UNC, Carbon Steel, Nickel Plate
10050169 1/2-14 NPT, 304 Stainless Steel Optional Thermowells Group II
Optional Thermowells Group III
10050901 1/2-14 NPT, 304 Stainless Steel
Consult factory for non-listed options and combinations.
50
5
sect. 10 9011
rev. 2014/11/13
Exhaust Pyrometers for Diesel Engines
10
Models 10705146 and 10705147
Excessive exhaust temperature is a major damaging
factor to all engines. The best way to monitor this
temperature is with the use of a pyrometer. Excessive
15
exhaust temperature is caused by an upset fuel/air ratio
or more fuel in the engine than there is air to support it.
This condition can occur as a result of over throttling,
a dirty air cleaner, different fuels, a malfunctioning
fuel system, change of altitude, an out-of-tune engine
20
and many other causes. But whatever the cause,
a pyrometer indicates this condition before serious
damage occurs.
The Single 10705147 and Dual 10705146 Port
Pyrometers monitor exhaust temperatures in all types
25
of engines. The Dual Port Pyrometer can monitor each
bank of a V-type engine allowing you to compare
readings at all times. Both pyrometers feature an easy-
to-read illuminated dial with scales in both Fahrenheit
and Celsius. They require no outside power (except
30
for dial lighting). Spring-loaded jewels and alloy
pivots increase durability. Murphy offers pyrometer
accessories such as thermocouples and wire lead
assembly suitable for stationary or mobile engines,
power units, agricultural and construction equipment, as
40
well as marine and trucking.
Features Specifications
• Large sweep scales for maximum legibility Dial Scale
50
• Internal illumination for night use Single: 300° to 1300°F (150° to 700°C)
Dual: 300° to 1200°F (150° to 649°C)*
• Accuracy: 2% full scale
Dial Sweep (both models): 100°
• Sealed housing Accuracy: Full scale 2%
• Ambient temperature compensation Illumination: Internal 12 or 24 VDC
• Calibrated permanently at 2/3 scale Bezel: Polished stainless steel+
55
• Flush type mounting on any plane Case: PVC
Pointer(s): Fire Orange
Benefits of Using a Pyrometer * Celsius only dials available

+
Black Bezel available. See special order.
• Longer engine life
70
• Better fuel economy
• Less lubrication oil dilution
• Lubrication oil stays clean much longer
• Exhaust emissions drop to a minimum
• Malfunctions indicated before excessive damage
75
occurs
78
51
80
Dimensions
Accessories
Type K thermocouples can mount in the engine Wire Lead Assembly 00000817 is a 14 ft. (4.27 m)
manifold or in 2 to 3-1/2 in. (51 to 89 mm) diameter extension with mating plug connections for the
exhaust ports. In turbo-charged engines, a 00000818 and 00003488 thermocouples. The wire
thermocouple mounts between the engine and the is PVC covered, non-shielded, 18 AWG (1.0 mm2),
turbo. Thermocouple 00000818 is a grounded, type with heat shrinkable sleeve provided for insulating
K (Chromel Alumel). Thermocouple 00003488 is terminals after installation. Extension up to 100 ft.
ungrounded type K (Chromel Alumel). (30.48 m) can be made with 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) or
Thermocouple Specifications larger copper wire at the gage head.
Element K: type (NiCr/Ni) solid wire
Hot Junction: fusion welded
Protecting Tube: inconel for no carbon absorption,
end closed by heliarc melt down
Wire Insulation: Q-glass with stainless steel overbraid
How to Order

00000819 10705146 Dual Pyrometer
00000956 10705147 Single Pyrometer
00000817 14 ft. (4.27m) Wire Lead Assembly
00000818 Thermocouple, grounded, Type K, 3/8 NPT *
00003488 Thermocouple, ungrounded, Type K, 1/4 NPT *
00003578 3/8 NPT Adaptor Accessories
00003577 1/8 NPT Adaptor
*1/8 NPT, 1/4 NPT and 1/2 NPT adaptors available.
52
5
sect. 10 7543
rev. 2014/11/08
Direct Mount Temperature Swichgage ®
10
SDB Series (For Gas Compressor Cylinder Discharge Temperatures)
The SDB Series are direct-mounting temperature
Swichgage devices. They provide an accurate direct-
15
reading gage with an adjustable limit switch to activate
alarms and/or shutdown. A knob on front of the
Swichgage instrument allows you to adjust the limit
switch trip point. Pointer movement is actuated by a bi-
metallic sensing element.
20
Models SDB500, SDB501 and SDB500EX have a
temperature range of 100° to 500°F (40° to 260°C).
SDB500EX enclosure is explosion-proof and CSA listed
for Class I, Group C and D hazardous locations. *
The SDB1000 has a temperature range of 200° to
25
1000°F (100° to 500°C).
The most common use of the SDB Series is to
monitor gas compressor temperatures. Engine * Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive
exhaust temperature can also be monitored to indicate 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.
overloading or lean fuel mixtures, or use the SDB to
Dimensions
30
help coordinate loads on twin-engine installations.
Specifications SDB500, SDB500EX and SDB1000

Temperature Ranges:
SDB500, SDB500EX, and SDB501: 100° to 500°F (40° to 260°C)
40
SDB1000: 200° to 1000°F (100° to 500°C)
Sensing Bulb Material and Size: 304 stainless steel; 1/2 in. dia.
x 4 in. insertion depth (13 x 102 mm)
Maximum Bulb Pressure: 285 psi (1.97 MPa) [19.7 bar]
at 625°F (329°C) NOTE: Use of a thermowell is recommended.
Process Connection: 1/2 NPTF; 3/4 NPT adapter available
50
Sensing Element: High torque bi-metal element in heliarc welded
stainless steel bulb
Contact Rating: SDB500, SDB501 and SDB1000: 2 A @ 30 VAC
SDB500EX: 2 A @ 120 VAC
Limit Contact Adjustment: By knob through full range
Maximum Unit Temperature:
55
SDB500, SDB500EX, SDB501: 625°F (329°C)
SDB1000: 1250°F (677°C) SDB501
Case Material: SDB501: Die-cast aluminum; SDB500, SDB1000,
SDB500EX: Sand-cast aluminum
Swichgage Accuracy: ± 3% of full scale; NOTE: All models are
calibrated for use with a thermowell. Specify when a thermowell is
70
NOT to be used when ordering.
Wire: 18 AWG (1.0 mm2). See Dimensions for lengths.
Dial: Black print on stainless steel. Dials are scaled in degrees Fahr-
enheit and Celsius.
Approximate Shipping Weight:
SDB501: 1 lb. 4 oz. (0.57 kg)
75
SDB500 and SDB1000: 2 lb. (1.0 kg)

SDB500EX: 2 lb. 5 oz. (1.05 kg)
Approximate Shipping Dimensions:
SDB501: 8-1/4 x 4-1/4 x 4-1/2 in. (210 x 108 x 114 mm)
SDB500 and SDB1000: 8-1/4 x 4-1/4 x 4-1/2 in. (210 x 108 x
114 mm)
78
SDB500EX: 9 x 5-1/2 x 6 in. (229 x 140 x 152 mm)
53
80
Basic Operation Wiring Diagrams
SDB500, SDB501 and SDB1000: When the indicating
pointer on the SDB touches the adjustable contact, a
one-wire-to-ground circuit is completed to shut down
the equipment and/or actuate audible or visual alarms.
Proper relays or Tattletale® annunciators (magnetic
switches) must be incorporated into the system.
SDB500EX: When the temperature rises to the preset
trip point, the pointer engages an internal SPDT snap-
switch to close/open circuits.
Optional Thermowells
Thermowells (separable sockets) are available to
facilitate maintenance of a temperature Swichgage
instrument and to protect the temperature sensing bulb
from extreme amounts of system pressure. For system
pressures exceeding 285 psi (1.97 MPa) [19.7 bar] at
625°F (329°C) an optional thermowell is recommended
for use with the SDB series. The thermowell protects the
SDB bulb from system pressures up to 3000 psi (20.68
MPa) [206.8 bar] at 300°F (149°C). Two thermowell
options are available: 1/2 NPT and 3/4 NPT. Thermowells
can be ordered with the SDB Series Swichgage
instrument or ordered separately. See How to Order.
How to Order

10050025 Thermowell for 1/2 NPT
Optional Thermowells
10050311 Thermowell for 3/4 NPT
54
5
sect. 10 94117
rev. 2014/11/16
4.5 in. (114 mm) Dial Temperature Swichgage®
10
SPL and 45TE Series
The 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) size dial Swichgage is a
mechanical gage for temperature indication. It is a
15
combination indicating gage and critical temperature
limit switches. High and low temperature limit contacts
are visible.
It includes adjustable, electrical contacts that can be
used for start and stop, to trip alarms and to shut down
20
equipment.
Panel and wall-mount versions are available as well as
latching control relay versions.
Ranges are available from 15° to 250°F (9° to 121°C)
through 260° to 450°F (127° to 232°C).
25
Typical applications include: 1
• Gas compressors • Engine coolant temperature
• Heaters and coolers • Process temperature 45TE Model
• Water pump temperature 2
30
Specifications
1 Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive
89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.
Dial: White on black, dual scale, °F and °C standard, 4-1/2 in. (114
2 Selected configurations are third-party listed. Call Enovation Controls for
mm) diameter
Case: Die-cast aluminum, surface or panel mount details.
40
Capillary: PVC-armored copper tube, 5 ft. long (1.5 m) standard –
see options Basic Models
Sensing Bulb: Copper bulb: 1/2 in. (13 mm) OD
Length: 7 in. (178 mm)
Minimum bulb insertion – see corresponding chart SPLC Series Swichgage: Surface-mount version
Pressure Rating: 600 psi (4.1 MPa) [41 bar]. Connection: 1/2 NPT of the Swichgage. For these models the gage pointer
50
compression fitting makes with two adjustable contacts to complete a
Overrange: Do not exceed 10% above full range pilot-duty circuit.
Limit Contacts (SPLC and SPLFC): 1-SPDT, Center off; pilot-du- SPLFC Series Swichgage: Panel-mounting (round
ty; 2 A @ 30 V; 1 A @ 125 VAC. Contacts are gold-plated silver.
Snap-Acting Switches (45TE and 45TEF): 2-SPDT; 2 A @ 250 case) version of the SPLC.
VAC SPLBP Latching Control Relay Swichgage: This
55
Dry Relay Contact (BP Models): 10 A @ 28 VDC or 10 A @ 120 version of the SPLC Series is designed to start and
VAC stop electric motor driven equipment. The pilot-duty
Wire Connections: contacts of the SPLBP are connected to a latching
Surface-mount models: 1/2 NPT conduit and terminal block
Panel mount models: Wire leads, 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) x 9 in. (229 control relay for automatic ON/OFF control, either
mm) long directly or through a motor starter.
45TE Series Snap-Acting Swichgage: Surface-
70
OS models: 1/2 NPT conduit and wire leads, 18 AWG (1.0 mm2)
x 9 in. (229 mm) long mount version of the Swichgage. These models offer
Item Weight: 8 lb. (3.6 kg) approximately; Explosion-proof models: internal snap-acting SPDT switches, instead of the
22 lb. (10 kg) approx.
Item Dimensions: 16 x 11 x 5-1/2 in. (406 x 279 x 140 mm); single pole contacts.
Explosion-proof models: 12 x 12 x 9 in. (305 x 305 x 229 mm) 45TEF Series Swichgage: This is the panel-mounting
(round case) version of the 45TE series.
75
45TEBP Snap-Acting and Latching Control Relay

Swichgage: Same as 45TE – includes an internal
latching control relay for automatic ON/OFF control
either directly or through a motor starter.
78
Enovation Controls offers square case configurations

altered to fit round panel openings, see Dimensions.
55
80
Basic Operation
This vapor-actuated gage features a sealed capillary completes a circuit when it touches the adjustable limit
tube and sensing bulb. When subjected to heat, the contacts. Contacts have self-cleaning motion to ensure
liquid in the sensing bulb expands to vapor creating electrical continuity. A toggle switch is provided on
pressure against a bourdon tube mechanism. The SPLC models to override the low contact for equipment
bourdon tube translates this vapor pressure into a start-up.
mechanical gage reading. Models 45TE and 45TEF have internal snap-acting
For models SPLC and SPLFC, the gage pointer acts SPDT switches.
as a pressure indicator and as one switch pole, which
Dimensions
Surface-Mount Models Panel-Mount Models
Ranges and Accuracy — Sensing Bulb Insertion
Temperature Ranges
Accuracy (SPL and 45 Series Models) Minimum Sensing Bulb
Available (dual scale dials)
Insertion into Process
Fahrenheit Celsius First 1/3 Middle 1/3 Upper 1/3
15° to 250° 9° to 121° ±8°F/±4°C ±2°F/±1°C ±2°F/±1°C 5 in. (127 mm)
130° to 350° 54° to 177° ±8°F/±4°C ±2°F/±1°C ±3°F/±1.5°C 2-1/2 in. (64 mm)
260° to 450° 127° to 232° ±8°F/±4°C ±2°F/±1°C ±3°F/±1.5°C 2-1/2 in. (64 mm)
Using a Thermowell Start-Up Lockout

Installing a thermowell The SPLC
is recommended for high Swichgage low
pressure applications or limit contact can
corrosive environments. be bypassed for
It also allows sensing equipment start
bulbs to be changed or up. A toggle switch
adjusted without opening is provided for
the connection to process. this purpose. The
Enovation Controls offers toggle switch must
thermowells for a variety of be manually reset
applications. when temperature
rises above the low
limit.
56
How the SPL Works How the 45TE Works
5
SPLC and SPLFC Swichgage temperature indicator The 45TE Series Swichgage incorporates two SPDT
gages include two pilot-duty, pointer-type limit contacts snap-switches instead of the pointer-type contacts of the
(one for high and one for low) that can be used for alarm SPL. Unlike the SPL that completes an electrical circuit
and/or shutdown. The SPLC and SPLFC models will as soon as the pointer touches the contact, the 45TE trip
10
complete a circuit when the gage pointer and either limit point indicators will stop the pointer movement slightly
contact meet. This provides an electrical signal to alert before the switches operate. As temperature continues to
the operator of critical temperature conditions or when increase (reaching high set point) or to decrease (reaching
required, to shut down the equipment. low set point), the electrical circuit is then made. It provides
Both limit contacts (high and low) are field adjustable by the ability to set the trip point exactly with the indicator
15
simply turning the fingertip-type knob to the desired point needle — no guessing or equipment calibration is needed
on the scale dial. This graphic shows details of a typical as on blind switches. The 45TE trip points (high and low)
SPLFC Swichgage model. can be easily set using its stacked-knob adjustment. See
the schematic below for details.
20
25
30
40
(BP) Latch Relay Contact Models
50
Primarily designed to maintain a specific temperature magnetic latching relay sets or resets to latch a heater or
range by turning ON or OFF heaters or coolers having cooler ON or OFF. The relay unlatches (resets), when the
125 VAC circuitry, the SPLBP and 45TEBP Swichgage opposite contact operates. Pictured is a typical application.
models are applicable to a variety of situations where For applications with higher voltages, a Murphy TR
variable temperatures are controlling factors. As the pointer assembly can be used in conjunction with any 4-1/2 in.
55
touches a preset high or low limit contact/snap-switch, the (114 mm) dial Swichgage.
70
75
78
57
80
How to Order
58
5
sect. 10 8911
rev. 2014/11/14
Dual Temperature Swichgage®
10
Model Series MDTM89
Murphy’s model MDTM89 is an electronic, dual-
temperature monitor. It monitors two thermocouples,
displays the temperature of the thermocouple selected
15
and has adjustable trip points for each input. A toggle
switch provides for selection of the thermocouple
to be displayed and/or the temperature trip point to
be checked/adjusted. If either trip point is reached,
the associated output turns on and can be used as a
20
control signal or to initiate alarms and/or shutdown.
A Push to Read button, located below the selector
switch, allows the operator to check the trip point
and to see its value as adjustments are made. Two
potentiometers, one on each side of the thermocouple
25
selector switch, are provided for field adjustment of the
trip points.
There are four basic models. Two of the models are
powered by capacitor discharge ignition and have either * +
an FET or an SCR output. One model operates from 12-
30
or 24-VDC and has an FET output. Standard display is
in degrees Fahrenheit; degrees Celsius is optional. * When used with approved ignition or 12-24 VDC. Contact
Enovation Controls for details.
+ Approved for CD ignition, 80–250 VDC
40
Applications Open Thermocouple Input
Applications include the following: An open thermocouple input forces the monitor into
• Compressor suction/discharge temperature upscale overrange. The monitor indicates an overrange
• Engine/compressor jacket water temperature by displaying the numeral 1 in the left most digit of the
50
• Engine exhaust temperature display. An overrange will turn on the high trip point
• Compressor cylinder temperature output.
• After cooler temperature Trip Point Operation
• Bearing temperature
Monitored trip points are independent of the
Thermocouple Type
55
thermocouple selector switch. Both set points are
always active.
Either J or K type UNGROUNDED THERMOCOUPLE When the thermocouple temperature reaches the
is accepted. Specify type in part number for each trip point temperature, the MDTM89 is triggered. After
MDTM89 unit (see How to Order). Order thermocouples approximately 0.5 seconds the trip point output turns
as a separate item.
70
on.
Trip points are set by depressing the Push to Read
Continuous & Trip Point
push button while rotating a trip point potentiometer
Display until the desired trip point temperature is
displayed.
The selector switch is used to select the thermocouple
75
or trip point temperature to be displayed. The selected Automatic Cold Junction

temperature is continuously displayed during normal
operation. Depressing the Push to Read push button Cold junction reference point compensation is an
displays the trip point temperature of the selected integral feature of the monitor. The compensator
thermocouple. circuit monitors case temperature and automatically
78
compensates for changes in ambient temperatures.

Compensation will allow maximum of 2 degrees
change in the temperature reading from 32° to 122°F
(0° to 50°C).
59
80
Specifications
Power Requirements (Operating Voltages): Operating Temperature: -4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)
MDTM89-A: 100 to 350* VDC, CD ignition, negative ground Storage Temperature: -40° to 300°F (-40° to 150°C)
(FET outputs) Case: Die cast aluminum
MDTM89-E: 100 to 350*, CD ignition, negative ground (FET
Reset Differential: FET models: Decreases 3° (°F or °C).
outputs)
SCR model: turn input power off to reset.
MDTM89-B: 100 to 350* VDC, CD ignition, negative or positive
ground (SCR outputs) Measurement Range: Monitor Range 0°-1999°F or °C (specify F
MDTM89-C: 12 to 24+ VDC, negative ground, 15 milliwatts or C in part number)
(FET outputs) Accuracy: With J-type thermocouple: from 150°-1200°F (66°-
Power Consumption: CD ignition: 350 μa @ 100V; 120 VAC: 649°C) ±1.5% of reading. With K-type thermocouple: from 400°-
0.6 watts; 24 VDC: 0.5 watts 2000°F (204°-1076°C) ±1.5% of reading. At calibration tempera-
Outputs: ture.
Model B: output turns on above trip point; output turns off when Laboratory Approvals: CSA† and Factory Mutual* approved for
power is switched off; two (2) isolated SCR outputs, 0.5 amp Class I, Division 2, Group D, hazardous locations).
@250 VDC Thermocouple Lead Length: 150 ohm lead resistance affects
Models A, C and D: output turns on above trip point; output monitor accuracy less than 1°
turns off below trip point; two (2) isolated FET outputs, 0.5 amp Trip Point Accuracy: ±3°F (±2°C) of reading
@ 250 VDC Trip Point Adjustment Range: 0-1999 Degrees
Model E: output one turns on above trip point, output turns off Shipping Weight: 48 oz. (1.4 kg)
below trip point: output 2 turns on below trip point, output turns Shipping Dimensions: 10 x 9-1/2 x 6 in. (254 x 241 x 152 mm)
off above trip point: two (2) isolated FET outputs, 0.5 amp @
250 VDC * Approved for CD ignition, 80–250 VDC.
Ambient Cold Junction Compensation Range: 32° to 122°F +
When used with approved ignitions or 12-24 VDC. Contact
(1°C from 0° to 50°C) Enovation Controls for details.
Dimensions
MDTM89 Interface Capabilities
Model Power Source Rating

LCDT CD Ign., 120 VAC, 12/24 VDC Cl.I, Div. 1, Gr. D, Haz areas*
S1501 120 VAC or 12/24 VDC Cl.I, Div. 1, Gr. D, Haz areas*
TTD CD Ign., 12/24 VDC Cl.I, Div. 2, Gr. D, Haz areas**
TATTLETALE ®
CD Ign., 120 VAC, 12/24 VDC Non-Hazardous areas
PLCs, various Non-Murphy annunciators - contact Enovation Controls.
* An isolation barrier is needed between the MDTM89 and an Annunciator rated for Class I, Division 1, Group D,
Hazardous areas.
** When used with approved ignition. Contact Enovation Controls for details.
60
How to Order
5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
55
70
75
78
61
80
62
5
sect. 10 9106
rev. 2015/03/04
Temperature Swichgage ®
10
Scanner/Pyrometer Model TDX6
The TDX6 is an advanced design six-point temperature
scanner and pyrometer. It continually scans up to
15
six thermocouples and sequentially displays the
thermocouple number and its reading. Each sensor
input has a field settable trip point for alarm, shutdown
or control. A read/scan selector allows the operator to
set and view each trip point. With the selector in the
20
scan mode, a thermocouple read push button provides
a means to manually toggle through the six channels
and to lock in on a specific channel. Normal scanning
will resume approximately three seconds after releasing
the push button. All trip points are continually armed
25
and active during the scanning process.
Type J or K, grounded‡ or ungrounded thermocouples
are accommodated. Other types are available upon
request.
The TDX6 can interface with other Murphy Selectronic®
30
Tattletale® annunciators and microcontrollers. It is rated
for Class I, Division 2, Group D, hazardous areas* and is Approved
† Approved *
available for operation from CD ignition, 120 VAC or 24 * When used with approved ignition. Contact Enovation Controls for details.
VDC. † When used with power requirements described below.
‡
Using grounded thermocouples introduces the risk of odd currents
or voltages being imposed on the thermocouple signal which can affect
Dimensions
40
the accuracy of the reading. This is an inherent problem of grounded
thermocouples and the reason why we prefer ungrounded thermocouples.
*An isolation barrier is needed between the TDX6 and an Annunciator rated
for Class I, Division 1, Group D, Hazardous Areas.
Applications
50
• Gas Compressor Suction/Discharge Temperature
• Engine/Compressor Jacket Water Temperature
• Process Temperatures
• Generators
55
• Pumps
• Engine Exhaust Temperature
TDX Interface Capabilities
Models Power Source Ratings

70
LCDT CD Ign., 120 VAC, 12/24-VDC C Cl.I, Div.1, Gr.D, Haz. areas*
S1501 120 VAC or 12/24-VDC Cl.I, Div.1, Gr.D, Haz. areas *
75
CD Ignition (neg. grnd),

TTD Cl.I, Div.2, Gr.D, Haz. areas †
12/24-VDC
Tattletale® CD Ign., 120 VAC, 12/24-VDC Non-Hazardous areas
*An isolation barrier is needed between the TDX6 and an Annunciator

rated for Class I, Division 1, Group D, Hazardous Areas.
78
†
When used with approved ignition. Contact Enovation Controls for
details.
PLCs, various non-Murphy annunciators–contact factory.
63
80
Specifications Typical Wiring Diagram
Power Requirements (Operating Voltages):

120 VAC or 80-250 VDC, CD ignition or 24 VDC
Outputs:
Models TDX6-A and TDX6-C: Six isolated Silicon Controlled Rectifier
(S.C.R.) outputs; 0.5 A @ 250 VDC; switches on (applies ground) above trip
point and switches off (removes ground) when power is switched off.
Models TDX6-B and TDX6-D: Six isolated Field-Effect Transistor (F.E.T.) PWR
outputs; 0.1 A @ 250 VDC; switches on (applies ground) above trip point and
switches off (removes ground) below trip point.
Operating Temperature: -4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)
Storage Temperature: -40° to 300°F (-40° to 150°C)
Case: ABS 1/4 DIN (90 x 90 mm)
Scanning Speed: Complete scan in 30 seconds
Reset Differential:
F.E.T. models: Decreases 3 Degrees (°F or °C)
S.C.R. models: Turn input power off to reset
Display Update Time: Updates temperature every 0.3 seconds
Start-up Time Delay: Unit is locked out for 10 seconds after ignition
voltage is sensed.
Ambient Cold Junction Compensation Range:
2°F from 32°F to 122°F (1°C from 0°C to 50°C)
Measurement Range:
Monitor Range 0-1999°F or °C (specify °F or °C in part number)
Accuracy:
With J-type thermocouple:
from 50°-150°F (10°-66°C) +3°F(+2°C)
from 150°-1200°F (66°-649°C) ±1.0% of reading
With K-type thermocouple:
from 400°-2000°F (204°-1076°C) ±1.0% of reading
Trip Point Accuracy: ±3°F (±2°C) of reading
Trip Point Adjustment Range: 0-1999 Degrees
Open Thermocouple Input: A number 1 appears in the display to the
right of the channel number and the trip point operates.
Shipping Weight: 2 lb. (0.91 kg)
Shipping Dimensions: 5-1/2 x 9 x 6 in. (140 x 229 x 152 mm)
How to Order
64
5
sect. 10 00064
rev. 2014/11/08
Temperature Scanner/Pyrometer
10
TDXM Model
The TDXM now gives you a unique configurable
temperature scanner/pyrometer with a built-in power
supply. A new design features a 7-character,
15
7-segment Liquid Crystal Display window with 1/2 inch
(13 mm), easy-to-read characters. Also located on the
faceplate are membrane keys for easy configuring.
Highly reliable and versatile, the TDXM accepts up to
24 type J or K grounded or ungrounded thermocouples.
20
Each channel has three adjustable set points SP1, SP2
and SP3. The SP1, SP2 and SP3 set points correspond
to the SP1, SP2 and SP3 outputs. Additionally it has the
selectable feature to monitor and alarm or shutdown
on deviation from an average for up to two groups of
temperatures (GRP/DEV; deviation from average). One
25
group could be exhaust temperatures, and another
group could be bearing temperatures.
The TDXM is capable of communicating with
controllers, PLCs, computers or SCADA (Supervisory
Control & Data Acquisition) systems by a built-in RS485
30
serial communications port.
The TDXM-DC is available for 10 - 32 VDC systems.
Dimensions
40
50
55
70
75
78
Important: For outdoor use, the TDXM should be mounted in a weatherproof enclosure.
65
80
Features
User Interface (Faceplate) Sensor Inputs and Terminals
The User Interface includes a numeric LCD and a The TDXM accepts up to 24 either J or K type grounded
five-button membrane keypad for readout and channel or ungrounded* thermocouples using 24 pairs of screw
configuration. Thermocouple types can be selected and type connections. Each pair has a jumper from the
set points entered through a series of setup menus. factory. Any tripped set point is detected within two
Thermocouple Types seconds after the set point is exceeded.
Each of the 24 channels on the TDXM can be configured RS485 Serial Port
as either J or K type thermocouples and temperature The RS485 serial port (MODBUS RTU slave) on the
units can be selected as °F or °C readout for each back of the module is provided for communicating with
channel. Unused channels can be set to Ignore and will micro-controllers, PCs, PLCs and SCADA systems. It
not be seen in the display and will not cause fault trips. is recommended that a termination resistor (customer
Control Options supplied) be used when the TDXM is the last device
Each TDXM model features three outputs: two Field connected in a daisy-chain configuration. The Baud
Effect Transistor (FET) outputs and one Form-C Relay rate, number of stop bits and slave node number can
output. Each channel has three set points; one for each be set using the keypad. Communication is half-duplex.
output. This allows for greater system flexibility by MODBUS RTU function codes 3 and 6 are supported.
grouping sets of channels through one output.
Set Point History * We recommend the use of ungrounded thermocouples. Errors
The TDXM stores the last set point trip for each output in readings with grounded thermocouples can be the result of
differences in grounding between different devices.
in non-volatile memory. For instance, if SP1 of channel 1
was the last SP1 tripped, the LCD display will read: SP1
1 when the set point History is accessed for SP1.
Specifications
Power Input (Operating Voltages): 10- 32VDC, 750 mW max Sensor Scan Rate: Scans all channels in 2 seconds
Sensor Inputs: Range:
Up to 24 type J or K grounded or ungrounded‡ thermocouples Type K: 0° - 1999°F (0° - 1093°C)
Outputs: Type J: 0° - 1538°F (0° - 837°C)
Two (2) Output .5 A, 350 VDC, FET-sink to ground to trip Display Type: Custom 7-segment, 7-character, backlit type with
One (1) Form C Solid State Relay Output 0.125 A, 350 VDC/240 VAC temperature units indication and set point trip indication
NOTE: The form C relay output is de-energized for a trip condition. The NC Accuracy:
terminal is closed, and the NO terminal is open for trip Cold junction: Better than ± 1.0°F (0.5°C)
Communications: RS485 Serial Port, MODBUS RTU slave Type J or K: ± 2°F (1°C); 100° - 1999°F (38° - 1093°C)
Operating, Storage and Display Temperature: Cold Junction Compensation: -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
-40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C) Open Thermocouple Detection: Drives channel reading high
Shipping Weight (all Models): 3 lb. (1.36 kg) approximately
‡
We recommend the use of ungrounded thermocouples. Errors in readings Shipping Dimensions (all Models):
with grounded thermocouples can be the result of differences in grounding 5-1/2 x 9 x 9-1/2 in. (140 x 229 x 241 mm) approximately
between different devices.
How to Order

10702748 TDXM-DC: 24-channel model, 10-32 VDC powered
Head/Module
10702996 TDXM-DC W/SP3 Latch: TDXM-DC with SP3 latch feature
Call for part MConfig: TDXM configuration software available
Software
number
10007848 Plug, kit, TDXM: Terminal Plug replacement kit Replacement Parts
66
5
sect. 10 96084
rev. 2014/11/08
Thermocouple, RTD and RTD Transmitter
10
With Thermowell – TC, RTD and RTDT Series
Enovation Controls offers a variety of highly reliable
thermocouple and RTD (Resistance Temperature
15
Detector) assemblies and 4-20 mA DC output RTD
transmitters.
Their innovative features include a 304 stainless steel
thermowell that provides protection to the spring-
loaded element.
20
The cast aluminum connecting head meets NEMA
4 requirements and includes an RTD transmitter or a
thermocouple/ RTD terminal block mounted on ceramic
Steatite and rated NEC Class 2.
The complete assemblies are offered in 2-1/2, 4-1/2
25
or 7-1/2 in. (63, 114 or 191 mm) thermowell insertion
lengths. Loop Resistance Graph
Specifications
30
Thermowell: 304 SS; 7000 psi (48.2 MPa) [482 bar] max. @ 70°F
Connecting Head: Cast Aluminum; 400°F (204°C) max. operating temp
Thermocouple: Ungrounded, Magnesium Oxide (MgO) insulated 96%
purity; element sheath of 304 SS (stainless steel)
Type J operating temp.: 900°F (482°C) max
Type K operating temp.: 1800°F (982°C) max
40
RTD: 100 ohm @ 0°C Platinum element; 3-wire; 400 °F maximum;
0.00385 temperature coefficient; 316L stainless steel element sheath
RTD Transmitter: 100 ohms Platinum RTD; 400°F maximum; Ranges:
0° to 400°F and -60° to 140°F. Linearized 4-20 mA DC output. Loop
powered typically 24 VDC, when using the Loop Resistance Graph, 13-40
VDC. For use with 100 ohms Platinum RTD elements, 0.00385 temp.
50
coefficient
Thermocouple Accuracy (J/K): 0.5%
RTD Accuracy: ±0.12% Supply voltage for RTDT must be within 13-40 VDC.
RTD Transmitter Accuracy: ±0.1% The graph shows the minimum supply voltage (VDC)
Terminal block: Ceramic Steatite; thermocouples have: 4 terminals; required for a given load resistance (RL).
RTDs: 6 terminals. 28 to 14 AWG wire size, (8-32 SS screws)
Thermocouple Assemblies with Thermowell
55
Shipping Weights (listed by insertion length):
2-1/2 in. (63 mm) model: 2 lb. (0.907 kg) Available in types J or K, the thermocouple assemblies
4-1/2 in. (114 mm) model: 2 lb. 8oz. (1.24 kg) have ungrounded elements in a 304 stainless steel
7-1/2 in. (191 mm) model: 3 lb. 6oz. (1.67 kg) spring-loaded sheath. For product compatibility see
Shipping Dimensions (listed by insertion length): next page (replacement parts and thermocouple
2-1/2 and 4-1/2 in (63 and 114 mm) models:
extension wire are available).
70
12 x 7 x 5-1/2 in. (305 x 178 x 140 mm)
7-1/2 in. (191 mm) models: RTD Assemblies with Thermowell
16 x 11 x 5-1/2 in. (406 x 280 x 144 mm) Resistance temperature detector (RTD) assemblies are
Optional Thermocouple Extension Wire: available with a 100 ohm platinum element, 3-wire leads
(Sold separately–see How to Order section) and spring-loaded 316L stainless steel element sheath.
Individual Conductor Insulation: Extruded PFA RTD Transmitter Assemblies with Thermowell
75
Duplex Conductor Insulation: Twisted; Extruded PFA Overall RTDT assemblies transmit process variable
Temperature Rating: Continuous -450° to 500°F (-267° to 260°C)
Abrasion Resistance: Good
temperatures. Available as part of the temperature
Moisture Resistance: Excellent sensor assemblies or as a separate units, the RTDTs
Shielding: Metallic Shield accept 2- or 3-wire, 100 ohm RTDs. The RTD
Gage: 20 AWG (0.5 mm2) transmitters are loop powered. They feature linearized
78
Ohms per Double Foot Type J: 0.357 4-20 mA DC outputs and have reversed polarity
Ohms per Double Foot Type K: 0.586
protection.
67
80
Dimensions
How to Order
Model Model
Model and Description Notes Model and Description Notes
Number Number
Replacement Parts (order separately)
Thermocouple Assemblies (thermowell included)
Cast aluminum head with terminal blocks for
TCJ-225 J Type underground thermocouple, 1/2 NPT TCHA
thermocouples
TCK-225 K Type underground thermocouple, 1/2 NPT 2-1/2 in. (63 mm)
TCJE-25 Type J elements only for 2-1/2 in wells*
TCJ-325 J Type underground thermocouple, 3/4 NPT insertion length
TCKE-25 Type K elements only for 2-1/2 in wells*
TCK-325 K Type underground thermocouple, 3/4 NPT all elements
TCJ-245 J Type underground thermocouple, 1/2 NPT are spring
TCKE-45 Type K elements only for 4-1/2 in wells* loaded
TCKE-75 Type K elements only for 7-1/2 in wells*
TCK-345 K Type underground thermocouple, 3/4 NPT
PTW-225 1/2 NTP x 2-1/2 in. thermowell
TCJ-275 J Type underground thermocouple, 1/2 NPT
TCK-375 K Type underground thermocouple, 3/4 NPT
RTD Assemblies (thermowell included)
RTD-225-400-100 100 ohm Pt RTD 400oF (204oC) max., 1/2 NPT 2-1/2 in. (63 mm)
RTDE-25 100 ohm Pt RTD element only for 2-1/2 in. wells
RTD-325-400-100 100 ohm Pt RTD 400 F (204 C) max., 3/4 NPT
o o insertion length
RTDE-45 100 ohm Pt RTD element only for 4-1/2 in. wells
RTD-245-400-100 100 ohm Pt RTD 400oF (204oC) max., 1/2 NPT 4-1/2 in. (114 mm)
RTDE-75 100 ohm Pt RTD element only for 7-1/2 in. wells all elements
insertion length
RTD-345-400-100 100 ohm Pt RTD 400oF (204oC) max., 3/4 NPT are spring
100 ohm Pt RTD Transmitter only 0-400oF
RTD-275-400-100 100 ohm Pt RTD 400oF (204oC) max., 1/2 NPT 7-1/2 in. (191 mm) RTDTX-400-100 loaded
(-17.8-204oC)
RTD-375-400-100 100 ohm Pt RTD 400oF (204oC) max., 3/4 NPT insertion length
100 ohm Pt RTD Transmitter only -60-140oF
RTDTX-140-100
RTD Transmitter Assemblies (thermowell included) (-51.1-60oC)
100 ohm Pt 4-20 mA RTD Transmitter, 1/2 NPT, Thermocouple Extension Wire
RTDT-225-400-100
0-400oF (-17.8-204oC) 00003271 Type J 100 ft. roll
100 ohm Pt 4-20 mA RTD Transmitter, 1/2 NPT, 00003272 Type K 100 ft. roll
RTDT-225-140-100
-60-140oF (-51.1-60oC) 2-1/2 in. (63 mm)
100 ohm Pt 4-20 mA RTD Transmitter, 3/4 NPT, insertion length
RTDT-325-400-100
0-400oF (-17.8-204oC)
100 ohm Pt 4-20 mA RTD Transmitter, 3/4 NPT,
RTDT-325-140-100
-60-140oF (-51.1-60oC)
Product Compatibility
RTDT-245-400-100
0-400oF (-17.8-204oC) Model Power Source Temp Sensor
100 ohm Pt 4-20 mA RTD Transmitter, 1/2 NPT, MDTM89 CD Ign. 12/24 VDC,120 VAC JK ungrounded thermocouples
RTDT-245-140-100
-60-140oF (-51.1-60oC) 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) TDX6 CD Ign. 12/24 VDC,120 VAC JK grounded/ungrounded tc.
100 ohm Pt 4-20 mA RTD Transmitter, 3/4 NPT, insertion length TDXM 12/24 VDC JK grounded/ungrounded tc.
RTDT-345-400-100
0-400oF (-17.8-204oC)
RTDT-345-140-100
-60-140oF (-51.1-60oC)
RTDT-275-400-100
0-400oF (-17.8-204oC)
RTDT-275-140-100
-60-140oF (-51.1-60oC) 7-1/2 in. (191 mm)
100 ohm Pt 4-20 mA RTD Transmitter, 3/4 NPT, insertion length
RTDT-375-400-100
0-400oF (-17.8-204oC)
RTDT-375-140-100
-60-140oF (-51.1-60oC)
68
5
sect. 10 0610107
rev. 2014/11/08
Thermocouple, Stainless Steel Tube Type
10
1/4 Inch Diameter
The thermocouples are encased in a 1/4 inch diameter
316 stainless steel tubing sheath with stainless steel
15
Bell Spring for strain relief. The initial offerings are K
type thermocouples with 6-inch and 10-inch long 1/4-
inch diameter probes. The thermocouples are shipped
straight but can be bent with standard tubing benders
anywhere along its length to a 90° angle to minimize
20
clearance required and help prevent damage due to
personnel working on the unit. The thermocouple is tip
sensitive to minimize ambient temperature influence
and should be inserted between 25% and 75% of
the piping inside diameter or enough to minimize any
25
skin temperature affect on the tip of the probe when
installed in vessels. Extension Wire
Features
30
• Stainless steel transition sealing gland with a
stainless steel Bell Spring for strain relief.
• Standard bore through stainless steel compression
fitting for securing the thermocouple in the
thermowell at the appropriate depth.
40
• Can be inserted directly into a low-pressure
application process through a standard 1/4-inch
stainless steel bore through tubing compression
fitting.
• Enables a run from the point of measurement to the
50
nearest conduit entry, junction box or all the way
The Type K, 20 AWG stranded extension wire
to the panel housing the readout and monitoring
encased in a rugged cable meets demanding
instrument. Can also be installed in a cable tray.
environments. The industry standard yellow Teflon
• The thermowell assembly comes with a stainless
allows easy identification of K type thermocouple
steel bore through compression fitting and ferrule
55
wires so they can be separated from high voltage
saving installation time and money.
wires following good installation practices.
Thermowell
Thermowells are available in 2-inch, 4-1/2 inch or 7-1/2 inch lengths

for insertion depth and have a 1/2-inch NPT process connection. They
are supplied with a standard stainless steel compression fitting for
70
securing the thermocouple in the thermowell at the appropriate depth.
In low pressure applications the thermocouple can be inserted directly
into the process through a standard 1/4-inch SS tubing compression
75
fitting.
78
69
80
How to Order

10051331 Thermocouple, Type K, 1/4 Dia. Tube x 6 in. L w/5 ft. Thermocouple Extension Wire
10707436 Thermowell, 1/2 in. NPT, 1/4 in. T, 2.0 in. L Assembly 304SS
70
5
sect. 10 0910430
rev. 2014/11/07
Air Temperature Sensor
10
Model 12
The Model 12 Air Temperature Sensor is intended
for use in applications that monitor slowly changing
15
temperature.
The unit gives approximately .5 °F (.25 °C) resolution
when used with an 8-bit analog input.
Temperature Sensing Range
20
VDC Out °C °F
0.00 -18 0
0.25 -14.5 5.8
25
0.50 -11.4 11.5 Wire Diagram
0.75 -8.2 17.3
1.00 -5 23.0
1.25 -1.8 28.8
30
1.50 1.4 34.5
1.75 4.6 40.3
2.00 7.8 46.0
40
2.25 11 51.8
2.50 14.2 57.5
2.75 17.4 63.3
Specifications
3.00 20.6 69.0
50
3.25 23.8 74.8 Temperature Capability
Useful Operating Temperature Range: 0°F to 115°F (-18°C to 46°C)
3.50 27 80.5
Component Temperature Range: -85°F to 300°F (-65°C to 150°C)
3.75 30.2 86.3 Accuracy: 2% of full scale with software offset correction.
4.00 33.3 92.0 Voltage
55
Power Input Voltage: 9 to 28 VDC
4.25 36.6 97.8
Current Draw: 1mA
Cable: 2 foot length, 22 AWG, stranded
Clamp: 1/2” ID, provided (P/N 00-03-0392)
70
How to Order
75

10707483 Model 12: Air Temperature Sensor
78
71
80
72
5
Section 15 Fluid Level
Level Switch System - Bilge
10
95107 Bilge Level Switch System — BLSK1 Series �� 75
Level Switches - Tank Level

94124 Hydrostatic Head Level Switches — DF Series �� 77
15
Level Swichgage® Instruments - Coolant
00072 Level Swichgage® Instrument for Engine Liquids — L150/EL150K1 Series�� 81
Level Maintainers
1010627 Lube Level Maintainer — LM500/LM500-TF �� 83
20
92149 Level Maintainer — LM300 Series �� 85
96121 Oil Level Regulators for Lubricators — LR500 Series�� 87
7225 Maintain Lube Level — Model LR857�� 89
25
Level Swichgage® Instruments - Oil
0710176 Float Actuated Oil Level Swichgage® for Small Engines and Pumps�� 91
Level Swichgage® Instruments - Lube

6572 Lube Level Swichgage® Instrument — L129�� 93
30
Level Switches - Crankcase
7229 Crankcase Level Switch — L971 Series�� 95
Level Switches - Scrubber
40
1010629 Liquid Level Switches — MLS Series�� 97
0600009 Liquid Level Switches — LS200 Series �� 99
Level Valves - Scrubber

01069 Dump Valves — DVU Series�� 103
50
Level Swichgage® Instruments - Tank Level
94122 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) Dial Level Swichgage® — OPLH/OPLHACS Series�� 105
55
70
75
78
73
80
74
5
sect. 15 95107
rev. 2014/10/25
Bilge Level Switch System
10
BLSK1 Series
The BLSK1 Bilge Level Switch System operates bilge
pumps or alarms. The kit includes all items and fittings
15
necessary to install in your bilge. You order only the
parts you want and you provide brackets, tubing and
mounting hardware.
Using the proven Air Cell actuating system, all moving
parts and switching are remote from bilge liquids and
20
are not affected by corrosion, rust, etc. All wetted parts
are of non-corrosive materials.
As bilge level rises, a column of air is captured in the
MAC1 Air Volume Cell. The rising bilge level compresses
25
the column of air creating pressure against the large
diaphragm in the BLS1 Bilge Level Switch and the
switch trips. Switch set point is adjustable.
The switch resets as the bilge is pumped out and the
air cell recharges itself during normal operation.
30
The BLS1 is constructed of materials not affected by Dimensions
marine atmospheres: aluminum or bronze body and
cover, Buna-N diaphragm.
Specifications
40
BLS1 Bilge Level Switch Snap-Switch SPDT (standard)
5 A @ 125, 250, or 480 VAC
1/2 A @ 125 VDC, 1/4 A @ 250 VDC
NOTE: A pilot relay may be used for higher contact ratings (see
50
Typical Wiring Diagram)
Case/Lid: Aluminum (std)
Bottom Plate: Glass-filled nylon
Process Connection: 1/4 NPTF A
Max. Pressure: 25 psi (172 kPa) [1.72 bar]
Conduit Connection (electrical): 1/2 NPT
55
BLS1 Weight: 3 lb. (1.4 kg)
BLS1 Dimensions: A
6-1/4 x 6-1/4 x 6-1/4 in. (159 x 159 x 159 mm)
15050737 Optional mounting bracket
16 ga., 304 stainless steel (see Dimensions)
70
MACT1 Tube Kit (fittings included)
4 ft. (1.21 m) flexible non-corrosive tubing, 1/4 in. (6 mm) dia.
(cut to fit)
MACT1 Weight: 0.5 lb. (0.23 kg)
MACT1 Dimensions: 6 x 6 x 6 in. (152 x 152 x 152 mm)
MAC1 Air Cell (Volume Cell)
75
Made of non-corrosive materials

(2) 1/4-20 stainless steel hex bolts and nuts
MAC1 Weight: 2 lb. (1 kg)
MAC1 Dimensions: 6 x 6 x 6 in. (152 x 152 x 152 mm)
78
75
80
Typical Installation and Wiring
Install flyback diode across K-1 relay or

DC power is used.
How to Order

SPDT, 5A Switch,
15000587 BLS1: Bilge level switch
aluminum case and lid
BLSK1: Bilge level switch kit includes BLS1, MACT1 tubing kit and
15700193 Kit
MAC1 air cell
15050737 BLS1 mounting bracket
15010205 5 A snap-switch and movement assembly
15000123 Diaphragm assembly
Accessories and
15050823 Piston
replacement parts
15050824 Knob for limit adjustment
15700200 MACT1
15000590 MAC1
76
5
sect. 15 94124
rev. 2014/12/02
Hydrostatic Head Level Switches
10
DF Series
The DF series are diaphragm operated hydrostatic
head pressure level switches. A pressure sensitive
15
diaphragm operates a snap switch that can be wired
directly to electric pilot circuits to control pumps at
predetermined levels. Typical application is to start and
stop electric driven pump(s) to maintain tank levels. It is
also applicable to engine-driven pumps.
20
The nitrile sensing diaphragm is impervious to most
liquids and is sensitive enough to control levels with
1/4 in. (6 mm) repeatability. See model descriptions for
limits of switch trip point adjustability. Materials include
aluminum body, glass-filled nylon bottom plate and a
25
special alloy leaf snap switch as standard.
This simple level switch is highly reliable and can be
worked into almost any new or existing system without
major modification or special tools. Dimensions
DF755 and DF757 are suitable for atmospheric tanks
in a non-hazardous area. The SPDT snap switch for the
30
DF755 is preset for a 4 in. (102 mm) differential in liquid
level. The DF757 trip point is adjustable over a 108 in.
(2743 mm) differential.
40
Specifications
Snap Switch Ratings

SPDT
15 A @ 125, 250 VAC
50
Case/Lid: Aluminum
Bottom Plate: Glass-filled Nylon
Process Connection: 1 NPT
Maximum Pressure Rating: 25 psi (172 kPa [1.72 Bar])
Conduit Connection (electrical): 1/2 NPT
55
Shipping Weights:
DF755: 3 lb. (1.4 kg)
DF757: 3 lb. (1.4 kg)
Shipping Dimensions:
6-1/4 x 6-1/4 x 6-1/4 in. (159 x 159 x 159 mm)
70
75
78
77
80
Applications
• Saltwater Disposal Systems • Waterflood Systems

• Cooling Towers • Diesel Day Tanks
• Crude Oil Tanks • Sumps
Typical Water Flood Control System Typical Tank Mounting Methods (DF755)
The diagram above displays eight DF Series switches

installed on a Raw Water tank and a Clear Water tank.
When raw water rises to predetermined level, DF#1
stops the supply pump. As the tank level falls below the
predetermined level, DF#2 starts the supply pump. If
the tank level continues to fall, DF#3 initiates shutdown
of the supply pump. DF#4 stops the transfer pump
before the raw water tank is completely pumped out.
When clear water reaches the predetermined level,
DF#5 stops the transfer pump. As the tank level falls
to a predetermined low level, DF#6 starts the transfer
pump. If the tank level continues to fall due to the
failure of the filters section, DF#7 initiates shutdown of
the transfer pump. (DF755 located at this level will also
operate backwash equipment). DF#8 stops the injection
pump before the tank pumps completely out.
An OPL Series Pressure Swichgage® stops injection
pump when pressure reaches predetermined high or
low pressure
78
Typical Wiring
5
Starts at Low Level, Stops at High Starts at High Level, Stops at Low
Start motor when predetermined low level is reached Start motor when predetermined high level is reached
and stops when high level is reached. Keeps tank level and stops when low level is reached. Motor starter
10
within selected limits. Motor starter equipped with equipped with H.O.A.
H.O.A.
15
20
Dual Magneto Shutdown
Single Magneto Shutdown Shut down dual magneto engines using Murphy
Shut down single ignition engine when fluid reaches low MS2120 Magnetic Switch. Diagram shows hookup
25
level. Simple wiring of magneto to N.O. switch terminal for low level shutdown. Simple wiring changes and
will shut down engine at predetermined high level. mounting locations are necessary for high level
shutdowns.
30
40
Basic Operation
As the liquid level rises, hydrostatic head pressure is applied to the diaphragm A. The diaphragm is forced upward
50
forcing the actuator arm B to activate the snap switch C.
Model DF755 is factory set and operates at approximately 2 in. (51 mm) and 6 in. (152 mm) above the level at
which the diaphragm is mounted. The trip point(s) for Model DF757 are adjustable between 2 in. (51 mm) and 110
in. (2794 mm) for high and low (make/break) operation by knobs, D.
55
70
75
78
79
80
Accessories
Enovation Controls offers the MAC-1 Volume Air Cell that can be
attached to the DF755 to monitor water levels on a sump. It activates
alarms or starts a pump directly. The MAC-1 Volume Air Cell is non-
corrosive and provides 1/4-20 stainless steel mounting studs.
The MACT-1 Tubing Kit provides 4 ft. (1.2 m) flexible, non-corrosive
1/4 in. (6 mm) tubing (cut to fit). The kit includes necessary fittings to
attach tubing.
Volume Cell Operation
As liquid rises around the volume cell, it compresses air inside the
cell and forces it up in the sensor line. As air pressure increases due
to the water level continuing to rise, sufficient pressure will be applied
to activate the internal snap-switch, which in turn starts the pump. As
the liquid level is pumped down, pressure decreases and the above
procedure is reversed. The pump is stopped and held in a standby
condition. An air purge may be required in the sensor line. Consult
factory.
How to Order

15700001 DF755: Hydrostatic head level switch, SPDT snap-switch
DF Series switch
15700007 DF757: Hydrostatic head level switch, adjustable trip point
15000123 Diaphragm Repair Kit DF Series service part
15000121 Snap switch and insulator assembly
DF755 Series service part
15000122 Snap switch, insulator and movement assembly
15000174 Snap switch and bracket assembly DF757 Series service part
Accessories and service parts are sold separately and are available from Enovation Controls.
Accessories available:
MAC-1: air volume cell
MACT-1: air volume cell tube kit
80
5
sect. 15 00072
rev. 2014/10/25
Level Swichgage ® for Engine Liquids
10
L150 and EL150K1 Series
The L150 Series Level Swichgage instrument is a
combination liquid level gage and low-limit switch; each
15
unit includes (1) a chamber with pivotal float, (2) an
indicating dial with pointer and (3) a low-level contact.
When properly installed and maintained, the float
operates the pointer which, in turn, both indicates level
during normal operation and closes a switching circuit if
20
the level falls to the low-limit set point. *
Applications
The primary use of the L150/EL150K1 is for engine †
cooling systems, surge or expansion tanks, condenser
25
radiator or vapor phase systems, pressurized or
atmospheric systems. The Level Swichgage instrument * EL150EX Models are CSA Listed for Class I, Division 1, Group C & D
can also be used to monitor lube oil, hydraulic fluid Hazardous Locations.
or diesel fuel reservoirs and activates alarms and/or † Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive
shut down at a predetermined minimum level. These 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.
30
instruments are built for low pressure systems with a
maximum of 25 psi (172 kPa) [1.72 bar].
Dimensions
40
L150 EL150EX
Standard Electrical Diagrams

50
55
70
EL150K1
WARNING: This typical wiring diagram is shown for

clarity only. It is not intended for use as installation
75
instructions.
78
81
80
Specifications
L150 EL150K1 EL150EX

Case: Die cast aluminum, polyurethane Case: Die cast aluminum, polyurethane Case: Sand cast aluminum, painted;
coated; approximate dimensions; 4-1/2 x coated; approximate dimensions; 5 x 4-3/4 approximate dimensions; 6-1/2 x 5-3/4 x
4-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. (114 x 121 x 70 mm) x 2-3/4 in. (127 x 121 x 70 mm) 5-1/4 in. (165 x 146 x133 mm)
Mounting Holes: (2) 9/32 in. (7 mm) diam- Enclosure Rating: IP35 Mounting Holes: (2) 5/16 in. (8 mm)
eter at 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) on center Mounting Holes: (2) 9/32 in. (7 mm) diameter at 5-1/2 in. (140 mm) on center
Float: Brass diameter at 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) on center Float: 304 Stainless steel
Lens: Polycarbonate Float: Brass Lens: Tempered glass
O-rings: Saturated Nitrile, are suitable for Lens: Polycarbonate O-rings: Saturated Nitrile, suitable for cool-
coolant or hydrocarbons O-rings: Saturated Nitrile, are suitable for ant or hydrocarbons
Maximum temperature: 250°F (121°C) coolant or hydrocarbons Maximum temperature: 250°F (121°C)
Gasket: Nitrile Maximum temperature: 250°F (121°C) Gasket: Nitrile
Vent Tube: 1/4 x 5 in. (6 x 127 mm) Gasket: Nitrile Vent Tube: 1/4 x 5 in. (6 x 127 mm)
copper cane with 1/4 NPT x 1/4 in. (6 mm) Vent Tube: 1/4 x 5 in. (6 x 127 mm) copper cane with 1/4 NPT x 1/4 in. (6 mm)
tube fitting copper cane with 1/4 NPT x 1/4 in. (6 mm) tube fitting and 1/2 NPT to 1/4 NPT reducer
Contact Rating: 2 A @ 30 VAC/DC. Wire: tube fitting fitting
(1) 16 AWG x 26 in. (1.5 mm2 x 660 mm) Snap-Switch: SPDT rated 10 A @ 125 Snap-Switch: SPDT rated 10 A @ 125
with terminals VAC; 0.5 A @ 125 VDC; 10 A 30 VDC VAC; 0.5 A @ 125 VDC; 10 A 30 VDC
Shipping Weight: 29 oz. (0.82 kg.) Wire: (3) 18 AWG x 14 in. (1 mm2 x 356 Wire: Wired to terminal block
Shipping Dimensions: 5-1/4 x 5-1/4 x mm) Laboratory Approvals: CSA Listed for
5-1/2 in. (133 x 133 x 140 mm) Shipping Weight: 42 oz. (1.2 kg.). Hazardous Locations Class I, Division 1,
Shipping Dimensions: 5-1/4 x 5-1/4 x Groups C & D
5-1/2 in. (133 x 133 x 140 mm) Shipping Weight: 5 lbs. (2.26 kg.)
Shipping Dimensions: 6-1/2 x 6-3/4 x
6-3/8 in. (165 x 171 x 162 mm)
Radiator Fittings
Murphy PS, PS Barbed and PS-D fittings allow the installation of the
L150 / EL150K1 to the radiator when a fitting is not available.
How to Order

15000138 All parts except case and body
L150 Repair Kits
15000101 Case/body assembly
15000139 All parts except case and body
15000101 Case/body assembly EL150K1 Repair Kits
15000100 Lens/switch assembly
15000110 Cover and float assembly
15000108 Lid assembly EL150EX Repair Kits
15000109 Switch/terminal assembly
15000107 Radiator fitting (PS), thin wall, 1/4 in. (6 mm) tube fitting
Radiator fitting (PS-D), for diesel or oil, thick wall (to 1/4 in. [6 mm]),
15010202
accepts 1/2 in. (13 mm) I.D. hose or 1/4 in. (6 mm) O.D. tubing Accessories
15010167 Radiator fitting (PS Barbed), thin wall, 1/4 in. (6 mm) tubing or hose
15700854 Visor Kit, EL150K1 (knob guard)
82
5
sect. 15 1010627
rev. 2014/10/23
Lube Level Maintainer
10
LM500/LM500-TF
The LM500 maintains oil level on any size engine. It
also supports installations that require a three-wire,
snap-action switch. The form C (three-wire) contact
15
allows a controller/annunciator to be wired as a closed-
loop system, resulting in a reliable fault-sensitive circuit.
Refer to LM500 Series Flow Rate Chart for application
data.
The Murphy LM500-TF Oil Level Maintainer includes
20
a test feature that confirms both the float and switch
are operating correctly with a single press of the test Thumb-Valve Operation
button. The LM500 series maintains the crankcase oil
level of an engine, pump or compressor. Adjusted to
the correct running oil level, it will replenish oil as it is
25
used. The low-level switch will alarm and/or shutdown
the equipment, if supply oil is lost and the equipment
continues to use oil.
As crankcase oil level drops, the LM500 float also
drops and opens the Thumb-Valve™. This allows oil to
30
flow from the supply tank through the LM500 and into
the crankcase. When proper level is achieved in the
crankcase, the LM500 float rises causing the Thumb-
Valve to close off further oil flow.
The simple and unique Thumb-Valve is non-clogging
40
and provides a positive, leak-free seal.
If the clean oil supply is depleted and oil level
continues to fall, the low-level switch will operate an LM500 Series Flow Rates
alarm or equipment shutdown.
50
Specifications
Crankcase Balance Vent Connection: 1/2 NPTF (top)
Inlet Connection: 1/2 NPTF removable screen (side)
Outlet Connection:
2 x 3/4 NPTF (side)
55
1 x 3/4 NPTF (bottom)
Thumb-Valve™ Material: Viton
Snap-switch: SPDT rating 10 A, 125 VAC; 0.5 A, 125 VDC; 10 A,
30 VDC
Wire leads: 18 AWG x 14 in. ± 2 in. (355 mm) length
Conduit Connection: 1/2 inch conduit (female, top)
Mounting Brackets with Hardware
70
Case: Die cast aluminum
Lens: Clear Frog Eye non-staining, high-impact, high
temperature polycarbonate; UV and heat stabilized In addition to the direct mounting option, Enovation
Dial: High visibility white background with solid green band for Controls offers two mounting brackets for the LM500.
normal level indication The pipe bracket fits a 7/8 in. (22 mm) diameter
Maximum Inlet Pressure: 9.50 psi/25 ft. oil (head pressure) pipe (see typical installation). The Universal Flange
75
Maximum Case Pressure: 15 psi (103 kPa) Kit allows various mounting methods. For exact
Maximum Differential: 2 in. (51 mm) between running and
stopped dimensions, visit http://www.fwmurphy.com.
Maximum Ambient Temperature: 250°F (121°C)
Float: 304 Stainless Steel
Flow Rates: Refer to LM500 Series Flow Rates chart for
78
application data
Dimensions: Overall 6-9/16 in. (H) x 6-3/16 in. (W) x 3-1/2 in. (D)
LM500/LM500-TF Shipping Dimensions: 9.5 (W) x 7.5 (D) x
11 in. (H) (241.3 (W) x 190 (D) x 279.4 mm (H))
LM500/LM500-TF Shipping Weight: 3 lbs. 13.44 oz (1.74 kg)
83
80
Typical Installations
Universal Mount Pipe Mount
Direct Mount
How to Order
Options listed at right.
All configurations may
not be available. Call your
sales representative or
more information.

15000954 Vent Fittings Kit one tubing vent, one 1/4 x 1/2 NPT connector
one - 1/2 in. (13 mm) I.D. x 3 ft. (914 mm) hose
one - 1 in. (25 mm) I.D. x 3 ft. (914 mm) hose
two - 1/2 in. (13 mm) worm gear clamp
15000355 Hose Kit
two - 1 in. (25 mm) worm gear clamp
two - 1/2 NPT x 1/2 in. (13 mm) barbed fitting
two - 3/4 NPT x 1 in. (25 mm) barbed fitting
89080801 1/2 NPT x 1/2 in. Hose Barbed Fitting
89081001 3/4 NPT x 1 in. Hose Barbed Fitting
15000518 Pipe Bracket Kit
15000519 Universal Flange Kit
15000532 Bubble Lens Kit
one tubing vent; one hose barb, 1/2 NPT to 1/2 Hose;
15000943 Fittings Kit one hose barb, 1” ID hose x 3/4 NPT; one connector,
1/4 x 1/2 NPT
84
5
sect. 15 92149
rev. 2014/10/25
Level Maintainer
10
LM300 Series †
The LM300 Series Level Maintainer automatically adds

oil to the crankcase as needed to keep the lube level
15
normal. Most models have built-in switches that will
alarm and/or shutdown the equipment, if the makeup
supply is depleted and engine oil level falls or if overfill *
conditions exist. LM300 series explosion-proof models
are CSA certified for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous
20
areas.
The LM300 can be used in engines, compressors,
pumps and coolers. *Products covered by this bulletin comply with Directive: 2004/108/EC
(European Electromagnetic Compatibility). European Harmonised standard:
EN 61000-6-3:2007 (Emissions). EN 61000-6-1:2005 (Immunity)
25
Dimensions
The dimensions below are for the optional EX model enclosure. The standard model enclosure dimensions are the same
except the height and width which are: 7 in. (178 mm) H, 7-7/8 in. (200 mm) W.
30
40
50
55
70
75
78
85
80
Specifications
Case/Cover: Die cast aluminum Flow Rate Test: Using SAE 30 @ 32°F (0°C)
Switch Housing: Aluminum Orifice Diameter Pressure Flow Rates
Approval Rating: LM301 through LM305: CSA certified† for non haz- 1/4 in. (6 mm) * 4 ft. oil – 15 ft. oil 4.7 GPH - 31.0 GPH
ardous locations. Enclosure Type 4 certified (1.2 m oil – 4.6 m oil) (17.8 LPH - 117.3 LPH)
LM301-EX through LM305-EX: CSA certified for Class I, Groups C and D; 1/8 in. (3 mm) 10 psig – 30 psig 16.9 GPH - 32.1 GPH
Class II, Groups F and G hazardous locations. Enclosure Type 4 certified. (68.9 kPa – 207 kPa) (63.7 LPH - 121.5 LPH)
Float: Rigid polyurethane foam; Polyurethane coated [.69 – 2.07 bar]
Max. Ambient Temperature: 250°F (121°C) * Standard
Oil Inlet Connection: Top entry 1/2-14 NPT with built-in filter screen NOTE: Friction losses due to piping not considered
(removable for cleaning) Outlet Connection: 3/4-14 NPT left side, right side and bottom
Inlet Orifices: 1/4 in. (6 mm) standard; 1/8 in. (3 mm) available Crankcase Balance Vent Fitting: 1/2-14 NPT
Wire (switch models): 18 AWG x 13 in. (1.0 mm2 x 330 mm) Mounting: Accepts Murphy pipe mounting bracket or universal mounting
Max. Inlet Pressure (MIP): 30 psi (207 kPa) [2.07 bar] with 1/8 in. (3 bracket
mm) orifice Lens: Clear Frog Eye non-staining, high-impact, high-temperature nylon;
15 ft oil (4.6 m oil) with 1/4 in. (6 mm) orifice UV and heat stabilized
Max. Differential: 2 in. (51 mm) between running and stationary oil level Dial: High visibility white background with green and white index lines for
Max. Case Pressure (MCP): 15 psi (103 kPa) [1.03 bar] normal level indication
Orifice Seal†: Buna-N Thumb-Valve Test Knob: Rotate to test switch operation. Turn clockwise for low level test
Switch Contact: Silver, SPDT snap-acting, rated at 10 A @ 125, 250 and turn counterclockwise for high level test.
VAC; 10 A @ 30 VDC (1 only for low level; 2 only for high and low; or 2
only for low level with alarm before shutdown)
Base Models
LM300: Level Maintainer only (no switches). LM304: Two switches. Alarm before shutdown on low
LM301: Low switch contacts for low-level shutdown or level and shutdown on low-low level. Four wires, DPST,
alarm. Four wires, SPDT. wired N.O. in normal operating ranges.
LM302: Two switches for low-and high-level shutdown or LM305: Two switches. Alarm before shutdown on low
alarm. Four wires, DPST, wired N.O. in normal operating level and shutdown on low-low level. Four wires, DPST,
ranges. wired N.C. in normal operating ranges.
LM303: Two switches for low-and high-level shutdown or
alarm. Four wires, DPST, wired N.C. in normal operating
ranges.
How to Order
Options listed at right. All configurations may not be
available. Call your sales representative or Enovation
Controls for more information.
Part Description
Number
15000355 Optional Hose Kit
1 1/2 in. (13 mm) I.D. x 3 ft. (914 mm) long hose
1 1 in. (25 mm) I.D. x 3 ft. (914 mm) long hose
2 1/2 in. (13 mm) worm gear clamp
2 1 in. (25 mm) worm gear clamp
2 1/2 NPT x 1/2 in. (13 mm) barbed fitting
2 3/4 NPT x 1 in. (25 mm) barbed fitting
Shipping Weights:
LM300 Series non-EX models: 6 lbs. 6 oz. (2.89 kg)
LM300 Series EX models: 6 lbs. 12 oz. (3.06 kg)
Shipping Dimensions (all LM300 Series models):
10-5/8 x 8-7/8 x 6-3/4 in. (270 x 225 x 171 mm)
86
5
sect. 15 96121
rev. 2014/10/25
Oil Level Regulators for Lubricators
10
LR500 Series
The LR500 Series Level Regulators automatically add
oil to a lubricator to maintain the factory-recommended
15
level. This function eliminates the work time necessary
for manual checks and refills.
Each model has a low-level shutdown switch to
protect equipment when oil supply is lost. If the
lubricator oil level drops below the minimum operations
20
level, the low-level switch will operate an alarm and/or
shutdown the equipment.
Model LR579 is for Lincoln lubricators. It features an
adjustable low-level shutdown contact.
LR589 is for Lincoln lubricators, and the LR589NC is
25
the normally closed-wired version of the LR589.
Dimensions
LR579 LR589/LR589NC
30
40
50
55
Shipping Weight and Dimensions
Shipping Weight: 13 oz. (368 g) Shipping Weight: 12 oz. (340 g) 70

Shipping Dimensions: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 3-1/4 in. Shipping Dimensions: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 2-3/4 in.
(121 x 121 x 83 mm) (121 x 121 x 70 mm)
75
78
87
80
Installation
WARNING!
Before beginning installation of this Murphy product:
• Disconnect ALL electrical power to the machine.
• Make sure the machine CANNOT operate during installation.
• Follow all safety warnings of the machine manufacturer.
• Read and follow all installation instructions.
1. Remove the cover on a vacant cell of the lubricator (DO NOT install in bays next to crank
arm).
2. Bolt the level regulator in place using the bolts that held the cover.
3. Connect the flex hose from the oil reservoir to the oil inlet at the level regulator. Oil reservoir
must be at least two feet (0.61 meters) above the level regulator.
4. Wire switch for alarm and/or shutdown. One switch can be used to shut down all equip-
ment supplied by a common oil reservoir.
Typical Wiring for LR579 Typical Wiring for LR589
How to Order

LR579
Specify Model
LR589
When Ordering
LR589NC
88
5
sect. 15 7225
rev. 2014/10/25
Maintain Lube Level
10
Model LR857
Murphy LR857 Lube Level Regulator maintains the
crankcase oil level of an engine, pump or compressor.
15
Adjusted to the correct running oil level, the LR857 will
replenish oil as it is used. An integral, low-level switch
will alarm and/or shutdown the equipment, if supply oil
is lost and the equipment continues to use oil.
The LR857 maintains oil level on any size engine
20
but is recommended for small- to medium-volume
applications and installations that require a three-wire,
snap-action switch. *
As crankcase oil level drops, the LR857 float also
drops and opens the Thumb-Valve™. This allows oil
25
to flow from the supply tank through the LR857 and * Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive
into the crankcase. When proper level is attained in the 89/336/EMC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.
crankcase, the LR857 float rises causing the Thumb-
Valve to close off further oil flow. Dimensions
The simple and unique Thumb-Valve is non-clogging
30
and provides a positive, leak-free seal. Flow rate
through the 1/8 inch (3 mm) orifice is significant to allow
crankcase refill through the LR857.
Thumb-Valve Operation
40
50
55
70
75
78
89
80
Enovation Controls offers two mounting brackets for the LR857. The 15000238 Pipe Bracket Kit fits a 7/8 in. (22 mm) diameter
pipe (see typical installation). The 15010224 universal Flange Kit allows various mounting methods.
LR857 Typical Installation Specifications
Inlet Connection: 5/8 in. (16 mm) I.D. hose

Outlet Connection: 3/8 NPT
Snap-switch: SPDT rating 10 A @ 125 VAC; 0.5 A @ 125 VDC; 10 A @
30 VDC
Conduit Connection: 1/2 NPT
Lens: Polycarbonate
Float: Brass
Flow Rates (see chart below): Oil with 0.9 specific gravity @ 70°F
(21°C)
Fittings Kit: 15000420

LR857 Shipping Dimensions: The 15000420 kit is sold separately. It includes the
9 x 5-1/2 x 6 in. (229 x 140 x 152 mm) following items:
Quantity Description
LR857 Shipping Weight: 1 1/4 in. (6 mm) O.D copper cane tube (vent connection)
3 lbs. 6 oz. (1.5 kg) 1 1/4 in. (6 mm) tube x 1/4 male pipe fitting
1 1/2 in. (13 mm) I.D. hose fitting (outlet connection)
How to Order

Specify Model No. LR857
15000420 Fittings Kit
15000238 Pipe Bracket Kit Accessories
15010224 Universal Flange Kit
15000159 Inlet Valve Assembly
15000100 Glass and Switch Assembly
Replacement Parts
15000161 Lid Assembly
15000941 Float Assembly (Brass-std)
90
5
sect. 15 0710176
rev. 2014/10/25
Float Actuated Oil Level Swichgage ®
10
For Small Engines and Pumps
The Float Actuated Oil Level Swichgage instruments
are a combination oil level sight gage and adjustable,
15
low and/or high limit switch. The limit switches are
normally open during operation — yet closed if the
level drops (or rises) to where the float contacts the
limit screw. The contact completes a circuit to ground
a magneto or trip a Murphy magnetic switch. The
20
magnetic switch can be used to activate alarms and/
or shutdown. Models are also available without limit
switches.
The level instruments can be used on a variety of
crankcases, pump gearcases or oil reservoirs —
25
primarily on small engines and pumps. Installation
is simple, and these instruments save on reduced
downtime and repair costs.
The following list displays the model and its typical
*
application:
30
L100†: Small engines and pumps with non-vented
crankcase
* Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive
L100W†: Small engines and pumps with vented
89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility as noted.
crankcase
L120: Machined surface on crankcase such as Witte, Specifications
40
National-Oilwell/Garland
L127: Machined surface on crankcase, specifically, Maximum Pressure Rating (all models): 30 psi (207 kPa) [2.07
Fairbanks-Morse ZC Series and Bell Engines bar]
L100 and L100W
L128: Machined surface on crankcase, specifically,
Arrow and Continental Emsco/Climax Float: Brass
50
Rating: 2 A @ 30 VAC/DC
Vent Fitting: 1/4 in. (6 mm) tube x 1/8 NPT
Typical Wiring Inlet Fitting: Hex Nipple 1/4 NPT
Hardware (shipped loose)
L100:
Below is a typical wiring diagram for a level Swichgage Copper Tubing: 1/4 x 48 in. dia. (6 mm x 1.2 m)
55
instrument. A Swichgage instrument can be connected Reducer Bushing: 1/2 NPT x 1/4 NPT
to a Murphy magnetic switch or magneto. Switch Close Nipple: 1/2 NPT
Contact Rating is 2 A @ 30 VAC/DC resistive. Tee: 1/2 NPT, black pipe
Wire: 16 AWG x 24 in. (1.5 mm2x 610 mm)
L100W:
Vent Tube: 1/4 x 3-3/8 in. (6 x 86 mm)
70
Reducer Bushing: 3/4 NPT x 1/4 NPT
Close Nipple: 3/4 NPT
Tee: 3/4 NPT, black pipe
Wire: 16 AWG x 24 in. (1.5 mm2x 610 mm)
L120
Case: Cast Aluminum
75
Float: Brass
Mounting Bolts: 1/4-20 UNC–2A (4 required)
L127 and L128
Case: TROGAMID Nylon
Float: Brass
78
Wire: 16 AWG x 48 in. (1.5 mm2 x 1.2 m)
Mounting Bolts:
L127: 1/4-20 NC x 2 in. (4 required)
†
Models available with high and low options. L128: 3/8-16 NC x 3/4 in. (2 required)
91
80
Dimensions
L100 and L100W L120
L127 and L128
How to Order
more information.
Shipping Weight: Shipping Dimensions:

L100: 2 lbs. (0.91 kg) L100: 5-1/4 x 5-1/4 x 5-1/2 in. (133 x 133 x 140 mm)
L100W: 2 lbs. (0.91 kg) L100W: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 3-1/4 in. (121 x 121 x 83 mm)
L120: 1 lb. 8 oz. (0.68 kg) L120: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 3-1/4 in. (121 x 121 x 83 mm)
L127: 8 oz. (0.23 kg) L127 and L128: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 3-1/4 in. (121 x 121 x 83 mm)
L128: 10 oz. (0.36 kg)
92
5
sect. 15 6572
rev. 2014/10/25
Lube Level Swichgage ® Instrument
10
L129 Series
The L129 Series Lube Level Swichgage instrument is
a combination lube level indicating gage and adjustable
15
low and high limit switches. It provides protection
against low oil level or high level caused by overfill or
fuel or water seepage into the crankcase.
A 6-3/4 inch (171 mm) deep sight gage allows you
to check the condition and level of your oil without
20
shutting down the equipment.
Fingertip adjustable limit contacts, through 4-7/8
inch (122 mm) range, make it simple to set high and
low limit contacts. If the float touches the high or low
limit contact, a normally open circuit will be completed
25
which can activate alarms and/or shutdown the *
equipment.
There are two models in the L129 Series: L129 and
L129CK1. The L129 model is designed for grounded,
low voltage electrical systems. It features a one-wire-
30
to-ground electrical circuit. The L129CK1 was designed
for applications requiring a three-wire, above ground
electrical circuit. It features ungrounded contacts and
a conduit hub to protect electrical wiring. Options are
available for both models.
40
A flow restrictor plug is available that restricts oil flow
from the crankcase to the L129 Series switch and vice * Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive
versa. It is typically used on applications where the 89/336/EMC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.
engine is not stationary such as marine and mobile
equipment. Wiring
50
When properly installed and maintained, the L129
Series Lube Level Swichgage can monitor and protect These diagrams are shown with the float in the full
engines and pumps from improper lubrication level, position.
which can result in extensive damage.
The L129 Series is recommended for engines and
pumps with larger crankcase capacity. Although
55
designed primarily for stationary engines, the L129
Series is often used in mobile applications such as
marine, rail and some large off-highway trucks.
Specifications
Case: Die-cast aluminum

70
Lens: Tempered glass
Maximum Working Pressure: 10 psi (68.9 kPa)
Process Connection: 1/2 NPT
75
Float Material: Brass

Contact Rating: 2 A @ 30 VAC/DC, pilot duty
Shipping Weight:
L129: 3 lb. (1.4 kg)
Contact Rating: 2 A @ 30 VAC/DC, pilot duty
L129CK1: 3 lb. 9 oz. (1.6 kg)
78
Shipping Dimensions (both models): 12 x 4-1/2 x 4-3/4 in.

(305 x 114 x 121 mm)
93
80
Dimensions
L129 L129CK1
How to Order

15000888 Full repair kit (less castings and glass assembly) for date code T2 and later For L129
15000480 Bezel, glass and gasket set for date code W7 and later
15000485 Glass and gasket set for all date codes
15050241 Restrictor plug for all date codes
94
5
sect. 15 7229
rev. 2014/10/25
Crankcase Level Switch
10
L971 Series
The Murphy L971 Series Level Switch detects low oil
level in a compressor’s crankcase. As oil level in the
15
crankcase depletes, the float on the L971 switch falls,
and when reaching the predetermined limit, it will trip
the internal snap-switch sounding an alarm or initiating
shutdown.
The L971 is designed for Ingersoll-Rand Type 30,
20
Type 40 and ESH compressors, yet it can be adapted
to fit other compressors that have an inspection plate
extending below normal operating oil level. It installs
with minimal downtime and has a two-year limited
25
warranty.
The L971 has a 1/2 NPT process connection and *
features an explosion-proof enclosure, durable
SPDT snap-switch and rigid polyurethane foam float.
A 304 stainless steel float is available on certain * Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive
30
configurations. 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.
Specifications Wiring
Operating Temperature Range: -15 to 275°F (-26 to 135°C) Diagrams are shown in the shelf position with no
40
Maximum Working Pressure: 30 psi (206 kPa) [2.06 bar] force acting upon float.
Switch Rating: 4 A @ 250 VAC
Case: Aluminum (explosion-proof) L971-A
Mounting Adaptor: Brass
Floats: Rigid polyurethane. 304 stainless steel available on L971-C
only
50
Other Wetted Parts: 303, 304, and 316 stainless steel
O-Ring Seals: Viton and Buna
Process Connection: 1/2 NPT
Hazardous Location Rating: UL and CSA listed for Class I,
Groups C & D; Class II, Groups F & G.
Enclosure Type / Ingress Protection Rating: IP66 per IEC
55
60529.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 NPT
Wire: 18 AWG (0.75 mm2)
Shipping Weight: 1 lb. 10 oz. (0.7 kg)
Shipping Dimensions: 8-1/4 x 4-1/4 x 4-1/2 in. (210 x 108 x
114 mm) All Other Models
70
75
78
95
80
Dimensions
Dimensions are inches (millimeters).

Model A B C D E
L971 2-5/8 (67) 5-7/8 (149) 30 (762) 2-1/2 (64) 2-27/32 (72)
L971-A 2-5/8 (67) 5-7/8 (149) 30 (762) 2-1/2 (64) 2-27/32 (72)
L971-B 4-13/16 (122) 8-1/16 (205) 30 (762) 4-5/8 (117) 2-27/32 (72)
L971-C 2-13/16 (71) 6-1/16 (154) 30 (762) 2-7/8 (73) 3-1/8 (79)
L971-D 3-7/8 (98) 7-1/8 (181) 30 (762) 3-3/4 (95) 2-27/32 (72)
L971-E 4-13/16 (122) 8-1/16 (205) 30 (762) 5-1/8 (130) 2-27/32 (72)
L971-F 2-5/8 (67) 5-7/8 (149) 40 (1016) 2-1/2 (64) 2-27/32 (72)
L971-G 2-5/8 (67) 5-7/8 (149) 40 (1016) 2-1/2 (64) 2-27/32 (72)
How to Order

more information.
To order the L971 Series Level Switch to fit your application, use this diagram.

15000449 Float kit for L971 Accessory
96
5
sect. 15 1010629
rev. 2014/10/25
Liquid Level Switches
10
MLS Series
MLS Series Liquid Level Switches are float activated to
operate an electrical SPDT reed switch for annunciation/
15
pilot signal for indication of high level to an annunciator,
controller or PLC. The MLS connects directly into the
gas scrubber wall and can be used with a Murphy weld
collar or Murphy external float chamber. The MLS Series
is available in both 1 1/2 and 2 in. NPT models.
20
Features of the MLS Series includes:
• Clean magnet design virtually eliminates iron filing
accumulation on the magnet
• Seal-free construction Specifications
• ANSI/ISA 12.27.01 compliant (Single Seal)
25
• Operates in 0.50 specific gravity or heavier fluids
• Designed for harsh gas compressor scrubber Process Connection: 2” NPT (MLS-020); 1-1/2” NPT (MLS-015)
Fluid Density (SG):
applications
0.50 MIN (no extension)
• 304 cast equivalent SS body and 304 SS float 0.65 MIN (1 inch extension)
• Rated for 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) [138 bar] working Pressure Rating: 2000 psig (13.8 MPa) [138 bar]
30
pressure Body: ASTM A351 CF8 (304 SS)
• Trip on rising and falling without need to rotate body Cover: ASTM A351 CF8 (304 SS)
• Electric model only available Other Wetted Parts: 303, 304 and 316 SS
• All models screw directly into the scrubber or can be Process Temperature: -20° to 300°F (-29° to 149°C)
mounted via a Murphy External Float Chamber Electrical: 30VAC/VDC 75mA Form C SPDT
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min.: 26
40
• CSA C/US Class I, Div. 1, Grp. B, C & D locations
• Canadian registered Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max.: 16
Canadian Registration Number: 0F12013.2
Dimensions
50
55
70
75
78
97
80
Electrical Wiring
How to Order

15700840 MLS-015 1-1/2 in. NPT
15700839 MLS-020 2 in. NPT
15700799 External Float Chamber Operating Pressure: 2000psi (13.8MPa) [138 bar]
15050375 Weld Collar Operating Temperature: 400°F (204°C)
15000892 1-inch Float Extension Kit
Approximate Shipping Weight: Approximate Shipping Dimensions:

MLS-015: 5 lbs. (2.27 kg) MLS-015 and MLS-020: 14 x 5 x 3.5 in. (356 x 127 x 89 mm)
MLS-020: 5.5 lbs. (2.49 kg)
External Float Chamber: 18 lbs. (8.2 kg)
Weld Collar: 6 lbs. (2.7 kg)
Refer to MLS installation and operation manuals for additional information.
98
5
sect. 15 0600009
rev. 2014/10/25
Liquid Level Switches
10
LS200 Series
Designed for harsh gas compressor scrubber
applications, the LS200 Series Liquid Level Switches
15
feature a robust design that trips on rising liquid level
only. With both electric and pneumatic models available,
the instruments screw directly into the vessel or can Electric Model
be mounted via an external float chamber. The nickel-
plated body provides enhanced corrosion protection
20
while the 304 stainless steel float operates in 0.55
specific gravity and heavier fluids. Additional features
include:
• Rated for 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) [138 bar] working Pneumatic Model
pressure
25
• Listed for Class I, Div. 1, Grp. C & D locations
• Canadian registered
• Stainless steel models available for corrosive
atmospheres
The LS200 Series replaces the Murphy Series 1200
30
Liquid Level Switches. The MSLS (Scrubber Level
System) replaces the LS200 high-level shutdown switch
with the MLS-020 magnetic level switch.
Models Dimensions
40
LS200, L1100
LS200 Liquid Level Switches with 2 in. NPT mounting
are float activated to operate an electrical SPDT snap-
switch (optional DPDT on some models) for alarm or
50
shutdown of an engine or electric motor. The LS200
connects directly into the vessel wall and can be used
with a Murphy weld collar or Murphy external float
chamber.
55
LS200NDVOR is a float-activated, pneumatic-vent
level device used to operate dump valves or similar
devices. It provides a 2 in. NPT mounting with a
pneumatic output for interfacing with pneumatic
devices such as the Murphy pneumatic dump valve or
Dimensions are inches (millimeters).
70
other pneumatic instrumentation.
LS200 L1100*
LS200NDVO is the Dump Valve Operator (DVO)
A 10.16 (258) 11 (279)
without the pressure regulator for those applications
where the system provides a filter regulator for B 3.44 (87) 3.50 (189)
instrument-quality air of gas as the control medium. C 1.75 (44) 1.56 (40)
75
D 2.80 (71) 3.4 (71)

LS200N is the pneumatic level switch without the
E 2 NPT 1-1/2 NPT
DVO or filter regulator. Please note: pneumatic media
devices require clean, dry, instrument-quality air or gas. * The L1100 has been discontinued and remains in the
78
table for reference purposes only.
99
80
Application Data
Pipe Data
Nom. Size O.D. Schedule Wall Thickness Inside Diameter
(inches) (inches) Number (inches) (inches)
3 3.5 40ST 0.216 3.068
3 3.5 80XS 0.3 2.9
4 4.5 40ST 0.237 4.026
4 4.5 80XS 0.337 3.826
Minimum Clearance
Insertion Depth (inches) Vertical Clearance (inches)
Product Std. w/ 1” Extension Std. w/ 1” Extension
LS200 4.6 5.6 2.8 3.15
LS200N 5.43 6.4 3.3 3.9
L1200 4.65 5.7 3.9 4.55
L1200N 5.6 6.7 5.3 6.9
L1100 4.4 5.4 3.4 4.05
Models L1200, L1200N and L1100 are discontinued and remain in the table for reference purposes only.
LS200N, LS200NDVO and LS200NDVOR with Dump Valve Operator, Pressure Regulator and Gage
CAUTION: LS200
Series parts are not
interchangeable with
the L1200 Series.
Accessories
Refer to LS200 installation and operation manual LS200 Minimum Allowable Specific Gravity
for additional information.
Model Float Extension Pressure Specific
External Float Chamber Length (inches) (psi) Gravity
Operating Pressure: 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) [138 bar] 0 0.55
Operating Temperature: 400°F (204°C) LS200 1 2000 0.7
Weld Collar 6 1
Operating Pressure: 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) [138 bar] 0 0.63
Operating Temperature: 400°F (204°C)
LS200NDVO 1 2000 0.73
Float Shaft Extensions 6 1.02
LS200 Series: 1 in. or 6 in.
Note: The minimum allowable SG will decrease with a
decrease in operating pressure.
100
Specifications
5
All Models LS200N
Body: Nickel-plated; optional 316 stainless steel Process Connection: 2” NPT
Float: 304 stainless steel Vent Valve: 2-way N.C. w/ 1/16 in. (2 mm) orifice and Viton seat;
Pressure Rating: 2000psig (13.8 MPa) [138 bar] Inlet: 1/8” NPT; Outlet: 3/8” NPT
10
Pending Canadian Registration Number: OF1476.2 issued by
ABSA except L1100 Electrical
LS200
O-ring: Viton
Process Connection: 2” NPT
15
Temperature Rating: -20° to 300°F (-29° to 149°C)
Electrical: SPDT std.
Wiring: 18 AWG x 36 in. (1.0 mm2 x 916 mm)
LS200NDVOR
DVO Valve: 3-way N.C. w/manual operator, all connections 1/8”
20
NPT (minimum 30 psig required)
Filter/Pressure Regulator Set:
Regulator: 0 to 75 psig (0 to 517 kPa) [0 to 5.17 bar] range
Maximum Input Pressure: 300 psig (2.07 MPa) [20.7 bar]
LS200NDVO
25
DVO Valve: 3-way N.C. w/manual operator, all connections 1/8”
NPT
How to Order
30
40
50
55
15700799 External Float Chamber
70
15050375 Weld Collar Shipping Weight: 6 lb. (2.7 kg)
15000478 1 in. Float Shaft Extension
LS200 Series
15000503 6 in. Float Shaft Extension
15000892 1 in. Float Shaft Extension L1100 Series
75
Note: Refer to 00020671 for replacement parts.

78
101
80
102
5
sect. 15 01069
rev. 2014/10/25
Dump Valves
10
DVU Series
The DVU Series features pneumatically controlled
dump valves. The valves open and close automatically
15
by pneumatic control from a Murphy level controller and
dump valve operator. Diaphragm actuated, the DVU
series dump valves operate at 30–70 psi (207–483 kPa)
[2.07–4.83 bar] and up to 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) [138 bar]
vessel pressure (depending on the model).
20
A key benefit of this design is a hex union that provides
the ability to replace the seat without removing the valve
from piping.
The DVU Series is compatible with Murphy level
controllers. They feature a soft seat valve and manual Models
25
valve operator.
Designed for gas compressor scrubbers, the DVU Working
Series can be used to dump any liquids compatible with Trim Size Max.
its materials of construction. Model Inlet Outlet inches (mm) Press.
Scrubber Level Systems (SLS) DVU2120 2 NPT 1 NPT 0.500 (12.7) 2000 psi
30
DVU2115 2 NPT 1 NPT 0.571 (14.5) 1500 psi
(Includes LS200, LS200NDVOR and DVU valve)
SLS2120: Includes DVU2120 valve DVU2105 2 NPT 1 NPT 0.791 (20.09) 500 psi
SLS2115: Includes DVU2115 valve DVU175 1 NPT 3/4 NPT 0.359 (9) 1800 psi
SLS2105: Includes DVU2105 valve
SLS175: Includes DVU175 valve DVU175SS 1 NPT 3/4 NPT 0.359 (9) 1800 psi
40
SLS150: Includes DVU150 valve DVU150 1 NPT 1/2 NPT 0.359 (9) 1800 psi
-LR: Less regulator option
DVU150SS 1 NPT 1/2 NPT 0.359 (9) 1800 psi
(Includes MLS-020, LS200NDVOR and DVU valve)
MSLS2120: Includes DVU2120 valve Specifications
MSLS175: Includes DVU175 valve
50
MSLS150: Includes DVU150 valve
-LR: Less regulator option Operating Temperature: -30° to 250°F (-34.4° to +121°C)
Valve Operating Pressure: See How to Order
Maximum Working Pressure:
DVU150/175 (STD & SS): 1800 psi (12.4 MPa) [124 bar]
DVU2105: 500 psi (3.44 MPa) [34 bar]
55
DVU2115: 1500 psi (10.3 MPa) [103 bar]
DVU2120: 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) [138 bar]
Shipping Weights:
DVU150 and DVU175: 9 lbs. (4 kg)
DVU150SS and DVU175SS: 9 lbs. (4 kg)
70
DVU2105, DVU2115, DVU2120: 14 lbs. (6.4 kg)
Wetted Parts
Standard Models:
Body/Union Nut: 12L14 carbon steel, electroless nickel-plated
Stem: ANSI 303 SS
75
Stuffing Box: ANSI 303 SS

Seat: ANSI 303 SS
Plug/Seal: ANSI 303 SS / 95 durometer urethane
Stainless Steel Models:
Body/Union Nut: ANSI 316 SS
78
Stem: ANSI 316 SS

Stuffing Box: ANSI 316 SS
Seat: ANSI 316 SS
Plug/Seal: ANSI 316 SS / 95 durometer urethane
103
80
Dimensions
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
Model DVU2120 DVU2115 DVU2105 DVU175 DVU150
A 7.50 (191) 7.50 (191) 7.50 (191) 7.50 (191) 7.50 (191)
B 8.0 (203) 8.0 (203) 8.0 (203) 6.75 (171) 6.75 (171)
C 2.75 (70) 2.75 (70) 2.75 (70) 2.0 (51) 2.0 (51)
D 1.0 (25) 1.0 (25) 1.0 (25) 1.0 (25) 1.0 (25)
E 2-11.5 NPT 2-11.5 NPT 2-11.5 NPT 1-11.5 NPT 1-11.5 NPT
F 1-11.5 NPT 1-11.5 NPT 1-11.5 NPT 3/4˝-14 NPT 1/2˝-14 NPT
G .81(20.57) .81(20.57) .81(20.57) 0.73 (19) 0.73 (19)
How to Order

DVU2120
DVU2115
DVU2105
Use Model
DVU175
Number
DVU175SS
DVU150
DVU150SS
55000272 DVU2120 Seal Kit
55000273 DVU2120 Diaphragm Kit
Service Parts
55000230 DVU150/175 Seal Kit
55000231 DVU150/175 Diaphragm Kit
55000255 DVU150/175 End Seal Kit (10 each)
55000262 DVU150SS/175SS Seal Kit
55000231 DVU150SS/175SS Diaphragm Kit
55000263 DUV150ss/175SS End Seal Kit (10 each)
104
5
sect. 15 94122
rev. 2014/10/26
4-1/2 in. (114 mm) Dial Level Swichgage ®
10
OPLH/OPLHACS Series
The OPLHC/OPLHACS Series Level Swichgage
instruments are combination level-indicating gages with
15
adjustable low- and high-limit switches. Limit switches
can be wired directly to electric pilot circuits to operate
alarms, shutdown or start/stop pumps to maintain
predetermined levels.
Surface-mount or panel-mount enclosures are
20
available for both model series. All models feature a
4-1/2 in. (114 mm) dial for easy viewing. Adjustable
limit switches are accessible from the front of the
Swichgage instrument.
Specialized models are available for specific
25
applications involving engines or electric motors. Selected configurations are third-party listed. Consult Enovation Controls for
OPLHC/OPLHACS Series Swichgage instruments details.
include two adjustable, pilot duty, pointer type
contacts. Contacts have self-cleaning motion to Applications
enhance electrical continuity. Models are available with
30
a rugged bourdon tube or a 316 stainless steel bellows
• Saltwater Disposal Systems
sensing element for greater accuracy and sensitivity in
• Waterflood Systems
lower ranges.
• Diesel Day Tanks
OPLHBP/OPLHABPS Internal latching control relays
• Oil Storage Tanks
are available to provide ON/OFF automation for electric
40
motor applications. Internal Wiring
OPLHC and OPLHACS series are available in
indication only Murphygage models (OPLHAGS). See
the following pages to determine the model for your
application.
50
Basic Operation
The OPLHC/OPLHACS
Series operates from static
55
head pressure. Pressure is
transmitted to the process
connection of the Swichgage
instrument. From here, the
pressure flexes the bourdon
tube or operates the 316
stainless steel bellows
70
(depending on which model
you have). The bourdon closes with the limit
tube/bellows operates the contact (B), a control
75
stainless steel rotary geared circuit (C) is completed

movement, which in turn and signals an alarm
operates the indicating and/or shutdown or
pointer on the face of the starts/stops a pump.
dial. When the pointer (A)
78
105
80
Dimensions
Typical Applications
106
Specifications
5
*
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
* Bourdon tube, 316 SS optional
55
70
75
78
107
80
How to Order

Shipping Dimensions: Shipping Weights:

16 x 11 x 5-1/2 in. (406 x 279 x 140 mm) Item Weight: 8 lb. (3.6 kg) approximately
Explosion-proof models: 12 x 12 x 9 in. (305 x 305 x Explosion-proof models: 22 lb. (10 kg) approximately
229 mm)
108
5
Section 20 Vibration, Time and Overspeed
Tachometers - Digital
10
9004 Selectronic® Digital Tachometer — MT90 Model�� 111
96115 Digital Tachometer and Hourmeter with Adjustable Overspeed Set Point — MTH6�� 113
97050 Digital Tachometer/Hourmeter with Adjustable Overspeed Trip Point
SHD30 and SHD30-45 Models�� 115
15
Speed Switches
97118 Electronic Speed Switches — HD9063 Series, OS77D Series and SS300 Series�� 117
Hourmeters - Electromechanical
20
97030 Hourmeters — TM Series�� 121
Timers - Mechanical
96095 Time Switches — Models 5T, 15T, 12T and 24T�� 123
Vibration Switches
25
96013 Shock and Vibration Switch — VS2 Series�� 125
94092 Shock and Vibration Switch — VS94 Model�� 129
30
40
50
55
70
75
78
109
80
110
5
sect. 20 9004
rev. 2014/10/28
Selectronic® Digital Tachometer
10
MT90 Model
The Murphy Selectronic MT90 digital tachometer offers
high accuracy and dependability resulting from use
15
of a quartz crystal time-base and digital, solid-state
electronics.
Tachometer power is supplied by either a Murphy
magnetic pickup mounted at the flywheel ring-gear
of an engine, or by a 12-, 24- or 32-volt DC battery
20
system.
RPM data is supplied by either a Murphy magnetic
pickup or by the alternator in your battery charging
circuit. The MT90 tachometer also has backlighting for
easy readings in low-lit areas. This lighting requires a
25
battery power source.
The MT90 is calibrated to engine RPM by setting a Dimensions
series of calibration rotary switches on the back of the
tachometer. The proper switch sequence for the engine
is determined by (1) the number of ring gear teeth for
30
the magnetic pickup or (2) by the ratio of alternator to
engine pulley diameter and the number of poles of the
alternator.
Typical applications include: generators, compressors,
industrial engines, oil field equipment, marine vessels,
40
vehicles, farm equipment and construction equipment.
Specifications
50
Signal Input Voltage: 4 to 35 Vrms from a magnetic pickup or alterna-
tor*
Pulses per Revolution: 3 to 999
Power Requirements
Pickup Power: 4-35Vrms*
55
Battery Power: 8-40 VDC (12, 24, 32 volt)
Current:
Tach backlight Off, 4mA @ 40 VDC
Tach backlight On, 25 mA @ 40 VDC
Case: 1018 polycarbonate/polyester blend
70
Lens: Polycarbonate
Bezel: #430 Stainless Steel
Display: LCD, 4-digit, seven segment
75
Mounting Hole: 3-7/16 in. (87 mm)

Shipping Weight: 14 oz. (0.4 kg)
Shipping Dimensions: 5-1/2 x 5-1/2 x 5-1/2 in. (140 x 140 x 140 mm)
78
111
80
Magnetic Pickups
Pickup Models Total Length Threaded Length Thread Size

MP3298* 3 in. (76 mm) 3 in. (76 mm) 5/8-18 UNF
MP7906+ 3 in. (76 mm) 3 in. (76 mm) 3/4-16 UNF
MP7905± 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) 3/4-16 UNF
* Replaces 20-01-0080 and MP100. Lead wire hookup (12 in. [305 mm])
+ Replaces 20-01-0081. Lead wire hookup (12 in. [305 mm])
± Replaces 20-01-0082. Lead wire hookup (12 in. [305 mm])
How to Order
112
5
sect. 20 96115
rev. 2014/10/28
MTH6 - Digital Tachometer and Hourmeter
10
With Adjustable Overspeed Set Point
This microprocessor-based digital tachometer and
hourmeter with a built-in overspeed switch is highly
15
accurate and dependable. It measures speed and
running hours and can give an alarm or shut down the
engine on overspeed.
The MTH6 case is polycarbonate, and its dial measures
3-1/2 in. (89 mm) in diameter.
20
RPM data for the tachometer and overspeed switch
is supplied by a magnetic pickup or battery charging
alternator. The magnetic pickup is installed into the
flywheel housing of an internal combustion engine.
The starter ring gear acts upon the magnetic pickup to
25
generate a voltage pulse each time a gear tooth passes
the end of the sensor.
During normal operation, the MTH6 displays RPM. Its
five-digit, liquid crystal display is updated every second. Applications
When the MTH6 is displaying hours and a speed signal
• Industrial Engines • Vehicles
30
is present, the far left digit and decimal point will flash
indicating the hourmeter is operating. • Generators • Farm Equipment
The overspeed set point and running hours can be • Compressors • Construction
viewed by manipulating three membrane switches • Oil Field Equipment Equipment
located on the MTH6 front panel. When the overspeed • Marine Engines
40
set point is met, an LED located on the front panel
lights. Dimensions
Specifications
Power Requirements: 8-40 VDC (12, 24 or 32 VDC systems)
50
Maximum Current:
12 VDC: 0.011 A, backlight Off; 0.025 A, backlight On
24 VDC: 0.008 A, backlight Off; 0. 015 A, backlight On
32 VDC: 0.007 A, backlight Off; 0. 010 A, backlight On
55
Storage Temperature: -40° to 185°F(-40° to 85°C)
Case: 1018 Polycarbonate/Polyester blend
Mounting Hole Dimensions: 3-3/8 in. (86 mm) Dia
Speed Input: 4.5 Vrms minimum
Overspeed Switch Rating: 2 A, 50 VDC
70
Overspeed Range: 0 to 9000 RPM
Pulses per Revolution: 4 to 255
Tachometer Range: 0 to 65,535 RPM
Tachometer Accuracy: ±1% of the display reading or -2 RPM whichev-
er is greater
75
Input Frequency Range: 25 Hz to 20 kHz

Hourmeter Range: 0 to 99999 hrs
Hourmeter Resolution: ±0.1 Hour up to 9999.9; ±1 hour 10,000 and
up
Reset Hourmeter: Apply temporary ground to terminal #5 to reset
78
hours to zero
Shipping Weight: 14 oz. (435 g)
113
80
Easy Calibration
The MTH6 calibration is simple. The operator enters the number of pulses per engine revolution and the overspeed
set point value using the membrane-switches located on the front of the MTH6.
Typical Wiring Diagram
Overspeed Load Momentary 2A, 50 Vdc
How to Order
114
5
sect. 20 97050
rev. 2014/10/30
Digital Tach/Hourmeter w/Adjustable Overspeed Trip Point
10
SHD30 and SHD30-45 Models
The SHD30 and SHD30-45 are microprocessor-based
tachometers with hourmeter and an overspeed trip
point. The trip point can be connected as either a form
15
C relay output or as a normally open SCR output for
alarm or shutdown on overspeed.
*
The SHD30 features a panel-mounting design, plastic
enclosure that is 5-1/16 (129 mm) long and 4-1/4 in.
(108 mm) high.
20
The SHD30-45 has the same enclosure, but it also has
a backplate with studs to mount like an OPLFC.
The SHD30 models power and RPM data are supplied
by either a magnetic pickup or a capacitor discharge
(CD) ignition. The hourmeter is adjustable to a preset
25
* When installed per Murphy drawing 20-08-0258
time and resettable to zero. Should power be lost, on-
board batteries maintain the run hours display and allow
for resetting the overspeed relay output. Specifications
When a tach signal is present the SHD30 models
display RPM. When a tach signal is not present, the Power input:
30
display is blank unless the Read Hours membrane key CD ignition:
on the faceplate is pressed and held. 90 to 350 VDC
The five-digit, liquid crystal display is updated every 150 µA typical @ 90 VDC
second. The run hours, overspeed set point and current 300 µA @ 350 VDC
pulses per engine revolution can be displayed by Magnetic Pickup:
40
manipulating the membrane switches. Run hours can be 5 to 120 Vrms
displayed even after power is lost. The run hours display 325 µA typical @ 5 Vrms, 100 Hz
can be configured to alternate with the RPM display. 450 µA typical @ 5 Vrms, 1 kHz
1 mA typical @ 5 Vrms, 5 kHz
Ease of Calibration 2 mA typical @ 5 Vrms, 10 kHz
50
15 mW max. @ 5 Vrms, 10 kHz
The SHD30 models calibration is accomplished by 2.8 W max. @ 120 Vrms, 10 kHz
entering the number of pulses per engine revolution Backup Batteries: 2 replaceable, long-life Lithium batteries, Panasonic
using the Pulses per Revolution and Overspeed Set CR2032 or equivalent, 3 V, 220 mAh power. Shelf life expectancy 10
point membrane keys on the faceplate. The number years
55
of pulses is determined by the number of cylinders, Operating Temperature: -4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)
cycles and ignition features. It is also determined by the Storage Temperature: -40° to 300°F (-40° to 150°C)
number of ring gear teeth of the engine’s flywheel on a Case Material: Plastic
magnetic pickup system. Ignition Frequency Range: 3 to 666 Hz
Presetting and resetting running hours is done from the Magnetic Pickup Frequency Range: 1 to 10 kHz
70
back and front of the SHD30 models. Overspeed Output:
Connected to S.C.R. (Silicon Controlled Rectifier) terminals:
Applications 0.5 A, 350 VDC continuous
Connected to Form C Relay terminals:
• Gas Compressors Relay Contact, 0.5 A, 30 VDC, 125 VAC resistive
75
• Oil Field Equipment Tachometer Accuracy: ±0.5% of the display reading or ±1 RPM which-
• Industrial Engines ever is greater
• Generators Hourmeter Range: 0 to 65535 hrs
Hourmeter Accuracy: ±15 minutes per year
Laboratory Approvals: CSA (Canadian Standards Association) approved
78
for Class I, Division 2, Groups C & D hazardous areas

Shipping Weight: 1 lb (0.5 kg)
115
80
Dimensions
SHD30
SHD30-45 Typical Wiring Diagram
WARNING: In hazardous areas the overspeed relay contact is certified for use
ONLY with Murphy non-incendive or intrinsically safe products. In non-hazardous
areas overspeed relay contact may be used to switch electromechanical
Tattletale® or Magnetic Switches that do not exceed the relay contact rating: 1 A,
30 VDC; 0.3 A, 110 VDC; 0.5 A, 125 VAC. However, the preferred output to switch
electromechanical Tattletale® or Magnetic Switches is the N.O. SCR.
How to Order

SHD30 Tach/Hourmeter with Overspeed
Specify Model
Number SHD30-45 Tach/Hourmeter with Overspeed to mount like SHD45
or OPLFC
00009389 Panasonic CR2032 or equivalent backup battery (2 required)
116
5
sect. 20 97118
rev. 2014/10/31
Electronic Speed Switches
10
HD9063, OS77D and SS300 Series
Murphy Electronic Speed Switches are available
in various configurations to cover a wide variety of
15
applications. These compact devices receive their
input signal from various sources depending upon the
particular speed switch model and application. They are
available in single or dual switch point models, and the
switch point(s) are field adjustable.
20
Models are available in self-contained enclosures and SS300
as PC-board design for inclusion in your control cabinet. HD9063
All Murphy speed switches are designed to operate
in harsh environments and have high electrical noise
immunity.
25
OS77D
Series Models Available Applications
SS300 Series: Single set point speed switch with SPDT relay dry Murphy speed switches applications include operating
30
contact output. alarms and equipment shutdown. They are ideal for
disconnecting starter cranking on auto start systems or
OS77D Series: Single set point speed sensing module with a
transistor output. overspeed switching:
• Generators • Pumps
HD9063 Series: Dual set point speed switch in a PC board con- • Compressors • Vehicles
40
figuration and relay outputs. • Industrial Engines • Farm Equipment
Selecting a Speed Switch
In selecting the best Speed Switch for your application, the following factors should be considered:
• Number of Switch Points
50
How many switch points are needed to perform the speed switching function you require?
• Available Signal Sources
The signal source must provide a minimum frequency and a minimum, but less than maximum, voltage as
required by the selected speed switch.
• What Is the Frequency Output of the Signal Source?
The following signal sources can be used with most Murphy Electronic Speed Switches.
55
Note: they may additionally provide the signal and/or power source for some Murphy Tachometer/
Tachswich™ instruments.
Magnetic Sensor: The sensor is usually mounted through the flywheel housing so that the sensor tip is in close proximity to the
ring gear teeth. Output voltage is dependent upon the amount of the gap between the sensor tip and the gear tooth.
Set Point Frequency in Hz = No. Gear Teeth x RPM Set Point
60
Alternator Output: Most industrial engine alternators have an auxiliary or tachometer tap. This tap can provide the signal 70
source for speed switches and tachometers.
Set Point Frequency in Hz = Pulley Ratio x No. of Alternator Poles x RPM Set Point
120
Ignition Output: This battery ignition signal is commonly used on gasoline and natural gas fueled type engines. The tap is
75
usually located either on the distributor or on the ignition coil. The ignition can be breaker point type or all electronic.
For 2 Cycle: Set Point Frequency in Hz = No. of Cylinders x RPM Set Point
60
For 4 Cycle: Set Point Frequency in Hz = No. of Cylinders x RPM Set Point
78
120
Signal Generators: Add-on signal generators produce a voltage and frequency output. Match this output to the requirements of
the speed switch selected.
117
80
SS300 Series
The SS300 Series are single set point speed switches with SPDT relay dry contact output. The trip point is set by
a potentiometer. An LED indicates when the signal source is present. A second LED turns on when the trip point is
reached. See Table 1 for available models and requirements. An optional time delay is on board to delay operation
of the relay for 2-6 seconds after the set point has been reached.
The SS300 Series speed switch is intended for installation within a weatherproof enclosure to protect it from rain,
dust, etc.
Application
Overspeed shutdown. Shuts down the engine if RPM exceeds the preset limit.
Speed sensitive pull-in/drop-out. Engage or disengage PTOs, four-wheel drives, other switch points, etc.
according to the engine speed being monitored.
Engine and transmission alarms/shutdowns. Oil pressure in some engines and transmissions varies widely
between running and idle speeds. The SS300 Series can select between two pressure switch set points according
to speed of the engine or transmission and thus give maximum protection to the equipment while at operating
RPM and eliminate nuisance alarms when at idle.
Adjustable differential model. The AD can be adjusted to change the speed range over which the pull-in and
drop-out differential of the relay will operate. A typical application is to ensure that engine speed is above a
minimum RPM before applying a load but allows a drop in speed of several hundred RPM without disconnecting
the load.
Table 1: Models Available and Input Signal

Model No. Distributor Magnetic Alternator Voltage
Ignition Pickup 12 24
SS300 (std. model) X X X
SS300-LF (low frequency) X X X X
SS300-AD (adjustable differential) X X X
SS300-AD-LF (low frq. & Adjst. diff.) X X X X
Specifications Dimensions
Power Requirements:
12 VDC (9-16 VDC)
24 VDC (18-30 VDC)
Frequency Signal:
Voltage (all models):
Minimum Input Voltage Signal: 4.5 Vrms
Maximum Input Voltage Signal: 50 Vrms
Maximum Current 12V 24V
Pull In 46 mA 46 mA
Pickup Only 10.5 mA 16 mA
Frequency Range in Hz Model Number

25-2000 SS300-LF, SS300-AD-LF
625-9000 SS300-AD, SS300
Reset Differential Magnetic Pickup Signal Models:

Standard Models: 2 Hz Differential
AD Models (Adjustable Differential): 650-8900 Hz Adjustable
Reset Differential Alternator Models:
LF Models (Low Frequency): 2 Hz Differential
AD-LF Models (Adjustable Differential Low Frequency): 50-1900 Hz
Adjustable
Output: Relay contact, SPDT, resistive load, 6 A, 30 VDC
Time Delay: When terminal 7 is grounded, the relay operation is delayed
for 2-6 seconds after RPM set point is reached.
Adjustment: 20–turn potentiometer(s)
Temperature Range: -4° to 185°F (-20° to 85°C)
Relative Humidity: 0 to 95% Non-condensing
Case: Black, ABS plastic
118
HD9063 Series
5
The HD9063 Series is a unitized two set point speed switch with SPDT relay outputs. HD9063 is a PC-board
configuration with standoffs for mounting in a control panel or cabinet.
The HD9063 provides crank disconnect and overspeed functions. Trip points can be field adjusted on all models.
10
LEDs next to the set point potentiometers indicate that the trip point has been reached and the relay(s) have
operated. An overspeed test circuit is built-in. It will actuate the output relay at a point 10 percent below the actual
overspeed set point.
Application
Crank disconnect/overspeed are functions where the HD9063 is used to disconnect the starter on automatic start
15
engine applications and to shut down the engine if an overspeed situation occurs. Re-engagement of the starter
is inhibited until RPM returns virtually to zero. Typical applications include: standby generator sets, pumps and
compressors.
20
Specifications Mounting Dimensions / Wiring
Power Supply: Voltage: 8-30 VDC

Maximum Current: 150 mA
25
Frequency Signal: (Voltage, Magnetic Pickup Signal Models):
Minimum: 0.35 Vrms
Maximum: 60 Vrms
Maximum Signal: 4.8 µA
Adjustment Range:
Crank Disconnect: 250-6,000 Hz
30
Overspeed: 1,100-10,000 Hz
Reset Differential, Magnetic Pickup Signal Models
Crank Disconnect: Dropout 160 Hz ± 5%
Overspeed: 200 Hz Differential
Output: Relay Contact, SPDT, Resistive Load: (2) 5 A 30 VDC
40
Adjustment: (2) 270°–turn potentiometer
Temperature Range: 14° to 158°F (-10° to 70°C)
50
OS77D Series
The OS77D Series single set point speed switch is a

compact all-electronic speed sensing module. It can
be panel mounted via its trip set point potentiometer.
55
It is field adjustable and gives a transistor output when
tripped. Relay models available.
Models are available with Normally Open or Normally
Closed circuit and with or without re-crank feature,
which inhibits starter re-engagement until the engine
70
speed is near zero RPM.
Application
Overspeed shutdown. Activates engine shut-down
circuit on engine overspeed.
Operate PTOs or drive circuits. Engage or disengage
75
engine PTO, four-wheel drives or other control circuits

according to RPM monitored.
Disconnect engine cranking when engine starts.
78
119
80
Power Supply: Voltage: 7-28 VDC
Maximum Current: 100 mA
Frequency Signal:
Voltage, Magnetic Pickup Signal Models
Minimum: 1.2 Vrms
Maximum: 30 Vrms
Voltage, Distributor Ignition Models
Minimum: 6 Vrms
Maximum: 30 Vrms
Maximum Signal Current, Magnetic Pickup Signal Models:
0.12 mA
Maximum Signal Current, Distributor Ignition Models: 0.12 mA
Adjustment Range, Magnetic Pickup Signal Models:
1000-10,000 Hz
Adjustment Range, Distributor Ignition Models: 40-400 Hz
Reset Differential, Magnetic Pickup Signal Models
Non-recrank model: 10 Hz Differential
Recrank model: dropout 54 Hz
Reset Differential, Distributor Ignition Models
Non-recrank model: 10 Hz Differential
Recrank model: Dropout 2.4 Hz
Output: Transistor Sink to Ground Resistive Load: 2 A, 28 VDC
Adjustment: 270°–turn potentiometer
How to Order

Specify Model
Number and SS300 Series See Table 1
Voltage
Two set points, PC board mounting, crank disconnect and
HD9063 Series
overspeed
Specify Model OS77D-900NTO Normally Open; 1000- 10,000 Hz, magnetic sensor input
Number OS771-040NTO Normally Open; 40-400 Hz, distributor ignition input
OS77D-900NTC Normally Closed; 1000-10,000 Hz, magnetic sensor input
OS77D-900RTC Normally Closed; 1000-10,000 Hz, max. with recrank feature
120
5
sect. 20 97030
rev. 2014/11/02
Hourmeters
10
TM Series
The TM Series hourmeters record the operating
time of vehicles or powered equipment. They are
electromechanical and have a quartz base time counter
15
that ensures accuracy (better than ±0.02% over the
entire range). They can record up to 99,999.9 hours
(9,999.9 for TM612/624) and include an automatic
recycle to zero hours feature. The TM Series models
have a shock-proof and tamper-proof, totally sealed *
20
case made of an engineered plastic. These small,
lightweight time meters are rugged and durable. They
are the answer to applications requiring a low DC power
and reliable hourmeter. The TM612/624 model includes * Products covered by this bulletin conform with European Council electro-
a three-hole mounting shock ring for extreme shock magnetic compatibility directive 89/336/EEC, except as noted.
25
protection. The CE mark does not apply to the TM612 and TM624 models
These hourmeters can be used on any engine where
operating time needs to be recorded. All it requires is a Available Bezels
DC power source (refer to Specifications).
30
Outstanding Features
• Solid-State Electronic Drive Circuit

• Quartz-Crystal for Accurate Timing
• Quiet Operation – Permanently Lubricated
40
• High-Impact, Tamper-proof Plastic Case
• Sealed Against Moisture and Dirt
• Indicates Operating Time in Hours and Tenths
• No Battery Back Up Required
• Made in the U.S.A.
50
Specifications
Power Input: 12 to 24 VDC
Power Consumption: Less than 0.03 W @ 12 VDC; 0.4 W @ 24 VDC
Basic Models
55
Accuracy: ±0.02% over entire range
Temperature Range: -40° to 185°F (-40° to +85°C)
6-Digits Hourmeters
Dial (Face Plate): White numerals (over black background)
Model Bezel Type
Time Scale: TM4592 Bright Stainless Steel Bezel
TM4592-95 models: 6-digits 99,999.9 hours TM4593 Black Stainless Steel Bezel
70
TM612/624 models: 5-digits 9,999.9 hours TM4594 SAE Bright Stainless Steel Bezel
Automatic recycle to zero TM4595 SAE Stainless Steel Black Bezel
Vibration Resistance: Withstands 10 to 75 Hz@ 1 to 8 Gs
5-Digits Hourmeter with Shock Ring Mounting
Case Material: Plastic TM612/624 3-Hole Mount, Black Bezel
Bezel: Stainless Steel
75
Terminations: 1/4 in. (6 mm) male blade terminals

TM4592/4595 Shipping Weight: 5 oz. (140 g)
Shipping Dimensions: 3-1/8 x 3 x 3 in. (79 x 76 x 76 mm) approxi-
mately
TM612/624 Shipping Weight: 8 oz. (230 g)
78
TM612/624 Shipping Dimensions: 5 x 5 x 3-1/4 in. (127 x 127 x 83

mm) approximately
121
80
Dimensions
WARNING:
Turn the power
source OFF before
wiring.
How to Order

20700192 TM4592 6 digits w/Bright Stainless Steel Bezel
20700193 TM4593 6 digits w/Black Stainless Steel Bezel
20700194 TM4594 6 digits w/SAE Bright Stainless Steel Bezel Bezel
20700195 TM4595 6 digits w/SAE Stainless Steel Black Bezel
20700144 TM612/624 5 digits w/Shock Ring Mount Black Bezel
00000355 Shock Ring only for TM612/624 Shock Ring
122
5
sect. 20 96095
rev. 2014/11/01
Time Switches
10
12T
Models 5T, 15T, 12T and 24T (cover not shown)
Murphy Time Switches can automatically start or stop

engines or electrical motors after a predetermined
15
time. These time switches can be wired for an open 15T
or closed circuit when time expires. They require no
electrical current to operate and have an SPDT contact
arrangement. These switches feature a precision
movement that gives years of reliable service. The
20
switches’ precision movement can be set to zero
anytime, and a built-in stop prevents overwinding.
Two versions are available: an hour switch for setting
run time and shutdown of equipment; and a minute
switch for short interruption of Swichgage® circuits on
25
test or start up.
The 12T (12 hour) and 24T (24 hour) time switches
Specifications
are enclosed in a NEMA 4 weatherproof enclosure.
A hinged, gasketed cover and 1/2 NPT conduit Range:
connection allow for a dust-tight installation. The 12T: 0-12 hours in 15 minute intervals
30
enclosure includes a clasp and eye for a padlock to 24T: 0-24 hours in 30 minute intervals
prevent unauthorized operation. Instructions for popular 5T: 0-5 minutes
engine applications are secured inside of the lid. 15T: 0-15 minutes
The 5T (5 minute) and 15T (15 minute) timers mount Operating Temperature Range: 32° to 185°F (0° to 85°C)
directly in control panels for short range timing with Contact (all models): SPDT, rated 5 A @ 480 VAC; 10 A @ 250
VAC; 15 A @ 48 VDC
40
manual reset.
These switches are perfect for disconnecting shutdown Shipping Weight: 12T, 24T: 4 lbs. 12 oz. (2.15 kg); 5T and 15T: 6
oz. (11.66 g)
circuits while equipment is being started.
Shipping Dimensions: 12T, 24T: 9-1/4 x 8-1/4 x 5-1/2 in. (235
Murphy Time Switches are designed for use in the oil x 210 x 140 mm); 5T and 15T: 3 x 2-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. (76 x 70 x 70
field, irrigation systems or anywhere equipment must mm)
50
operate or be controlled for a predetermined time.
Mounted on a post or in a panel away from vibration
and shock, these time switches give accurate, long-
term service.
Dimensions
55
12T and 24T 5TWP and 15TWP 5T and 15T
70
75
78
123
80
Typical Wiring
How to Order

20700155 5T: 5 minute timer
20700154 15T: 15 minute timer
Time switch
20700031 12T: 12 hour timer
20700037 24T: 24 hour timer
20000033 12T & 24T Repair Kit, case and lid assembly Service
124
5
sect. 20 96013
rev. 2014/12/02
Shock and Vibration Switch
10
VS2 Series
The VS2 Series switches are shock-sensitive VS2
mechanisms for shutdown of engine or electric motor
15
powered equipment. It is designed to detect shock/
vibration in three planes of motion.
These fully adjustable switches use a magnetic latch to
ensure reliable operation. Explosion-proof EX models for
hazardous locations are available.
20
Ideal for use on engines, pumps, compressors, heat
exchangers and pumping units, the VS2 Series can be
used where shutdown protection from damaging shock/
vibration is desired. Switches are field adjustable to the
sensitivity required in each application. *
25
Specifications
Normal Operating Temperature: -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C); For UL
and CSA applications, applicable temperature specification is de-rated to VS2EX
-40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
30
* Selected configurations are third-party listed.
VS2 and VS2C
Case: Environmental Protection: Ingress protected to IP54 (when
mounted on a horizontal surface with drain holes down). Suitable for Basic Operation
non-hazardous areas. VS2C: C-clamp mount, includes 45 ft. (13.7 m)
2-conductor cable and 5 cable clamps Pushing the reset button moves the tripping latch into
40
Contacts: SPDT-double make leaf contacts, 3A @ 240 VAC; 10A @120
a magnetically held position. A shock/vibration will
VAC; 10A @ 32 VDC
Shipping Weight: VS2: 2 lb. 8 oz. (1.1 kg); VS2C: 7 lb (3.2 kg) move the magnet beyond this holding position, thus
Shipping Dimensions: VS2: 8-1/4 x 9-1/4 x 5 in. (210 x 235 x 127 mm); freeing the spring loaded tripping latch to transfer the
VS2C: 12 x 7 x 5-1/2 in. (305 x 178 x 140 mm) contacts and shut down the machinery (see dimensional
diagrams or visual representation of parts).
50
VS2EX
Case: Base mount, explosion-proof aluminum alloy housing; meets IP54
specifications; Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D; UL and CSA listed Remote Reset Operation
Certification: CSA, UL (VS2EXR and VS2EXRB)
Snap switches: 2-SPDT snap switches; 5A @ 480 VAC; 2A resistive, 1A
inductive, up to 30 VDC The remote reset option includes a built-in electric
55
Shipping Weight: 4 lb. 8 oz. (2 kg)
Shipping Dimensions: 8-1/4 x 9-1/4 x 5 in. (210 x 235 x 127 mm)
solenoid which allows reset of tripped unit from a
remote location. Available for 115 VAC or 24 VDC.
VS2EXR
Case: Same as VS2EX
Certification: CSA, UL
70
Snap switch: 1-SPDT snap switch and reset coil; 5A @ 480 VAC; 2A resis-
tive, 1A inductive, up to 30 VDC
Remote Reset: 115 VAC or 24 VDC (specify)
Shipping Dimensions: 8-1/4 x 9-1/4 x 5 in. (210 x 235 x 127 mm)
75
VS2EXRB
Case: Explosion-proof aluminum alloy housing; designed to meet Class I,
Division 1, Group B hazardous areas
Certification: No third-party certification
Snap switch: 1-SPDT snap switch with reset coil (option available for
2-SPDT switches); 5A @ 480 VAC; 2A resistive, 1A inductive, up to 30 VDC
78
Remote Reset: 115 VAC or 24 VDC (specify)

125
80
Dimensions
Environmental Protection: Ingress protected to IP54 (when mounted on a horizontal surface with drain holes down).
VS2 and VS2C

The VS2 and VS2C
are designed for use in
non-hazardous locations.
They have leaf type SPDT,
double make contacts
that can be used for
shutdown and/or alarm.
They have a slotted
sensitivity adjustment
located on the side of the
case (see drawing).
VS2EX
• IP54 Specifications
• Snap switch Contacts
• Tattletale® Reset Button
Model VS2EX is housed
in an explosion-proof
enclosure with threaded
cover. This enclosure
is CSA and UL listed
for Class I, Division 1,
Groups C & D hazardous
locations. In place of
the leaf type contacts,
2-SPDT snap switches
are used in this model.
Sensitivity is externally
adjustable, and when
tripped, the VS2EX gives
a Tattletale indication
on the reset button. It is
constructed to meet IP54
specifications.
126
Dimensions - continued
5
VS2EXR
• Remote Reset Feature
• IP54 Specifications
10
• Snap switch Contacts
• Tattletale® Reset Button
Model VS2EXR features an electric remote
reset feature in addition to the Tattletale reset
button. The VS2EXR uses only one SPDT
15
snap switch and is CSA and UL listed for
Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D hazardous
locations. It is constructed to meet IP54
specifications.
20
25
30
40
50
VS2EXRB
• For Group B Locations (not certified)
• Snap-switch Contacts
• DPDT Feature Optional
55
Model VS2EXRB is constructed for use
in Class I, Division 1, Group B, hazardous
locations. It has as standard a SPDT snap
switch and an electric remote reset. Option is
available for DPDT snap-switch
70
75
78
127
80
How to Order
more information.
Service Part Number Description Notes

20000030 Movement assembly
20000031 Glass and gasket assembly VS2 and VS2C
20000032 Reset push button assembly
20050021 Mounting clamp
20000261 Cable clamp assembly (1 each)
VS2C
20050465 2-Conductor electrical cable, 45 feet (13.7 meters)
20000137 5 clamps and 45 feet (13.7 meters) of cable
20050087 Cover
00000309 Cover gasket
20010090 Snap switch and insulator kit (1 switch per kit) prior to Sept. 1, 1995.* VS2EX
Snap switch and insulator kit (1 switch per kit) for models
20000288
manufactured after Sept. 1, 1995.*
20000289 C-clamp conversion mounting kit
20050087 Cover
00000309 Cover gasket
20010090 Snap switch and insulator kit (1 switch per kit) prior to Sept. 1, 1995.*
Snap switch and insulator kit (1 switch per kit) for models VS2EXR
20000288
manufactured after Sept. 1, 1995.*
20000049 Reset solenoid assembly (115 VAC)
20000234 Reset solenoid assembly (24 VDC)
20000289 C-clamp conversion mounting kit
20010090 Snap switch and insulator kit (1 switch per kit) prior to Sept. 1, 1995.*
Snap switch and insulator kit (1 switch per kit) for models
20000288
manufactured after Sept. 1, 1995.* VS2EXRB
Inside snap switch and insulator kit (1 switch per kit) for model
20000057
VS2EXRB-D prior to Sept. 1, 1995.*
*Models with date 0895 and before use old switch. Dated 0995 and after, use straight snap-switch arm, no rollers.
128
5
sect. 20 94092
rev. 2014/11/01
Shock and Vibration Switch
10
VS94 Model
VS94 Series is an electro-mechanical device designed
to protect equipment from damaging shock or vibration.
15
This sensitive mechanism can detect excessive shock
or vibration and shut down the equipment before
further damage occurs. A set of contacts is held in a
latched position through a magnetic latch mechanism.
As the level of shock or vibration increases, an inertia
20
mass exerts force against the latch arm and forces it
away from the magnetic latch causing the latch arm
to separate and to operate the contacts. Sensitivity is
obtained by adjusting the amount of air gap between
the magnet and latch arm plate.
25
The VS94 Series is housed in a NEMA 4/4X glass-filled
polyester enclosure and has a base mount. It is for
applications in non-hazardous locations. Features
VS94 models are rated up to 480 VAC. (See How to
Order for models and options available.) • Electromechanical Design
30
Applications for the VS94 include all stationary types • Detects Shock or Vibration in Three Planes of Motion
of machinery or equipment where excessive shock/ • NEMA 4/4X (CSA types 4 and 12) Weatherproof
vibration can be damaging or poses a threat to normal Enclosure
operations in: • Reliable Magnetic Latch Feature
• Cooling fans • Engines • Micro Fine, Easy-to-Adjust Sensitivity Adjustment
• Manual Reset (Standard)
40
• Pump jacks • Compressors
• Pumps • Rotating and Reciprocating • Remote Reset (Optional)
Machinery • Adjustable Start-up Time Delay (Optional)
• Space Heater Circuit to Prevent Housing Moisture
Specifications Condensation (Optional)
• Two versatile SPDT snap-switches rated up
50
Case: Polyester fiberglass reinforced; NEMA type 4X; IP66; CSA to 480 VAC
types 4 and 12
Conduit Fitting: 3/4 NPT conduit fitting connection
Normal Operating Ambient Temperature: 0° to 140°F (-18° to
60°C) Options
55
Snap-switches: 2-SPDT snap acting switches; 5A @ 480 VAC; 2A
resistive, 1A inductive, up to 30 VDC Remote Reset
Range adjustment: 0 - 7 Gs; 0 - 100 Hz /0.100 in. displacement This option of the VS94 includes a built-in electric
Space Heater (optional): solenoid which allows reset of tripped unit from a
Option Operating Current remote location. Available for 115 VAC or 24 VDC.
H15 .023 A @ 115 VAC
Time Delay
70
H24 .12 A @ 24 VDC
Remote Reset (optional): Overrides trip operation on start-up. The time delay
Option Operating Current option is field-adjustable from 5 seconds up to 100
R15 .17 A @ 115 VAC seconds with an easy-to-adjust 20-turn potentiometer.
R24 .36 A @ 24 VDC Available for 115 VAC or 24 VDC.
Time Delay (optional):
Option Operating Current Standby Current Space Heater
75
T15 .360 A @ 115 VAC .01 A @ 115 VAC This optional circuit prevents moisture condensation
T24 1.15 A @ 24 VDC .01 A @ 24 VDC inside the VS94 housing.
Time Delay/Remote Reset: Adjustable 20-turn potentiometer from
5 seconds to 6-1/2 minutes (15 seconds per turn approximately)
Shipping Weight: 4.35 lb. (2 kg)
Shipping Dimensions: 9 x 8 x 4-11/16 in. (229 x 203 x 119 mm)
78
129
80
Dimensions
How to Order
130
5
Section 25 Magnetic Switches & Annunciators
Remote Alarm / Annunciators
10
95046 Selectronic® Tattletale® Remote Alarm Annunciators — ST Series �� 133
Magnetic Switches
78793 Tattletale® Annunciators and Magnetic Switches�� 139
15
20
25
30
40
50
55
70
75
78
131
80
132
5
sect. 25 95046
rev. 2014/09/27
Selectronic® Tattletale®
10
Remote Alarm Annunciators
The ST Series Selectronic Tattletale annunciators
are a simple and inexpensive answer to your remote
15
alarm annunciator needs. These compact Tattletale
annunciators announce by a flashing LED which variable
malfunctioned. It may feature a pulsating Mini-Siren®
to audibly alert to the malfunction, which is silenced by
depressing the alarm silence button. The visual signal
20
remains in operation until the fault is corrected and the
contacts are cleared. When an alarm sensor trips, the
LED flashes, and if equipped, the Mini-Siren sounds.
At the same time, an output circuit will activate which
normally open (N.O.) or normally closed (N.C.) contacts.
allows you to connect an external relay to operate a
You can mix N.O. and N.C. contacts on the same unit.
25
general alarm, operate a shutdown device, etc.
Two mounting styles are offered: a recessed panel
A test push button tests all alarm LEDs.
mounting flange and a freestanding gimbal mounting.
Basic models accept 8-32 VAC or 8-40 VDC input
(Model STA16 is available only in flange mount).
voltage. Others are available for either 12-VDC or 24-
All models except STA16 have a time delay available
VDC input.
to lock out the audible alarm on startup. These unique
30
Preprinted peel and stick nameplates for common
alarm panels have wide ranging applications and can be
faults are supplied with each unit. Most of the
grouped in many configurations.
Selectronic Tattletale annunciators accept either
Dimensions
40
ST5ASF Gimbal Mounting (G Option)
50
55
ST8F and ST10ASF STA16
70
75
78
133
80
BASIC: ST5AS, ST10AS and ST5DAS Series
Murphy Basic ST-Series Selectronic Tattletale When a fault occurs, the contact operation causes the
annunciators are used wherever a remote alarm and appropriate LED to flash and the audible Mini-Siren to
annunciation is required. Typical applications are in pulse. At the same time, an output signal is generated,
marine pilot houses to alert the crew of problems which allows an external relay to be wired to operate
developing in engine, gear, bilge, auxiliary power plants, a general alarm such as a bell or horn. Pressing the
etc. Repeater panels can be added for additional Alarm Silent button quiets the local audible alarm
locations such as flybridge, on deck, galley or engineer’s and disconnects the output for the remote alarm. The
quarters. Each repeater panel can be acknowledged flashing LED remains in operation until the fault is
individually, or alternate wiring allows for one master corrected and the contacts reset. An Alarm Silence/Test
control to silence all repeater panels. button allows you to test all LEDs.
Other applications include power plant control rooms, Preprinted peel and stick nameplates for common
building maintenance, remote drilling rigs, construction faults are supplied with each unit.
sites, agricultural and construction equipment.
5-Points
• ST5ASF (flange mount) and ST5ASG (gimbal mount)
• Provides 5 alarm points and output for remote alarm relay
• Accepts N.O. and/or N.C. contacts
• Use individually or gang for multiple applications
• Input voltage 8-32 VAC or 8-40 VDC
10-Points
• ST10ASF (flange mount) and ST10ASG (gimbal mount)
• Provides 10 alarm points and output for remote alarm relay
• Use individually or gang for multiple applications
Dual 5-Points
• ST5DASF (flange mount) and ST5DASG (gimbal mount)
• Provides two separate sets of 5 alarm points in one package.
Each set of 5 points is powered separately from the other but share
the same negative of the power source.
• Primary application is on twin engine boats. Because each set
of alarm points is powered separately, if only one engine is running
there is no alarm on the engine not running.
A copy of the warranty may be viewed or printed by going to fwmurphy.com/support/warranty.htm
134
FIRST OUT FAULTS: ST8 Series
5
First out fault Tattletale tells you which monitored
variable malfunctioned first. The fault is annunciated
and locked in until reset by the operator. Applications
10
include process monitoring such as compressors,
pumps, generators, etc. Preprinted peel and stick
nameplates for common faults are supplied with each
unit.
8 First Out
15
• ST8F (flange mount) and ST8G (gimbal mount)
• Provides 8-point first out cause of shutdown Tattletale. A flashing
LED indicates the cause of shutdown identified by the nameplate.
• Includes SPDT dry contact output rated 2 A @ 28 VDC
20
• Selectable sensor lockout for delay on start up
25
GENERATORS: STA16 Series
The STA16 is a multifunctional visual and audible
30
16-point alarm typically applied as a remote alarm.
Its picture frame bezel allows for flush mounting into
a control panel or customer supplied wall mounted
pull box. Preprinted peel and stick nameplates for
all common engine and generator functions allow for
40
generic applications or for NFPA-110 Requirements.
16-Points
• STA16 is a 16-point annunciator for generator sets.
• Provides 16 points of visual and audible alarms including
50
built-in sensing for low battery voltage and battery charger
malfunction
• Accepts N.O. switch inputs
• Negative switch input
55
70
75
78
135
80
Specifications
Accessories and Options
TDST3-5 and TDST8-10

TDST3-5 and TD8-10 single point time delays inhibit sensor
input to ST Series annunciators for 3 to 5 or 8 to 10 seconds.
Compensates for momentary contact operation due to vessel
movement, etc.
Gimbal and Flange Mounting Kits

These kits are available for change-over mounting and as
service parts. They fit all LM (less mounting) configurations.
136
How To Order
5
10
15
20
25
30
Accessories and Options
TDST3-5 3-5 second time delay
TDST8-10 8-10 second time delay
40
25700007 Gimbal mount kit
Fits ST5ASLM
25700008 Flange mount kit
25700034 Gimbal mount kit Fits ST10ASLM, ST5DASLM and
25700371 Flange mount kit ST8LM
50
55
70
75
78
137
80
138
5
sect. 25 78793
rev. 2014/09/27
Tattletale ®
10
Annunciators and
Magnetic Switches
15
Tattletale annunciators and magnetic switches are
the nerve centers that translate Swichgage contact
operations into decisions and operate the alarm or
shutdown device. These switches are the electrical
20
load carrying devices for the alarm or shutdown device.
Tattletale annunciators indicate which monitored
function failed leading to the alarm or shutdown;
magnetic switches do not. Magnetic switches operate
basically as a latching relay.
25
Application capacitor discharge type ignitions.
Magnetic switches and Tattletale annunciators are Energized to run models allow Closed Loop circuitry.
available for use with engines or electric motors. Others draw momentary power to trip. Configurations
Various circuits, time delays and contact configurations are available for contact make or contact break to cause
30
are available to match the power source and mode shutdown. Some models have both make and break
of operation required for alarm only, alarm before contacts.
shutdown or shutdown only. All models have a weather-resistant case with screw
For distributor ignition engines, the magnetic switch terminals for ease of customer hookup. Manually reset
40
opens the distributor coil circuit to cause shutdown. For models have a face mounted reset push button which
magneto or CD ignitions the magnetic switch grounds also serves as a fault indicator in the Tattletale version.
the ignition output. Some models can also trip fuel In this application, one or more Tattletale/magnetic
valves instead of or in addition to grounding the ignition. switches are used to advise operating personnel which
Diesel engines are shut down by either closing off the monitored function caused shutdown.
50
fuel or air supply. Magnetic switches and Tattletale Only the Tattletale connected to that function sensor
annunciators can make or break circuits for these trips causing the reset push button to pop out.
engines. Electrically reset models perform the same functions as
For electric motor application, various magnetic the manually reset models and are reset by cycling the
55
switches are available to operate the motor starter, power supply off and then on.
holding coil directly or in conjunction with appropriate Time delay models use reliable solid state time circuits
Murphy Transformer-Relay assembly. to lockout operated switch contacts for start-up and/
Features or to allow operation of alarms before shutdown
70
Magnetic switches and Tattletale annunciators occurs. Specific models allow application of power to
described in this bulletin are electrically tripped relay a shutdown circuit and automatic disconnect of power
type devices. Models are available to operate from after a given time delay.
battery power, 120 VAC, conventional magnetos and
75
78
139
80
Specifications
NOTES
This chart indicates features/configurations
available for each model.
1. Coil Voltage — Coils are specific voltage
rated or multiple voltage rates.
2. Contacts — This is the control circuit out-
put. In the latched position, the NCH contact
has a hot output. In the tripped position, the
NOH contact has a hot output. In the latched
position, the NCG has a grounded output. In
the tripped position, the NOG has a grounded
output.
3. Latch Type — Refers to whether the
magnetic coil is momentarily energized to trip
or requires continuous power in the operating
mode and de-energizes to trip.
4. Reset Type — Refers to manual or electric
reset; manual indicating type is a Tattletale.
5. Time Delay — Indicates operation of the
time delay.
6. Coil Resistances — In OHMS or coil and
resistor
1.) 0.5 2.)18 3.)30 4.)72 5.)90/190
for 12/24 6.)288 7.)339/678 for 12/24
8.)339/618 for 12/24
Models
Model Description Illustration
Use to shutdown 12V through 32V distributor ignition or

diesel engines. Breaks circuit when tripped. Opens dis-
117/117PH tributor coil circuit or power circuit to diesel run device.
Automatically disconnects from battery after trip. Con-
tacts 10 amps 32 VDC. 14 amp fuse.
Multipurpose Tattletale with dry contacts that can be

used to make two circuits and break another when
tripped. Operates from 120 VAC or capacitor discharge
MS2100 ignition. The operating coil is intermittent duty and must
be disconnected by an external circuit when tripped. The
MS2100 is a replacement for 100PH, 307CD, 307PHCD
and 224CD.

tripped. Operates from 12 or 24 VDC or 24 VAC.
MS2110 The operating coil is intermittent duty and must be
disconnected by an external circuit when tripped. The
MS2110 is a replacement for 221PH, 169PH, 274 and
274PH.
140
5
tripped. Operates from magneto ignition. The operating
MS2120 coil is intermittent duty and must be disconnected
10
by an external circuit when tripped. The MS2120 is a
replacement for 307, 307PH and 224.
15
Allows for Swichgage and/or N.C. contacts to be wired
closed loop (in series). Any contact open or Swichgage
518PH contact close in the circuit shunt trips the 518PH. Specify
12 or 24 VDC. Contacts 10 amps 24V. 14 amp fuse.
20
Allows for Swichgage and/or N.C. contacts to be wired
closed loop (in series).Any contact open or Swichgage
518APH contact close in the circuit trips the 518APH. Specify 12
or 24 VDC. Contacts 10 amps 24V. 14 amp fuse.
25
Same as 518APH but recommended for high vibration
application where nuisance shutdowns typically occur
518E due to higher than normal vibrations (i.e. wood chippers).
12 Volt only.
30
Same as 518PH except with 30 second time delay before
trip on one Swichgage contact input but immediate trip
on the second Swichgage contact input. Typical use is
for immediate stop of engine from oil pressure or coolant
40
520APH temperature but delayed shutdown from alignment
switches on center pivot irrigation system. Specify 12
or 24 VDC and length of time delay. Time delays are
available from 5 to 120 seconds. Contacts 10 amps 24 V.
14 amp fuse.
50
Use with N.C. Swichgage or switches to ground magneto
or CD ignition when tripped. Trip coil energized to
521PH shutdown when N.C. contacts open. Specify 12 or 24
VDC. Contacts 10 amps 24V.
55
Replaces 221PH with 72 ohm coil. Used with NICS-78
70
MS2111 non-incendive control system. Service part only.
75
78
141
80
Use for distributor ignition or diesel. Time delay lockout of

Swichgage contacts on start up only. Customer wired for
delay or immediate trip on shutdown. Breaks and makes
circuits when tripped. 760A resets automatically when
the shutdown signal is removed or power is removed.
761APH has manual reset. 760AF is 760A with in-line
760A/ fuse. Must specify 12 or 24 VDC and length of time delay.
Option time delays: 15, 30 (standard) or 60 seconds.
760AF/ Contacts 10 amps 24 V. 14 amp fuse. Models 760A and
761APH 761APH carry the CE mark.
Note: The 760A cannot be adequately protected by a
circuit breaker in a dead short condition with a battery
as the power source. The circuit breaker will take a finite
amount of time to react, during which time the circuit
board of the 760A will be damaged beyond repair. Fuses
are the optimal method for protecting 760A.
Used in Murphy TR assemblies as master disconnect.

24VAC coil energizes when Swichgage contact closes to
822PH ground; breaks and makes circuit when tripped. Manual
reset
Detects loss of magneto/CD ignition output and transfers

contacts for customer use. Contacts 10 amps; 48 VAC/
M4264 Series VDC.
M42641CS transfers SPDT dry contacts when tripped.
A SPDT relay with 10 amp dry contacts. Specify 12 or 24

R129A VDC. Contacts 10 amps 24 VDC. 14 amp fuse.
Always provide proper circuit protection with fuses or circuit breakers.
142
How to Order
5
10
15
20
25
* Add the letter F to the base model to indicate an in-line fuse instead of a base-mounted fuse.
** 12 Volt negative ground version only
30
Configurations Available
40
50
55
25050016 Weather cap
25050547 Clear, flexible dust boot for push button
Accessories
30050323 Single unit mounting plate
70
65010026 In-line fuse holder with 14 amp fuse
75
78
143
80
144
5
Section 30 Engine Panels
Engine Panel Accessories
10
8904 Selectronic® Flasher Alarm and Mini-siren — TL7 and SAH Series�� 147
94032 Swichgage® Shutdown Panels for Mobile Equipment of All Kinds — WAI Series�� 149
8198 Swichgage® Kits for Engines — WD100 Series �� 153
03061 Swichgage® Shutdown Panels with Open Back for Diesel Engines — WD300 Series�� 155
15
04001 Electric Gage Shutdown WDU Series Panels
for Deutz 1011/2011, 912/913 and 914 Engines �� 157
03062 WHB Series Swichgage® Shutdown Panels
for High Plains and Other Irrigation Engines�� 163
20
94100 Shutdown Panel Kits for Deutz and Other Engines — W0156 and W0169 Series�� 165
8426 Swichgage® Shutdown Panel Kit — W0168 and WO241�� 167
92226 Swichgage® Shutdown Panel Kit — Model WO270�� 169
25
MurphyLink® PowerView™ Panels
1211014 ML25 Panel — MurphyLink® Series �� 171
30
40
1211030 Murphy Industrial Harnesses —MurphyLink® Series �� 183
Marine Engine Panels

1211179 Marine Engine Panel Series — Local and Remote�� 185
50
55
70
75
78
145
80
146
5
sect. 30 8904
rev. 2014/11/1
Selectronic ® Flasher Alarm and Mini-Siren
10
TL7 and SAH Series
The Model TL7 is a panel-mounted flashing alarm light
and audible alarm driver. The TL7 helps protect the
15
Murphy Swichgage contacts from the very high inrush
current of the lamp. It is available in 12- or 24-VDC for
negative ground systems. The SAH Mini-siren provides
an audible alarm when fault conditions are detected by
a Swichgage instrument. It can be panel mounted and
20
operates on 6–28 VDC.
Application
The TL7 Flasher/Light is used as a warning device on
various types of industrial and mobile equipment. The
25
Mini-siren will give an audible warning when the TL7
operates, or it can be wired directly to the Swichgage
contacts for audible only alarm.
Features
30
• Red polycarbonate lens Dimensions
• 12 VDC or 24 VDC negative ground
• Tin-plated male push-on type terminals
• SAH terminal designed to drive piezo electric TL7
audible alarm rated 20 mA @ 28 VDC such as
40
Murphy SAH Series Mini-siren
Specifications
TL7
50
Power Requirements:
Voltage: 12 or 24 VDC, negative ground (specify voltage)
Current:
- Sensor switch < 60 mA
- 12 VDC, 360 mA with lamp on
55
- 24 VDC, 200 mA with lamp on
- 12 or 24VDC, 5 mA standby, lamp off
Outputs (see replacement lamps):
Lamp output: 120 mA @ 14.4 VDC SAH
SAH terminal: 20 mA @ 28 VDC resistive
Enclosure: Red polycarbonate lens with aluminum retaining nut
70
Terminal Connections: Four tin plated 1/32 x 1/4 in. (0.8 x 6 mm)
male push-on type terminal
Mounting Hole: 1-1/8 in. (29 mm) diameter
75
SAH
Type: PIEZO electric transducer
Operating Voltage: 6–8 VDC
Output Level: at 28 VDC 1 meter, 90± 5 dB
Current Drain: at 28 VDC, 20 mA MAX
Mounting Hole: 1-1/8 in. (29 mm) diameter
78
147
80
WARNING Before beginning installation of this Murphy product:

Below is a typical circuit diagram for the TL7 Flasher/Light and SAH Mini-siren. When the switch closes, the lamp
will flash and the optional Mini-siren will pulse at the same frequency.
NOTE: Typical wiring with negative ground. Although designed to be used with Murphy Swichgage, the TL7 can be
used with any dry contact type switch.
How to Order

65700045 TL7-12N: 12 VDC, negative ground
Alarm light and audible alarm
65700047 TL7-24N: 24 VDC, negative ground
65700257 SAH: Mini siren steady tone
Audible alarm
65700258 SAH-A: Mini siren pulse tone
148
5
sect. 30 94032
rev. 2014/11/01
Swichgage ® Shutdown Panels
10
for Mobile Equipment of All Kinds
WAI Series
15
WAI Series Murphy panels offer
engine protection for on- and off-
road mobile equipment.
The panels provide accurate
engine readings and time-delayed
20
automatic shutdowns. Flashing
light and mini-siren signal a WAI-271
warning before a shutdown. Alarm-
only panels (without shut-down
capabilities) are also available.
25
WAI panels are easy to install and
function test without the need for
expensive auxiliary equipment. Each
is a cost-competitive and effective
system for engine protection.
30
The WAI Series Panels are
complete diagnostic, engine- WAI-8
protection systems. Any vehicle
or engine can be monitored, and
in case of potentially damaging (gage and limit switch in one) and fork lifts, loaders, earth-movers —
40
conditions, an alarm will operate Selectronic relays and alarms. any engine-powered mobile unit,
before the engine is shut down. Swichgage instruments are internally such as delivery vans, farm and
WAI Panels feature direct reading, lighted for night illumination. construction equipment and street
mechanical Swichgage instruments Applications include: trucks, buses, sweepers.
50
Models
WAI-2: Completely enclosed and WAI-4: Same as WAI-2 panel with WAI-9: Open style panel same
convenient under-dash mounting a third Swichgage instrument for as WAI-8 with transmission
provides Swichgage instruments for transmission temperature temperature Swichgage instrument
55
low oil pressure and high coolant (140°- 300°F / 60°- 148°C) instead of coolant pressure
temperature; visual and audible
alarms before automatic shutdown. WAI-7: Open style panel same as WAI-271: Open style panel similar
Includes a 270° pivoting, mounting WAI-2 to WAI-7 but for alarm-only
bracket.
WAI-3: Same as WAI-2 panel with

WAI-8: Open style panel provides
Swichgage instruments for low oil
70
a third Swichgage instrument for pressure, coolant pressure and high
block coolant pressure (0-15 psi) coolant temperature; visual and
audible alarms before automatic
75
shutdown
78
149
80
WAI-2
• Enclosed Panel
• Oil Pressure Swichgage instrument
• Coolant Temperature* Swichgage instrument
• Mini-siren
• FL3/TL2 flasher and light
• 760AF Magnetic Switch with 30-second time delay for
alarm before shutdown; 12-VDC, (optional 24-V)
WAI-3 / WAI-4
• Enclosed Panels
• Block Coolant Pressure* Swichgage instrument
(WAI-3 only 0-15psi)
• Transmission Temp.* Swichgage instrument
(WAI-4 only 140°-300°F / 60°- 148°C)
• Mini-siren
• FL3/TL2 flasher and light
• 760AF Magnetic Switch with 30 second time delay
for alarm before shutdown; 12-VDC, (optional 24-V)
WAI-7
• Open Style Panel
• Mini-siren
• TL7 Flasher Alarm Light
WAI-8 / WAI-9
• Open Style Panel
• Coolant Pressure* Swichgage instrument
(WAI-8 only 0-15psi)
• Transmission Temp.* Swichgage instrument
(WAI-9 only 140°-300°F / 60°- 148°C)
• Mini-siren
WAI-271
• Alarm-Only, Open Style Panel
• Mini-siren
• Available for 12-VDC or 24-VDC
* Temperature capillary length is standard 6 ft. (1.8 m). Specify longer lengths.
150
Dimensions
5
WAI-2 WAI-3 / WAI-4
10
15
20
25
30
WAI-7 WAI-8 / WAI-9
40
50
55
70
WAI-271
75
78
151
80
Standard Panel Assemblies and Kits Reference Guide
How to Order
Part Number Model Number Notes

WAI-2
WAI-3
WAI-4
Use Model Number for Ordering WAI -7
WAI-8
WAI-9
WAI-271
152
5
sect. 30 8198
rev. 2014/11/01
Swichgage ® Kits for Engines
10
WD100 Series
The WD100 Series Swichgage kits provide engine
monitoring that shuts down farm, construction or other
15
engine-powered equipment when dangerous pressures
or temperatures occur. The control center for each of
these kits is the compact and adjustable Universal
Mounting Panel. This panel holds two Swichgages and
a Tattletale® magnetic switch as well as a shutdown
20
device where appropriate.
Specifications
• Murphy Swichgage products are two-instruments-in-one: (1) an
25
accurate indicating gage with (2) a built-in, adjustable limit switch.
• 518PH Tattletale magnetic switch is designed to shut down en-
gines by operating as a circuit breaker to interrupt the ignition circuit WD100 Series Kits
to a distributor or to close a solenoid fuel valve on diesels.
• Temperature capillary tubes are 6 ft. (1.8 m) standard but can be Depending upon the kit selected, the following
ordered in any length. components are supplied:
30
• Standard Swichgage ranges*: A. Universal Mounting Panel which consists of:
Pressure: 0-100 psi (0-689 kPa) [0-6.89 bar] • 20P oil pressure Swichgage instrument
Temperature: 100° to 250°F (37° to 121°C) • 20T temperature Swichgage instrument with 6 ft.
*Other ranges available on request.
(1.8 m) capillary, or 20TH temperature Swichgage
instrument for WD175 kit
40
• 518PH Tattletale magnetic switch
B. Bracket mounting bolts, washers and nuts
C. CKV2336 fuel reverse flow/check valve
D. PRV50 fuel pressure relief valve
E. SV Series fuel shut-off solenoid valve
50
(1/4 NPT X 1/4 NPT) Specify 12-VDC or 24-VDC
Kit Combinations
Kit WD100 includes: A and B Kit WD175 includes: A, B, C and E
55
Suitable for use on distributor ignition Suitable for air-cooled diesel engines;
engines or on diesels having a shut- 10 mm 1.5 adaptor and special head
down solenoid in the fuel pump temperature bulb. Includes SV Series
Approximate Shipping Weight: 4.75 fuel valve
lbs. (2.2 kg) Approximate Shipping Weight: 6.15
70
Approximate Shipping Dimensions: lbs. (2.8 kg)
9-3/4 x 9-1/4 x 5-3/4 in. (248 x 235 x Approximate Shipping Dimensions:
146 mm) 9-3/4 x 9-1/4 x 5-3/4 in. (248 x 235 x
146)
Kit WD150 includes: A, B, C and E
Suitable for most liquid cooled diesel Kit WD185 includes: A, B, C, D and E
75
engines Suitable for engines with gear-

Approximate Shipping Weight: 6.15 driven transfer pump. (SV Series is
These kits are available for virtually lbs. (2.8 kg) not required on engines with built-in
any engine application, any engine Approximate Shipping Dimensions: shutdown in the injector pump.)
type or can be custom ordered to 9-3/4 x 9-1/4 x 5-3/4 in. (248 x 235 x Approximate Shipping Weight: 6.20
78
meet a specific use. 146 mm) lbs. (2.8 kg)

Approximate Shipping Dimensions:
9-3/4 x 9-1/4 x 5-3/4 in. (248 x 235 x
146 mm)
153
80
Typical Wiring to Diesel Engine
Special Notes:
• Murphy Pressure Relief Valve
(model PRV50) is factory set to start
opening at 25 psi (172 kPa) [1.72
bar]. This is done to protect the fuel
filter canister from bursting due to
high pressure.
• Install the Murphy Check Relief
Valve (model CKV2336) as close
as possible to the injection pump.
When the CKV2336 is installed
properly, it should prevent the
injection pump from siphoning fuel
which halts operation after the SV
valve closes.
• Install the SV Series fuel valve
as close as possible to the injection * Always provide proper circuit protection with fuses or circuit breakers.
pump inlet port.
• All fittings must be air tight.
Dimensions Rotating/Tilting Panel

This panel may mount in many different positions
(Swichgage instruments can be rotated and the panel
tilted) that allows for instrument visibility without a difficult
installation or interference with other engine equipment.
How to Order
To determine the kit that will suit your application, refer to descriptions. When you have selected a kit, the model
number and voltage must be specified when ordering.
Order oil line assembly separately.
154
5
sect. 30 03061
rev. 2014/11/01
Swichgage ® Shutdown Panels
10
with Open Back for Diesel Engines
WD300 Series
15
WD300 Series
The universally applicable WD300 Series panels are the
ideal control solution for a wide variety of diesel engines
without shutdown solenoid in the injection pump.
The standard WD300 Series panel includes basic
20
engine protection for low oil pressure and high coolant
temperature. It also includes Murphy’s SV Series
solenoid fuel shut-off valve, (see bulletin SV-99026B).
WD300LV Models
For engines that have the fuel shutoff solenoid built
25
into the injection pump. This model is also applicable to
battery ignition engines.
Panel Kits Include:
• Low lube oil pressure Swichgage instrument
WD300-LV
• High coolant/temperature Swichgage instrument
30
• 117PH magnetic switch
• SV Series solenoid fuel shutoff valve
• PB128S emergency stop push button
40
Low Lube Oil Pressure Swichgage:
• 0-100 psi (0-689 kPa) [0-6.89 bar]
• 1/8 NPT process connection
High Coolant Swichgage:
• 130-250°F (54-121°C)
50
• 48 in. (1.2 m) capillary
• 1/2 NPT process connection
117PH Magnetic Switch SV Series Solenoid Fuel Shutoff
Valve: 12 or 24 volt (specify)
Approximate Shipping Weight: 8 lbs. 8 oz. (3.9 kg)
Approximate Shipping Dimensions: 8.5 x 5.25 x 5.5 in. (216 x
55
133 x 140 mm)
70
75
78
155
80
How to Order
Notes:
* = Standard Component or Range and is not required for ordering. See section notes if section has two parts to
specify.
• WD300LV: Does not include an SV Fuel Valve.
• WD300: Includes an SV Fuel Valve. (WD300-12 = 12-volt valve and WD300-24 = 24-volt valve)
If requirements are outside of the matrix, order panel with free-formed text and use the product number of the
base model.
156
5
sect. 30 04001
rev. 2014/11/02
Electric Gage Shutdown WDU Series Panels
10
for Deutz 1011/2011, 912/913 and 914 Engines
Deutz engines that come factory equipped with
electric-switched oil pressure and temperature senders
15
can now be outfitted with a standard line of electric
gage plug-and-go panels that take the work and time
out of the installation process. Two bolts mount the
panel to the engine’s bell housing, and the included
wiring allows for fast plug-and-go assembly. Simply
20
remove two screws and the front hinged panel drops
down allowing access to all the internal components.
These panels are offered in three versions to
accommodate all wiring and mounting requirements for
DEUTZ 1011/2011, 912/913 and 914 Engines.
25
The panels are designed to compliment Deutz engines
supplied with pre-installed factory-set electric switched
senders. Protection against low oil pressure and high
engine temperature is achieved with the Murphy 760A
Time Delayed Magnetic Switch. A panel mounted 10
30
amp fuse protects the sensitive instrumentation from
any over-current situation and stops the engine if blown.
The Deutz pre-installed electric switched senders Features
supply all shut-down signals directly to the Murphy
760A providing reliable and proven engine protection in • Pressure Gage: 0-80 PSI (0-500 kPa)
40
harsh environments. • Engine Temperature Gage: 140°-300°F (60°-150°C)
Critical engine information is provided with Murphy’s • Volt Meter (8-18 VDC)
environmentally sealed, LED illuminated EG Series • Tachometer/Hourmeter (0-4000 RPM)
electric gages. Known for their reliable performance • Key Switch (Heavy-Duty)
and constructed of corrosion resistive materials, these • Engine Preheat with Red Indicator Lamp
50
rugged gages exceed SAE J1810 standards for use in • Murphy 760A Safety Shutdown (Automatic Time
tough off-road and industrial power unit applications. Delayed for Start-up)
A unique spin-on gage clamp keeps the gages tight • Panel Mount Fuse
even in high vibration applications. Murphy’s alternator • Recessed and Protected Front Panel
driven ATHA 4000 RPM tachometer provides accurate • Durable Powder-Coat Finished Enclosure and
55
display of engine speed with its back-lit dial, while the Mounting Bracket
digital hour meter records the elapsed engine run time.
The heavy-duty key switch constructed of corrosion
resistant materials and heavy gage wiring exceeds the Labor Saving Install Features
current requirements of the starter and engine pre-heat
• Pre-wired External Harness (Includes all connectors
70
circuit. A red lamp mounted on the front panel indicates
when the pre-heat circuit is active. and terminals)
All components are assembled into a robust black • Mating connectors match Deutz Engine wiring for
powder-coated enclosure with text indicating key fast plug-and-go connection
position. The plug-and-go external wire harness • Pre-assembled: Enclosure, Rubber Isolation Mounts
connects to the rear of the panel and has all the engine and Mounting Bracket
75
side connections pre-wired. The panel mounting bracket • Simple Bolt-on/Plug-in Installation
comes pre-assembled to the enclosure with three
vibration isolators, making installation fast and simple.
78
157
80
WDU0814 Dimensions (includes Enclosure, Mounting Bracket and Shock Mounts)
Wiring
158
5
10
15
20
25
30
WDU0815 Wiring
40
50
55
70
75
78

159
80
WDU0816 Wiring
160
WDU0865 Wiring for Deutz 914 Tier 3 Engine
5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
55
70
75
78
161
80
Specifications
Voltage: 12 VDC
Shipping Weight: 16 lb. (7.3 kg)
Shipping Dimensions: 14 x 15-3/4 x 9-1/2in. (356 x 400 x 242 mm)
How to Order

Includes Attached Wire Harness Pigtail with
WDU0814 Panel Number used on DEUTZ engine connector, battery (+), starter, pre-
30700814 1011/2011 Engine heat and ground wires. Mounting bracket
has an additional plate to accommodate
specific engine mount location.
Includes Loose External Wire Harness that
WDU0815 Panel Number used on DEUTZ plugs into back of panel, starter and pre-
30700815
912/913 Engine heat wires. Deutz-supplied engine harness
also plugs into back of panel.
Includes a relay housed internal to the panel
for the fuel solenoid. Includes Loose External
WDU0816 Panel Number used on DEUTZ Wire Harness that plugs into back of panel,
30700816
914 Engine starter and pre-heat wires. Deutz-supplied
engine harness also plugs into back of
panel.
Includes a relay housed internal to the panel
for the fuel solenoid. Includes Loose External
WDU865 Panel Number used on Deutz 914 Wire Harness that plugs into back of panel,
30700865
TIER 3 engines starter and pre-heat wires. Deutz-supplied
engine harness also plugs into back of
panel.
162
5
sect. 30 03062
rev. 2014/11/04
WHB Series Swichgage® Shutdown Panels
10
for High Plains and Other Irrigation Engines
The WHB Series open type panels are the industry
standard for High Plains irrigation engines. These
15
panels bolt directly to the engine flywheel housing.
They include Swichgage protection for low engine
oil pressure and high coolant or high oil temperature
and have provision to add additional Swichgage
instruments, such as a pump discharge pressure,
20
voltage regulator, throttle cable and start button or
switch.
For diesel engines without shut-down solenoid in the
injection pump, add a Murphy SV Series solenoid fuel
shut-off valve or RP2300 series rack puller solenoid (for
25
details visit www.fwmurphy.com).
Swichgage products are two instruments in one: (1) an
accurate indicating gage with (2) a built-in, adjustable
limit switch.
Panel Kits include:
30
• Low Lube Oil Pressure Swichgage instrument
• High Coolant/ Temperature Swichgage instrument Specifications
• 117PH Magnetic Switch
• PB128S Emergency Stop Push Button Low Lube Oil Pressure Swichgage instrument:
• Ammeter 60-0-60 0-100 psi (0-689 kPa) [0-6.89 bar]
40
1/8 NPT process connection
High Coolant/Oil Temperature Swichgage instrument:
130°-250°F (54°-121°C)
48 in. (1.2 m) capillary
117PH Ammeter: 60-0-60
50
Shipping Weight: 8 lbs. 8 oz. (3.9 kg)
Shipping Dimensions: 9.5 x 9 x 5 in. (241 x 229 x 127 mm)
Dimensions
55
70
75
78
163
80
How to Order
Notes:
* = Standard Component or Range and is not required for ordering. See section notes if section has two parts to
specify.
If requirements are outside of the matrix, order panel with free-formed text and use the 3050xxxx product number
of the base model.
164
5
sect. 30 94100
rev. 2014/11/04
Shutdown Panel Kits for Deutz and Other Engines
10
W0156 and W0169 Series
The W0156 and W0169 panel kits were developed
specifically for air-cooled and liquid-cooled engines
15
where a weatherproof engine panel is required. Both
kits feature Swichgage® protection for low engine oil
pressure and high cylinder head or high oil temperature.
Shock-mounted panel bolts directly to the flywheel
housing or bracket of your design.
20
These kits were originally designed for Deutz FL912
and FL913 Series engines but can be used on a variety
of engines. Internal wiring mates with a standard Deutz
circuit.
Panel kits include:
25
• Cylinder Head/Oil Temperature Swichgage
instrument
• Alternator failure light
• Ignition key switch
30
• Provisions for additional Swichgage instruments
such as irrigation pump pressure or voltmeter/
ammeter etc.
CAUTION: Certain danger to human
• Provisions for tachometer
and to equipment such as applied in
Swichgage products are two instruments in one: (1) an
40
a mobile or marine application may
accurate indicating gage with (2) a built-in, adjustable
occur if some equipment is stopped
limit switch.
without pre-warning. It is therefore,
A 518PH Magnetic Switch provides a closed-loop
recommended that monitored functions
circuit to ensure proper operation at all times. The
be limited to alarm only or to alarm
518PH allows the system to be sensitive to open
50
before shutdown in such applications.
circuits, broken wires, false grounds, corrosion, loss of
power and other factors which could otherwise prevent
the protective controls from operating. * NOTE: 12-volt kit is standard. If you require a 24-volt kit, specify when
The mounting panel is enclosed. Panel Kits are pre- ordering.
wired, ready to install and are available for 12- or 24-
55
VDC systems.*
Dimensions (dimensions are for both panel kits)
70
75
78
165
80
Typical Wiring Diagram for Deutz
Specifications
Low Lube Pressure Swichgage: Temperature Swichgage:
0-100 psi (0-689 kPa) [0-6.89 bar] Cylinder Head Temperature (W0156): 160°-320°F (71°-
1/8 NPT process connection 160°C), M10 x 1.5 process connection
518PH Magnetic Switch: 12 or 24 volt (specify) Oil Temperature (W0169): 130°-250°F (54°-121°C), 1/2NPT
Shipping Weight: 14 lbs. (6.4 kg) process connection (see Murphy General Catalog for optional
Shipping Dimensions: 14-7/8 x 14-7/8 x 6-3/4 in. (378 x 378 x sizes)
171 mm) 48 in. (1.2 m) capillary
How to Order

Specify Model W0156 For air-cooled engines
Number W0169 For liquid-cooled engines
166
5
sect. 30 8426
rev. 2014/11/06
Swichgage ® Shutdown Panel Kit
10
Models WO168 and WO241
The W0168 and W0241 panel kits are universal-fit
instrument panels for most industrial engines. They
15
include Swichgage protection for low engine oil
pressure and high coolant or high oil temperature.
These Panel Kits are similar – the W0168 has a start/
stop key switch and the W0241 has a start push button.
The Swichgage product is two instruments in one: (1)
20
an accurate indicating gage with (2) a built-in, adjustable
limit switch.
A 518PH Magnetic Switch provides a closed-loop
circuit to ensure proper operation at all times. The
518PH allows the system to be sensitive to open
25
circuits, broken wires, false grounds, corrosion, loss of
power and other factors which could otherwise prevent
the protective controls from operating.
The universal mounting panel is enclosed on all four
sides with an open back. An optional back cover is
30
available for both kits. Panel Kits are pre-wired and
ready to install and are available for 12- or 24-VDC Dimensions
systems.
Features
40
• High Coolant/Oil Temperature Swichgage
• Emergency stop push button
• Ignition key switch for start/stop (W0168)
50
• Push button for start (W0241)
• Ammeter 60-0-60
• Provisions for additional Swichgage controls,
such as irrigation pump pressure or engine oil
temperature
55
• Provisions for tachometer and throttle cable
Specifications
Low Lube Oil Pressure Swichgage Instrument:
70
0-100 psi (0-689 kPa) [0-6.89 bar]
High Coolant/Oil Temperature Swichgage Instrument:
130°-250°F (54°-121°C)
48 in. (1.2 m) capillary
75
518PH Magnetic Switch: 12 or 24 volt (specify)

Ammeter: 60-0-60
Shipping Weight: 8 lbs. 8 oz. (3.9 kg.)
Shipping Dimensions: 16 x 11 x 5-1/2 in. (406 x 279 x 140 mm)
78
167
80
How to Order

WO168: Panel Kit, start/stop key switch 12-volt kit is standard. If
Specify Model
WO168B: Panel Kit with back cover, start/stop key switch you require 24-volt kit -
Number
WO241: Panel Kit, start push button specify when ordering
168
5
sect. 30 92226
rev. 2014/11/07
Swichgage ® Shutdown Panel Kit
10
Model WO270
The W0270 is a compact, low-profile Swichgage
shutdown panel kit. It is designed to fit the following
15
power units:
• Caterpillar 3054 and 3056
• Perkins 1004 and 1006
• Detroit Diesel 1000 Series.
A universal shock-mounted bracket allows mounting
20
on either side of the engine or on top for your power
unit configurations. The kit is ready for quick, easy
installation with provision for installing customer
supplied ignition/start key switch. All wiring is included
in the panel.
This panel kit is ideal for all types of power unit
25
applications – irrigation pumps, grain dryers,
compressors, generators, etc.
Features
30
• Engine oil pressure monitoring Swichgage • Provision for optional tachometer or hourmeter
instrument (20P-F) (loom is pre-wired)
• Coolant temperature monitoring Swichgage • Provision for one additional Swichgage instrument
instrument (20T-F) such as irrigation pump discharge pressure
• Voltmeter (VM12/VM24) monitoring
40
• Closed-loop 518PH Magnetic Switch • All items pre-wired including tachometer or
• Emergency stop button (PB128S) hourmeter
• Provision for throttle cable • Complete external wiring harness including wiring
• Provision for customer supplied key switch (loom is for pre-heat and shutdown solenoid
pre-wired – mount and plug-in)
50
Dimensions
55
70
75
78
169
80
Dimensions — continued
Bottom View
How to Order

Specify Model
WO270: Panel Kit
Number
Order oil line assembly separately
170
5
sect. 30 1211014
rev. 2014/11/03
ML25 Panels
10
MurphyLink ® Series
The MurphyLink Series ML25 Panels feature the
PowerView™ PV25, an engine and diagnostic display
15
in an economical and compact package. This J1939-
compliant device provides electronic engine parameter
data, is simple to install and matches the PowerView
line of rugged displays. The PV25 can be powered by
12- or 24-volt systems.
20
The PV25 is equipped with two push buttons to
quickly access a convenient menu. In addition, a back
lit graphic display and two LEDs indicate Active-fault
Alarm or Shutdown status.
Active and Stored Fault messages display the SPN
25
(Suspect Parameter Number), FMI (Failure Mode
Indicator) and the OC (Occurrence Count) using the SAE Dimensions
J1939 protocol.
Features
30
• Tier 4/Stage IIIB/IV Compliant/Ready
• Compact J1939-compliant device for electronically
controlled engines
• Displays up to 20 standard J1939 parameters
• Active and stored diagnostic trouble codes
40
• Provides enhanced visual alarm indication using
bright alarm and shutdown LEDs
Specifications
50
Operating Voltage:
12/24 VDC (6.5-32VDC Minimum and Maximum Voltage)
Operating Current: 850mA MAX
Mounting: 4-.75” Rubber Isolated Shockmounts
Starting Method: KeySwitch
55
Stopping Method: KeySwitch
Display: PowerView Model 25
Indication Lamps: One red, One Amber via PV25 Display
Enclosure Material: Powder-Coated Cold Rolled Steel
Wiring Interface: 1-Deutsch HDP 21pin Connector
70
Throttle Method: Rocker Switch (Digital Inputs to ECU)
Tier 4 Regeneration: CAN Enabled (via PV25) or Rocker Switch
(via Digital Input to ECU)
Operational Temperature: -40° to +158°F (-40° to +70°C)
Storage Temperature: -67° to +185°F (-55° to +85°C)
Box Dimensions: 15.4 X 13.4 X 8.5 (340.6 mm X 215.9 mm)
75
Shipping Weight: 9.5 lbs (4.3 kg)

78
171
80
How to Order

32700190 ML25-FP: PV25 flat only, PTO Ramp throttle method, 12/24 VDC Flat panel
32700191 ML25: PV25 enclosed, PTO Ramp throttle method, 12/24 VDC Enclosed panel
ML25-T4-FP: PV25 flat only w/ T4 switch, PTO Ramp T4 Rocker
32700192 Flat panel
throttle method, 12/24 VDC
ML25-T4: PV25 enclosed w/ T4 switch, PTO Ramp T4 Rocker
32700193 Enclosed panel
throttle method, 12/24 VDC
172
5
sect. 30 1211015
rev. 2014/11/03
ML50 Panels
10
The MurphyLink Series ML50 Panels feature PVCAN
gages and the PowerView™ PV25, an engine and
15
diagnostic display in an economical and compact
package. This J1939-compliant device provides
electronic engine parameter data, is simple to install and
matches the PowerView line of rugged displays. The
PV25 can be powered by 12 or 24 volt systems.
20
The PV25 is equipped with two push buttons to
quickly access a convenient menu. In addition, a back
lit graphic display and two LEDs indicate Active-fault
25
Indicator) and the OC (Occurrence Count) using the SAE Dimensions
J1939 protocol.
Features
30
• Compact J1939-compliant device for electronically
controlled engines
• Displays up to 20 standard J1939 parameters
• Active and stored diagnostic trouble codes
40
• Analog gages
• Provides enhanced visual alarm indication
using bright alarm and shutdown LEDs
Specifications
50
Operating Voltage:
12/24 VDC (6.5-32VDC Minimum and Maximum Voltage) Operating
Current: 1.2A MAX
Mounting: 4-.75 in. Rubber Isolated Shockmounts
55
Starting Method: KeySwitch
Stopping Method: KeySwitch
Display: PowerView Model 25 Indication Gages
1) Engine Temperature
2) Engine Oil Pressure
70
3) Engine Speed (Analog Tachometer)
Indication Lamps: One red, One Amber via PV25 Display
Enclosure Material: Powder-Coated Cold Rolled Steel
Throttle Method: Rocker Switch (Digital Inputs to ECU)
Tier 4 Regeneration: CAN Enabled (via PV25) or Rocker Switch
75
(via Digital Input to ECU)

Operational Temperature: -40° to +158°F (-40° to +70°C)
Storage Temperature: -55° to +185°F (-67° to +85°C)
Box Dimensions: 15.4 X 13.4 X 8.5 (391 X 340.4 X 216 mm)
Shipping Weight: 10.5 lbs (4.8 kg)
78
173
80
How to Order

ML50-FP: PV25 with gages flat only, PTO Ramp throttle method,
32700212 Flat panel
12/24 VDC
ML50: PV25 with gages enclosed, PTO Ramp throttle method,
12/24 VDC
ML50-T4-FP: PV25 with gages flat only w/ T4 switch, PTO Ramp
32700214 Flat panel
T4 Rocker throttle method, 12/24 VDC
ML50-T4: PV25 with gages enclosed w/ T4 switch, PTO Ramp T4
Rocker throttle method, 12/24 VDC
174
5
sect. 30 1211016
rev. 2014/11/03
ML100 Panels
10
The MurphyLink® Series ML100 Panel features the
PV101-C display, which was developed to meet the
15
needs for instrumentation and control on electronically
controlled engines communicating using the SAE J1939
Controller Area Network (CAN).
This basic panel contains a key switch, increment/
decrement throttle and the PowerView. This standard
20
panel can be ordered with or without an enclosure,
because all of the components are assembled to a
stand-alone flat panel. Optional mounting kits are
offered for the enclosure, which provide packagers
and operators numerous mounting solutions to meet
multiple applications. Panel designs are offered to
25
meet the needs of specific engine models. In addition,
Murphy offers standard wiring harnesses for quick plug- Dimensions
and-go operation that interface with all the second-
generation MurphyLink PowerView panels.
The PV101 Display is a multifunction tool that enables
equipment operators to view many different engine
30
or transmission parameters and service codes. The
PowerView includes a graphical, backlighted LCD
screen. It has excellent contrast and viewing from all
angles. The display can show either a single parameter
or a quadrant display for viewing four parameters
40
simultaneously. Diagnostic capabilities include fault
codes with text translation for the most common fault
conditions.
The PowerView has four buttons using touch-
sensitive technology, which eliminates the concern for
push button wear and failure. In addition, operators
50
can navigate the display with ease. Enhanced alarm
indication uses ultra bright alarm and shutdown LEDs
(amber and red). The PowerView has a wide operating
temperature range of -40° to185°F (-40° to +85°C),
display viewing -20° to185°F (-29° to +85°C) and
55
environmental sealing to +/- 5 PSI.
Features
• Standard Panel Designed for Modern Electronic
Engines and Equipment Applications Using SAE
J1939 Controller Area Network (CAN) 70
• PowerView Model 101 Displays More Than 50
Standard SAE J1939 Parameters Broadcast by
Major Engine and Transmission Manufacturers
75
ECUs
• Display Active Faults and ECU-Stored Faults with
Text Description on Most Common Faults for
Diagnosing Equipment Malfunctions
• Standard Harnesses Available for Most Major
Engine Manufacturers ECUs
78
• Enclosed Design or Flat Panel Option
175
80
Specifications
Operating Voltage: Throttle Method:

12/24 VDC (6.5-32VDC Minimum and Maximum Voltage) Rocker Switch (Digital Inputs to ECU)
Operating Current: 1A MAX TSC1 CAN Throttling (via PV101)
Mounting: 4-.75” Rubber Isolated Shockmounts Tier 4 Regeneration:
Starting Method: KeySwitch CAN Enabled (via PV101) or Rocker Switch (via Digital Input to ECU)
Stopping Method: KeySwitch Operational Temperature: -40° to +185°F (-40° to +85°C)
Display: PowerView Model 101-C Viewable Temperature: -20° to +185°F (-29° to +85°C)
Indication Lamps: One red, One Amber via PV101-C Display Storage Temperature: -40° to +185°F (-40° to +85°C)
Enclosure Material: Powder-Coated Cold Rolled Steel Box Dimensions: 15.4 X 13.4 X 8.5 (391 X 340.4 X 216 mm)
Wiring Interface: 1-Deutsch HDP 21pin Connector Shipping Weight: 9.5 lbs (4.3 kg)
How to Order

32700198 ML100-FP: PV101 Flat only, PTO Ramp throttle Flat panel
32700199 ML100: PV101 Enclosed, PTO Ramp throttle Enclosed panel
ML100-T4-FP: PV101 Flat only w/ T4 switch, PTO Ramp T4 Rocker
32700200 Flat panel
throttle
ML100-T4: PV101 Enclosed w/ T4 switch, PTO Ramp T4 Rocker
throttle
176
5
sect. 30 1211017
rev. 2014/11/03
ML150 Panels
10
The MurphyLink® Series ML150 Panels include the
PowerView™ PV101-C display and the M-Link™
15
PowerView Analog gages. They are part of the J1939
MurphyLink Family developed to meet the needs for
instrumentation and control on electronically controlled
engines communicating using the SAE J1939 Controller
Area Network (CAN).
20
The PV101 display is a multifunction tool that enables
equipment operators to view many different engine or
transmission parameters and service codes. The panels
provide a window into modern electronic engines.
The PowerView includes a graphical backlighted LCD
screen. It has excellent contrast and viewing from all
25
angles. The display can show either a single parameter
or a quadrant display for viewing four parameters Dimensions
simultaneously. Diagnostic capabilities include fault
codes with text translation for the most common fault
conditions.
Other components in the panels are microprocessor-
30
based M-Link PowerView Analog Gages for displaying
critical engine data broadcast by an electronic engine:
engine RPM, oil pressure and coolant temperature.
The ML150 Series panels are available in an enclosure
or stand-alone flat panel option that can be dropped
40
into a dash or console. This standard panel can be
ordered with or without an enclosure. Optional mounting
kits are offered for the enclosure, which provide
packagers and operators numerous mounting solutions
to meet multiple applications.
50
Features
• Standard Panel Designed for Modern Electronic
Engines and Equipment Applications Using SAE
J1939 Controller Area Network (CAN)
55
• PowerView Model 101 Displays More Than 30
Standard SAE J1939 Parameters Broadcast by
Major Engine and Transmission Manufacturers’
ECUs
• Display Active Faults and ECU-Stored Faults with
Text Description on Most Common Faults for
•
Diagnosing Equipment Malfunctions
Standard Harnesses Available for Most Major
70
Engine Manufacturers ECUs
• Enclosed Design or Flat Panel Option
75
78
177
80
Specifications
Operating Voltage: Throttle Method:

12/24 VDC (8-32VDC Minimum and Maximum Voltage) Rocker Switch (Digital Inputs to ECU) or Hand Throttle (PWM or 0-5V)
Operating Current: 1.4A MAX TSC1 CAN Throttling (via PV101)
Mounting: 4-.75” Rubber Isolated Shockmounts Tier 4 Regeneration:
Starting Method: KeySwitch CAN Enabled (via PV101) or Rocker Switch (via Digital Input to ECU)
Display: PowerView Model PV101-C Viewable Temperature: -29° to +185°F (-20° to +85°C)
Indication Lamps: One red, One Amber via PV101-C Display Storage Temperature: -40° to +185°F (-40° to +85°C
Enclosure Material: Powder-Coated Cold Rolled Steel Box Dimensions: 21.5 X 13.5 X 8.5 (546 X 343 X 216 mm)
Wiring Interface: 1-Deutsch HDP 21pin Connector Shipping Weight: 16.0 lbs (7.3 kg)
How to Order

32700202 ML150-FP: PV101 Flat only, PTO Ramp throttle Flat panel
32700203 ML150: PV101 Enclosed, PTO Ramp throttle Enclosed panel
ML150-T4-FP: PV101 Flat only w/ T4 switch, PTO Ramp T4
32700204 Flat panel
Rocker throttle
ML150-T4: PV101 Enclosed w/ T4 switch, PTO Ramp T4 Rocker
throttle
ML150-ES-MT5V-FP: PV101 Flat only Stop Button, Morse 5V,
32700216 Flat panel
PWM Morse & E-Stop throttle
ML150-ES-MT5V: PV101 Enclosed Stop Button, Morse 5V, PWM
Morse & E-Stop throttle
ML150-T4-ES-MT5V-FP: PV101 Flat only Stop Button, Morse 5V
32700206 Flat panel
w/ T4 switch, PWM Morse & E-Stop throttle
ML150-T4-ES-MT5V: PV101 Enclosed Stop Button, Morse 5V w/
T4 switch, PWM Morse & E-Stop throttle
ML150-ES-MTPWM-FP: PV101 Flat only Stop Button, Morse
32700218 Flat panel
PWM, 0-5V Morse & E-Stop throttle
ML150-ES-MTPWM: PV101 Enclosed Stop Button, Morse PWM,
0-5V Morse & E-Stop throttle
ML150-T4-ES-MTPWM-FP: PV101 Flat only Stop Button, Morse
32700208 Flat panel
PWM w/ T4 switch, 0-5V Morse & E-Stop throttle
ML150-T4-ES-MTPWM: PV101 Enclosed Stop Button, Morse
PWM w/ T4 switch, 0-5V Morse & E-Stop throttle
178
5
sect. 30 1211018
rev. 2014/11/03
ML300 Panels
10
The MurphyLink® Series ML300 Panels include the new
PowerView™ PV300, a robust, multifunction control
15
panel that provides advanced monitoring of electronic
engines designed to meet Tier 4/Euro Stage IV
emissions requirements. The model PV300-P monitors
multiple engine and machine parameters on an easy-to-
20
read 3.8-inch (97 mm) QVGA monochrome LCD.
The panel is capable of handling sophisticated engine
diagnostics as well as basic engine alarm/shutdown
with integrated throttle control. The PV300 provides
monitoring of Tier 4/Euro Stage 4 compliant electronic
25
engines, monitors multiple J1939 parameters and
provides basic engine alarm/shutdown with integrated Dimensions
throttle control. Throttling communicates through
TSC1 on the J1939 CAN network. The regeneration
commands for inhibit and forced-regeneration
30
communicate through J1939 CAN protocol.
Features
40
• Tier 4/Euro Stage IV ready
• Superior Display Visibility Even in Bright Sunlight
• Back-Mounted Display for Seamless Panel
Integration
• Integrated CAN Communication Using SAE J1939
50
• Rugged Enclosure Using Industry Standard
Deutsch Connectors
• Circuit Protection and Diagnostics
55
70
75
78
179
80
Specifications
Operating Voltage: Throttle Method: TSC1 CAN Throttling (via PV300 Tactile Rocker)
12/24 VDC (9-32VDC Minimum and Maximum Voltage) - Increment/Decrement
Operating Current: 1.2A MAX - Idle/Run
Mounting: 4 - .75” Rubber Isolated Shockmounts - Idle, Run 1, Run 2
Starting Method: KeySwitch Tier 4 Regeneration: CAN Enabled (via PV300 Tactile Rocker)
Display: PowerView Model 300 Storage Temperature: -40° to +185°F (-40° to +85°C)
Indication Lamps: One red, One Amber via PV300 Display Box Dimensions: 15.4 X 13.4 X 8.5 (391 X 340.4 X 216 mm)
Enclosure Material: Powder Coated Cold Rolled Steel Shipping Weight: 10.0 lbs (4.5 kg)
How to Order

32700210 ML300: 12/24-Volt Enclosed panel
180
5
sect. 30 1411441
rev. 2014/11/10
ML2000 Panel
10
The MurphyLink Series ML2000 Panel, engineered and
built by Enovation Controls’ Industrial Panel Division, is
15
a superior panel offering which includes the powerful,
yet simple-to-configure MPC-20 Controller. This
controller is part of the Murphy PowerCore family and
was developed to meet the need of manual or automatic
control whether it’s starting/stopping, throttling or both.
20
This controller also has the flexibility to be used on
either mechanically or electronically governed engines
supporting SAE J1939 CAN communications.
The ML2000 panel has the ability for the software
to be fully configured from the front user interface or Specifications
25
PC configuration tool. If the default parameters set
by Enovation Controls are not the desired set points MPC-20 Controller
for a factory default reset, the packager or operator Operating Voltage: 8-32VD
has the ability to change these settings with the PC Operating Temperature: -40° to +85°C (-40° to 185°F)
configuration tool then load with a USB thumb drive1 Storage Temperature: -40° to +85°C (-40° to 185°F)
30
and USB programming harness1. The configuration Total Current Consumption:
tool also allows for the splash screen to incorporate a 18W Max without 2 2A High-sides active,
company logo when powered on. 146W Max with 2 2A High-sides active
The flexibility of the MPC-20 controller allows for Enclosure: Powder-coated cold rolled steel or polycarbonate
the same control panel to be used across many Mating Connectors:
40
applications. This provides the operator familiarity with 21 Position, Deutsch HDP26-24-21SE,
the controller and control panel in any application. 31 Position, Deutsch HDP26-24-31SE
The Control Panel utilizes industry standard Deutsch Shipping Weights:
connectors and is compatible for use on the simplest ML2000: 13 lbs (5.9kg)
mechanical engine to the most advanced, fully ML2000-FP: 7 lbs (3.17kg)
50
electronic Tier 4 engines, when used with the correct ML2000-4X: 11 lbs (4.99kg)
Murphy Industrial Harness2 (MIH) or John Deere OEM Communications: CAN (SAE J1939) and RS-485 Modbus
engine harnessing. Outputs (13):
The ML2000 Series panels are available in two rugged (2) 1A Max Low-side
enclosures or a stand-alone flat panel option that can (2) 2A Max High-side
55
be dropped into an existing panel or engine surround/ (2) 200mA Max 5VDC
dog house. The enclosure types to choose from are (1) 0-5VDC Analog
powder-coated cold rolled steel or polycarbonate (6) 10A Max Form C Relays
NEMA 4X. Optional mounting kits are offered for the Inputs (15):
sheet-metal enclosure, which provide packagers (8) Analog, configurable as Resistive, 0-5VDC or 4-20mA
70
(6) Digital, Configurable as Battery or Ground
multiple applications. (1) Frequency, (2Hz - 10KHz, 3.6VAC-120VAC)
1
USB thumb drive and programming harness sold separately from the
control panel.
2
75
Please contact Industrial Panel Sales for application specifics and

MIH harnessing.
78
181
80
Product and Mounting Dimensions
ML-2000
ML-20004X
How to Order

40700491 ML2000, Metal Control Panel
40700492 ML2000-4X, Polycarbonate, NEMA 4X Control Panel
40700497 ML2000-FP, Flat Control Panel
40700499 ML2000, Metal Control Panel (Spanish)
40700501 ML2000-4X, Polycarbonate, NEMA 4X Control Panel (Spanish) Spanish
40700502 ML2000-FP, Flat Control Panel (Spanish)
40000479 Deutsch Connector Kit, 21-pin & 31-pin, Panel Connector Kit
40000531 Deutsch Connector kit, 21-pin, Panel Connector Kit, Engine Only
78700046 Deutsch Connector kit, 31-pin, Panel Connector Kit, I/O Only
Harness, ML2000, Mechanical, 10’ Blunt, 21 Pos, 10’ Mechanical
40000553
Engine Whip Harness
40000565 Harness, ML2000, I/O, 10’ Blunt, 31 Pos, 10’ I/O Whip Harness
ML2000 USB Programming Harness, 6PIN to USB Programming
40000566
Harness
182
5
sect. 30 1211030
rev. 2014/11/03
Murphy Industrial Harnesses
10
The MurphyLink Series ML Panels are universal to all
engines. The adaptation to the engines will be through
15
the MIH Harness, which is built to the specifications
of each engine manufacturer and customer. When
requesting the MIH Harness, specific information will
be obtained so that the correct harness may be built for
20
your engine.
Features
• Connect any MurphyLink Panel to Major Engine
Manufacturers’ Engines
25
• Customizable Per Specific Customer Application
and Requirement
• Standard 21-Pin Deutsch Connector Interface
• Manufactured in the USA
• Built to Strict Quality Standards for Long-Term
30
Reliability
How to Order
Part
40
Model and Description Engine MFG
Number
32000137 MIH-CA-40P-T2-ADEM3-6: CAT W/PTO
32000138 MIH-CA-64P-T3-A4E2-6: Works with C4.4 & 6.6
32000160 MIH-CA-70P-IT4-A4E4-6: Works with CAT C18-32
50
32000148 MIH-CA-70P-IT4-A4E4-6-12VDC: Works with IT4 C9.3, C13, C15, C18 (<750 hp)
Caterpillar
32000150 MIH-CA-70P-IT4-A4E4-6-24VDC: Works with IT4 C9.3, C13, C15, C18 (<750 hp)
32000159 MIH-CA-70P-IT4-C4.4-12VDC: Works with only IT4 C4.4
32000151 MIH-CA-70P-IT4-C7.1-6-12VDC: Works with only IT4 C7.1
55
32000171 MIH-CA-70P-T3-A4-6: Works with C series tier 3 except 4.4 and 6.6
32000149 MIH-CU-50P-T2-CM570-12: Works with QSM/QSX
32000134 MIH-CU-50P-T2-CM570-6: Works with QSM/QSX
Cummins
32000147 MIH-CU-50P-T3-CM850-12: QSB4.5/EMS PRO, works with QSB, QSC, QSL
32000152 MIH-CU-60P-IT4-CM2250-6: Works with QSB6.7, QSL9, QSX11.9, QSX15 70
32000168 MIH-DD-30P-T3-DDECIII/DDECIV-6: Works with DDEC III/IV ECM
Detroit Diesel
32000139 MIH-DD-68P-T3-DDECV-6: Works with 50/60 Series, DDEC V ECM
32090037 MIH-JCB-62P-T3-DCM3.3-6: Connect M110/310 panels to ECM JCB
75
32000166 MIH-SCANIA-8P/6P-DC-13-24V: Scania

Perkins, Iveco
32000170 Hanress, T4, C3.4/P854 IOPU: Has mini harness to connect with IOPU
and Fiat
78001035 MIH, extension harness, 6 foot long
78
78000294 MIH, extension harness, 12 foot long All

78000293 MIH, extension harness, 20 foot long
183
80
184
5
sect. 30 1211179
rev. 2014/11/6
Marine Engine Panel Series
10
Local and Remote
Maximize the monitoring and alarm capabilities for your mechanical engine with Murphy’s panel solutions
designed specifically for commercial marine applications. The 100 Series and 300 Series provide the durability,
15
reliability and functionality essential for your engine and offer a broad range of features from which to choose.
• Designed Specifically for Commercial Marine, Mechanical Engine Applications

• Full and Broad Compliment of Features and Functionality
• High-Quality Construction and Components Designed to Withstand the Rigors of Marine Life
20
• Local and Remote Panel Options
MLP 100
25
Indication Gages: Mounting: Shock Mounts
Water Temperature (Engine Coolant Temperature) Panel Material: Polycarbonate
Oil Pressure (Engine Oil Pressure) Style: Enclosed
Voltage (Voltmeter) Voltage: 12-V or 24-V
Engine Speed (Analog Tachometer/ Digital Hour Meter) Max Current Draw: 13 Amps
Inputs: Starting Method: Key Switch
30
Battery (+) Stopping Method:
Battery (-) Key Switch or Engine Stop Button
Magnetic Pickup Wiring Interface:
Engine Oil Pressure 1-Deutsch HDP 21 pin
Engine Temperature & 1 Deutsch HDP 31 pin Connectors
Outputs: Remote/ Local Switch: Toggle Switch
40
Engine Crank for Switching Between Local and Remote Modes of Operation
Engine Stop Signal
MRP 100
50
Indication Lamps: Outputs:
5-First Out Fault Indication Lamps Utilizing Murphy’s ST5 Annun- Remote Start
ciator Remote Stop Signal
1-Power On Lamp Utilizing Murphy’s ST5 Annunciator Mounting: Countersunk Screw
Indication Gages: Holes (size 6 to 8 screws)
Engine Speed (Analog Tachometer/ Digital Hour Meter) Panel Material: Polycarbonate
55
Inputs: Style: Flat Panel
Battery (+) Voltage: 12-V or 24-V
Battery (-) Max Current Draw: 13 Amps
Magnetic Pickup Starting Method: Key Switch
Remote Stop Signal Line In Stopping Method:
Warning Oil Pressure Key Switch or Engine Stop Button
70
Warning Coolant Temperature Wiring Interface: 1-Terminal Block 16 Position
75
78
185
80
MLP 300
Indication Lamps: Outputs:
System Power Green Incandescent Lamp Engine Crank
Water Temperature High Red Incandescent Lamp Engine Stop Signal
Overspeed Red Incandescent Lamp Mounting: Shock Mounts
Oil Pressure Low Red Incandescent Lamp Panel Material: Polycarbonate
Warning Red Incandescent Lamp Style: Enclosed
Indication Gages: Voltage: 12-V or 24-V
Water Temperature (Engine Coolant Temperature) Max Current Draw: 13 Amps
Oil Pressure (Engine Oil Pressure) Starting Method: Key Switch
Voltage (Voltmeter) Stopping Method:
Engine Speed (Analog Tachometer/ Digital Hour Meter) Engine Stop Push Button
Gear Oil Pressure Wiring Interface:
Exhaust (Pyrometer) 1-Deutsch HDP 21 pin
Crankcase Pressure (Water Column Pressure) & 1 Deutsch HDP 31 pin Connectors
Inputs: Remote/ Local Switch: Toggle Switch for Switching Between
Battery (+) Local and Remote Modes of Operation
Battery (-)
Magnetic Pickup
Engine Temperature
MRP 300
Indication Lamps: Engine Oil Pressure
10-First Out Fault Indication Lamps Utilizing Murphy’s ST10 An- Engine Coolant Temperature
nunciator Gear Oil Pressure
1-Power On Lamp Utilizing Murphy’s ST10 Annunciator Outputs:
1-Engine Warning Red Incandescent Lamp Remote Start
Indication Gages: Remote Stop Signal
Water Temperature (Engine Coolant Temperature) Mounting: Countersunk Screw
Oil Pressure (Engine Oil Pressure) Holes (size 6 to 8 screws)
Engine Speed (Digital Tachometer) Panel Material: Polycarbonate
Gear Oil Pressure + D14 Style: Flat Panel
Inputs: Voltage: 12-V or 24-V
Battery (+) Max Current Draw: 13 Amps
Battery (-) Starting Method: Key Switch
Magnetic Pickup Stopping Method: Engine Stop Push Button
Remote Stop Signal Line In Dimmer: Local Dimmer knob (Adjustment to Gage Backlights)
Warning Oil Pressure Wiring Interface: 1- Terminal Block 16 Position
Warning Coolant Temperature
Warning Gear Oil Pressure
Warning Crankcase Pressure
Warning Overspeed
How to Order

30090496 MLP 100: Marine Local Panel 12-V
30090497 MRP 100: Marine Remote Panel 12- or 24-V
30090489 MLP 300: Marine Local Panel 12-V
30090488 MRP 300: Marine Remote Panel 12-V
30090510 MLP100-24V: Marine Local Panel 24-V
30090512 MRP300-24V: Marine Remote Panel 24-V
30090511 MLP300-24V: Marine Local Panel 24-V
186
5
Section 40 Engine and Motor Controls
10
0810288 Keystart 9620 Series — Engine/Generator Controls�� 189
0810330 CANstart™ 9630 Series — Engine/Generator Controls�� 191
Auto Start Controllers

05195 Cascade Controller — Auto-Start/Stop �� 193
15
0910438 Automatic Engine Controller — Model AEC101�� 195
Digital Engine Controller

1411425 PowerCore™ MPC-20�� 197
20
1411441 ML 2000 Panel — MurphyLink® Series�� 199
1010554 EMS Pro — Engine Monitoring System Controller�� 201
1110770 EMS Pro Lite — Engine Monitoring System Controller�� 203
25
0910462 Murphymatic® TR Series — Transformer Relay Assemblies�� 205
Ignition Controls
1311391 IntelliSpark™ — Ignition Controller System�� 209
30
0910517 601 Series CD Ignition — Ignition Control Systems�� 211
0910515 Detonation Sensing Interface System — Model DSI �� 213
0910513 Ignition Coils — Ignition Control Systems �� 215
40
0910514 Murphy Brushless Alternators — Power Supply�� 217
Air/Fuel Ratio Controls

0910476 AFR-1R — Rich Burn Air/Fuel Ratio Control System�� 219
0910477 AFR-9R — Rich-Burn Air/Fuel Ratio Controller �� 221
50
0910475 AFR-64R — Rich Burn Air/Fuel Ratio Control System�� 223
0910491 AFR-64L — Lean Burn Air/Fuel Ratio Control System�� 225
1010670 EICS — Engine Integrated Control System �� 227
55
Rack Pullers
00092 Pull/Push DC Solenoids for Diesel Engines — RP Series�� 229
95028 Rack Puller for Diesel Engines — Model RP75�� 233
Throttle Controller
04052 Murphymatic® Engine Throttle Controller— Model AT03069�� 237 70
Clutch Controller
01035 Electric Motor Driven Clutch Operator for Engine Automation Systems �� 239
75
78
187
80
188
5
sect. 40 & 75 0810288
rev. 2014/10/28
Keystart 9620 Series
10
Engine/Generator Controls
Keystart 9620 and 9621 control modules provide
manual start/stop and automatic fault protection for
15
generators, pumps and other engine-driven applica-
tions. Outputs allow control of engine fuel (energized to
run), starter motor and preheat. The Keystart also has
an alarm output for remote or audible warning of faults.
Six LEDs and icons indicate engine status and faults.
20
Four switch inputs (closing to negative on fault) enable
automatic shutdown on engine low oil pressure, high
coolant temperature and auxiliary faults. Model 9621
has a fully adjustable engine overspeed shutdown
feature, configurable for either generator AC or
25
magnetic pickup speed signals. Charge alternator
excitation and a charge fail warning LED are standard.
Electrical connection is by quick-connect, spring-
clamp terminal blocks. A universal 7 to 30VDC power
supply permits operation with 12 or 24VDC engine
batteries, with standard engine crank-dip voltage
30
protection.
Keystarts (with the key removable only in the stop/reset
position) are mounted in the front through a standard
cutout and secured at the rear with quick-fit clips.
Epoxy resin case encapsulation gives superior vibration/
40
shock resistance and environmental protection.
Specifications Typical Connections

Power Supply
50
Operating voltage, steady state: 7 to 30VDC
Operating voltage, brown out/cranking: 5VDC minimum
Current consumption: <100mA
Inputs
Fault switch inputs: close to negative DC during fault
Generator AC input (model 9621 only):
55
70 - 270 VAC rms, <50 to >60 Hz nominal
Magnetic pickup input (model 9621 only):
3.5 - 21 VAC rms, <2000 to >6500 Hz nominal
Outputs (all ratings non-reactive)
Run (fuel): positive DC, NO relay contacts, 10A max @ 24VDC
Start (crank): positive DC, keyswitch contacts, 10A max @
70
24VDC
Alarm: negative DC (open collector transistor), 300 mA max
Speed calibration: to suit 0-1mA, 75 Ohm meter,
output=0.75mA at rated engine speed.
Adjustable settings
Preheat timer: 0 or 10 secs, default = 0 secs
75
Fault override timer: 2 to 20 secs (VR1), default = 10 secs

Overspeed trip level (model 9621 only): 100 to 130% (VR3) of
nominal calibrated speed, default = 110% (of 50 or 60 Hz)
Physical
Case material: polycarbonate / polyester
Overall dimensions: (w x h x d): 3.8 x 3.8 x 3.7 in.
78
(96 x 96 x 95mm)
Panel cut-out size: DIN 3.6 x 3.6 in. (92 x 92mm)
Weight: approx 0.7 lb. / 300g
Operating temperature: -31° to 131°F / -35° to 55°C
189
80
Operation, Connections and Settings
Front View and Operation Rear View, Connection & Settings
LED Indication
run (fuel) on - green
preheat on - amber
low oil pressure
fault shutdown - red
high engine temperature
overspeed/aux 2 fault
charge fail
warning - red
aux 1 fault
shutdown - red
4 Position Keyswitch
Off/Reset.
Removes power, stops the engine and resets any
latched shutdown fault.
Run.
Activates the run output and (if enabled) the timed
preheat output. Once the engine is fully running,
and after the override time, keystart immediately Configuration
shuts down the engine on detection of a fault. Use a 3 mm/0.1 in. flat head screwdriver for potentiometers VR1-
VR3
Start/crank. All models:
Maintains the run output, and activates the start J1 & J4: preheat output timing
(crank) output. Shutdown fault inputs are disabled - J1 ON: no preheat
and the fault override timer is reset. This position - J1 OFF, J4 OFF: preheat 10 secs fixed, unaffected by crank
spring-returns to I (run) on release. - J1 OFF, J4 ON: preheat 10 second max, canceled by crank.
VR1: Fault override, 2-20 secs, clockwise to increase.
Auxiliary. Model 9621 only:
Keyswitch auxiliary output, positive DC J2 & J3: speed sensing source (pins 13 and 14):
- both links ON for generator AC, 50/60Hz
- both links OFF for magnetic pickup, 2000 - 6500Hz
VR2: Speed calibration. Set J2 and J3 correctly, run engine to
nominal speed, adjust VR2 to give (pin 11) calibration output of
0.75mA
VR3: Overspeed, 100 - 130% of VR2 setting, clockwise to increase
How to Order
Part Number Model / Description Notes

KEY9620 K2 KEY9620 (with overspeed protection)
KEY 9621 (with overspeed protection, selectable AC Keyswitch Type K2, rubberized
KEY9621 K2
generator or magnetic pickup sensing)*
41700157 Spare mounting clips (pack of 4)
65700256 Spare keyswitch (K2 type), includes key Accessories / Spares
00003235 Spare key (K2 type)
00-02-0657 Keystart 9620/9621 Installation Instructions Further Information
*Factory default setting is for AC generator sensing, calibrated to either 50 or 60 Hz nominal. Non-standard (NS)
setting options are available to order.
190
5
sect. 40 & 75 0810330
rev. 2014/10/28
CANstart™ 9630 Series
10
CANstart™ 9631 and 9632 modules provide operator
start/stop control, panel gage driving, fault indication,
15
and auxiliary shutdown protection for ECU-controlled,
CAN bus SAE J1939 compatible engines. These
compact controllers can be used with generators,
pumps and other engine-driven applications.
Operator control is through a four-position keyswitch.
20
The key is common to all CANstarts and is removable
only in the stop/reset position. Six LEDs and icons
indicate engine/ECU status and faults. Two of these
LEDS (with associated inputs) provide for auxiliary fault
shutdown and charge alternator fail excitation.
CANstart has two protected (positive DC) FET outputs
25
for the control of ECU engine run and starter motor.
Three additional outputs drive analog panel gages
(Murphy, VDO or Datcon) based on ECU-transmitted
data for engine speed, oil pressure or coolant
temperature.
30
All units include adjustable engine overspeed
protection: model 9631 provides automatic overspeed
shutdown for variable speed applications; model 9632
is configured for fixed-speed 1500/1800 RPM genset
use.
DIP switches at the rear allow setup of control and
40
gage output options. Electrical connection is by
spring-clamp terminals, including a universal 8-32VDC
power supply for operation with 12 or 24VDC engine
batteries. Engine cranking supply brownout protection Specifications
is standard.
CANstart is panel-front mounted through a standard
50
Power Supply
cutout and secured at the rear with quick-fit clips. Operating Voltage, steady state: 8 to 32 VDC
Epoxy resin case gives superior vibration/shock Operating Voltage, brownout / cranking: 5 VDC minimum
Current consumption: < 100 mA
resistance and environmental protection. Inputs
CAN bus: SAE J1939 protocol, switchable 120 Ohm terminating
Typical Connection resistor
55
Auxiliary Shutdown (x2): close to negative DC during fault
Run (ECU), start (crank): positive DC (protected FET), 6A max @
32 VDC
Alarm: negative DC (open collector transistor), 250mA max @ 32
VDC
Oil pressure gage: suitable for Murphy, VDO 5 or 10 Bar,
70
Datcon 7 or 10 Bar.
Engine temperature gage: suitable for Murphy, VDO or Datcon
Tachometer: for use with charge alternator driven tachometers
Adjustable Settings
Model 9631 (variable speed engines)
Overspeed level: 1250 - 2800 RPM (50 RPM increments) or off
Model 9632 (fixed speed engines/gensets)
75
Nominal speed: 1500 or 1800 RPM

Overspeed level: 1 - 15% of nominal speed (1% increments) or
off
Physical
Electromagnetic capability: 2004/108/EC
Case Material: polycarbonate / polyester
78
Overall dimensions (w x h x d): 3.8 x 3.8 x 5.2 in. (96 x 96 x

131mm)
Panel cutout size: DIN 3.6 x 3.6 in. (92 x 92 mm)
Weight: approx. 0.6 lb / 240g
Operating Temperature: -4° to 167°F / -2° to 75°C
191
80
Connection
1 -DC power supply
2 +DC power supply
3 run (ECU) output, +DC, 6A max
4 start (crank) output, +DC, 6A max
5 alarm output, -DC, 250 mA max
6 charge fail (alternator WL)
7 aux 1 input, -DC to activate
9 oil pressure gage output
10 coolant temp gage output
11 tachometer output
12 CAN screen
4 Position Keyswitch 13 CAN high
Off/Reset. 14 CAN low
latched shutdown fault. S1 - S5 DIP Switch Settings
Run. Note: switch S6 reserved for future use.
and after the override time, Keystart immediately
shuts down the engine on detection of a fault.
Start/crank.
Maintains the run output and activates the start
(crank) output. Shutdown fault inputs are disabled
and the fault override timer is reset. This position
spring-returns to I (run) on release.
Auxiliary.
Keyswitch auxiliary output, positive DC
DP1 digital potentiometer setting (with S5 above)

Overspeed shutdown set point: see installation instructions
for details.
How to Order

CST9631: Keyswitch K2 (Type 2, rubberized)
CST9631 K2 Default overspeed setting is 1250 RPM. (For variable speed
engines, overspeed setting range 1250 - 2800 RPM.) Non-standard (NS)
CST9632: Keyswitch K2 (Type 2, rubberized) settings/options are
Default overspeed setting is 110% of 1500 or 1800 RPM (please available to order.
CST9632 K2
specify). (For fixed speed engines/gensets, overspeed setting
range 100-115% of 1500/1800 RPM.)
65700256 Spare keyswitch (K2 type), incl. key
Accessories and spare
parts
Various EG/EGS series Electric Gage & Swichgage
Various ATA/ATHA series tachometers & tachourmeters
192
5
sect. 40 & 75 05195
rev. 2014/10/30
Cascade Controller
10
Auto-Start/Stop
The Cascade controller offers automatic start and stop
15
control with easy configuration for a broad number of
applications.
This auto-start controller is designed to fit any
engine-driven application requiring a simple and
robust automatic start and stop sequence. Pumps,
20
compressors, grinders, power units and generators are
just a few of the industrial applications for the controller.
The Cascade controller is fully compatible with
all major engine types. Whether you are running
mechanical or J1939 engines, the controller will work
25
with your application.
Murphy offers unique features at a competitive price
with the Cascade controller.
Features Dimensions
30
• Durability: Encapsulated to protect it against dirt,
water and dust, along with a compression gasket
to fully seal it to the panel. Cascade is rated
40
NEMA4 and IP65
• Low Battery Blackouts: Operates in total blackout
for a minimum of two seconds
• Compatibility: Accepts MPU, AC Frequency and
ECU speed signals and can operate with standard
50
and J1939 engines
• Inputs and Outputs: The Cascade Inputs and
Outputs are ruggedly protected and fault tolerant.
• J1939 Ready: Works directly with Murphy’s J1939-
ready PowerView gages, just plug and go. No
55
sender is required.
• CD101 Cascade Configuration Tool: Allows quick
setup and loading of parameters into a Murphy
standard Cascade via a PC software tool.
70
75
78
193
80
Specifications
Power input: 9-35VDC continuous - operates during total black Outputs: 7 – 4 auxiliary, configurable (1A DC protected). 3 dedicated
out for 2 seconds minimum. outputs for crank, fuel/ECU, alternator excitation
Power consumption: Sleep Mode (Manual): 1mA typical; Sleep Crank attempts: 3, 5, 10, Continuous
mode (Automatic): 4mA typical. Running mode (manual): 20mA Crank Rest: 5-60 seconds, adjustable
typical; Running mode (Automatic): 24mA typical. Shutdown lockout time delay: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds
Operating/Storage temperature: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C) Crank disconnect speed setting: Field settable 0-9999 RPM (16-
Humidity: 0-100%, non-condensing 60Hz AC freq input).
Housing: UV stabilized black polycarbonate and epoxy encapsu- Overspeed/underspeed trip point setting: ±5 to 50% of nominal.
lation. Weather tight and includes sealing gasket to keep mois- Speed sensing inputs: Magnetic pickup (5-120VAC RMS / 0-10 kHz)
ture and debris out of enclosure. Properly mounted controller will and AC frequency (30-600VAC RMS / 16-80 Hz)
maintain NEMA4 / IP65 rating of enclosure. CAN bus interface: Directly reads engine speed and engine status data
Vibration: Rated to 6G from SAE-J1939 enabled engines
Impact: Rated to 10G MODBUS interface: In J1939 applications, drives PVA series
Inputs: Dedicated digital inputs for low oil pressure, high engine tem- analog gages
perature, remote start, DC charge fail/alternator fail. Two auxiliary inputs Shipping Weight: 1 lb. (453 g) approximately
are configurable for multiple functions. Shipping Dimensions: 5.1 x 6.7 x 1.6 inch (130 x 10 x 41 mm) ap-
proximately
How to Order

40700259 CD101 Cascade Controller Controller
40090045 CD101 Cascade Configuration Kit Accessories
194
5
sect. 40 0910438
rev. 2014/10/21
Automatic Engine Controller
10
Model AEC101
The AEC101 Automatic Engine Controller provides
simple, yet sophisticated engine automation. It features
15
basic automatic start/stop capabilities plus other
features found on more advanced and expensive
controllers, all in an easy-to-install panel.
The AEC101 operates from 12- or 24-volt systems.
It includes crank and rest cycles, sensing circuits for
20
crank disconnect and overspeed, overcrank and re-
crank on false starts. The top LED for engine running
indicates when crank disconnect occurs. Four of the up
to six shutdown LEDs are dedicated for low oil pressure,
high engine temperature, overspeed and underspeed.
Two remaining LEDs can be established for first-out
25
shutdown indication through auxiliary inputs 1 and 2. Dimensions
The built-in oil pressure and water temperature
Swichgage® instruments provide visual indication and
can be set to initiate shutdown.
The electromechanical quartz-based hourmeter can
30
record up to 9,999.9 hours. It is housed in a shock-proof
case and built to be rugged and durable for a long life.
The Cascade controller allows manual or automatic LED’s
selection of the operation sequence. ENGINE RUNNING
ECU STATUS
Additional features of the AEC101 are an adjustable
40
REMOTE START/CRANK REST
LOW OIL PRESSURE
HIGH ENGINE TEMPERATURE ON
shutdown lockout delay, engine running indication LED, MAN OFF AUTO OVERSPEED
UNDERSPEED
advanced microprocessor technology and a convenient

OVERCRANK/START FAIL
OFF
CHARGE FAIL
AUXILIARY1
hat bracket design for simple engine mounting.

AUXILIARY2
Specifications
50
Operating Voltage: 9-35VDC – operates during total blackout for 2 Crank Attempts: 3, 5, 10, Continuous
seconds minimum Crank Rest: 5-60 seconds, Adjustable
Environmental Shutdown lockout time delay: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 sec.
Operating Temperature: -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F) Speed sensing input:
55
Storage Temperature: -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F) Magnetic pickup (5-120VAC RMS / 0-10 kHz)
Humidity: 0-100%, non-condensing AC frequency (30-600VAC RMS / 16-80 Hz)
Inputs: dedicated digital inputs for low oil pressure, high engine Crank disconnect speed setting: Field programmable 0-9999
temperature, remote call to run, DC charge fail/Alternator fail. Two RPM (16-60 Hz AC freq input)
auxiliary inputs are configurable for multiple functions. Housing: Powder-coated 14 gage cold rolled steel
Outputs: (7 total): Four configurable auxiliary sinking outputs (1A Shipping Weights: 7 lb. (3175 g) approximately
70
DC protected), three dedicated outputs for crank, fuel, alternator Shipping Dimensions: 12 x 12 x 5.5 in. (305 x 305 x 140 mm)
excitation. approximately
How to Order
75
Part Number Model Notes

Specify Model AEC101
Number
78
195
80
Sequence of Operation
The following sequence is pre-programmed into the AEC101:
Operation sequence with panel in Auto:
When the AEC101 receives an automatic start signal, the engine will begin to crank and the Shutdown Lockout
time delay will begin. The Shutdown Lockout Delay has two functions: 1) it allows the AEC101 to disregard signals
from the low oil pressure and high temperature SWICHGAGE® at engine start-up, and 2) if the engine false starts,
the recrank will be delayed to allow the engine to stop moving before engaging the starter. If the engine fails to start
after the set number of crank and rest attempts, the AEC101 will indicate an Overcrank LED. The engine will be
locked out from any further start attempts.
NOTE: All shutdown conditions can be reset by pressing the OFF button followed by pressing the Auto
button to initiate auto sequence.
Once Crank disconnect speed is reached the Engine Running LED will turn on steady. The engine will also run
at full governed speed while in operation. If the speed exceeds the Overspeed set point, the AEC101 will initiate
an engine shutdown, and the Overspeed LED will turn on. The engine will be locked out from any further start
attempts.
If low oil pressure or high temperature conditions occur while the engine is running, the AEC101 will shutdown the
engine, and the appropriate LED will turn on. The engine will be locked out from any further start attempts.
NOTE: The Shutdown Lockout Delay must have expired to get a shutdown on low oil pressure or high
engine temperature.
Operation sequence with panel in Manual:
When the Manual button on the Cascade controller is pressed, an automatic start signal is simulated. Therefore,
the controller will operate the same as it does in Auto. However, it will continue to run as long as there are no signals
from monitored conditions or until the Off or Auto buttons are pushed. Keep in mind, it will still shutdown the engine
if a monitored condition occurs such as low oil pressure, high engine temperature or loss of speed signal.
NOTE: This diagram

represents a typical
wiring scenario and is
not the schematic to
the panel. Everything
shown except Cascade
module, 20T, 20P
and Hourmeter are
customer supplied.
*
Hourmeter
+ -
*Always provide proper circuit protection with fuses or

circuit breakers.
196
5
sect. 40 1411425
rev. 2014/12/08
PowerCore ™ MPC-20
10
Murphy’s PowerCore MPC-20 is an all-purpose
industrial controller that stands up to some of the
harshest environments. This powerful controller is
15
targeted for engine-driven pumps and irrigation, with the
versatility to work in most engine-driven applications.
The controller can be mounted in a sealed control box
but is entirely sealed to meet and/or exceed an IP67
rating.
20
Easily viewable in full-sun conditions, the MPC-20 has Although a configuration tool is not required, it
a large 3.8-inch monochrome transflective LCD. Interim provides the ability to configure the controller’s set
and Final Tier 4 ISO symbols appear with engine and points on the PC and save them in a file for future
application information without the appearance of a loading. A standard set point configuration tool is
cluttered screen. included as a free download to allow customized default
25
The MPC-20 is configurable by the user to meet the settings for building application- or customer-specific
most versatile applications. The ease of initial setup of configurations.
the I/O does not leave the user feeling paralyzed when The MPC-20’s design has been proven through internal
an input is needed for a specific function. This allows and external testing including HALT (Highly Accelerated
for quicker uptime and less headache while on the Life Testing) and third-party approvals.
30
manufacturing floor or in the field.
Specifications
Display: 3.8” Monochrome LCD, Transflective, 320 x 240 QVGA Power Input: 8-32VDC, Reverse Polarity & Load Dump
40
with White Backlight Protection
Keypad: 11 Tactile Feedback Buttons Total Current Consumption: 18W Max without 2 2A High-
LEDs: (1) Red, Shutdown, (1) Amber, Warning, (1) Green, Auto sides, active, 146W Max with 2 2A High-sides active.
Mode Dimensions: 208.7mm (L) x 189.7mm (W) x 57.5mm (H)
Outputs: Mass: 0.9kg (2.0lb)
(2) 1A Max Low-side Operating Temperature: -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to 185°F)
50
(2) 2A Max High-side Storage Temperature: -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to 185°F)
(2) 200mA Max 5VDC EMI/RFI: SAE J1113
(1) 0-5VDC Analog Shock: 50G in X, Y, Z Axes
(6) 10A Max Form C Relays Vibration: Random, 7.86 Grms (5-2000Hz), 3 Axes
Inputs: Sealing: IP67 Complete Controller, IP66 Panel Mount with
(8) Analog, Configurable as Resistive, 0-5VDC, 4-20mA or Digital Gasket (Minimum 14Ga Metal Plate)
55
Ground Case: Polycarbonate
(6) Digital, Configurable as Battery or Ground Mating Connector: Delphi, SICMA 90 Position
(1) Frequency, (2Hz - 10KHz, 3.6VAC-120VAC) Shipping Weight: 2lbs. 7.1 oz (1.11 kg)
Communications: Shipping Dimensions: 9.5 x 9 x 5 in. (241 x 229 x 127 mm)
(1) CAN 2.0B, 250 kbps, J1939
(1) RS485, MODBUS RTU
70
(1) USB, Programming
How to Order
Part Number Model/Description

75
40700490 MPC-20 Controller

40700500 MPC-20 Controller, Spanish version
40051031 Panel Gasket, IP66, MPC-20
40700496 PowerCore 90 Position Connector Kit
78
40000554 PowerCore 90 Position 3’ Conn Whip Harness

40000567 Hand Crimper for PowerCore 90 Position Connector
197
80
Dimensions
Connectors
Delphi SICMA 90 Way Connector 1-30 Delphi SICMA 90 Way Connector 31-60 Delphi SICMA 90 Way Connector 61-90
PIN Function PIN Function PIN Function
1 Switched Power (+) 31 Power (+) 61 Power (+)
2 Ground (-) 32 Ground (-) 62 Ground (-)
3 Analog Input 1 (Resistive,0-5V,4-20mA) 33 Digital Input 1 (Power or Ground) 63 Digital Input 2 (Power or Ground)
6 Analog Input 4 (Resistive,0-5V,4-20mA) 36 Reserved 66 High-side FET 1 (2A Max)
7 Analog Input 5 (Resistive,0-5V,4-20mA) 37 Reserved 67 High-side FET 2 (2A Max)
8 Analog Input 6 (Resistive,0-5V,4-20mA) 38 Reserved 68 Reserved
9 Analog Input 7 (Resistive,0-5V,4-20mA) 39 Reserved 69 Frequency Input
10 Analog Input 8 (Resistive,0-5V,4-20mA) 40 Analog Output 70 Ground (-)
11 Reserved 41 Reserved 71 Reserved
12 RS485 Low 42 Reserved 72 CAN Low
13 RS485 High 43 Reserved 73 CAN High
16 USB D+ 46 USB D- 76 USB VBUS
17 USB Ground 47 USB Shield 77 USB ID
18 Relay 4 Normally Closed 48 Reserved 78 Relay 1 Normally Closed
19 Relay 4 Common 49 Reserved 79 Relay 1 Common
20 Relay 4 Normally Open 50 Reserved 80 Relay 1 Normally Open
29 Low-side FET 1 (1A Max) 59 Reserved 89 5VDC Output 1 (200mA Max)
30 Low-side FET 2 (1A Max) 60 Reserved 90 5VDC Output 2 (200mA Max)
198
5
sect. 40 1411441
rev. 2014/11/10
ML2000 Panel
10
The MurphyLink Series ML2000 Panel, engineered and
built by Enovation Controls’ Industrial Panel Division, is
15
a superior panel offering which includes the powerful,
yet simple-to-configure MPC-20 Controller. This
controller is part of the Murphy PowerCore family and
was developed to meet the need of manual or automatic
control whether it’s starting/stopping, throttling or both.
20
This controller also has the flexibility to be used on
either mechanically or electronically governed engines
supporting SAE J1939 CAN communications.
The ML2000 panel has the ability for the software
to be fully configured from the front user interface or Specifications
25
PC configuration tool. If the default parameters set
by Enovation Controls are not the desired set points MPC-20 Controller
for a factory default reset, the packager or operator Operating Voltage: 8-32VD
has the ability to change these settings with the PC Operating Temperature: -40° to +85°C (-40° to 185°F)
configuration tool then load with a USB thumb drive1 Storage Temperature: -40° to +85°C (-40° to 185°F)
30
and USB programming harness1. The configuration Total Current Consumption:
tool also allows for the splash screen to incorporate a 18W Max without 2 2A High-sides active,
company logo when powered on. 146W Max with 2 2A High-sides active
The flexibility of the MPC-20 controller allows for Enclosure: Powder-coated cold rolled steel or polycarbonate
the same control panel to be used across many Mating Connectors:
40
applications. This provides the operator familiarity with 21 Position, Deutsch HDP26-24-21SE,
the controller and control panel in any application. 31 Position, Deutsch HDP26-24-31SE
The Control Panel utilizes industry standard Deutsch Shipping Weights:
connectors and is compatible for use on the simplest ML2000: 13 lbs (5.9kg)
mechanical engine to the most advanced, fully ML2000-FP: 7 lbs (3.17kg)
50
electronic Tier 4 engines, when used with the correct ML2000-4X: 11 lbs (4.99kg)
Murphy Industrial Harness2 (MIH) or John Deere OEM Communications: CAN (SAE J1939) and RS-485 Modbus
engine harnessing. Outputs (13):
The ML2000 Series panels are available in two rugged (2) 1A Max Low-side
enclosures or a stand-alone flat panel option that can (2) 2A Max High-side
55
be dropped into an existing panel or engine surround/ (2) 200mA Max 5VDC
dog house. The enclosure types to choose from are (1) 0-5VDC Analog
powder-coated cold rolled steel or polycarbonate (6) 10A Max Form C Relays
NEMA 4X. Optional mounting kits are offered for the Inputs (15):
sheet-metal enclosure, which provide packagers (8) Analog, configurable as Resistive, 0-5VDC or 4-20mA
70
(6) Digital, Configurable as Battery or Ground
multiple applications. (1) Frequency, (2Hz - 10KHz, 3.6VAC-120VAC)
1
USB thumb drive and programming harness sold separately from the
control panel.
2
75
Please contact Industrial Panel Sales for application specifics and

MIH harnessing.
78
199
80
Product and Mounting Dimensions
ML-2000
ML-20004X
How to Order

40700491 ML2000, Metal Control Panel
40700492 ML2000-4X, Polycarbonate, NEMA 4X Control Panel
40700497 ML2000-FP, Flat Control Panel
40700499 ML2000, Metal Control Panel (Spanish)
40700501 ML2000-4X, Polycarbonate, NEMA 4X Control Panel (Spanish) Spanish
40700502 ML2000-FP, Flat Control Panel (Spanish)
40000479 Deutsch Connector Kit, 21-pin & 31-pin, Panel Connector Kit
40000531 Deutsch Connector kit, 21-pin, Panel Connector Kit, Engine Only
78700046 Deutsch Connector kit, 31-pin, Panel Connector Kit, I/O Only
Harness, ML2000, Mechanical, 10’ Blunt, 21 Pos, 10’ Mechanical
40000553
Engine Whip Harness
40000565 Harness, ML2000, I/O, 10’ Blunt, 31 Pos, 10’ I/O Whip Harness
ML2000 USB Programming Harness, 6PIN to USB Programming
40000566
Harness
200
5
sect. 40 1010554
rev. 2014/10/23
EMS Pro
10
Engine Monitoring System Controller
The EMS PRO is a flexible all-in-one customizable
unit that meets the needs of engine-driven pumping Shown
15
equipment applications. with optional
The EMS PRO is a dedicated microprocessor-based, clear door.
single-engine controller. It offers field-adjustable
operating parameters that can be changed without
the need for a computer. It is also able to support both
20
mechanical and J1939 electronic engines.
The EMS PRO has selectable auto start/stop features
with several throttling options. The auto start/stop
options (single contact, floats, momentary, transducer
and clock) are available at the touch of a button. The
25
transducer start/stop option includes three settings:
pressure, level and temperature. In addition, there are
many performance-enhancing features, all of which
are available through an operator interface that is
*Approved by CSA for Non-hazardous locations (Group Safety Publication
easy to learn and use. The EMS PRO is ideal for use
IEC 61010-1)
30
with a remote modem or in a SCADA system offering
MODBUS RTU protocol on either the RS232 or RS485 Specifications
port.
The EMS PRO has the ability to withstand a wide Operating Voltage (12 and 24 systems): 8 VDC minimum to 32
ambient temperature range, comes standard in a NEMA VDC maximum
Environmental
40
4 rated enclosure and is secured by four rubber shock
mounts. Inside is a backlit graphical display that is Operating Temperature: -40° to 176°F (-40° to 80°C)
NOTE: Care should be taken when selecting the clear door op-
visible day or night in all conditions.
tion when used in applications involving sunlight exposure. Direct
Additional features include: sunlight can cause premature component failure by allowing the
• Shutdown history file sealed enclosure temperature to exceed the rated 80°C/175°F.
50
• First-out shutdowns and/or alarm indicating LEDs Storage Temperature: -40° to 176°F (-40° to 80°C)
• Supports TSC1 throttle messaging Environmental Sealing: IP66
• Wide operating temperature range NOTE: Meets IP66 when the door is closed and latched.
• IP66 rated Relative Humidity: 95%RH @ 60°C
• Internet ready utilizing MODBUS RTU with auxiliary Standby Current:
equipment (@ 12VDC) 220mA
55
• Real-time clock in 24-hour format (@ 24VDC) 255mA
• NEMA 4 enclosure with optional clear door CAN bus: SAE J1939 compliant
Enclosure: Polycarbonate NEMA 4 (UL Certified)
Communications Inputs
Analog Inputs: (12) designated via program; sender/ground digital,
70
The EMS PRO has RS485, RS232 and J1939 CAN 4 -20mA, 0-5 VDC.
communication ports. The standard unit uses RS485 or Digital Inputs: (8) high/low
Frequency: 1 optically-isolated input for speed reference, magnetic
RS232 for MODBUS RTU. At the same time, the CAN
pick-up. (2VAC-50VAC RMS)
port allows J1939 communication with the engine ECU Fuel Sender Input: 33 Ohm full, 240 Ohm empty
to display engine parameters and control the throttle Outputs
75
via TSC1, if supported by the engine. Digital Outputs: (3) FET B+ (rated at 1A)
Relays: 1 SPDT and 8 SPST 5 Amp pilot relays (maximum relay
ground current limited to 23 amps).
User Interface: (8) button membrane switch
Connectors: 21 pin and 31 pin Deutsch HDP20 Series
78
Mounting: 4 isolated .75 inch rubber shock mounts

Shipping Weight: 11 lb. (5 kg.)
Shipping Dimensions (all models): 15 x 15 x 11 in. (381 x 381
x 279.4 mm)
201
80
Dimensions
How to Order

40700301 EMS Pro
40700302 EMS Pro with optional clear door*
40000479 21-pin and 31-pin connector kit
Deutsch HDP 10’ 21-pin and 31-pin
40000480
harness kit
Accessories
40000481 10’ 31-pin I/O harness
MEH adapter harness
Contact Industrial Panel Sales
MEH harness
* Care should be taken when selecting the optional clear door when used in applications involving direct sunlight exposure. Direct
sunlight can cause premature component failure by allowing the sealed enclosure temperature to exceed the rated 175°F/80°C.
202
5
sect. 40 1110770
rev. 2014/10/21
EMS Pro Lite
10
Engine Monitoring System Controller
The EMS PRO LITE is a customizable pump
controller designed specifically for dewatering and
15
irrigation applications. This versatile unit supports
both mechanical and J1939 electronic engines, thus
eliminating the need to stock multiple controllers. A step
ahead, the EMS PRO LITE is Tier 4 and Stage IIIB/IV
ready. This includes displaying the current urea level %
20
on the LCD.
The operator interface is a responsive eight-button
membrane keypad and backlit graphical display
mounted directly to the front of a rugged NEMA 4
enclosure.
25
A microprocessor-based controller, the EMS PRO
LITE’s operating parameters are field adjustable without
the need for a computer. However, the EMS PRO LITE
can be modified for use with a remote modem or in a
SCADA system with MODBUS* RTU protocols on either
an RS232 or RS485 port.
30
EMS PRO LITE offers Auto Start/Stop with 2-Float,
Transducer settings (pressure and level) or Clock start/
stop using the internal real-time clock. Throttle to Level,
Pressure or Maximum RPM (desired RPM) is offered.
The robust EMS PRO LITE is engineered for 12 VDC
40
systems (8 VDC minimum to 14.4 VDC maximum) and a *MODBUS is a registered trademark of its respective owner and is not
wide operating temperature. affiliated with Enovation Controls.
Dimensions
50
55
70
75
78
203
80
Communications
The EMS PRO LITE has RS485, RS232 and J1939 CAN communication ports. The standard unit uses RS485 or
RS232 for MODBUS RTU. At the same time, the CAN port allows J1939 communication with the engine ECU to
display engine parameters and control the throttle via TSC1, if supported by the engine.
Specifications
Operating Voltage: 8 VDC minimum to 14.4 VDC maximum Shipping Dimensions: 12 x 12 x 10 in. (304.8 x 304.8 x 254 mm
Relative Humidity: 95% RH @ 60°F (15.5°C) Operating Temperature: -40 to 80°C (-40 to 176°F)
Enclosure: Polycarbonate NEMA 4 (UL/cUL listed) Storage Temperature: -40 to 80°C (-40 to 176°F)
Shipping Weight: 7 lb. (3.2 hg) Environmental Sealing: IP65
Analog Inputs: 6 analog inputs designed via program; sender/ground digital 4-20mA, 0-5 VDC
Digital Inputs: 4 digital inputs High/Low (2 inputs dedicated for auto and manual states of key switch)
Frequency: 1 optically isolated input for speed reference, magnetic pick-up, (2 VAC - 50 VAC RMS, 30-10kHz)
Fuel Sender Input: 33 Ohm full, 240 Ohm empty. This input can also be configured for an external auxiliary shutdown.
Analog Output: 4-20mA or 0.4 to 4.2 VDC (used for 0.4 – 4.2V throttling)
Digital Outputs: 6 digital outputs; 3 FET B+ (rated at 1A), 3 Open Collector sink-to-ground 100 mA (one of these is used to pilot a relay)
Communications: RS485, RS232, CAN J1939, CAN 2.0B ports
How to Order
Part Number Description

40700305 EMS PRO LITE
Accessories
40000521 21-pin and 9-pin, 10 ft (3.048m) Whip Harness Kit for Mechanical Engines
40000522 9-pin, 10 ft (3.048m) Whip Harness for I/O
40000523 9-pin Connector Kit for I/O with terminals
40000524 21-pin and 9-pin Connector Kit with terminals
40000526 21-pin, 10 ft (3.048m) Whip Harness for Mechanical Engines
40000531 21-pin Connector Kit with terminals for engine connector
Murphy Industrial Harness: Please contact Industrial Panel Sales for application-specific harnesses for
electronic engines.
204
5
sect. 40 0910462
rev. 2014/10/22
Murphymatic ® TR Series
10
Transformer Relay Assemblies
The Murphy TR Series Transformer Relay Assemblies
are electric motor controllers. Models are available for
15
emergency shutdown, start and stop only, start and
stop with emergency shutdown and combinations of the
above models with time delay.
All TR Series internal control circuits are completely
pre-wired and relays are plug-in type to facilitate field
20
servicing.
The NEMA 1 enclosure is standard on all TR Series
models. The NEMA 3 weatherproof enclosure and LC
Less Case versions are optional.
Murphy Swichgage® instruments for pressure,
25
temperature, level etc., can be used with the TRs for
semiautomatic or totally unattended operation and
control of your electric motor powered equipment.
A set of normally open, dry relay contacts controlled by
a 24 VAC relay coil controls the magnetic motor starter Specifications
30
holding coil up to 480 volts. The high voltage contacts
are completely isolated from the low voltage control to Transformer:
help reduce electrical hazards. Primary (power supply) with triple taps for 120/240/480 VAC
50/60 Hz
Features Secondary (control supply) 24 VAC
Power Rating: 25 VA
40
• Heavy-duty transformer with multiple primary taps Terminal Blocks:
for easy connection to most any available AC power High Voltage rated at 30 A, 600 V
sources. Low Voltage rated at 20 A, 300 V
• 24 VAC low voltage secondary control circuit with Control Relays: Plug-in, 120 V, 10 A contact rating
Contacts:
terminals for remote auxiliary switches.
50
Power (holding): 10 A, 480 VAC, SPST
• Plug-in relays have three SPDT silver cadmium
Control (auxiliary): 480 VAC, 690 VA pilot duty
oxide contacts providing long life reliability. Conduit: Top: 3/4 in. hub; Bottom 1/2 in. hole
• Power relay has extra heavy silver cadmium oxide Approximated Shipping Dimensions:
contacts rated 10 amp, 480 VAC. NEMA 1; NEMA 3; and “LC” Less Case:
• When TR is used with a Murphy Analog Swichgage, 15 x 15 x 7 in. (381 x 381 x 178 mm)
55
it allows for visual reading of operating conditions Approximated Shipping Weight:
and provides an adjustable differential between high NEMA 1: 18 lb. (8.16 kg)
and low settings throughout the Swichgage dial NEMA 3: 22 lb. (10 kg)
range. “LC” Less Case: 14 lb. (6.35 kg)
70
Applications
The TR Series transformer relay assemblies are
ideal for controlling a variety of electric motor driven
applications. They are recommended for use on
75
saltwater disposal systems, waterflood systems and

many others. Model TR-1762 used in conjunction with
model OPLHC Tank Level Controller and an OPLC
Series discharge pressure can completely automate a
salt water disposal pump.
78
205
80
TR Assemblies
Models and Functions
TR7207 — Used for emergency shutdown of electric motors driven operating remote panel lights or audible alarms. Also includes emergency
equipment which are manually started. shutdown and lockout from a remote, normally open, one wire to ground
Tattletale® indicates shutdown and locks out power until the malfunction Swichgage.
is corrected and the Tattletale is reset. A momentary power failure during TR1762 — Same as TR1761 with adjustable time delay lockout of
shutdown will not void the lockout feature. For use with shutdown functions, for up to 10 minutes, during start-up.
standard, normally open, one-wire to ground Murphy Swichgage
instruments. NOTE: TR1760, TR1761 and TR1762 comply with National Electrical
TR7208 — Same as TR7207 except used with normally closed, code 1975, Article 430-73.
ungrounded Swichgage instruments which open for shutdown.
TR9193 — Same as TR7207 with adjustable time delay, which locks out Some models have been discontinued and replaced by other models:
shutdown functions for up to 10 minutes, to allow pressures and Discontinued Replacement
temperatures to reach normal range after start-up. TR-5171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR1760
TR1760 — Used with electric motors or driven equipment which is started TR-7159 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR1761
and stopped from a remote, normally open Swichgage. TR-9195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR1762
TR1761 — Includes the same features as the TR1760 plus provisions for To order TR assemblies use the appropriate model number
Warning: Before beginning installation of this Murphy product:

1. Disconnect ALL electrical power to the machine.
2. Make sure the machine CANNOT operate during installation.
3. Follow all safety warnings of the machine manufacturer.
TR1762
Always provide proper

circuit protection with
fuses or circuit breakers.
206
TR7207
5
10
15
20
25
30
TR1760
40
50
55
70
75
78

207
80
TR1761

How to Order

TR7207
TR7208
Specify Model TR9193
Number TR1760 Replaces TR-5171
TR1761 Replaces TR-7159
TR1762 Replaces TR-9195
208
5
sect. 40 1311391
rev. 2014/10/14
IntelliSpark ™
10
Ignition Controller System
The IntelliSpark™ 32/16/8 series ignition systems are
capacitive discharge, low-tension type designs. The
15
system is capable of generating precise spark timing
that improves fuel economy, load balance and ignition
stability. The controller design incorporates a state-of-
the-art 16-bit microcontroller. This technology provides
users with a highly flexible solution to meet their ignition
20
needs.
The user can choose from one of five methods of
crankshaft sensing for a 4-stroke engine and two
methods for a 2-stroke engine.
Murphy’s smart ignition coils used with this product
25
incorporate a sense lead connection for real-time spark
plug demand voltage measurements by the ignition
controller. This allows the controller to: Dimensions
• Measure demand on each cylinder’s plug for
diagnostic purposes;
• Automatically control the energy delivered to the
30
smart coils to optimize spark plug life;
• Use the measured demand in the unique camless
crank method to determine the compression stroke,
eliminating the need for a camshaft sensor.
Several smart coil designs are available to
40
accommodate specific ignition requirements including:
remote mount coils and plug-mounted (integral) coils,
non-hazardous or CSA Class I, Div. 2 rated versions.
This system also includes the Murphy PV-450 full-
color screen display for control functions, monitoring,
50
programming and diagnostic testing. The eight-button
display includes comprehensive built-in help files and
wiring information for the coil harness and a database of
common engines for ease of configuration.
55
Features
• Crankshaft-referenced 16-bit microprocessor based
70
system
• Patented Smart Coil technology
• Automatic energy control
• Five timing reference options including camless
operation
75
• Two field-adjustable timing schedules

• Optimized engine combustion and performance
• True primary and secondary diagnostics
78
209
80
Specifications
Power Requirements: Output Electrical Specifications:

IS-16/8: 10-30 VDC (12/24 VDC nominal) 3.0 Amps max IS-8: Single tank capacitor
IS-32: 10-30 VDC, 6.0 Amps max IS-16: Dual, alternately fired tank capacitors
Note: The input current is dependent on firing rate IS-32: Quad, alternately fired pairs of tank capacitors
Environment: Ignition Outputs are High-side firing referenced to the T pin
Temperature Operating Range: -4o to +158o F on the output harness
(–20o to +70o C) Note: These outputs are not ground referenced unless the T lead is
Enclosure Rating: IP66 with display mounted in the enclosure box; grounded. Recommend careful adherence to installation instructions.
Type 4 without display mounted in the enclosure box Maximum Output Current Pulse Rating: 40 Amps
Third Party Approvals: Note: Current pulse amplitude is dependent on the coils in use
CSA Certified for Class I, Div 2, Groups B, C, D and the tank capacitor voltage.
IS-8: Fires 8 outputs IT-230 Series coils: 7 Amp pulse @ 230Volts
IS-16: Fires 16 outputs IT-150 Series coils: 35 Amps @ 150 Volts
IS-32: Fires 32 outputs, 2 outputs can fire simultaneously IT-250 series coils: 20 Amps @ 250 Volts
Energy Storage: 4/20 mA Inputs:
IS-32/16/8: 180 mJ max, per tank capacitor 4/20mA A: This input retards timing (if programmed) when
Communications: schedule A is active.
IS-32/16/8: An auxiliary comm port is available, RS-485 interface, 4/20mA B: This input retards the timing (if programmed) when
MODBUS protocol schedule B is active.
Note: This port has a user programmable slave ID, runs at
9600 baud or 19.2K.
All parameters available can be modified in parallel using the main
front panel display.
How to Order

72700256 IS-8,Ignition Module, 8 Outputs, Without Display
72700252 IS-8D,Ignition Module, 8 Outputs, With Display
72700257 IS-16,Ignition Module, 16 Outputs, Without Display IntelliSpark Ignition
72700253 IS-16D,Ignition Module, 16 Outputs, With Display Module
72700258 IS-32,Ignition Module, 32 Outputs, Without Display
72700254 IS-32D,Ignition Module, 32 Outputs, With Display
72700249 Display Module, PV450NV-03-CSA-IS
78001106 Cable, Remote Power 50 ft., PVW-450-PWR-50 ft. Remote Display Unit
78001107 Cable, Remote Communication 50 ft., PVW-450-RS485-50 ft.
NOTE: Either choose an ignition module that comes with the display built into the enclosure or order loose
display and cables for remote mount.
Please contact your local Murphy Sales Representative for a complete IntelliSpark Ignition System and Murphy
products from Enovation Controls.
A local distributor can be found at www.fwmurphy.com/wheretobuy/us-sales-distributors.
210
5
sect. 40 0910517
rev. 2014/10/14
601 Series CD Ignition
10
Ignition Control Systems
The 601 Series is a self-powered CD ignition system
which can be installed on any large flywheel, spark-
15
ignited engine. With electronics engine-mounted in
close proximity to the flywheel, the unit is powered by
magnetic charging circuitry.
Features and Benefits
20
• Reliable capacitor discharge circuitry
• High-output, self-powered electromagnetic system
• 30,000 volt output at low rpm
• Crankshaft-referenced timing
25
• Dual trigger timing
• One-cylinder applications
• Control circuitry is sealed module
• Self-powered, no external power required
• Two year warranty
• Inexpensive, proven design
30
• No moving parts to wear out
• More timing accuracy with flywheel mounting
• Compatible with most large flywheel spark-ignited
engines
• Provides power for ignition-powered panels
40
Dimensions
50
55
70
75
78
211
80
Connection Diagram
Installation Brief
1. A trigger magnet bar is fastened to the flywheel with the run magnet (deeper recessed) at the timing angle
chosen for normal running.
2. A trigger coil is installed to sense the magnets and trigger ignition circuitry.
3. The ignition unit is installed on brackets in close proximity to the flywheel, at a 30 degrees more advanced
than the position of the trigger magnet bar.
NOTE: Detailed instructions are provided with every unit.
How to Order
To order, please contact your local Murphy Sales Representative for a complete 601 Series CD Ignition Control
System for your specific engine type.
212
5
sect. 40 0910515
rev. 2014/10/15
Detonation Sensing Interface System
10
Model DSI - G3500 Series Caterpillar Engine
The Murphy Detonation Sensing Interface System
utilizes a pair of highly sensitive accelerometers to
15
detect detonation. In the event of detonation, the DSI
signals the Murphy IntelliSpark™ System, via 4/20 mA
control signal, which responds by immediately retarding
the timing thus eliminating the potentially harmful effects
of continuous detonation.
20
Features
• Utilizes advanced piezoelectric accelerometer
sensors to provide real-time analog signal
• Signal is proportional in amplitude to the levels of
25
vibration detected
• Sensors respond over wide range of frequencies up
to 10 K Hz
• Retards timing to reduce vibration intensity or
eliminate it entirely
30
• Sensor range - 0 - 500 g’s
• Detect any source of vibration
Benefits
40
• Easy-to-use controller interface
• Detects detonation tendencies at low levels before
they reach greater intensity and cause engine
damage
50
• Flexible controls and useful information for
operators
• Wide bandwidth allows detection of most
mechanical vibration sources including detonation
• Complete installation kits, wiring guidelines and
55
sensor kits provided
Specifications
Power Requirements: 18-30 VDC 300mA max

Controller Operating Temp: -40oF to 158oF (-40oC to 70oC)
70
Sensor Operating Temp: -40oF to 248oF (-40oC to 120oC)
Sensor Frequency: 20 - 500 Hz
Sensor Sensitivity: 10mV/g 500g F. S.
75
78
213
80
Control Inputs
The 1/REV signal must be provided. Two interfaces are available for customer convenience.
Option 1. MPI_ISO_1/REV-MPI_ISO_RTN: This input connects back to the IntelliSpark Isolated_ 1/REV output pair.
Option 2. 1/REV_In: This interface is designed to be used directly by a mag pick sensor. It can be wired in parallel
to the MPI 1/REV mag pick up. It can also be connected in parallel to a Hall-Effect sensor if in use.
Control Output: Vanalog_Out: This is a 1-5 volt open-circuit output level that when terminated externally by 250
ohm becomes a 4-20 mA current signal. Note: The Murphy IntelliSpark ignition system already has an internal 250
ohm resistor across this input.
Shutdown Output: This is an Open-Drain type interface.

Maximum current when activated: 1.0 amps.
Maximum externally applied voltage when de-activated: 100V.
Panel Controls and Indicators
Power On Switch. Applies 24 VDC to the electronics and sensors.

The knock sensor cable should never be removed or installed with power on.
Power On Indicator provides verification that power is applied.
Sensor 1(2) Low Level lights: These indicators will come on when the engine is running over 400 rpm and the
sensor output is below minimum level. Its an indication that the sensor is not sensing vibration levels during
normal running operations. This may be due to the sensor becoming loose or the cable is removed or the engine is
running at idle or unloaded when very low levels of vibration are generated.
SHUTDOWN: This indicator will come on if the system detects three heavy detonation events present for three
successive revolutions. The Shutdown output will activate and it can be tied into a panel or directly to a Murphy
IntelliSpark Ignition system to kill ignition.
SHUTDOWN RESET: After a shutdown occurs this push-button clears the shutdown indicator and de-activates the
shutdown output for subsequent start-up.
Internal indicators: Flashing amber led indicates firmware is operating normally
Applications: Any Caterpillar 3500 series engine.
How to Order
Please contact your local Murphy Sales Representative for a complete System and Murphy products from
Enovation Controls.
214
5
sect. 40 0910513
rev. 2014/10/20
Ignition Coils
10
Ignition Control Systems
The ignition coil is one of the most critical components of any ignition system. When properly matched to the
ignition controller’s output, the ignition coil ensures optimum performance and reliability.
15
Murphy Smart Coils are patented and are used with IntelliSpark Control Technology to provide real-time
diagnostics and prognostics. Also offered are coils for direct replacement of Altronic coils. All Murphy coils are
manufactured with the highest quality of construction for long life durability.
A variety of coils are offered to meet specific application requirements as listed below.
20
IT-250FM
72700240 IT-250
Smart Coil™ 72700237
25
Flange Mount Coil Smart Coil™
CSA Approved - CI. I, Gr. D, Div. 2 Open Coil, Non-Hazardous
Duration: 400-500 uS @ 10 kV Duration: 400-500 uS @ 10 kV
30
IT-230FM
72700231 IT-230
40
Smart Coil™ 72700230
Flange Mount Coil Smart Coil™
CSA Approved - CI. I, Gr. D, Div. 2 Open Coil, Non-Hazardous
Duration: 500-700 uS @ 10 kV Duration: 500-700 uS @10 kV
50
ITX-150-6; -12
ITX-230RM 6” Length 72700233
55
72700232 12” Length 72700234
Smart Coil™ Smart Coil™
Remote Mount Coil 6 in. Integral Coil
CSA Approved - CI. I, Gr. D, Div. 2 CSA Approved - CI. I, Gr. D, Div. 2
Duration: 500-700 uS @ 10 kV Duration: 200-300 uS @ 10 kV
70
75
ITX-250-6; -12 ITX-250RM

72700245 72700246
Smart Coil™ SmartCoil™
Integral Coils Integral Coil
CSA Approved - CI. I, Gr. D, Div. 2 CSA Approved - CI. I, Gr. D, Div. 2
Duration: 400-500 uS @10 kV Duration: 400-500 uS @ 10 kV
78
215
80
Murphy Ignition Coils Direct Replacement to Altronic Coils
ITX-200RM
72700241
Remote Mount Coil ITX-170-6; -10; -12
(direct replacement to *Altronic 501061-S) 6” length 72700242 (replaces *Altronic 501011A)
CSA Approved - CI. I, Gr. D, Div. 2 10” length72700243 (replaces *Altronic 501011B)
Duration: Standard 12” length72700244 (replaces *Altronic 501011C)
CSA Approved - CI. I, Gr. D, Div. 2
Duration: Standard
IT-200FM
72700238 IT-200 Blue
Flanged Coil 72700235
(replaces *Altronic 501018) Unshielded Epoxy Coil
CSA Approved - CI. I, Gr. D, Div. 2 (replaces *Altronic 501061)
Duration: Standard Duration: Standard
IT-200LFM
7270023 IT-200L Red
Flanged Coil 72700236
(replaces *Altronic 501012) Unshielded Epoxy Coil
CSA Approved - CI. I, Gr. D, Div. 2 (replaces *Altronic 501010)
Duration: Long Duration: Long
*Altronic is registered trademark of Altronic Inc.
How to Order
Part Number Model Notes

72700240 IT-250FM
72700237 IT-250
72700231 IT-230FM
72700230 IT-230
72700232 ITX-230RM Smart Coil
72700233 ITX-150-6, 6 inch length
72700234 ITX-150-12, 12 inch length
72700245 ITX-250-12, 12 inch length
72700246 ITX-250RM
72700241 ITX-200RM
72700242 ITX-170-6, 6 inch length
72700243 ITX-170-10, 10 inch length
72700244 ITX-170-12, 12 inch length Direct replacement
72700238 IT-200FM of Altronic coil
72700235 IT-200 Blue
7270023 IT-200LFM
72700236 IT-200L Red
216
5
sect. 40 0910514
rev. 2014/10/21
Murphy Brushless Alternator s
10
Power Supply
Murphy Ignition Systems are optimized with power
supplies utilizing Murphy high-quality brushless
15
alternators. Designed for long-lasting durability with
no moving electrical components theses devices are
ideal for all industrial applications and are certified for
hazardous duty locations and field proven.
20
Features
• No brushes, no brush springs
• One moving part, no moving electrical parts
• One-piece bearing housing, 4.5 or 9.5 inch brackets
available
25
• Permanent bearing alignment
• Oversize lubrication reservoir
• Glass Filled TFE Fluorocarbon Seal (Teflon)
• Air-cooled 7.3” diameter advanced design
Shown with optional bracket
30
Benefits
• Strong, compact reliable power
Dimensions
• Exceptional bearing life
• Simple inspection and maintenance procedures
7.3 inch Diameter Model 102499-HZ24
40
• 24-VDC, rated to 80 amp, 5,000 rpm CSA approval
rated to 60 amp, 3,600 rpm
12 in. (305 mm)
• Bi-directional rotation
1.5 in.
2.1 in. (38 mm)
Specifications (53 mm)
50
1.1 in.
Rated Amperes: 80 (28 mm) 4.5R in.
(114 mm)
RPM @ Rated Amperes: 5000
Preset Volt Range: 25.5-30
7.3 in.
Full Load Voltage @ 28.0 Preset: 27.5
55
(186 mm)
Field Amperes: 4.5 Typical diameter
Rotation: Bi-Directional 15 ft of wire

0.88 in. 4.5R in.
Shaft Diameter (Pulley): 7/8 inch nominal (114 mm) dia. (114 mm)
Voltage Regulator: Integral - Adjustable - Self Exciting
Wiring Connections: B+, B-, Ground
Rectifier Diode Construction: Individually Replaceable
Rectifier, Rated Capacity: 225 Amperes 4 in. (102 mm)
70
*CSA International Certification 60 Amperes @ 3600 RPM
75
78
217
80
Brushless Alternators
Wiring Diagram Output Amperes at RPM Ranges
For 7.3 inch diameter, single ended, 80 amp alternator

to self-excited voltage regulator, all voltages. 120
For use in Class I, Div. 2, Hazardous Areas.
ALTERNATOR 100
FRAME TO
EARTH GROUND AC VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
AC
AC (-) (+) (F) 80
Output Amperes
NEGATIVE
POWER
(-)
OUTPUT 60
POSITIVE (+)
POWER
OUTPUT 40
FIELD COIL
STATOR 20
WIRE COLOR CODES

AC WHITE
0
POS RED 10 20 30 40 50
NEG BLK
FLD BLUE Alternator RPM X 100
CHASSIS GROUND GREEN
How to Order

72700161 102499-HZ24, 7.3 inch diameter, air-cooled, belt or direct driven 24 Volt
218
5
sect. 40 0910476
rev. 2014/10/12
AFR-1R
10
Rich-Burn Air/Fuel Ratio Control System
The AFR-1R is the simplest, rich-burn air/fuel controller
available.
Striking the right air/fuel ratio to support your catalytic
15
converter shouldn’t be that hard. And it’s not if you
choose the right equipment.
Compliance Controls’ AFR-1R air/fuel ratio controller
is exactly the right choice. It’s pure simplicity at every
step, from installation to operation.
20
High-speed full-authority butterfly control valves are
available.
Single set point. No fine-tuning or tweaking needed.
Streamlined navigation – single-button access to the
main functions.
25
The system is equipped with comprehensive fault
diagnostics, an operator help key on the display and
easy on-screen interface for convenient setup and
operation.
Dimensions
30
Technical Features
• Designed for low horsepower gas fueled,

carbureted rich-burn industrial engines.
40
• Microprocessor-based controller with a single set
point.
• Set point and operation done entirely through the
4 Line x 20 character display, enclosure or remote
mounted.
50
• Post catalyst, oxygen sensor input for real-time
adaptation to changing catalyst performance (post
catalyst sensor is optional).
• Pre and post catalyst thermocouple input for
catalyst over temperature protection (ungrounded
Type K thermocouples, optional).
55
• Pre and post catalyst differential temperature
displayed.
• Separate alarm and shutdown dry-contact relays
for flexibility in setup and operation.
• High-speed full-authority butterfly fuel control
•
valves for quick response time. (available)
Proportional solenoid fuel control valves for 70
auxiliary fuel control (available)
• Heated exhaust gas oxygen sensors for optimum
AFR control.
75
• NEMA 12 enclosure, 10 in. W x 13 in. H x 5 in. D.

• 24 VDC standard with optional 12 VDC
configuration.
• CD ignition input for engine speed reference with
optional magnetic pickup input.
78
• Upgradeable to command multi-set point targets

and accept additional end devices.
219
80
How To Order
Options listed below applies to all Air/Fuel Controllers. All configurations may not be available. Call your sales
representative or Enovation Controls for more information.
AFR-WD-R-1R-10-TK4B-LC
HARDWARE Application End Devices
AFR-WD-R 1 R 1 0 TK4B LC
Type
# of Target
1 Model 2 3 Control Type 4 # of Banks 5 Post Cat Sensor 6 of 7 Kit Type
Setpoints
Valve
AFR-ND-R AFR, No Display, HEGO Controller 1 Qty. 1 R RICH BURN 1 Single 0 None TK2 Blank Standard Kit w/Enclosure
AFR-WD-R AFR, With Display, HEGO Cotroller 9 Qty. 9 2 Dual 1 Yes TK4B LC "Less Case", No Enclosure,
AFR-ND-L AFR, No Display, Wideband Controller 64 Qty. 64 - OR IF LEAN BURN - TK6B for Panel Mount
AFR-WD-L AFR, With Display, Widband Controller L LEAN BURN 1 1 Fuel Ctrl Valve 1 1 UEGO Sensor TK10
2 2 Fuel Ctrl Valve 2 2 UEGO Sensor TK11B
FA25
FA50
220
5
sect. 40 0910477
rev. 2014/10/12
AFR-9R
10
Rich-Burn Air/Fuel Ratio Control System
The AFR-9R air/fuel ratio controller is exactly the
right choice. It is pure simplicity at every step – from
installation to operation.
15
The AFR-9R offers the same simplicity as the AFR-1R
model such as stream-lined menu-driven navigation but
with more set points for even tighter control.
The AFR-9R features nine set point targets based on a
combination of three RPM settings and three manifold
20
pressure settings. As your engine’s load conditions
change, the AFR-9R continues to make sure it is in the
best possible operating range for optimum catalyst
performance.
If your site is facing tightening regulations, changes in
25
ambient temperature, big load swings or gas quality/
pressure changes, the AFR-9R is the right choice. It is a
simple air/fuel ratio controller with more flexibility.
The system is fully programmable through the display
which includes an on board setup guide and a help key Dimensions
30
providing context specific aid.
Technical Features
• Set point and operation done entirely through the
40
4 line x 20 character display, enclosure or remote
mounted
• Designed for wide range of horsepower, gas fueled,
carbureted rich-burn industrial engines
• Microprocessor-based controller with nine air/fuel
50
set points
• Available with either the non-intrusive fuel
enrichment strategy or the in-line fuel authority
control strategy
valves for quick response time. (available)
55
• Proportional solenoid fuel control valves for
auxiliary fuel control (available)
• Map sensor to measure variances in manifold air
pressure
• Post catalyst, oxygen sensor input for real time
70
adaptation to changing catalyst performance (post
catalyst sensor is optional)
• Pre and Post catalyst differential temperature
displayed when using an (optional) ungrounded
Type K thermocouple
• Separate alarm and shutdown dry-contact relays
75
for flexibility in setup and operation

• Heated exhaust gas oxygen sensors for optimum
Air/ Fuel Ratio control
• 24 VDC, 4.8 amp. (application specific), 12 VDC
optional
78
• Magnetic pickup or CD ignition input for engine

speed operating reference
• Upgradeable to accept additional end devices
221
80
How To Order
Type
# of Target
Setpoints
Valve
FA25
FA50
222
5
sect. 40 0910475
rev. 2014/10/12
AFR-64R
10
Rich Burn Air/Fuel Ratio Control System
A lot of control in a single package: The AFR-64R air/
fuel ratio controller monitors ambient changes, reacts
15
with precision and diagnoses potential problems before
they become costly.
Emissions Compliance: The AFR-64R precisely tracks
the air/fuel mix to maintain targeted emissions levels –
regardless of variance in load, ambient air temperature
20
or fuel composition.
Flexibility: The AFR-64R controller stores up to 64
load-specific air/fuel set points and automatically
tracks engine load changes based on engine RPM and
manifold air pressure.
Cost Savings: Pinpoint performance problems as soon
25
as they occur–misfires, engine valve issues and more –
to cut the costs of maintenance, downtime, labor and
replacement parts.
Whether you need better emissions compliance,
engine prognosis/diagnosis and trouble-free equipment
Dimensions
30
life, the AFR-64R helps maximize the efficiency of the
engine and its three-way catalytic converter.
Technical Features
40
• Fast, easy, low-cost installation
• Fits virtually any gas-fueled, carbureted, rich-burn
industrial engine – with (or without) a catalytic
converter
• Windows®-based platform compatible with most
50
computers
• Software can be installed on laptop, PC or network
• Comprehensive 38-fault diagnostics, including
continuous oxygen sensor health monitoring
• Data plotting for easy, accurate troubleshooting
55
• Separate alarm and shut-down dry contact relays
• Pre-catalyst closed loop, exhaust oxygen feedback
control
• Post-catalyst exhaust oxygen feedback; cascade
control for fast, real-time adaptation to changing
•
catalyst performance
Variable set-point for pre-catalyst and post-catalyst
70
exhaust oxygen control – for real-time response to
varying engine loads
• Up to 64 load-specific air/fuel set points to map
75
your engine
• Catalyst temperature monitoring for catalyst over
temperature protection
• Drives up to two control banks for operation on V
type engine configurations
78

valves for quick response time.
223
80
Technical Features - continued
• Multiple valve control options: • Display – Viewable monitor (optional)

• Full Authority Valve controls all engine fuel via • RS-485/MODBUS communications support for
system- controlled butterfly valve high-speed
• Trim Fuel Valve adds supplemental fuel to the
air intake via system-controlled proportional
fuel valve
How To Order
Type
# of Target
Setpoints
Valve
FA25
FA50
224
5
sect. 40 0910491
rev. 2014/10/12
AFR-64L
10
Lean-Burn Air/Fuel Ratio Control System
The AFR-64L air/fuel ratio controller provides state-
of-the-art engine control in one simple, easy-to-use
15
product.
Automatic Operation: No operator intervention needed
– the AFR-64L controller automatically tracks multiple
factors, including engine load, tailpipe emissions and
more, then precisely adjusts the air/fuel mix to maximize
20
fuel efficiency, minimize engine emissions, improve
engine performance and reduce maintenance costs.
Emissions Compliance: The AFR-64L controller
optimizes the lean-burn air/fuel mix to maintain targeted
emissions levels over varying engine loads, speeds, fuel
quality and ambient conditions.
25
Cost Savings: Pinpoint performance problems and
avoid detonation. The AFR-64L controller’s advanced
troubleshooting and diagnostics cover 76 critical
operating parameters, allowing the operator to cut the
costs of maintenance, labor, downtime and replacement
Dimensions
30
parts.
Take control over your engine needs – engine
diagnostics, emissions control, fully automatic operation
– the AFR-64L does it all for you.
40
Technical Features
• Fast, easy, low-cost installation

• Fits virtually any lean-burn, spark-ignited,
50
carbureted natural-gas industrial engine
• Windows-based platform compatible with most
computers
• Software, upgrades and documentation available
on disk or online
55
valves for quick response time
• Comprehensive 76 fault diagnostics
• Data plotting for easy, accurate troubleshooting
• Separate alarm and shutdown dry contact relays
70
• Closed loop, exhaust oxygen feedback control
• Variable set-point for exhaust oxygen control
delivers real-time response to varying engine loads
and transients – perfect for generator-sets and
other high-variance applications
• Catalyst temperature monitoring to protect the
75
catalyst from engine fueling malfunctions

78
225
80
Technical Features - continued
• Open loop/feed forward control combined with • Drives up to two control banks for operation on V
closed loop exhaust gas oxygen sensor feedback type engine configurations
and a super fast-acting fuel control valve • Fast-acting Full-Authority Fuel Control Valve
• Allows for rapid response to engine load changes controls all fuel delivered to the engine
• Vital for generator sets and other applications with • Display - Viewable monitor (optional)
severe engine load variations • RS-485/MODBUS communications support for
• Helps maintain compliance even in the event of an high-speed data transmission
oxygen sensor failure
How To Order
Type
# of Target
Setpoints
Valve
FA25
FA50
226
5
sect. 40 1010670
rev. 2014/10/12
EICS
10
Engine Integrated Control System
Optimizing your engine’s performance and maintaining
emission compliance is easier than ever with Murphy’s
15
Engine Integrated Control System (EICS). It is a
complete integration package pre-calibrated specifically
for your engine model.
EICS combines key components - ignition system
(powered by Murphy’s IntelliSpark™ Ignition
20
technology), air/fuel control, speed governing, interface
and diagnostics, sensors, harnesses, catalyst and
engine control unit (ECU) - in one package, saving you
money and man-hours associated with the installation
and setup of separate engine components.
25
The EICS has been pre-configured for your
convenience, ensuring your engine will run at optimum
performance without the need for manual field
adjustments. Its D-EPR valve accommodates wide
variations in fuel composition and speed/load ranges, Benefits
30
maintaining efficiency with load following technology for
even the toughest gas lift applications. • Integrated system = simplified installation compared
In addition, the EICS eliminates the need for pretest to separate components
site visits by maintaining emissions - saving you time • The integrated approach makes more advanced
and money. With EICS you can be certain your site will diagnostics possible
pass required testing, like Quad J testing, without the
40
• No more setup of generic boxes - EICS is engine
need for pretesting to get dialed in. specific
• No more dialing in - it’s pre-calibrated
Features
• Optimization of your engine’s performance
• Maintains emissions compliance between testing -
• An OEM approach to an after-market application
50
no tweaking necessary
• Two packages available: performance/efficiency
• Eliminates magneto failures and premature spark
package, optional emissions package (includes
plug changes
catalyst)
• Reduces engine failure diagnostic time
• One unit, three integrated functions - CD Ignition,
• Reduces costs associated with the engine’s
air/fuel control and electronic governing speed
55
operation
control
• Pre-calibrated and dyno tested for specific engine
models
• Advanced electronic air-fuel ratio control
• Lightning fast response to engine speed/load
•
variations and fuel quality changes
Murphy’s IntelliSpark™ Ignition Coils for expanded 70
engine diagnostics and dynamic spark adjustment
• Graphical color user interface
• Data sharing via MODBUS RS485
75
• Data logging
78
227
80
How To Order
Step 1 - Pick the EICS System based on your engine model

An EICS System is Available for Engine Models
Arrow VRG330 and VRG330CF
Caterpillar G3300 Series
Caterpillar G3406
Cummins G5.9
Cummins G8.3
Cummins Engine KTA19GC
Kits are available with magneto conversion for older engines.

Kits are also available with shielded ignition components.
Step 2 - Determine display variant

Every EICS Engine Kit Requires One Display - Choose One Variant Below
P/N 48700017 - In Panel Mount Display Kit, Display + EICS Pigtail + RS485 Pigtail
P/N 48700021 - Remote Mount Display Panel with Switches, in Enclosure
Step 3 - Add optional hardware if desired

Add Optional Emissions Package:
Emissions kits are available for each engine. To order, contact your Murphy sales representative.
To Add Optional Suction/Discharge Pressure Based Speed Control:

Order the key below and add a standard Murphy PXT 4-20ma Pressure Sensor to complete
P/N 48700031 - Suction Control/Discharge Control Software Key (requires Murphy PXT sensor)
Step 4 - Generator controls

The EICS works with generator controls. To check compatibility contact your Murphy sales representative.
Contact your Murphy sales representative:

• To purchase products and systems
• To view a full list of supported engine models
• To let us know which engine models you would like to see mapped next
Contact your Murphy sales representative at www.fwmurphy.com/EICS-engines.
Diagram of System Overview
228
5
sect. 40 00092
rev. 2014/12/04
Pull/Push DC Solenoids for Diesel Engines
10
RP Series
Murphy’s Push/Pull DC Solenoids provide single unit
versatility for engine applications, such as shutdown.
15
One solenoid offers pull/push operation. The RP Series
has no internal switches, reduces coil burnout and
reduces adjustments while boosting reliability. The
solenoid offers high force in its small size. It can be
used with most engines’ start systems.
20
A choice of two models and two voltages is available. RP2309B & RP2310B
All models come complete with return spring and
rubber seal boot.
An SD85 Solenoid Drive Time Delay is also available to
greatly reduce possibility of coil burnout and to facilitate
25
low current-piloted operation.
Basic Models
RP2307B & RP2308B
Models RP2307B and RP2308B give a full 1in. (25
30
mm) stroke at 11 pounds (49 N) and hold up to 27
pounds (120 N) at full voltage, continuous duty. They SD85 Solenoid Drive Time Delay
will operate at any stroke less than maximum; see chart
below. The SD85 is used when the solenoid is duty cycled
Models RP2309B and RP2310B can pull 17 pounds for short time periods such as two-position throttle
40
(75 N) with a 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) stroke. They hold up to operation. It also provides enhanced operational
35 pounds (155 N) at full voltage, continuous duty. See control for normal on-off applications. Using the SD85
chart below for holding force at any stroke less than ensures the energize coil is only powered for one to
maximum. two seconds with each operation. If the plunger does
not seat in that time, it is highly unlikely it will seat. The
50
SD85 activates both coils of the solenoid for a short
time then de-energizes the Energize coil. The Hold-in
coil is energized as long as the signal to the SD85 is
active. This ensures long life of the RP solenoid.
Input voltage: 8 to 30 VDC. See chart below for current
55
ratings.
Watts Power/Cold Force in Pounds at 100% Voltage/Inches Stroke
70
Force* in Pounds [Kilograms] at 100% Voltage†
Solenoid Max Power in Watts Stroke in Inches (Millimeters)
Model Stroke Hold Energize Hold
Number In. (mm) Coil Coil Continuous 1/8 (3) 1/4 (6) 1/2 (13) 3/4 (19) 1 (25) 1-1/4 (32) 1-1/2 (38)
25 [11.34] 22 [9.98] 21 [9.53] 17 [7.71] 14 [6.35] 10 [4.54] _____ _____
RP2307B 1 (25) 18 624
<13> [5.90] <12> [5.44] <11> [4.99] <10> [4.54] <8> [3.63] <6> [2.72] _____ _____
75
27 [12.25] 25 [11.34] 23 [10.43] 19 [8.62] 15 [6.80] 11 [4.99] _____ _____

RP2308B 1 (25) 12 696
<15> [6.80] <14> [6.35] <13> [5.90] <12> [5.44] <9> [4.08] <7> [3.18] _____ _____
32 [14.52] 30 [13.61] 27 [12.25] 22 [9.98] 18 [8.16] 13 [5.90] 8 [3.63] 6 [2.72]
RP2309B 1-1/2 (38) 18 1029
<19> [8.62] <18> [8.16] <16> [7.26] <14> [6.35] <11> [4.99] <9> [4.08] <6> [2.72] <4> [1.81]
35 [15.88] 34 [15.42] 31 [14.06] 26 [11.79] 22 [9.98] 17 [7.71] 12 [5.44] 7 [3.18]
RP2310B 1-1/2 (38) 12 960
78
<20> [9.07] <19> [8.62] <17> [7.71] <15> [6.80] <12> [5.44] <9> [4.08] <7> [3.18] <4> [1.81]
* Forces shown are without return spring. Forces shown < > are with return spring. Forces shown in [ ] are in kilograms.
† To determine the operating current, divide the power (watts) indicated in the above table by the applied voltage. Solenoids will operate at any stroke less
than maximum.
229
80
Dimensions
RP2307B & RP2308B
RP2309B & RP2310B
NOTES: SD85
1. Typical operating temperature for single 15 second operation
of the energize coil is less than:
140° F (60° C) ± 10° F (6° C) for 1 in. (25 mm) Stroke Sole-
noids (70° F/21° C rise above ambient)
120° F (49° C) ± 10° F (6° C) 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) Stroke Sole-
noids (50° F/10° C rise above ambient)
See CAUTION statement in Operations section on pre-
vious page and note maximum housing temperature is
185° F (85° C).
2. The energize coil should not be activated for more than 15
seconds. Longer energize coil activation times will damage the
solenoid.
3. Allow minimum 15 minutes for cooling between activations
of energize coil to avoid damaging the solenoid. (Depends on
length of time energize coil is energized.) Contact Enovation
Controls for high cycle rate applications.
4. The energize coil must fully seat the plunger to allow the hold-
coil to function properly.
230
Typical Wiring Diagrams
5
NOTE: In either application if the starter hangs on starters
CAUTION: On certain starter solenoids/
with integral solenoids, the energize coil remains energized.
contactor relays, current can feed back
through the energize terminal from the
10
hold coil and provide a parallel path to
ground through the device connected to
the energize terminal.
15
Typical time-delayed
shutdown using a 518PH
magnetic switch
(SD85 is optional)
20
25
Typical time-delayed
30
shutdown using a 760A
magnetic switch
(SD85 is optional)
40
50
Mechanical Installation Operation
1. Bolt the solenoid securely to the mounting bracket. The solenoid coil is connected to the existing engine
2. Connect linkage and check for binding. Plunger starter system or an equivalent circuit. A SD85 is
55
should move freely throughout the complete stroke recommended. At starting, both the Energize and Hold-
and be allowed to bottom at the internal stop of the in coils are energized. In the run mode, the Hold-in coil
solenoid. is continuously energized while the Energize coil has to
DO NOT MOUNT WITH BOOT DOWN. DO NOT be disconnected, reducing the heating effect and power
APPLY ANY GREASE OR LUBRICATION TO PARTS. consumption and avoiding damage to the device.
IMPORTANT: If the plunger does not seat, it will
release prematurely when shifted to the holding mode
NOTE: Coils that burn out due to improper electrical 70
hookup, misadjustment or improper operation are not
of operation. Re-adjust linkage to lengthen the plunger covered by Murphy factory warranty.
stroke. Adjust the yoke in increments of 1/2 turn until
plunger will remain in hold position. CAUTION: The solenoid housing is hot to the
75
touch. A temperature rise to 185° F (85° C) is

Electrical Installation permissible.
1. Refer to the diagrams above for typical electric NOTE: A cool down period of 15 minutes minimum
wiring. should be allowed between energized pull in cycles.
78
2. Use minimum 10 AWG [65/0.3 mm (4.5 mm)] wire

* Always provide proper circuit protection
size, as noted in the wiring diagrams. A smaller wire will
with fuses or circuit breakers.
reduce the current available and thus the pulling force.
Wire length must be kept to a minimum.
231
80
How to Order

RP2307B — 12VDC, 1 in. (25 mm) stroke, 10 lbf
40700092
(44 N) pull, 25 lbf (111 N) hold
RP2308B — 24VDC, 1 in. (25 mm) stroke, 11 lbf
40700093
DC Solenoids
RP2309B — 12VDC, 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) stroke, 13 lbf
40700094
RP2310B — 24VDC, 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) stroke, 17 lbf
40700095
40700067 SD85 Solenoid Drive Time Delay
65010108 Clevis yoke assembly
65010110 Clevis yoke chain assembly
40050315 Threaded rod (1-1/2 in.)
00002457 RPS in-line ball joint
00002458 RPS 90° ball joint
Shipping Weights:
RP2307B: 24oz. (0.7 kg) Clevis yoke: 1 oz. (.03 kg)
RP2308B: 24 oz. (0.7 kg) Clevis yoke chain assembly: 2 oz. (.04kg)
RP2309B: 48 oz. (1.4 kg) Threaded rob (1-1/2 in.): .05 oz. (.001 kg)
RP2310B: 48 oz. (1.4 kg) RPS in-line ball joint: .05 oz. (.001 kg)
SD85: 6.4 oz. (0.2 kg) RPS 90° ball joint: 1 oz. (.03 kg)
232
5
sect. 40 95028
rev. 2014/10/20
Rack Puller for Diesel Engines
10
Model RP75
The RP75 Rack Puller is a semiautomatic device that
provides a pulling force to initiate shutdown of diesel
engines and equipment.
15
The RP75 connects to the injection pump or air intake
shut-off lever via a cable (chain optional). A coil spring,
within the RP75, is reset manually and is held in place
by an electromagnet. When the Swichgage® detects a
malfunction, the electromagnetic circuit is interrupted
20
through a magnetic switch — releasing the coil spring
thus pulling the cable/chain to actuate shutdown. When
fully compressed, the spring exerts a pull of 30 lbf (133
N).
The RP75 is available for 12- or 24-VDC applications
25
and is compatible with all Swichgage instruments.
Dimensions Specifications
Operating Force: 30 lbf (133 N) maximum, 10 lbf (44 N) minimum
30
Coil Voltage: Specify 12- or 24-VDC
Coil Resistance: RP75-12: 32.2 ohms; RP75-24: 129.8 ohms
Length of Travel: 1-7/8 in. (48 mm)
Control Linkage
• Cable: 4ft. (1.22 m); Optional 8 ft. (2.43 m) or 12 ft. (3.65 m)
40
available.
• Chain (optional): 30 in. (762 mm)
Shipping Weight: 5 lbs 3 oz. (2.4 kg)
Shipping Dimensions: 9-1/4 x 8-1/4 x 5-1/4 in. (235 x 210 x 133
mm)
50
55
70
75
78
233
80
Installation
WARNING Before beginning installation of this Murphy product:

Mounting
1. Mount the RP75 using the 40-05-0161 mounting WARNING: The firewall
bracket or similar (see Figure 1). If installing the RP75 to an must be capable of
engine compartment firewall, go to Step 2. withstanding the push and
2. If installing the RP75 to an engine compartment pull force of the RP75.
firewall, drill a 37/64 in. (15 mm) diameter hole in the
firewall (see Figure 2).
3. Remove the reset knob on the RP75 by loosening the
Allen-head screw on the knob.
4. Remove the mounting nut and insert the RP75 reset
stem through the hole from the back of the firewall.
5. Replace the mounting nut and tighten. Reinstall the
reset knob.
Typical Wiring Diagrams
Wire the RP75 appropriately (see Figure 3).
NOTE: RP75 is voltage rated; do not apply 24-VDC
to 12-VDC model and vice versa. Also, the 117PH
Magnetic Switch is rated for both 12- and 24-VDC
circuits but voltage must be specified when ordering
the 518PH or 761APH Magnetic Switches.
Installing Cable or Chain
1. To install the control linkage (cable or chain), apply
voltage to the RP75. Push in the reset knob. If installing
the cable, insert the cable attaching nut into the RP75 and
tighten snugly (see Figure 1). DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN or
threads may strip. Attach and tighten outer cable securing
nut. If installing the chain, attach the S hook to the RP75
(see Figure 1).
2. Attach the other end of the cable or chain to the
injection pump or air intake shutoff lever so it moves freely
without sharp bends and without binding.
Operation Test
NOTE: Some method must be provided to disconnect
(lockout) all normally closed Swichgage® circuits when
* *
starting (such as through the appropriate Magnetic
Switch).
1. Reset magnetic switch.
2. Push in RP75 reset stem until coil latches the trip
mechanism.
3. Start engine and observe that all locked out contacts
clear.
4. With engine running, ground Swichgage contact. The
Magnetic Switch will trip thus removing voltage to RP75.
The engine should shutdown immediately. If the engine
does shutdown, adjust control linkage (cable or chain)
to ensure that shutoff lever travels the full length in both
directions.
CAUTION: Shut-off lever should * Always provide proper circuit protection with fuses or
not pull hard against the stop in circuit breakers.
the OFF position.
234
How to Order
5
10
more information.
15
Mounting bracket is
20
40050161 Mounting Bracket sold separately from
RP75.
40000021 12 VDC core assembly
40000044 Shaft solenoid assembly
25
40010050 Bushing shaft assembly
40010053 Case repair kit
40040054 Cocking rod, bushing and knob repair kit Service parts
40050136 Spring, main actuating
30
40050149 Spring, cocking rod return
80041030 2 screw, machined #10-24 x 3/8 pan HD steel CAD II
40000024 24 VDC core assembly
40
50
55
70
75
78
235
80
236
5
sect. 40 04052
rev. 2014/10/22
Murphymatic ® Engine Throttle Controller
10
Model AT03069
The AT03069 is a completely reliable heavy-duty
device developed specifically to automatically control
15
engine speed to meet system demand. Low current,
high torque, solid-state switching and an electronic
clutch make it ideal for all automatic and semiautomatic
engine systems. Used with the appropriate Murphy
Swichgage®, near constant pressure, level and load
20
can be maintained. Speed changes are made slowly
and smoothly. The device saves fuel, engine wear,
horsepower and labor. One model can be used
with both 12- and 24-VDC systems. Check with our
engineers for help with other applications where speed
control can improve your system.
25
Applications include: Specifications
Pressure
• City water systems
Voltage: 11-28 VDC negative ground
• Water flood injection Maximum Current: 500 mA (1/2 amp)
• Sprinkler lateral changes
30
Standby Current: Approx. 7 mA
• Make-up if a gang pump stops Increase and Decrease: Inputs float at approx. 8.4 VDC. Grounding
• Multiple hose-reel irrigation systems inputs causes 8-18 mA of current to flow from either.
Level Torque: 25 inch pounds
• Water or oil storage tanks Sealed limit switches: Factory adjusted, controls maximum travel
• Waterflood tanks Linkage adjustment on lever arm—5 holes: Adjusts travel:
40
• Sewer disposal systems 1-3/16 in. (30 mm); 1-11/16 in. (43 mm); 2 in. (51 mm); 2-1/4 in. (57
• Flood control catch basins mm) approximately. Travel Time: 11 to 20 seconds depending on the
Temperature voltage and force applied.
Net Weight: 5 lb. (2.27 kg)
• Multi-engine cooling systems
• Air conditioned chilled water systems
50
Engine load Operation
• Empty or fill reservoirs with a lower horsepower
engine — fast when head is high — slow when A Murphy
head is low Swichgage®*
The AT03069 can enhance features of our Selectronic® constantly
55
Microcontroller units by allowing features such as: monitors
• Warm-up RPM set point pressure, level,
• Minimum RPM set point temperature or
• Maximum RPM set point load. Adjustable
• Preset operating RPM set point high and low
70
• Auto throttling to match flows (as needed in flood contacts on
control applications) Swichgage
• Maintaining system pressure (as needed in booster are set slightly
station application) above and
• Adjustable rate of change in RPM (allowing fine below desired
75
tuning of overall system). operating point. When demand changes, the pointer
For more information, recommendations and touches appropriate high or low contact and signals
quotations contact our engineering department. speed change. The AT03069 controller responds only as
long as contact is made. The controller stops immediately
when contacts separate. Slow, smooth action prevents
78
hunting or surging on normal applications.

*Mercury tube or snap-action switches are not suitable for this type
of control. For more information, recommendations and quotations,
contact our engineering department.
237
80
Dimensions Typical Wiring
How to Order

40700249 AT03069
238
5
sect. 40 01035
rev. 2014/10/22
Electric Motor Driven Clutch Operator
10
for Engine Automation Systems
The CO3 is an electrically controlled and driven
actuator for automatic operation of two position,
15
lever action equipment. Primarily designed to engage
and disengage over-center clutches on engines,
the CO3 has a wide variety of applications such as
opening and closing of pipeline valves, engagement
and disengagement of pumps, fixture positioning in
20
automated process control, etc. The positive action
screw-type actuator is fully adjustable for length
of stroke up to 6 inches (152 mm). The CO3 motor
is equipped with an overload clutch that slips if
overloaded. In addition, the motor is protected with an
25
automatic reset thermal overload. The CO3 is available
for 12- or 24-VDC applications and is compatible with
Murphymatic® start-stop engine controllers.
Applications include:
• Engine disc clutches
Specifications
30
• Butterfly and ball valves
• Brakes
• Two position lever-action equipment Voltage:
CO3-12: 12-VDC, negative ground
Dimensions CO3-24: 24-VDC, negative ground
Travel (adjustable): 6 in. (152 mm) max
40
Case Material: Cast aluminum
Built-in Circuit Breaker: 20 A
Operating Force:
CO3-12: 250 lb-f (1112N) max
CO3-24: 500 lb-f (2224N) max
50
Duty Cycle @ 77° F (25° C):
CO3-12: 40% max. @ 125 lb-f (556N) to 25% @ 250 lb-f (1112N)
CO3-24: 100% max. @ 75 lb-f (334N) to 25% @ 500 lb-f (2224N)
Speed:
CO3-12: 1.2 in./sec. (3 cm/sec.) @ 0 lb-f to 1.00 in./sec. (1 cm/
sec.) @ 250 lb-f (1112N)
55
CO3-24: 2.4 in./sec. (6 cm/sec.) @ 0 lb-f to 1.35 in./sec. (3 cm/
sec.) @ 500 lb-f (2224N)
Drive: Self-locking ACME screw
Current:
CO3-12: 20 amp max
70
CO3-24: 14 amp max
Basic Operation Operating Temperature: -15 to 150° F (-26 to 66° C)
Shipping Weight: 40 lb (18.1 kg)
When the CO3 receives a signal to engage, the heavy- Shipping Dimensions: 25 x 14-1/2 x 12 in. (635 x 368 x 305 mm)
duty DC motor operates to extend the actuator shaft
and yoke a predetermined length. Length of extension How to Order
75
is controlled by the adjustable cams in the control

housing. When disengaging, the motor reverses and Part Number Model and Description
retracts the actuator shaft. At engagement end of the CO3-12
stroke, the actuator backs off from its maximum travel Specify Model
CO3-24
to relieve pressure on the clutch or other device.
78
Refer to Figure 4.
239
80
Installation
1. Disengage clutch lever on the engine.
WARNING Before beginning installation of this
2. Remove the clutch lever and reposition it approximately 45
Murphy product:
degrees from vertical, toward the rear of the clutch (Figure 4).
3. Locate and remove outer roller of the CO3 operating yoke
• Make sure the machine CANNOT operate during
(Figure 1).
4. Place the CO3 in direct line with the clutch lever until the installation.
inner roller touches the clutch lever at an approximate 90 degree • Follow all safety warnings of the machine
angle (See detail in Figure 4). manufacturer.
NOTE: Reposition clutch lever so it does not bind between • Read and follow all installation instructions.
rollers when actuator is fully extended and fully retracted.
5. Bolt the CO3 to the stabilizer arm to hold the angle of
incidence to the clutch arm (Figure 4).
6. Temporarily attach the CO3 mounting plate to the engine skid
or base, or mark its location on the skid or base. (See Figure 2
for dimensions.)
7. Open control housing cover and locate Cam A (Figure 1).
Loosen the two set screws on Cam A and slide the cam all the
way to Cam B.
NOTE: Do not disturb setting of Cam B. It is factory
adjusted for proper operation.
8. Temporarily wire Battery Negative to terminal #5, Positive to
terminal #4 of the CO3 (Figure 3).
9. Apply a momentary N.O. push button between terminals #1
and #3. When the push button is pressed the CO3 actuator will
extend (Figure 3).
CAUTION: Be ready to release the

push button when the clutch arm is
fully engaged. Damage to the clutch
or the CO3 can occur if the actuator is
allowed to continue to push against the
clutch arm.
NOTE: This is best done by energizing the CO3 for short

intervals as the clutch arm approaches full engagement.
Disconnect battery and remove push button from terminals
#1 and #3.
10. Firmly affix the CO3 mounting plate to the engine or skid or
pad.
11. Move Cam A back toward the front end of the CO3 so that
it fully depresses the roller of limit switch SW-2. Re-tighten both
set screws.
12. Reconnect battery and the temporary push button across
terminal #1 and #3. The actuator should back-off a short
distance until clutch lever is between both rollers to insure
removal of load from throw out bearings. If minor adjustment
is necessary, move SW-2 forward to reduce back-off or aft to
increase back-off. Maximum adjustment is 1/2 in. (13 mm).
Remove momentary push button.
13. Place a N.O. momentary push button across terminals #2
and #3 (Figure 3). Press push button. Actuator should retract and
disengage clutch. Actuator will back-off and stop when clutch is
fully disengaged.
Disconnect battery and remove push button from terminals
#2 and #3.
14. Reconnect battery. The CO3 is now ready for operation.
A maintained contact closure across terminals #1 and #3 will
engage clutch. A maintained contact closure across terminals #2
and #3 will disengage clutch.
NOTE: Readjust CO3 after any clutch repair.
240
5
Section 50 Compressor Controls and Panels
Annunciators
10
8535 LCDT Selectronic® Tattletale® System �� 243
0910435 TTD™ Series — Configurable Fault Annunciator�� 245
96122 SeriesS1501 Selectronic® Microcontroller/Annunciator�� 249
15
Controllers
0910434 Centurion™ Configurable Controller �� 251
0910452 Centurion™ PLUS Full-Featured Controller�� 255
Panels
20
0910471 TTD Annunciator Panel�� 259
0910472 Centurion™ Configurable Control Panel �� 261
0910492 Centurion™ PLUS Control Panel�� 265
1210950 Control Systems & Services�� 269
25
30
40
50
55
70
75
78
241
80
242
5
sect. 50 8535
rev. 2014/12/05
LCDT Selectronic ® Tattletale ® System
10
The LCDT Selectronic Tattletale system is a compact fault annunciator
with an electronic alarm/shutdown control system. It’s designed to protect
engine-driven or motor-driven compressors and pumps. The annunciator
indicates the sensor, and hence the parameter, that causes an alarm or
15
shutdown. In addition, a means is provided for testing the operation of each
sensor without initiating an alarm or shutdown. Employing a liquid crystal
display, the LCDT system gives a digital reading of the tripped sensor and
the lockout timer countdown.
At the heart of the system, the basic annunciator component has two
20
variations: the Model LCDT-NO, which accommodates normally open
sensors; and the Model LCDT-NC, which accommodates normally closed
sensors. These units are enclosed in an aluminum box having a brush
finish. The LCDT system accommodates 47 NO or 45 NC sensor inputs, 15
of which may be locked out during start up by the start/run timer delay.
25
A separate power supply is provided with the model LCDT instrument.
Power may be supplied by CD ignition, a 120 VAC line or by 12- or 24-VDC
battery.
Intended for use with all Swichgage instruments without OS option.
Features include:
30
• System alarm or shutdown for up to 47 NO or 47 NC sensors
• Timed start up override for up to 15 sensors
• Liquid Crystal Display of tripped sensors and the lockout timer
countdown
• Test timer for shutdown override during sensor test
40
• Intrinsically safe annunciator unit: Class I, Division 1, Group D
Hazardous Locations
• Explosion-proof power supply
• Battery power to maintain electronics while engine is not running
• Optional three-second time delay allows a fuel valve to close before
50
grounding the ignition
Specifications
Power: Supplied by CD ignition of an engine, 120 VAC line or by FET Outputs: LCDT-PS-CD-N rating (for fuel valve and ignition
55
12- or 24-VDC battery ground): 0.5A @ 250 V
Power Inputs (Operating Voltage): Alarm Relay Contact Rating: 4A, 1/20 HP, 125/250 VAC/3A, 30
LCDT-PS-CD (R)-P: 90-250 VDC, CD ignition, positive ground VDC
LCDT-PS-CD-N: 90-250 VDC CD ignition, negative ground Operating Temperature: Module (head): -40° to 185°F (-40° to
LCDT-PS-120/24/12: 120 VAC (6 VA), 24 VDC (1 watt), 12 VDC 85°C)
(0.5 watts) Power Supply: 0° to 158°F (-18° to 70°C)
Sensor Inputs: Accepts up to 47 sensors (NC version only 45) via
a ribbon cable. The LCDT system was designed to be used with
Case: LCDT-NO/NC (module): anodized aluminum.
70
sensor switches having normally open or normally closed contacts Power Supply (all models): Explosion-proof aluminum
such as Murphy Swichgage instrument. Multiplexer Scan Rate: Scans all 47 sensors in 0.7 sec.
NOTE: An approved isolation barrier such as a thermocouple Start-Run/Test Timer: Standard 5 minutes, specify other, up to
75
type barrier, must be used between sensor switch and input 7 minutes maximum (in 1 minute increments)
terminals if sensor outputs come from any energy storing device Laboratory Approvals: CSA* and Factory Mutual System† Listed
such as a relay or transistor. for Class I, Division 1, Group D, Hazardous Locations
Relay Outputs Ratings:
LCDT-PS-CD (R)-P Contact rating: 4A, 1/20 HP, 125/250
78
* When used with approved ignition A. Contact Enovation Controls

VAC/3A, 30 VDC for details.
LCDT-PS-120/24/12 Contact Rating: 5A, 28 VDC. 120 VAC † When installed per Murphy drawings HC-9450-A (50-08-0021)
(resistive) or HC-9450-AA (50-08-0019).
243
80
Dimensions
LCDT System How to Order

The basic LCDT system consists of the
LCDT module, the terminal strip and cable
assembly and the power supply. LCDT-NO, LCDT Normally Open
Terminal Strip and Cable Assembly
LCDT Module
LCDT-NC, LCDT Normally Closed
The plug-in type Terminal Strip has 50
screw-type connections for normally open LCDT-50CA-36, Normally Open Terminal Strip and
sensors and 100 connections for normally LCDT-100CA-36, Normally Closed Cable Assembly
closed sensors. The terminal strip can be Specify Model LCDT-PS-CD (R)-P, CD Ignition
connected to the LCDT module with the Number Positive Ground
36 in. (914 mm) flat ribbon cable.
Power Supply LCDT-PS-CD-N, CD one or two
Power Supply
You have a choice of input power ignitions negative ground
supplies: LCDT-PS-CD (R)-P and LCDT-PS-120/24/12, Voltage: 120
LCDT-PS-CD-N for CD ignition or LCDT-
AC, 12/24DC
PS-120/24/12 for 120 VAC or 12 or 24
VDC. Each power supply includes control
Inputs/Outputs and an intrinsically safe Shipping Dimensions:
LCDT-NO/NC module: 8-1/2 x 9-1/2 x 5-1/2 in. (216 x 241 x 140 mm)
barrier. They were designed for Class I,
LCDT-PS-CD-N and LCDT-PS-CD (R)-P: 4-1/2 x 15-1/2 x 5-1/2 in. (114 x 394 x 140 mm)
Divisions 1 and 2, Group D Hazardous LCDT-PS-120/24/12: 11-1/2 x 18-1/4 x 13-1/2 in. (291 x 464 x 343 mm)
Locations. FM and CSA listed. LCDT-50CA-36 or 100CA-36: 7-1/4 x 12 x 5-1/2 in. (184 x 305 x 140 mm)
Shipping Weights:
LCDT-NO/NC Head: 5 lbs. (2.2 kg)
LCDT-PS-CD (R)-P: 9 lbs. (4.08 kg)
LCDT-PS-120/24/12: 21 lbs. (9.5 kg)
LCDT-50CA-36 or 100CA-36: 3 lbs. (1.3 kg)
244
5
sect. 50 0910435
rev. 2014/12/05
TTD Series
10
Configurable Fault Annunciator
The TTD product is a solid-state fault annunciator and shutdown control
system designed to protect engines, pumps, compressors and associated
15
equipment. The TTD model accepts 48 sensor inputs from normally open
and/or normally closed sensors. Each of the 48 inputs can be configured
for shutdown or alarm only. Any input can be locked out by one of the two
start-run timers or configured as Class C, ESD or ignore. The annunciator
provides for both closing of a fuel valve and grounding of an ignition after a
20
time delay.
Incorporated in the TTD non-volatile memory:
• Run Hours/Elapsed Time Meter (hours roll over at 99,999)
• Last 10 shutdowns with associated run hours
• Last four alarms with associated run hours
25
• Selectable Modbus RTU slave RS232/RS485 serial communications
• Selectable baud rates
Optional Features:
• Pre/Post lube timed functionality
• Tachometer w/ overspeed and underspeed setpoints and running
30
hours.
• Lubricator no-flow detection for up to four proximity switches
With the TTD series, the display head is common to all configurations
allowing fewer spare parts required to be maintained in the field. Its user-
selectable templates provide ease of retrofit by selecting configuration of
40
existing annunciators via display keypad or download from a computer wtih
Windows-based MConfig® installed.
Components
50
Display Head Power Supply
The display head shows operational and configuration The power input and control output terminals
data. Configuration parameters are entered via keypad are mounted on the plug-in power supply (PSU-
55
or downloaded from MConfig software. 2). Power supplies also include an RS485/RS232
The display head will accept digital inputs directly on serial communication port (MODBUS RTU slave)
the back of the unit. Power is provided to the display to interface with micro-controllers, PCs, PLCs and/
head via a direct Phoenix connector. The display head or communication and control systems. The serial
contains the microprocessor, LCD, membrane keys for communication provides read and write register
70
configuring the sensors inputs and the sensor input capability and selectable baud rate up to 38,400.
terminal blocks. All power supply models are reverse polarity protected
The TTD LCD annunciates any fault from the sensor and can be powered by 10-32vdc or 90-400vdc
inputs, displays engine speed and run hours/elapsed negative ground CD ignition. The TTD annunciator is
time meter. Other features for the TTD are: built-in test fully operable with the internal battery. The external DC
mode function to check the sensor circuits without power enables communications support (MODBUS
75
causing a fault shutdown, pre-lubrication and post- slave) and turns on the display backlight.
lubrication timers and onboard backup battery to retain
the fault display after shutdown on ignition powered
units.
78
245
80
Specifications
Power Requirements: Communication Ports: 1
PSU-2: 10-32VDC, 10W (max); 90-400VDC CD Ignition, 750uA @ A single bi-color (green/red) LED is provided to give visual indication
100VDC (max) of active transmit and receive traffic. Only one connection will be
On-Board Backup Power: Lithium battery, 6 VDC, 1300 mAh. active at any time.
Digital Inputs: 48 (aka channels) Interface: Factory configured for RS485; field-selectable for 3-wire
Sensor Types: Discrete input, N.O./N.C., non-incendive RS232 or RS485
Magnetic Pickup Input: Baud/Stop Bit Selections: 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K†;N,8,1;N,8,2
One Magnetic Pickup Sensor Input: 3.6 - 120 VAC, 2-10 kHz. Protocol: MODBUS RTU
Outputs: Connection: There are two screw terminal connectors for RS485.
IGN: 0.4A @ 400VDC* for 5 seconds There are two screw terminal connectors for RS232. There is one
0.15A @ 400VDC(*) cont. duty screw terminal common for both ports labeled as GND.
RLY: 0.5A @ 48VDC cont. duty Third-Party Approvals:
FV- : 0.5A @ 400VDC(*) cont. duty TTD-H, PSU-2: CSA Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C and D
ALR: 0.5A @ 48VDC cont. duty TTD-H: IEC 60529 - IP66 (NEMA 4 & 4X equivalent)
AUX: 0.5A @ 48VDC cont. duty Intuitive Display Icons: Display status and assist in setup and
Operator Interface: operation. The appropriate icon will turn on to indicate unit status or
Display Type: LCD, Static, 80 segment, custom text with LED navigation through the setup features.
backlight RUN – Run mode
Display Viewable Area: ~ 2.79 x 1 in. (71.04mm x 25.4mm) RPM – Screen Value
Display Contrast: Automatic HOURS – Screen Value
Display Backlight: Yellow (Normal Operation); Red (Shutdown) TYPE – Channel Type Configuration
(Backlight will only be available when unit is powered by DC) LOW BATT – Low Battery Warning (displayed when condition
Voltage Level Monitor: Monitor and display voltage level of DC exists)
supply, CD ignition and internal battery HISTORY – Shutdown History
Keypad: 6 switches: Ridge Embossed, Metal Dome, Tactile 14 Oz. TEST – Test Mode
Trip Force LUBE – Pre-lubrication Timer
Enclosure Cutout: 5.50 x 5.50 in. (133 mm) POSTLUBE – Post-lubrication Timer
Operating Temperature: -40° to 85°C SHUTDOWN – Stop Mode
Viewable Temperature: -40° to 85°C ALARM – Alarm(s) Warning (displayed when condition exists)
Storage Temperature: -40° to 85°C SETPOINT – Edit Set-point Value
Tachometer Accuracy: ±0.5% of the display reading or ±1 RPM, SETUP – Setup Menu(s)
whichever is greater
Resettable Hourmeter Range: 0 to 99999 hrs. * CSA approved for 250VDC maximum
Non-Resettable Hourmeter Range: 0 to 99999 hrs. †
38.4K baud will not be available when IGN input is selected as the
Hourmeter Accuracy: ±1 hour per year source for RPM calculations. When MPU is selected, this feature is
available for selection.
Dimensions
Display Head
Power Supply (PSU-2)
246
TTD System
5
10
15
20
25
30
40
TTD-H Display Head
50
55
70
TTD Intuitive Display Icons
75
The TTD system features a static LCD display

(A) with backlight (external DC is required). The
applicable icon and number (B, C and D) will
be displayed to clarify the display readings or
alert the operator to an operating condition.
78
247
80
How to Order

50700597 TTD-H Display Head
50700596 PSU-2 Div 2 Power Supply
50700594 PSU-2-T Div 2 Power Supply w/ Tach
PSU-2-L-N Div 2 Power Supply w/Pre/Post Lube and
50700944
No-Flow
PSU-2-T-L-N Div 2 Power Supply w/ Tach, Pre/Post
50700942 Replacement Parts
Lube and No-Flow
and Assemblies
00005125 Backup Lithium Battery, 6VCD, 1200mAh
50000774 Ignition Choke Filter
TTD-H Plug Kit, Printed Replacement Terminal Plugs
00009741
for TTD-H Sensor Inputs
PSU-2-Plug, Printed Replacement Plug for PSU-2
00009768
Power Connector
248
5
sect. 50 96122
rev. 2014/12/05
Series S1501 Selectronic ®
10
Microcontroller/Annunciator
The S1501 instrument is a microprocessor-based
alarm, shutdown and control system with tachometer/
15
hourmeter function. It annunciates in alphanumeric
characters the protective device that has signaled an
alarm or caused equipment shutdown. Information is
called up and adjustments are made on a six-button
keypad on the face of the unit. Configurations such as
20
alarm or shutdown nomenclature, preset timers and
tachometer calibration can be made in the field.
Murphy’s S1501 system has seven SPDT relays. On
the standard model, the relays are assigned to the
following functions: lube, crank, ignition/motor, fuel
25
valve/cooler, load, alarm and shutdown. NRTL/C
The complete S1501 system consists of a head,
sensor input terminal strip (two needed for 64 sensor
models), 36-inch (914 mm) flat ribbon cable(s) for
connecting the terminal block to the head and a Class I,
Specifications
30
Div. 1, explosion-proof power supply.
The S1501 system is powered from 120 VAC or 12 Power Consumption:
or 24 VDC. The head is rated intrinsically safe and • 120 VAC (7.5 VA) • 12 VDC (3.5 watts) • 24 VDC (3.5 watts)
Sensor Inputs: 32 or 64 N.O. and/or N.C. inputs such as Murphy
includes a communication port, jumper selectable for Swichgage® instruments. Field selectable as a Class A, B1, B2, C, P
either RS232 or RS485, operating as a MODBUS RTU or ESD for shutdown, alarm or control function.
40
slave. This port allows for remote control functions such NOTE: Sensor inputs 27 through 32 reserved for control functions.
as start/stop, load/unload, etc., and for read access to Outputs: 7-SPDT relay outputs, 5 A, 1/16 HP, 125/250 VAC/ 1 A,
S1501 holding registers. 30 VDC
NOTE: For hazardous areas an approved isolation barrier must
The S1501 system can be configured to monitor be used between sensor switch and input terminals if the sensor
applications such as air and natural gas compressors, output comes from any energy storing device such as a relay or
natural gas refueling and other industrial operations.
50
transistor.
For a list of applications and our cataloged programs Adjustable Time Delays:
contact a Murphy sales representative. • Permissive • Run • Ignition Ground
• Prelube • Class B1 Lockout • Postlube
Custom programming is available at additional charge. • Purge • Class B2 Lockout • Cooler
MConfig can be used to download to or upload from • Fuel • Process Lockout
the S1501 and to save configurations. • Crank • Idle/Cool down
55
Sensor Inputs Terminal Block: Rail mount DIN type; 32 termi-
nals, screw type
Opto-Isolated Tach/Run Input: Magnetic pickup, 4.5 to 120
Vrms, 0-10 kHz. CD ignition, positive or negative ground, 100 to 300
VDC, 3-666 Hz. 12 to 125 VDC or 120 Vrms, 50/60 Hz may be
used for run signals.
Operating Temperatures: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C)
Storage Temperatures: -4 to 158°F (-20 to 70°C) 70
Case : ABS plastic, 1/4 DIN (90 x 90 mm)
Interface Output: Factory configured for RS232; field-selectable
for RS485.
Alphanumeric Display: 2 lines, each line with 16 characters (32
75
characters total)
Power Supply Enclosure: Explosion-proof, Class I, Division 1.
Intrinsically safe barrier built into the power supply, with 7 form C relay
outputs for the following functions (with standard S1501):
• Lube • Fuel/Cooler • Shutdown
• Crank • Load
78
• Ignition/Motor • Alarm
249
80
Dimensions
How to Order

S1501H-32-2 Head with RS232/RS485 port for 32 sensors
S1501H-64-2 Head with RS232/RS485 port for 64 sensors
Head with custom* program, RS232/RS485
S1501CH-32-2
port, 63 sensors
Head with custom* program, RS232/RS485
S1501CH-64-2
port, 64 sensors
S1500TB32 Terminal Block only**
Specify Model Number S1500CA36 Ribbon Cable Assembly**
S1501PS-120 120 VAC, 12 or 24 VDC Power Supply
S1501PS-120-E Power Supply with 90° Conduit Elbow Fitting
S1501PS-120-LC-AMOT Kit
S1501PCA72 - Power and Control
Cable Assembly, 72 in. (1.8 m) long
Accessories
S1501PS-120-LC - Power Supply less
case
*Specify program number or contact Enovation Controls for available programs listings.
** Two required for 64 sensor models.
Approximate Shipping Weights /Dimensions
S1501 complete system: S1500CA36; S1501PCA72:
28 lb. (12.7 kg) / 20x14x12.5 in. (508x356x218mm) 2 lb. (0.907 kg) / 6x6x6 in. (152x152x152mm)
S1501H-32-2; S1501H-64-2; S1501CH-32-2; S1501PS-120-LC:

S1501CH-64-2: 3 lb. (1.36 kg) / 12x7x4 in. (305x178x102mm)
2 lb. (0.907 kg) / 6x6x6 in. (152x152x152mm)
S1501PS-120 and S1501PS-120-E:
S1500TB32: 22 lb. (9.98 kg) / 17x10x9.75 in. (431x254x248mm)
2 lb. (0.907 kg) / 12x7x4 in. (305x178x102mm)
250
5
sect. 50 0910434
rev. 2014/10/20
Centurion ™ Configurable Controller
10
The Centurion Configurable
Controller is a control and
monitoring system. Primarily
designed for engine/electric
15
motor driven compressors, the
Centurion is well suited for many
control applications using standard
configurations to save money
and reduce training. Additionally,
20
Enovation Controls can custom
design a control package to meet
exact specifications for a variety of
applications.
The Centurion continuously
25
monitors input signals and set
points and commands outputs
to maintain proper operation.
When an out-of-limits event
occurs, the controller will stop, Features of the Centurion include: • Upload/download capabilities for
30
shutdown or control equipment to • Fully configurable control and configurations and set points.
change conditions. The auto-start monitoring system. Applications • Approved certification for Class I,
capabilities of the Centurion allow include reciprocating/screw Division 2, Groups B, C & D areas.
for start/stop based on parameters compressors and pump systems. • Shutdown history list (Last 20
• Expandable system to meet events)
such as pressure set points or by
40
most three-stage compressor • Event history list (Last 32 events)
digital signals.
applications. • Active alarm list
The Centurion provides real-time
• User configurability with • 10 maintenance timers
data via communication ports
Windows-based software allows • Run hourmeter
to a connected display and/or the operator to point and click to • Support for no-flow totalization
50
supervisory system. This advanced implement standard processes. • Number of starts per hour
system offers multiple options All I/O points can be custom (electric motor)
for remote communications and configured. • Six PID loops with override (up to
operation including HMIs, PLCs, • No programming experience three each)
PCs and SCADA systems. The required. • Configuration templates provided
55
industry standard MODBUS* RTU • Local and remote for simple use
protocol means greater support for communications, MODBUS RTU via • Configurations stored in non-
a wide variety of communication RS485/232. volatile flash memory
equipment including radio and • USB 1.1 support for laptops • Set points stored in non-volatile
satellite communications systems. without a serial port. EEPROM memory
Controller General
70
Basic Components Specifications
The Centurion consists of a display module, a main I/O module and Power Input: 10 -32 VDC
75
optional expansion I/O module. No special cables are required. The Operating Temp: -40° to 185° F (-40° to
Centurion is designed for use within a weatherproof enclosure only. 85° C)
Display Module (Head): Choose from Configuration: PC-based Centurion Con-
Standard MV-3-C LCD with graphic display figuration Software
Standard full-color VGA 6 in. or 10 in. touchscreen
78
Main I/O Module: CPC4-1-A: 32 DI, 10 DO, 12 AI, 8 TC, 2 AO, 1 MPU
Expansion Module: MX4: 18 TC (Type J or K). MX5-A: 6 DO, 8 AI, 4 AO, 1 MPU
DI=Digital Input; DO=Digital Output; AI=Analog Input; AO=Analog Output; TC=Thermocou-
ple Input; MPU=Magnetic Pick Up Input; RTD=Resistive Temperature Device
251
80
MV-3-C Display Module with Graphical LCD
• Operating temperature: -40° to 185° F (-40° to 85° C)
• 320x240 pixels, LCD display with backlight
• 12-key keypad for user interface for set point entry, alarm
acknowledgment, start, stop, reset, etc.
• Communications
- RS232/RS485-1 (MODBUS master)
- RS485-2 (reserved)
- USB 1.1 compliant ports
- Type A (reserved)
- Type B (firmware updates)
- CAN 1/2 (reserved)
• Customizable process screens (up to nine)
- Line by line
- Gage
- Control loop
- Generic register
Full-Color VGA Touch Screen
• Operating temperature: 32 to 122° F (0 to 50° C)
• Full-color VGA touch screen (resistive analog)
• 6” standard offering, 10” upgrade
• Data logging - 1 GB memory card
• Data log transfer on the fly
• Communications
- Serial RS232 - 2
- Serial RS485 - 1
- USB 1.1 - 1
- Ethernet (several protocols supported including,
but not limited to MODBUS TCP, TCP/IP Internet Web server)
• Five-button keypad for on screen menus (6”)
• Eight-button keypad for on-screen menus (10”)
• Standard screen offerings
• Front panel power LED
• 24 VDC powered
CPC4-1-A Main I/O Module

• All I/O options individually software selectable. No -
jumpers required
• 32 optically isolated DC digital inputs: NO or NC,
(active high/active low), non-incendive
- LED indicators
- Approved for use with general purpose switches in
hazardous areas
• 12 analog inputs: 0-24mA or 0-5VDC , 10 bit hardware
• Eight thermocouples
- Open thermocouple
- Cold junction compensation
• One magnetic pickup input/AC run signal: 30 to
10kHz, 4.5VAC rms min, 120VAC rms max. Interface: RS232 or RS485
• 10 digital outputs: - Protocol: MODBUS RTU (slave), proprietary
- LED indicators (configuration transfer)
- 4 relay outputs, form C, dry contacts Port 2 (USB): Interface: USB 1.1 compliant port
- 4 FET outputs (source) emulating RS232 communications via PC driver
- 2 FET outputs (sink) - Protocol/Services: MODBUS RTU (slave), proprietary
• Two analog outputs (configuration transfer)
- 4-20mA, 16 bit hardware - Connection: USB Type B connector
• 3 Communication Ports: - Automatic selection of USB when a signal is
Port 1 (SERIAL): detected on the USB Type B connector
- Interface: RS232 or RS485 Port 3: Interface: CAN bus
- Protocol: MODBUS RTU (slave) - Protocol/Services: Proprietary communications for
Port 2 (SERIAL): expansion I/O module support
252
Expansion I/O Modules
5
MX4 Expansion I/O Module
• All I/O options individually software selectable. No jumpers required.
• 18 thermocouple inputs: Type J or K, 12 bit hardware
- Open thermocouple detection: Drives channel reading high (max of scale)
10
• One magnetic pickup input: 4.5VAC – 120 VAC, 30 – 10kHz
MX5-A Expansion I/O Module

• Eight analog inputs: 0-24mA or 0-5VDC, 10 bit hardware
• Six digital outputs: open collector transistor, 150mA (sink)
15
• Four analog outputs: 4-20mA, 16 bit hardware
Dimensions
20
MV-3-C
25
30
40
6-Inch VGA Touch Screen 10-Inch VGA Touch Screen
50
55
CPC4-1-A
70
75
78
253
80
How to Order
Select a Centurion Configurable Controller The minimum system requirements:

CPC4-1-A CPC4-1-A Main I/O Module
Display capable of MODBUS communications
Specify One (optional) Expansion I/O Module
MX4 or MX5-A The Murphy MV-3-C Display Module is a highly
integrated HMI for use with the Centurion system and
Specify One Display is recommended for most customers.
MV-3-C LCD
Some systems may require additional I/O which
6-inch VGA Touch Screen
is available on the MX4 or MX5-A expansion I/O
10-inch VGA Touch Screen
modules.

CPC4-1-A, Centurion Controller
MV-3-C, Monochrome display
6-inch VGA touch screen
Specify Model
MX4 expansion I/O module
MX5-A expansion I/O module
50000774 Ignition noise (choke) filter
Printed replacement terminal plugs for main I/O
00030866 CPC4-1-A Plug kit
module
Printed replacement terminal plugs for MX4 expansion
00030867 MX4 Plug kit
I/O module
I/O module
MurphyNET Configuration Suite is software for
Centurion configuration tool for user modifying sequence of operation, set points, timers,
50702313
application setup faults and displays for Centurion. Includes file transfer
utilities for configuration and upgrades.
254
5
sect. 50 0910452
rev. 2014/10/20
Centurion ™ PLUS Full-Featured Controller
10
The Centurion PLUS Full-
Featured Controller is a control
and monitoring system. Primarily
designed for engine/electric
motor driven compressors, the
15
Centurion is well suited for many
control applications using standard
configurations to save money
and reduce training. Additionally,
Enovation Controls can custom
20
design a control package to meet
exact specifications for a variety of
applications.
The Centurion PLUS continuously
monitors input signals and set
points and commands outputs
25
to maintain proper operation.
When an out-of-limits event
occurs, the controller will stop,
shutdown or control equipment to
change conditions. The auto-start • USB 1.1 support for laptops Expanded communication abilities
30
capabilities of the Centurion allow without a serial port • Modem dial in/dial out using
for start/stop based on parameters • Upload/download capabilities for terminal interfaces, MODBUS
such as pressure set points or by set point edits RTU protocols
digital signals. • Shutdown and alarm history, • Remote monitoring and control
The Centurion PLUS provides maintenance timers via Ethernet (several protocols
real-time data via communication • Complex valve logic and
40
supported including but not
ports to a connected display and/or sequencing support limited to MODBUS TCP, TCP/IP
supervisory system. This advanced • PID Loops w/ overrides (multiple Internet web server)
system offers multiple options control loop possibilities) • Event driven email, SMS text
for remote communications and • Expand I/O up to three expansion messaging possible
operation including HMIs, PLCs, modules, any combination Protocol conversion (many
50
PCs and SCADA systems. The • Firmware stored in non-volatile industry protocols supported)
industry standard MODBUS* RTU flash memory Web page hosting
protocol means greater support for • Set-points stored in non-volatile Data logging
a wide variety of communication eeprom memory • Using common compact flash
equipment including radio and • Approved Certification for Class card memory, 1 GB of storage
satellite communications systems. 1, Division 2, Groups B, C & D areas • Trends data as well as capture
55
Features of the Centurion include: Expanded calculation abilities of readings at time of fault
• Custom programmed to meet • Custom rod load equations • Security file logs all set point
exact application requirements • Look up table support changes
• Communications via 2 RS485/ • Temperature channel deviation • Importable to CSV files
RS232 ports Multi-language support
Controller General
70
Basic Components
Specifications
The Centurion consists of a display module, a main I/O module and
optional expansion I/O module. No special cables are required. The Power Input: 10 -32 VDC
75
Centurion is designed for use within a weatherproof enclosure only. Operating Temp: -40° to 185° F (-40° to
85° C)
Display Module (Head): Choose from Configuration: PC-based Centurion Con-
Standard MV-3-C LCD with graphic display figuration Software
Main I/O Module: CPC4-1-A: 32 DI, 10 DO, 12 AI, 8 TC, 2 AO, 1 MPU
78
Expansion Module: MX4: 18 TC (Type J or K). MX5: 24 DI, 8 DO, 10 AI, 1 MPU. MX5-A:
6 DO, 8 AI, 4 AO, 1 MPU. MX5-D: Same I/O as MX5, additional 8 digital outputs.
DI=Digital Input; DO=Digital Output; AI=Analog Input; AO=Analog Output; TC=Thermocou-
ple Input; MPU=Magnetic Pick Up Input; RTD=Resistive Temperature Device
255
80
• Communications
- Type A (reserved)
- Line by line
- Gauge
- Control loop
- Generic register
• Communications
- Serial RS232 - 2
- Serial RS485 - 1
- USB 1.1 - 1
• 24 VDC powered

•Application Firmware: Programming proprietary C
Language; PC-based upload/download set point editor
• All I/O options individually software selectable. No
jumpers required
- LED indicators
hazardous areas
- Open thermocouple
- Cold junction compensation Port 2 (SERIAL):
• One magnetic pickup input/AC run signal: 30 to - Interface: RS232 or RS485
10kHz, 4.5VAC rms min, 120VAC rms max. - Protocol: MODBUS RTU (slave), proprietary
• 10 digital outputs: (configuration transfer)
- LED indicators Port 2 (USB): Interface: USB 1.1 compliant port
- 4 relay outputs, form C, dry contacts emulating RS232 communications via PC driver
- 4 FET outputs (source) - Protocol/Services: MODBUS RTU (slave), proprietary
- 2 FET outputs (sink) (configuration transfer)
• Two analog outputs - Connection: USB Type B connector
- 4-20mA, 16 bit hardware - Automatic selection of USB when a signal is
• 3 Communication Ports: detected on the USB Type B connector
Port 1 (SERIAL): Port 3: Interface: CAN bus
- Interface: RS232 or RS485 - Protocol/Services: Proprietary communications for
- Protocol: MODBUS RTU (slave) expansion I/O module support
256
5
10

• 24 Digital Inputs: Optically-isolated DC digital inputs, (active high/
active low), non-incendive
15
• 10 analog inputs: 4–20mA or 0–5VDC, 10 bit hardware
• Eight digital outputs: open collector transistor. 150mA (sink)
• One magnetic pickup input: 4.5VAC–120VAC, 30–10kHz
20
MX5-D Expansion I/O Module – Analog Output Option
25
• 24 digital inputs: optically isolated DC digital inputs, (active high/active low) non-incendive
• 16 digital outputs: open collector transistor. 150mA (sink)
30
Dimensions
MV-3-C
40
50
55
70
75
78
257
80
Dimensions - continued
CPC4-1-A
How to Order

Specify any combination up to three Expansion I/O
Modules The Murphy MV-3-C Display Module is a highly
MX4 MX5-A MX5-A and/or MX5-D integrated HMI for use with the Centurion system and
is recommended for most customers.
Specify One Display
MV-3-C LCD Some systems may require additional I/O which
6-inch VGA Touch Screen is available on the MX4 or MX5-A expansion I/O
10-inch VGA Touch Screen modules.

Specify Model
module
I/O module
I/O module
MurphyNET Configuration Suite is software for
Centurion configuration tool for user modifying sequence of operation, set points, timers,
50702313
application setup faults and displays for Centurion. Includes file transfer
utilities for configuration and upgrades.
258
5
sect. 50 0910471
rev. 2014/12/05
TTD Annunciator Panel
10
The TTD is a fully configurable fault
annunciator and shutdown control
system designed to protect engines,
compressors and associated
15
equipment.
This easy-to-operate panel features
a simple interface. One display head
is common to all configurations
which requires fewer spare parts.
20
The optional tachometer may use
CD ignition or MPU input. The panel
offers optional pre-lube or post-lube
functionality as well as optional no-
flow detection. It can monitor 48 user- TTD-H, PSU-2 approved for
25
hazardous locations Class 1,
configurable sensors. Division 2, Groups B, C and D.
Specifications
30
Power Requirements: Communication Ports: 1
PSU-2: 10-32VDC, 10W (max); 90-400VDC CD Ignition, 750uA @ A single bi-color (green/red) LED is provided to give visual indication
100VDC (max) of active transmit and receive traffic. Only one connection will be
On-Board Backup Power: Lithium battery, 6 VDC, 1300 mAh active at any time.
Digital Inputs: 48 (aka channels) Interface: Factory configured for RS232; field-selectable for RS232
Sensor Types: Discrete input, N.O./N.C., intrinsically safe or or RS485
40
non-incendive Baud/Configuration: 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K†;N,8,1;N,8,2
Magnetic Pickup Input: 3.6 - 120 VAC, 2-10 kHz. Protocol: MODBUS (Slave)
Outputs: Connection: There are two screw terminal connectors for RS485.
IGN: 0.4A @ 400VDC* for 5 seconds There are two screw terminal connectors for RS232. There is one
0.15A @ 400VDC(*) cont. duty screw terminal common for both ports labeled as GND.
FV- : 0.5A @ 400VDC(*) for 5 seconds Third Party Approvals:
50
ALR: 0.5A @ 48VDC TTD-H, PSU-2: CSA Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C and D
AUX: 0.5A @ 48VDC Intuitive Display Icons: Display status and assist in setup and
operation resulting in greater ease of operation and interface. The
Operator Interface: appropriate icon will turn on to indicate unit status or navigation
Display Type: LCD, Static, 80 segment, custom text with LED through the setup features.
backlight RUN – Run mode
55
Display Viewable Area: ~ 2.79 x 1 in. (71.04mm x 25.4mm) RPM – Screen Value
Display Contrast: Automatic HOURS – Screen Value
Display Backlight: Yellow (Normal Operation); Red (Shutdown) TYPE – Channel Type Configuration
(Backlight will only be available when unit is powered by DC. LOW BATT – Low Battery Warning (displayed when condition
Voltage Level Monitor: Monitor and display voltage level of DC exists)
supply, CD ignition and internal battery. HISTORY – Shutdown History
70
Keypad: 6 switches: Ridge Embossed, Metal Dome, Tactile 14 Oz. TEST – Test Mode
Trip Force LUBE – Pre-lubrication Timer
Enclosure Cutout: 5.25 x 5.25 in. (133 mm) POSTLUBE – Post-lubrication Timer
Operating Temperature: -40° to 85°C SHUTDOWN – Stop Mode
Viewable Temperature: -40° to 85°C ALARM – Alarm(s) Warning (displayed when condition exists)
Storage Temperature: -40° to 85°C SETPOINT – Edit Set-point Value
75
Tachometer Accuracy: ±0.5% of the display reading or ±1 RPM, SETUP – Setup Menu(s)
whichever is greater
Resettable Hourmeter Range: 0 to 99999 hrs. * CSA approved for 250VDC maximum
Non-Resettable Hourmeter Range: 0 to 99999 hrs. †
38.4K Baud will not be available when IGN input is selected as the
Hourmeter Accuracy: ±1 hour per year. source for RPM calculations. When MPU is selected, this feature is
available for selection.
78
259
80
260
5
sect. 50 0910472
rev. 2014/11/04
Centurion ™
10
Configurable Control Panel
The Centurion Configurable Control Panel (C4) is a
hybrid of an annunciator and compressor controller. The
15
C4 combines the monitoring and shutdown features
of an annunciator, with auto-start and basic engine
controls that help prevent shutdowns.
The panel is PC configurable and USB compatible. No
programming experience is required for this panel.
20
Specifications
Power Input: 10 -32 VDC
25
Operating Temp: -40° to 185° F (-40° to 85° C)
Configuration: PC-based Centurion Configuration Software
Display Module (Head): Choose from

Standard MV-3-C LCD with graphic display
30
Main I/O Module: CPC4-1-A: 32 DI, 10 DO, 12 AI, 8 TC, 2 AO,
1 MPU
Expansion Module: MX4: 18 TC (Type J or K). MX5-A: 6 DO, 8
AI, 4 AO, 1 MPU
DI=Digital Input; DO=Digital Output; AI=Analog Input; AO=Analog
40
Output; TC=Thermocouple Input; MPU=Magnetic Pick Up Input;
RTD=Resistive Temperature Device

50
jumpers required
- LED indicators
hazardous areas
55
- Open thermocouple
70
75

78

261
80
• Communications
- Type A (reserved)
- Line by line
- Gage
- Control loop
- Generic register
• Communications
- Serial RS232 - 2
- Serial RS485 - 1
- USB 1.1 - 1
• 24 VDC powered


262
Dimensions
5
MV-3-C 6-Inch VGA Touch Screen
10
15
Unit is 2.3 in. (58.4 mm) deep.
20
CPC4-1-A 10-Inch VGA Touch Screen
25
30
Unit is 2.2 in. (58.8 mm) deep.
40
How to Order
50
Modules The Murphy MV-3-C Display Module is a highly
MX4 MX5-A integrated HMI for use with the Centurion system and
Specify One Display
MV-3-C LCD Some systems may require additional I/O which
55

70
Specify Model
75

module
78

I/O module
I/O module
263
80
264
5
sect. 50 0910492
rev. 2014/11/04
Centurion™ PLUS
10
Control Panel
The Centurion PLUS Configurable Control Panel (C4)
is the latest evolution in Murphy’s controller technology.
15
This full-featured controller provides the stability of
proven technology combined with the latest HMI touch
screen for greater expandability and user interface.
The Centurion Plus panel features custom application
programming as well as full-time date logging and
20
expandable communication capabilities.
Specifications
Power Input: 10 -32 VDC
Operating Temp: -40° to 185° F (-40° to 85° C)
25
Operating Temp (touch screen): 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C)
Display Module (Head): Choose from
Standard MV-3-C LCD with graphic display
Main I/O Module: CPC4-1-A: 32 DI, 10 DO, 12 AI, 8 TC, 2 AO,
30
1 MPU
Expansion Module: MX4: 18 TC (Type J or K). MX5-A: 6 DO, 8
AI, 4 AO, 1 MPU
DI=Digital Input; DO=Digital Output; AI=Analog Input; AO=Analog
Output; TC=Thermocouple Input; MPU=Magnetic Pick Up Input;
RTD=Resistive Temperature Device
40
Application Firmware: Programming Proprietary C language -
PC-based upload/download set point editor
50
jumpers required
- LED indicators
hazardous areas
55
- Open thermocouple
70
75

78

265
80
• Communications
- Type A (reserved)
- Line by line
- Gage
- Control loop
- Generic register
• Communications
- Serial RS232 - 2
- Serial RS485 - 1
- USB 1.1 - 1
• 24 VDC powered


• 24 Digital Inputs: Optically-isolated DC digital inputs, (active high/
active low), non-incendive
• Eight digital outputs: open collector transistor. 150mA (sink)

MX5-D Expansion I/O Module – Analog Output Option

• 24 digital inputs: optically isolated DC digital inputs, (active high/active low) non-incendive
• 16 digital outputs: open collector transistor. 150mA (sink)
266
Dimensions
5
MV-3-C
10
15
20
25
30
40
CPC4-1-A
50
55
70
75
78
267
80
How to Order
Select a Centurion Configurable Controller

The minimum system requirements:
CPC4-1-A
Modules
The Murphy MV-3-C Display Module is a highly
MX4 MX5-A MX5-A and/or MX5-D
integrated HMI for use with the Centurion system and
Specify One Display
MV-3-C LCD
Some systems may require additional I/O which

Specify Model
module
I/O module
I/O module
268
5
sect. 50 1210950
rev. 2014/10/04
Control Systems & Services
10
With more than 75 years of history, Murphy’s Control Systems &
Services division has the experience to provide the correct solution
for any control system need. We work with clients to quickly
identify critical needs and cost-effective solutions in a wide variety
15
of control systems applications, from basic annunciator shutdown
panels to complex PLC-based systems.
CS&S takes any project from conception to completion and

beyond with 24-hour technical support.
20
Services include:
• Project Management
• Design and Engineering
• Testing
25
• Training
• Technical Support
30
Project Management: Dedicated to the Details
Our employees have the proven ability to take your project from concept
to design to fabrication and field support. We begin the process with the
40
end in mind, utilizing a consultative approach to get a clear picture of your
desired end result.
Design and Engineering: Built Right, Every Time

Consistent design maintains similar look and feel across many different
50
PLC panels. This concept allows production, support staff, customer staff
and end users to be familiar with the controls panels even before they see it
for the first time.
Start-Up Assistance: Money Saved, Not Spent
55
In the oil and gas industry, start ups are critical. Having the right personnel
on site can save downtime and money by reducing lost production
time. Downtime is expensive and can be minimized by having a PLC
Service Engineer provide the technical expertise needed for advanced
troubleshooting and on-site control philosophy modifications.
Troubleshooting: Extensive Knowledge When & Where You Need It 70

Equipment malfunctions can happen any time, day or night. So we provide
24-hour technical support to help get your equipment back up and running.
Our support team is available by phone to answer your questions and assist
75
with troubleshooting.
Training: Helping Your Team

Our dedicated team of PLC Engineers help your operators feel more
comfortable with the systems by spending time with them to go through the
78
PLC as well as basic troubleshooting tips.
269
80
270
5
Section 55 Valves
Check/Relief Valves — Diesel Fuel
10
7867 Diesel Fuel Check Valves — CKV/PRV Series �� 273
Shutoff Valves
99026 Diesel Fuel Shutoff Valves — SV Series�� 275
94134 Electromechanical Fuel Shutoff Valves — M25 and M50 Series �� 277
15
94129 Pneumatic Valves for Fuel Gas Shutoff — Models M2582-P and M5180-P�� 281
Pulsation Dampener Valves

95145 Pulsation Dampener — PD8100 Series �� 283
20
25
30
40
50
55
70
75
78
271
80
272
5
sect. 55 7867
rev. 2014/12/05
Diesel Fuel Check Valves
10
Murphy offers two types of diesel fuel line valves: check valves and
pressure relief valves.
The CKV series check valves are in-line, one-way valves that prevent fuel
from being siphoned back into an injector or injection pump which could
15
delay a shutdown.
There are two types of check valves: CKV2336 and CKV1WPS. The
CKV2336 has a 1/4 NPT threaded male connection on each end for
connecting to fuel line fittings or hoses. The CKV1WPS check valve is
typically mounted in the fuel bypass line of the last fuel injector. The
20
CKV1WPS features a hollow bolt connection and a barbed 1/8 NPT
connection for flex hose or fitting.
The PRV series pressure relief valves relieve overpressure in a fuel system
usually caused by closing of a solenoid fuel valve. The PRV50 and PRV70
have a 1/4 NPT threaded connection on each end for connecting to fuel line
25
fittings or hoses.
Specifications
Materials Opening Pressure
30
Body Seal Spring CKV2336 4 psi (27)
CKV2336 Brass Poppet SS CKV1WPS 2 psi (14)
CKV1WPS Brass SS SS PRV50 25 psi (172)
PRV50/PRV70 Brass SS SS PRV70 70 psi (483)
40
Note: SS=Stainless steel Note: metric (kPa) equivalents in parentheses
Static Pressure (all): 150 psi (1.03 MPa) maximum

Weight (all): 1.3 oz. (40.5 g)
Dimensions
50
CKV2336 CKV1WPS PRV50 and PRV70
55
70
How To Order
75

CKV2336
CKV1WPS
Specify Model Number Valves
78
PRV50
PRV70
Note: There are no replacement parts.
273
80
Basic Operation
Murphy Check Valves and Pressure

Relief Valves enhance the operation
of diesel engine shutdown valves
by reducing the time required for
complete engine shutdown after the
solenoid valve closes. The diagram
at right shows a typical installation
using CKV check valves and PRV
pressure relief valves.
All valves are shown closed.
Check Valves close off the fuel
return line(s) to prevent fuel or
air from re-entering the injection
system through the bypass line(s).
Models CKV2336 (3) is an in-line
valve. Model CKV1WPS (2) has a
21/64 in. (8 mm) banjo fitting that
attaches to the return line of the final
injector. All check valves allow fuel
to flow away from the injectors but
close to prevent fuel from flowing in
the reverse direction.
The PRV50 and PRV70 (1) relieve
pressure buildup in the fuel system
that can cause fuel filter canisters
to burst. When the solenoid valve
closes to stop the engine, the fuel
transfer pump will continue to
produce pressure as the engine
slows down to stop. This pressure
buildup, if not relieved, can cause
fuel filter canisters or gaskets to
leak. PRVs are installed in the
bypass line from the fuel filter(s) to
the fuel return line.
274
5
sect. 55 99026
rev. 2014/09/27
Diesel Fuel Shutoff Valve
10
SV Series
The SV series valve, which is solenoid operated, is a normally closed valve
that opens when current is supplied from the battery through a magnetic
switch. Temperature, level or pressure Swichgage® instruments installed
15
on the diesel engine and pump or compressor trip the magnetic switch
breaking the circuit from the battery which closes the valve and stops the
engine.
The SV-12 valve operates on 12-VDC, has a 1/4 NPT inlet and outlet and a
full 3/16 in. (5 mm) orifice. A 24-VDC (SV-24) is optional. The SV valves open
20
against 30 psi. (207 kPa) [2.07 bar] inlet pressure.
For a greater flow rate valve, we offer the special series SV valve with a
1/4 in. (6 mm) orifice which opens against maximum pressure of 15 psi (103
kPa) [1.03 bar]. This valve is recommended where greater flow is required
and only static head or low transfer pump pressures are encountered. Auxiliary Fuel
25
Murphy’s SV-HP series valves open against diesel fuel transfer pump
Valves
pressure up to 60 psi (414 kPa) [4.14 bar]. Models are available for 12- or
24-volt DC systems. The orifice is 1/4 in. (6 mm) using the same inlet/outlet
Fuel Return Line Check Valve
and options as standard SV.
The CKV series is an in-line, one-
The SV Series fuel shutoff valve is for use with diesel engines with
30
way valve for the prevention of
externally accessible fuel injection pumps. The volume of fuel required for
fuel siphoning
the engine to operate must be able to pass through the 3/16 in. (5 mm) or
from the diesel
1/4 in. (6 mm) orifice of the valve. You must be able to attach the fuel valve
return line by
directly onto or in close proximity to the fuel injection pump in order to close
an injection
off fuel flow to the pump.
40
pump. In engine
The SV series is NOT intended for use with engines having unit injectors or
shutdown
distributor type injection pumps. Use only with diesel.
systems using a Murphy SV valve,
Specifications the CKV is necessary to ensure
a rapid shutdown of the engine
by fuel starvation of the injection
50
Electrical Rating: 12- or 24-VDC, 10 watts system. For details see bulletin
Orifice: 3/16 in. (5 mm) diameter (optional 1/4 in. [6 mm] diameter). See chart below.
Body Connections: 1/4 NPT inlet/outlet 7867.
Maximum Opening Pressure:
3/16 in. (5 mm) orifice: 30 psi (207 kPa) [2.07 bar] Fuel Line Pressure Relief Valve
1/4 in. (6 mm) orifice: 15 psi (103 kPa) [1.03 bar] The PRV50 is an in-line, one-
55
Shipping Weight: 1 lb. 6 oz. (0.68 kg) way valve for the prevention of
Shipping Dimension: 3 x 2-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. (76 x 70 x 70 mm)
overpressure damage to fuel filters
SV-HP (High Pressure model) and their housings. This pressure
Orifice: 1/4 in. (6 mm) diameter. See chart below.
Maximum Opening Pressure: 60 psi (414 kPa) [4.14 bar].
relief valve operates in conjunction
with a Murphy SV series shutdown
valve. After
the SV closes,
70
a rapid high
pressure build-
up caused by
75
the fuel pump

can occur. The PRV, mounted in a
fuel return line after the filter, will
open to relieve pressure buildup.
78
275
80
Typical SV Valve Installation
Installation and Service

Suggestions
1. Make sure the valve is the same
voltage as the battery. Under continu-
ous duty, the coil will normally be hot;
however, incorrect voltage can cause
smoking and burned coils.
2. The valve will not operate if the flow
arrow on the side of the valve does not
indicate the correct direction of flow.
3. Do not apply pipe dope to female
valve threads. Dope inside the valve
will foul the seat and prevent proper Note: Mount the SV valve as close as possible to the injection
pump. If using the SV valve with electronic devices, we
seal. recommend installing a suppression diode across the SV valve
4. Install the valve as close as possi- coil.
ble to the injection pump.
Dimensions
Troubleshooting the
SV Series Valves
Check Control Circuit: To deter-
mine if the electrical system is ener-
gizing the solenoid, listen for a metallic
click signifying the solenoid is oper-
ating. Absence of the click indicates
loss of power supply. Check for blown
or loose fuses, for an open circuit or
a grounded coil, for broken lead wires
or open splice connections.
Coil Burnout: Check for open-circuit
coil. Replace coil if necessary.
High or Low Voltage: Check volt-
age across the coil with a voltmeter. How To Order
Voltage must be in 85 percent to 110
percent of nameplate rating. Options listed at right. All
Incorrect Pressure: Check fuel line configurations may not be
pressure. Pressure on the valve must available. Call your sales
be within the specific range of the SV representative or Enovation
in use. Controls for more information.
Fuel Leak Through Valve: Disas-
semble the valve and clean parts.
Replace any parts that are worn or
damaged (see How To Order for
repair parts).
Slow Shutdown: Due to the internal
fuel capacity of some injection Part Number Description Notes
pumps, engine shutdown will not 80-04-1412 Screw
occur until that fuel is used up 55010141 Coil Replacement 12-volt kit
Note: If engine continues to run after 55010145 Coil Replacement 24-volt kit
the valve closes, install a check valve 55010155 Core Repair Kit (Std. model)
Repair
such as CKV2336 in the return line. 55010156 Core Repair Kit (HP model) Parts
Valve Body: 3/16 Orifice 1/4
55050194
NPT x 1/4 NPT (std.)
Valve Body: 1/4 Orifice 1/4
55050193
NPT x 1/4 NPT
276
5
sect. 55 94134
rev. 2014/12/05
Electromechanical Fuel Shutoff Valves
10
M25 & M50 Series
These fuel shutoff valves are semi-automatic devices
for shutdown of natural gas-fueled engines. The valve is
opened manually and closes when the electromagnet is
15
energized and trips the latch. The valve can be closed
manually by turning the disconnect knob. A normally
energized model is available that holds the valve open
electrically and closes when the coil is de-energized.
A vent in the valve body relieves trapped gas when the
20
valve closes. A pop-out indicator button informs you
when the valve is open or closed.
The valve’s tripping power is provided by an engine
ignition system or battery. Models are available for
magneto, CD ignition or 12-/24-V battery.
25
The M2582 is a 1-inch (25 mm) valve with one NPT
connection. It has one SPDT snap-switch. The valve
body is made of sandcast aluminum. It does not
include the open/close indicator button.
The M5081 is a 2-inch (51 mm) valve with two NPT
30
connections. It has two SPDT snap-switches. The valve
body is available in sandcast aluminum or cast Specifications
steel (optional).
The M5081FS is the same as the M5081 but has a Valve Body: Sandcast aluminum, painted red (corrosion resis-
normally energized circuit. This circuit allows the valve tance). Optional cast steel available for M5081 and M5081FS
40
to be held open electrically and close by interruption models only.
of the coil’s power circuit. A manual trip knob is not Valve Seat: Buna-N
Maximum Pressure Rating:
available on this model. An optional 2-inch (51 mm)
• M2582: 80 psig (552 kPa) [5.52 bar]
steel flange pipe connection is available for • M5081: 100 psig (689 kPa) [6.89 bar]
M5081 and M5081FS steel body models (see • M5081FS: 100 psig (689 kPa) [6.89 bar]
50
Dimensions). Coil Rating: Intermittent duty; coil type must match power source;
• CD ignition coil resistance: 72 Ω
Options & Accessories • CD primary voltage current: 1.38 to 3.8 A
• M5081FS model: Energized to run (continuous-duty coil) coil
resistance:
Diode Package (65010065) 12 Volt model: 33 Ω (0.36 A)
55
24 Volt model: 136 Ω (0.17 A)
The Murphy 202 V diode package is designed to allow • Magneto ignition coil resistance: 0.5 Ω
the fuel shutoff valve to be used with dual Magneto • Magneto primary voltage current: 1 to 5 A
Ignition systems. Sold separately (see How to Order). • Battery coil resistance: 7 Ω
12 or 24 VDC: 1.2 to 2.4 A
Magnetic Switch Adapter Wiring (See Internal Wiring):
70
• M2582: Wire leads
As ignition systems wear from usage, their power output • M5081 and M5081FS: Terminal blocks
becomes less and less. Ignition may not have the Snap-switch Rating: 5 A @ 480 VAC
Laboratory Approval: CSA listed for Class I, Groups C and D
capacity to reliably trip the fuel valve. Therefore, the use Hazardous Locations. 5 amps maximum; intermittent duty; mod-
of a Magnetic Switch Adapter for CD ignition systems is els M5081 and M5081-CD engine ignition powered and model
75
recommended. The adapter stores energy from the CD M5081-B, 12 or 24 VAC or VDC; switch contacts rated 5 A @
ignition to trip the fuel valve. 480 VAC maximum
Three models are available:
65700053 (65020126):
For Negative Ground CD Ignitions up to 240 VDC
78
65700055 (65020155):
For Negative Ground CD Ignitions 240 VDC to 450 VDC
277
80
Dimensions
M2582 Steel Flanged Option 3 (available on M5081FS and

M5081FS steel body configurations only)
M5081 & M5081FS
278
Flow Rates
5
M2582 M5081 & M5081FS
10
15
20
25
30
Internal Wiring
M2582 M5081 & M5081FS
»» NOTE: For grounding the ignition (CD models only) through the fuel valve’s internal snap-switch, a Murphy Magnetic Switch adapter
(see How To Order) must be used in addition to a 100 ohm, 2 watt resistor.
40
50
55
70
75
78
279
80
How to Order
Options listed at right. All

configurations may not be
available. Call your sales
representative or Enovation
Controls for more information.

For Negative Ground CD
65700053
Ignitions up to 240 VDC
Magnetic Switch Adapter
(for M2582 and M5081) For Negative Ground CD
65700055 Ignitions 240 VDC to 450
VDC
M2582 M5081 M5081FS Service Parts Notes
55000128 55000126 ---------- Battery
55000129 55000127 ---------- CD Ignition Coil Assembly
55000094 55000080 ---------- Magneto Ignition
---------- ---------- 55000158 12 VDC
FS Coil Assembly
---------- ---------- 55000159 24 VDC
55000095 55000074 ---------- Latch Block Assembly
55000144 ---------- ---------- Latch Block Switch and Coil Assembly
Latch Block Assembly
Latch Block Switch and Mounting
---------- 55000118 ----------
Bracket Assembly
---------- 55000102 55000102 Handle & Latch Kit
55000096 ---------- ---------- Handle Kit
55000097 55000137 ---------- Manual Disconnect Assembly
55000098 55000072 55000160 Snap-Switch Assembly
---------- 55000138 55000138 Close/Open Indicator Assembly
55000093 55000075 55000135 Stem & Seat Kit
55000161 (12V) Top Works Complete Valve
55000146 55000131
55000194 (24V) Less Body and Vent
55000143 55000132 55000132 Vent Bushing Assembly
Diode Package for Dual Magneto
---------- 65010065 ----------
Ignitions
Shipping Information
Shipping Weights: Shipping Dimensions:
• M2582: 5 lbs 8 oz. (2.49 kg) • M2582: 8 x 8 x 7 in. (203 x 203 x 178 mm)
• M5081: 14 lbs 8 oz. (6.58 kg) • M5081: 12 x 12 x 9-5/16 in. (305 x 305 x 237 mm)
• M5081-2: 40 lbs (18.14 kg) • M5081-2: 12 x 12 x 9-5/16 in. (305 x 305 x 237 mm)
• M5081-3: 56 lbs (25.40 kg) • M5081-3: 18 x 12 x 13-1/2 in. (457 x 305 x 343 mm)
• M5081FS: 14 lbs 8 oz. (6.58 kg) • M5081FS: 12 x 12 x 9-5/16 in. (305 x 305 x 237 mm)
• M5081FS-2: 40 lbs (18.14 kg) • M5081FS-2: 12 x 12 x 9-5/16 in. (305 x 305 x 237 mm)
• M5081FS-3: 56 lbs (25.40 kg) • M5081FS-3: 18 x 12 x 13-1/2 in. (457 x 305 x 343 mm)
280
5
sect. 55 94129
rev. 2014/12/05
Pneumatic Valves for Fuel Gas Shutoff
10
Models M2582-P and M5180-P
The MS582-P and M5180-P are pneumatically controlled fuel shutoff
valves that open and close automatically or semi-automatically. The
pneumatic control pressure can be air, oil or gas. A manual lever aids in
15
opening the valve when control pressure is insufficient. A gas escape vent,
when properly vented and maintained, releases trapped gas from the valve
after shutoff. Basic operation is:
Automatic: As the control pressure/vacuum increase the valve will open.
When the control pressure/vacuum decreases, the valve will close.
20
Semi-Automatic: If the control pressure/vacuum is too low and the valve
does not open automatically, it can be opened manually by lifting the
built-in lever arm and setting the latch. The latch resets automatically
when control pressure rises enough to release it.
M2582-P is for 1-inch (25 mm) gas lines. It automatically opens at 5 psi
25
(35kPa) [0.34 bar] and fully opens the seat at 15 psi (103 kPa) [1.02 bar]. The
valve can be manually opened with the lever and latch against inlet pressure Specifications
of 80 psi (552 kPa) [5.52 bar]. The latch will release after pilot pressure
reaches 11 psi (17kPa) [.17 bar]. Valve body: Sandcast aluminum (alodined
M5180-P is for 2-inch (52 mm) gas lines. It automatically opens at 5 psi for corrosion resistance). Optional steel
30
(35kPa) [0.34 bar] and fully opens the seat at 15 psi (21 kPa) [.21 bar]. The body available on M5180-P models only.
valve can be manually opened with the lever and latch against inlet pressure Valve seat: Buna-N
Valve Inlet Pressure (maximum):
of 100 psi (689 kPa) [6.89 bar]. The latch will release after pilot pressure M2582-P: 80 psi (552 kPa) [5.52 bar]
reaches 11 psi (17kPa) [.17 bar]. M5180-P: 100 psi (689 kPa) [6.89 bar]
Parts exposed to gas line flow:
40
Dimensions M2582-P:
• Aluminum
• Buna-N
M2582-P M5180-P
• 302, 303 and 17-7 PH stainless steel
M5180P:
• Aluminum (steel optional)
50
• Buna-N
• 302, 303, 304 and 416 stainless steel
Control diaphragm: Flexweave polyester
fabric and Buna-N elastomer
Control pressure (maximum):
M2582-P: 75 psi (517 kPa) [2.55 bar]
55
M5180-P: 80 psi (552 kPa) [5.52 bar]
Shipping Weights:
M2582-P: 5 lbs 10 oz (2.55 kg)
M5180-P: 14 lbs 9 oz (6.61 kg)
With steel body option: 25 lbs (11.34 kg)
70
75
5 PSI 35 kPa 0.34 bar

From
78
55020131 (M25) 15 PSI 103 kPa 1.02 bar

55020114 (M50)
11 PSI 76 kPa 0.75 bar
281
80
M2582-P Flow Characteristics Laboratory Test
How To Order
Options listed at right. All configurations may
not be available. Call your sales representative
or Enovation Controls for more information.

55000148 Handle & Latch Kit
55000147 Stem & Seat Kit
Top Works Complete Valve Less
55000150
Body & Vent M258-P Service Parts
55000143 Vent Bushing Assembly
55000184 Diaphragm Assembly
0007908 Pilot Diaphragm
55000154 Handle & Latch Kit
55000135 Steam & Seat Kit
Top Works Complete Valve Less
55000155
Body & Vent M5180-P Service Parts
55000132 Vent Bushing Assembly
55000153 Diaphragm Assembly
55050420 Pilot Diaphragm
282
5
sect. 55 95145
rev. 2014/09/27
Pulsation Dampener
10
PD8100 Series
The PD8100 Series eliminates pointer flutter on
pressure indicating Swichgage® devices which are
subject to pulsating pressure from reciprocating pumps
15
or compressors. It also allows a close setting of high
and low contact points providing for more accurate
pressure indication and control of equipment.
The PD8100 Series decreases wear on geared
movements and increases the life of pressure indicating
20
instruments by eliminating excessive gage strain and
unnecessary movement, a necessity which quickly
pays for itself by protecting any pressure indicating and
control instrument which is subject to pulsation.
PD8100 SERIES IS NOT FOR USE ON OXYGEN OR
25
LIQUID OXYGEN APPLICATIONS.
The PD8100 is quality built with a large diameter valve
stem wheel for ease of adjustment and features clearly NOT INTENDED FOR USE
printed operating instructions. AS A SHUTOFF VALVE
Machined from 1 3/8-inch (35 mm) hex bar stock, a
30
two degree taper on the valve and stem assure positive
dampening. Dimensions
It’s available in brass, carbon steel, 303 stainless
steel or 316 stainless steel to meet pressure and
environmental requirements with either 1/2 NPT or 1/4
40
NPT inlet connections.
Specifications
See How to Order section for available inlet and outlet
50
connections.
PD8183: All wetted parts are brass. Rated to 3000 psi (20.68 MPa)
[206.80 bar]
PD8184: All wetted parts are carbon steel. Rated to 5000 psi (34.47
MPa) [344.70 bar]
PD8185: All wetted parts are 303 stainless steel. Rated to 10000
55
psi (68.95 MPa) [689.50 bar]
PD8190: All wetted parts are 316 stainless steel. Rated to 10000
psi (68.95 MPa) [689.50 bar]. Meets NACE standard MR- 01-75 for
direct exposure to H2S.
Shipping Weight (all models): 2 lbs. (0.9 kg)
70
Shipping Dimensions (all models): 4 3/4 x 4 3/4 x 3 1/4 in.
(121 x 121 x 83 mm)
Murphymatic ® Compressor Panel

75
Shown at right is a typical Murphymatic compressor panel featuring three Pulsation

Dampeners and Murphy’s OPLFC gages.
The PDs are recommended for use on piston pumps and compressors to eliminate
pointer contact flutter and gage wear.
78
283
80
Mounting
The PD8100 Series Pulsation

Dampener is mounted directly
below the OPLFS Pressure
Swichgage. Precautions: Dope or use
Teflon tape on connection
threads. Do not block the
inlet orifice.
How to Order

PD8183 PD8184 PD8185 PD8190
65050104 65050210 65050204 65051136 A. 1/2 NPT inlet x 1/4 NPT outlet*
65050105 65050212 65050206 65051135 A. 1/2 NPT x 1/2 NPT outlet*
65050099 65050209 65050203 65051139 B. Bonnet Fitting
65050175 65050208 65050202 65051140 C. Valve Stem
Service Parts
65050098 65050211 65050205 65051137 D. Packing Nut
See Drawing Below
55000179 55000179 55000179 55000179 E. Hand Wheel (with 10-32 nut)
55000174 55000173 55000175 55000206 F. Strainer Bushing Assembly†
00000936 00000936 00000936 00000936 G. Molded Packing Gland
00000302 00000302 00000302 00000302 H. O Ring Bonnet Seal
65050214 65050214 65050214 65050214 J. Stainless Mesh Filter**
*For 1/4 NPT inlet use with strainer bushing assembly
†
Provided only for units with 1/4 NPT inlet
**Provided in units with 1/2 NPT inlet.
284
5
Section 70 Electric Gauges
Electric Gages
10
95090 EG Series — Electric Gage and Swichgage® Instrument�� 287
Senders
1411577 Fuel Senders�� 291
1411607 Pressure Senders �� 293
15
1411608 Temperature Senders �� 295
Annunciators
0910469 Four Function Tattletale® Annunciator — EN204 Series�� 299
20
Tachometers - Analog
97026 Tachometers and Tach/Hourmeters — AT and ATH Series�� 301
25
30
40
50
55
70
75
78
285
80
286
5
sect. 70 95090
rev. 2014/10/01
EG Series
10
Electric Gage & Swichgage ® Instrument
The EGS21 Series Swichgage instrument has all of the
features of the EG21 Series Gage plus an adjustable
15
set point Power Hall Effect switch output for operating
alarms or equipment shutdown. The trip point is
adjustable over 90 percent of the scale and has a set
point indicator visible from the gage face. Now you can
have both the ease of electric gage installation and
20
the reliable switching of Murphy’s famous Swichgage
instrument.
Features of the EG Series include:
• EG Air Core Movement design
• Technological improvements in lighting, accuracy
in reading and wiring installation
25
• Environmentally sealed design
• Exceeds the rigid SAE J1810 standard Dimensions
• Corrosion-resistant materials
• Desirable for marine and other environmentally
sensitive applications
30
• Soft, non-glare dial and pointer illumination
by cold light LED
Specifications
Power Input: For Gage, Swichgage instrument and sender, 12
40
VDC or 24 VDC
NOTE: EG21 Series gage and EGS21 Series Swichgage instru-
ment MOVEMENT and ILLUMINATION require 12 VDC to function.
For 24-volt systems, voltage converters are built into the electrical
wire/connector assembly and supplied with instrument. Specify
voltage when ordering.
50
Case: Polyester (PBT), impact and weather resistant with convenient
screw-on mounting clamp
Bezel: Polished 316 stainless steel bezel is supplied as standard;
Available in black. SAE style optional.
Lens: Clear polycarbonate and UV stabilized
Air Core Movement: Silicon dampened pointer
55
Dial: Black background and white markings; behind dial lighting
(white marking becomes red when illuminated); dual scale with mirror
band to reduce parallax reading errors
Swichgage Instrument Sensor: Outputs ground signal (sinking
output) rated 300 mA continuous (EGS21 Series only). Pressure,
fuel, volts set on decreasing scale. Temperature and amps set on
70
increasing scale.
Output saturation voltage (voltage drop across switch):
1.3-2.3 Volts @ 77°F (25°C) (May require some conditioning to work
with logic inputs)
Swichgage Instrument Set Point Indicator: Visible on mirror
band (scale); adjustable from the back of the unit (1/16 in. hex type
75
wrench)
Wiring: Plug connector with wire leads, 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) x 8 in.
(203 mm) length
Over Voltage (Gage Movement): Withstands a voltage of 200%
78
of nominal system voltage for 5 minutes. (Meets SAE J1810 stan-

dards)
Reversed Polarity (Gage Movement): Withstands reversed
battery terminal polarity indefinitely within operating temperatures
Environment and Test: Meets SAE J1810 standards
287
80
Gage Ranges
80 psi 552 kPa 5.52 bar

100 psi 689 kPa 6.89 bar
Pressure 200 psi 1.38 MPa 13.80 bar
300 psi 2.07 MPa 20.70 bar
400 psi 2.76 MPa 27.60 bar
250° F 121° C
Temperature
300° F 149° C
Fuel Level Empty — 1/4 — 1/2 — 3/4 —Full
Ammeter 60 — 0 — 60 amps (internal shunt)
12 VDC: 8-18 Volts

Voltmeter
24 VDC: 16-36 Volts
Electric Gage Senders

Pressure Temperature Fuel
• ESP: 1-wire-to-ground sender* • EST: 1-wire-to-ground sender • ESF: 1-wire-to-ground sender

• ES2P: 2-wire ungrounded sender* • ES2T: 2-wire ungrounded sender • ES2F: 2-wire ungrounded sender
• ESDP: 2-wire ungrounded sender, • ESDT: 2-wire ungrounded sender, • ESDF: 2-wire ungrounded sender,
drives 2 gages* drives 2 gages. drives 2 gages
• ESPM: 1-wire-to-ground sender † ‡
• ES2PM: 2-wire ungrounded
sender † ‡
* Through 100 psi (689 kPa) [6.89 bar]
† Ranges above 100 psi (689 kPa) [6.89 bar]
‡ Mounting off equipment recommended
288
How to Order
5
EG Series Gage and Swichgage Instrument
10
15
20
25
NOTE: EG21 and EGS21 are designed for use with 12-volt systems. For 24-volt systems, voltage reducing
resistors are included in the wire/connector assembly. No designator required for Standard configurations.
* The EG21PV-80-12 or 24 is designed to read senders with a resistance curve of 9.5 to 182 Ohms, which
are commonly supplied as standard senders on Deutz and VW engines.
30
**The EG21TV-300-12 or 24 is designed to read senders with a resistance of 240 to 18 Ohms, which are
commonly supplied as standard senders on Deutz and VW engines.
EG Series Senders
40
30000213 Off-Equipment For ESPM,
Mounting Kit ES2PM and ES-
50
DPPM pressure
senders. Rec-
ommended for
protection from
damaging vibra-
tion. Customer
55
supplies hose
and fittings.
12 VDC 24 VDC Wire/
Connector
Assembly
05004506 05006166
(05004546)6
EG21P/T/F
70
05004507 05006168 EGS21P/T/F
(05004548)6
75
05004505 05006170 EG21AM

Notes: (05004550)6
1 - Through 100 psi (689 kPa) [6.89 bar] 05004504 05006172 EGS21AM
2 - Ranges above 100 psi (689 kPa) [6.89 bar] (05004552)8
3 - Mounting off-equipment recommended
4 - Straight threads, for use with adapter nut 05004508 05004508 EG21VM
78
5 - Separate adapter nut not required 05004504 05004504 EGS21VM

6 - For gages with date code R1 (Jan. 1996) or earlier
(Q12, Q11, etc.) specify part number shown in parenthe-
ses.
289
80
290
5
sect. 70 1411577
rev. 2014/12/09
Fuel Senders
10
These Fuel Senders are designed to be used in
conjunction with our EG Series Swichgage Instruments
15
as well as CAN I/O modules. See the bulletin 95090 EG
Series – Electric Gage and Swichgage Instrument for
more information.
20
Specifications
Tank Cutout Hole: Ø 1.750 in. (44 mm)

Materials:
Float: Foamed Buna N
25
Float Arm: Stainless Steel
Resistor Housing: Glass Filled Polyacetal
Flange & Shaft: Steel, Zinc-Plated
Gaskets: Buna N, 70 Durometer (48% Acrylonitrile)
Hardware: Brass & Phosphor Bronze
Mounting Hardware: Zinc-Plated Steel Dimensions
30
Resistance Range:
ESF and ES2F Model: 240 Ohms to 33 Ohms
ESDF Model: 120 ohms to 17 ohms Mounting and Cutout Layout
40
R1.062 in.
Resistance Values [27 mm]
ESF, ES2F Senders:

E = 240 ohms (falling level) (primary calibration point)
50
1/4 = 153 ohms (falling level)
1/2 = around 100 ohms (falling level)
3/4 = 67 ohms (falling level)
F = 33 ohms (rising level) (secondary calibration point)
55
.156 in. 1.750 in.
[4 mm] [44 mm]
Resistance Table for ES2F Fuel Sender
70
Resistance tables for ES2F Fuel Sender (resistance verses % of scale) Murphy Fuel Sender (0% - 100%)
% of Scale 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
R(Ohm) 244 205 171 143 123 103 88 74 60 47 33
75
78
291
80
Model ESF Series Model ES2F and ESDF Series
2.75 in. 2.75 in.

[70 mm] [70 mm]
FLOAT ARM
FLOAT ARM
1.06 in.
[27mm]
1.06 in. 2.20 in. MAX
[27 mm] [56mm MAX]
2.20 in. MAX
[56 mm MAX]
GASKET
GASKET
FLOAT ARM
.250 in.
FLOAT ARM [6 mm]
A
A
.250 in.
[6 mm] B
B
D
C D
1.38 in.
1.38 in. [35 mm]
[35 mm]
Fuel Sender Table

D A D A
Tank Depth Cut Float Arm Shaft Length Tank Depth Cut Float Arm Shaft Length
Length Adjustment Length Adjustment
inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm
6.00 152 2.31 59 3.06 78 15.00 381 8.56 217 7.56 192
6.50 165 2.69 68 3.31 84 15.50 394 8.949 227 7.81 198
7.00 178 3.00 76 3.56 90 16.00 406 9.31 237 8.06 205
7.50 191 3.38 86 3.81 97 16.50 419 9.62 244 8.31 211
8.00 203 3.75 95 4.06 103 17.00 432 10.00 254 8.56 217
8.50 216 4.06 103 4.31 110 17.50 445 10.31 262 8.81 224
9.00 229 4.38 113 4.56 116 18.00 457 10.69 271 9.06 230
9.50 241 4.75 121 4.81 122 18.50 470 11.00 279 9.31 237
10.00 254 5.12 130 5.06 129 19.00 483 11.38 289 9.56 243
10.50 267 5.44 138 5.31 135 19.50 495 11.75 298 9.81 249
11.00 279 5.81 148 5.56 141 20.00 508 12.06 306 10.06 256
11.50 292 6.19 157 5.81 148 20.50 521 12.44 316 10.31 262
12.00 305 6.50 165 6.06 154 21.00 533 12.75 324 10.56 268
12.50 318 6.88 175 6.31 160 21.50 546 13.12 333 10.81 275
13.00 330 7.19 183 6.56 167 22.00 559 13.44 341 11.06 281
13.50 343 7.56 192 6.81 173 22.50 572 13.81 351 11.30 287
14.00 356 7.88 200 7.06 179 23.00 584 14.12 359 11.56 294
14.50 368 8.25 210 7.31 186 23.50 597 14.50 368 11.81 300
24.00 610 14.88 378 12.06 307
B = A + 1.03125
C = D - .46875
How to Order

05705668 ESF: 1-wire-to-ground Fuel sender
05705669 ES2F: 2-wire ungrounded Fuel sender
05705670 ESDF: 2-wire ungrounded Fuel sender, drives 2 gages
292
5
sect. 70 1411607
rev. 2014/12/08
Pressure Senders
10
These Gage Pressure Senders are designed to be
used in conjunction with our EG Series Swichgage
15
Instruments as well as CAN I/O modules. See
the bulletin 95090 EG Series – Electric Gage and
Swichgage Instrument for more information.
NOTE: Always provide proper circuit protection with
20
Model ESP Series

1.81 in.
25
[46 mm]
1.98 in. [50 mm] 1.61 in. [41 mm]
30
#10-32
1/8-27 NPTF .55 in [14 mm] HEX.
40
Model ES2P Series
1.81 in.
[46 mm]
50
1.98 in. [50 mm] 1.61 in. [41 mm]
55
#10-32
1/8-27 NPTF .55 in [14 mm] HEX.
Model ESDP Series

70
1.81 in.
[46 mm]
75
1.98 in. [50 mm] 1.61 in. [41 mm]

78
#10-32
1/8-27 NPTF .55 in [14 mm] HEX.
293
80
Model ESPM and ESPMK Series
2.47 in. [63 mm]

2.25 in.
1.86 in. [47 mm] [57 mm]
1.65 in. [42 mm]
1/8-27 NPT
2.03 in.
[52 mm]
1/2 in. SQUARE WRENCH

[13 mm] FLATS
Resistance Values
ESP-80, ES2P-80 Senders: ESPM-300, ES2PM-300 Senders:
0 PSI = 240 ohms (falling pressure) 0 PSI = 240 ohms (falling pressure)
20 PSI = 153 ohms (falling pressure) (primary calibration point) 75 PSI = 153 ohms (falling pressure) (primary calibration point)
40 PSI around 100 ohms (falling pressure) 150 PSI around 100 ohms (falling pressure)
60 PSI = 67 ohms (falling pressure) (secondary calibration point) 225 PSI = 67 ohms (falling pressure) (secondary calibration point)
80 PSI = 33 ohms (rising pressure) 300 PSI = 33 ohms (rising pressure)
ESP-100, ES2P-100 Senders: ESPMK-400, ES2PMK-400 Senders:
0 PSI = 240 ohms (falling pressure) 0 PSI = 240 ohms (falling pressure)
25 PSI = 153 ohms (falling pressure) (primary calibration point) 100 PSI = 153 ohms (falling pressure) (primary calibration point)
50 PSI around 100 ohms (falling pressure) 200 PSI around 100 ohms (falling pressure)
75 PSI = 67 ohms (falling pressure) (secondary calibration point) 300 PSI = 67 ohms (falling pressure) (secondary calibration point)
100 PSI = 33 ohms (rising pressure) 400 PSI = 33 ohms (rising pressure)
ESPM-200, ES2PM-200 Senders:
0 PSI = 240 ohms (falling pressure)
50 PSI = 153 ohms (falling pressure) (primary calibration point)
100 PSI around 100 ohms (falling pressure)
150 PSI = 67 ohms (falling pressure) (secondary calibration point)
200 PSI = 33 ohms (rising pressure)
Resistance Table for Pressure Sender

The voltage generated when excited by a 10mA DC constant current
PSI 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
R(Ohm) 240 205 171 143 123 103 88 74 60 47 33
V (mV) 2.40V 2.05V 1.71V 1.43V 1.23V 1.03V (880) (740) (600) (470) (330)
How to Order
Part Number Model and Description Notes: Available Ranges

05701860 ESP-80: 1-wire-to-ground Pressure sender
0-80 psi (0-500 kPa)
05701867 ES2P-80: 2-wire ungrounded Pressure sender
05701857 ESP-100: 1-wire-to-ground Pressure sender
05701858 ES2P-100: 2-wire ungrounded Pressure sender 0-100 psi (0-700 kPa)
05701859 ESDP-100: Dual Gage, 2-wire ungrounded Pressure sender
05701753 ESPM-200: 1-wire-to-ground Pressure sender †
0-200 psi (0-1380 kPa)
05701748 ES2PM-200: 2-wire ungrounded Pressure sender †
05701751 ESPM-300: 1-wire-to-ground Pressure sender †
0-300 psi (0-2070 kPa)
05701750 ES2PM-300: 2-wire ungrounded Pressure sender †
05702566 ESPMK-400: 1-wire-to-ground Pressure sender †
0-400 psi (0-2760 kPa)
05702565 ES2PMK-400: 2-wire ungrounded Pressure sender †
† Mounting off-equipment recommended.

NOTE: The ESPMK-400 & ES2PMK-400 are not recommended for use with digital I/O modules – use PXT-K
pressure transmitter.
294
5
sect. 70 1411608
rev. 2014/12/09
Temperature Senders
10
These Temperature Senders are designed to be used in
conjunction with our EG Series Swichgage Instruments
15
as well as CAN I/O modules. See the bulletin 95090 EG
Series – Electric Gage and Swichgage Instrument for
more information.
NOTE: Always provide proper circuit protection with
20
Specifications
Housing Material: Brass
25
Temperature Range:
100º-250ºF (40º-120ºC) or 140º-300ºF (60º-150ºC)
Resistance Values
30
EST-250/300, ES2T-250/300 Senders:
100 F = 1050 ohms (rising temperature)
150 F = around 330 ohms (rising temperature)
180 F = 174 ohms (rising temperature) (secondary calibration point)
210 F = 100 ohms (rising temperature) (primary calibration point)
40
EST-250/300, ES2T-250/300 Senders:
210 F = 100 ohms (rising temperature) (secondary calibration point)
50
240 F = 63 ohms (rising temperature) (primary calibration point)
Resistance Table for Temperature Sender
55
The voltage generated when excited by a 2.5mA DC constant current
°C 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140
R(Ohm) 7208 4115 2529 1594 1029 680 460 321 227 164 120 89 74 52 40
V (mV) 18.0V 10.3V 6.32V 3.98V 2.57V 1.70V 1.15V (0.80) (0.57) (0.41) (300) (222) (185) (130) (100)
70
Resistive Range Table (Nominal OHMS)
100–250ºF 40–120ºC 140–300ºF 60–150ºC
Temp. OHMS Temp. OHMS Temp. OHMS Temp. OHMS
75
100 1050 40 1050 140 410 60 410

150 330 60 410 180 176 80 189
180 176 80 193 210 100 100 97
210 103 100 100 240 63 120 55
78
250 54 120 55 300 26 150 25
295
80
Model EST Series Model ES2T Series
EST Wiring ES2TWiring
EST 250/300 1/2-14 NPT

ES2T 250/300 1/2-14 NPT
(2.00 in.) [51 mm]
OPTIONAL: TERMINAL BOOT
( 1.12 in.) [28 mm]
(2.41 in.) [61 mm]
( 1.04 in.) [26 mm]
( 1.06 in.) [27 mm]
( .33 in.) [8 mm]
( .33 in.)
[8 mm] 1/2-14 NPTF
1/2-14 NPTF #8-32 UNC (2 PLS.)
#10-32 UNF
EST 250/300 1/8-27 NPT ES2T 250/300 1/8-27 NPT

(2.00 in.) [51 mm]
(2.41 in.) [61 mm]
( .89 in.) [23 mm] ( .89 in.) [23 mm] ( 1.04 in.) [26 mm]
( .33 in.) [8 mm]
1/8-27 NPTF
( .33 in.) [8 mm] #8-32 UNC (2 PLS.)
1/8-27 NPTF
ES2T 250/300-X 5/8-18 UNF
#10-32 UNF
EST 250/300-X 5/8-18 UNF
(2.81 in.) [71 mm]

( 1.04 in.) [26 mm]
( 1.44 in.) [37 mm]
(2.34 in.) [59 mm]
( 1.50 in.) [38mm]

( .33 in.) [8 mm]
5/8-18 UNF-2A
#8-32 UNC (2 PLS.)
( .33 in.)
[8 mm]
5/8-18 UNF-2A
#10-32 UNF
296
Model ESDT Series
5
ESDT 250/300 1/2-14 NPT ESDT Wiring
10
(2.41 in.) [61 mm]

( 1.04 in.) [26 mm]
(1.06 in.) [27mm]
15
( .33 in.) [8 mm]
1/2-14 NPTF
#8-32 UNC (2 PLS.)
ESDT 250/300 1/8-27 NPT
20
(2.41 in.) [61 mm]
(.89 in.) [23mm]

( 1.04 in.) [26 mm]
ESDT 250/300-X 5/8-18 UNF
25
( .33 in.) [8 mm]
(2.80 in.) [71 mm]

( 1.04 in.) [26 mm]
(1.44 in.) [37 mm]
1/8-27 NPTF
30
#8-32 UNC (2 PLS.)
( .33 in.) [8 mm]
5/8-18 UNF-2A
#8-32 UNC (2 PLS.)
40
How to Order

10702010 EST-250/300-1/8: 1-wire-to-ground Temperature sender
50
10702014 ES2T-250/300-1/8: 2-wire ungrounded Temperature sender Thread 1/8 - 27 NPT
10702017 ESDT-250/300-1/8: 2-wire ungrounded Temperature sender
10702009 EST-250/300-1/2: 1-wire-to-ground Temperature sender
10702013 ES2T-250/300-1/2: 2-wire ungrounded Temperature sender Thread 1/2 - 14 NPT
55
10702016 ESDT-250/300-1/2: 2-wire ungrounded Temperature sender
10704691 EST-250/300-X: 1-wire-to-ground Temperature sender
10706175 ES2T-250/300-X: 2-wire ungrounded Temperature sender Thread 5/8 - 18 UNF
10704690 ESDT-250/300-X: 2-wire ungrounded Temperature sender
70
00003624 EST Boot Optional
NOTE: X = 5/8-18 thread for adaptors.

NOTE: See bulletin 8428 for avalable adaptors (Group 1).
NOTE: Always provide proper circuit protection with fuses or circuit breakers.
75
78
297
80
298
5
sect. 70 0910469
rev. 2014/10/01
Four Function Tattletale ® Annunciator
10
EN204 Series
Designed for use with electric Swichgage instruments,
the EN204 Series Tattletale Annunciator works with
other engine components to clearly indicate critical
15
engine operating conditions. The four bright LEDs on
the face of the annunciator indicate the cause of an
alarm or shutdown condition.
Two EN204 models are available. Each shows the
standard critical engine operating parameters—oil
20
pressure, coolant temperature and battery voltage.
Model EN204-S-12 also includes an indicator for low
fuel level. Model EN204-SG-12 substitutes the fuel level
indicator with a glow plug indicator for those engines
that use a glow plug for easier starting.
25
The EN204 Annunciators are used in conjunction
with a Murphy Electric Swichgage instrument or other
Dimensions
normally open switches that close to ground when
a fault condition occurs. As an example, in a system
with a Murphy EGS21P-100 Oil Pressure Swichgage
30
instrument, the Swichgage closes to ground when the
oil pressure drops below a predetermined set point.
This will energize the oil pressure LED on the EN204 to
LED Indicators
highlight a low oil pressure failure.
A very important feature of the EN204 is the
40
ability to interface with Murphy 518PH or the 760A
Electromagnetic Switches to perform automatic engine
shutdown when fault conditions occur. The EN204 2-1/4 in.
(57 mm)
can also be used with other Murphy visual and audible
alarms (STAS series remote alarm, SAH audible alarm
50
and the TL7 visual alarm) for remote annunciation and
equipment shutdown. 1-15/16 in. (49 mm)
Specifications Mounting
Clamp
55
Operating Voltage: 12 VDC (10 V min. - 16 V max.)
Current: 0.020 A to 0.025 A per LED 1-15/16 in.
Output: Sink 0.275 A (49 mm)
Output Saturation Voltage: .7-1.1 V @ 77°F (25°C)
Case and Screw-on Mounting Clamp: Polyester (PBT)
70
Bezel: Bright stainless steel 3/4 in. (19 mm) max. Panel Thickness.
Lens: Clear Polycarbonate, UV stabilized 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) adjust/wiring clearance
Dial: Black background and white markings with four red LED
indicators
Wiring: Plug connector with wire leads, 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) x 8 in. 2-1/16 in. (52 mm)
(203 mm) long Mounting hole diameter.
75

Shipping Weight: 0.5 lb. (226 g)
Shipping Dimensions: 8 x 4 x 4-1/2 in. (203 x 102 x 114 mm) Push-on Plug & Wire Leads
18 AWG (1.0 mm2);
78
8 in. long (203 mm)
299
80
Basic Models
EN204-S-12 EN204-SG-12
Monitored Action Monitored Action The Switched functions
Functions Functions listed are able to sink
Indicate and Indicate and a current up to 0.275
Oil Pressure Oil Pressure amps and may be
Switched Switched
used to activate the
Coolant Indicate and Coolant Indicate and
electromechanical
Temperature Switched Temperature Switched
control switches or other
Battery Voltage Indicate Battery Voltage Indicate devices.
Indicate and Glow Plug
Fuel Level Indicate
Switched Energized
EN204-S Typical Wiring Diagram
How to Order

Four LED Tattletale annunciator including fuel
Specify Model Number EN204-S and Switch
level LED indicator
Four LED Tattletale annunciator including glow
EN204-SG-12
plug LED indicator
300
5
sect. 70 97026
rev. 2014/10/27
Tachometers and Tach/Hourmeters
10
AT and ATH Series
The AT Series tachometers are rugged, transistorized
instruments with solid-state circuitry for indication
15
of engine RPM. They are equipped with a bracket
for mounting into a standard 3-3/8 in. (86 mm) dash
mounting hole. A full 270° sweep of the pointer gives
an accurate indication on a large easy–to–read scale,
and the dial can be illuminated for night reading. The
20
ATH Series models are also equipped with hourmeter to
record the elapsed running time of an engine.
Models are available for alternator, magnetic sensor *
or ignition signal. These instruments are designed
to function from pulses generated by an alternator
25
with 4, 8, 12, 14 or 16 poles on the rotor (3 - 40 PPR).
The pulses can also be obtained from the ring gear
of an engine by means of an electromagnetic sensor * Products covered by this bulletin comply with European Council
(magnetic pickup). Murphy’s magnetic sensor driven electromagnetic compatibility directive 2004/108/EC, except as noted.
models are designed to function with flywheels having
30
anywhere from 50 to 304 teeth. Ignition signal model Specifications
available for 2 - 10 cylinder, 4 cycle spark-ignited
engines. All models are for negative ground, positive Magnetic Sensor Driven Models
ground or isolated electrical systems and are protected Power Input: 11-28VDC (70mA – 120mA except lamp load)
against reverse polarity hookup. Backlight: 3.4W T-10 wedge base bulb
RPM Input Signal Voltage: 1.5Vrms minimum
40
All models are powered by a 11-28 VDC battery and Accuracy:
are reverse polarity protected. Tachometer: +2% full scale
These tachometers are specially designed for use on Hourmeter: +0.01% hours, +1 count
Temperature Range: -40 to 180°F (-40 to 82°C) (no permanent damage
truck, marine, industrial or stationary engines. shall occur)
Dial (Face Plate): 270° sweep with white numerals (over black back-
Series Models
50
ground)
Bezel: 304 stainless steel for bright and IS 513 E.E.E. CRCA steel for
ATS Series Magnetic Sensor Signal Tach black
50-304 flywheel teeth 11-28 VDC, 3333 Hz to 20.27 kHz @ 4000 Scale: 0-4000RPM
Case Material: Plastic
RPM Hourmeter Range: 99999.9 hours in 0.1 increments.
ATHS Series Magnetic Sensor Signal Tachometer/Hourme-
55
Alternator Driven and Ignition Driven Models
ter Power Input: 11-28VDC (70mA-120mA except lamp load)
50-304 flywheel teeth 11-28 VDC, 3333 Hz to 20.27 kHz @ 4000 Backlight: 3.4W T-10 wedge base bulb
RPM RPM Input Signal Voltage: V low: 0.5V max, V high: 8.0V min.
Accuracy:
ATA Series Alternator Signal Tachometer Tachometer: +2% full scale
3-40 pulses/engine revolution 12 VDC, 200 Hz to 2667 Hz @ Hourmeter: +0.01% hours, +1 count
70
Temperature Range: -40 to 180°F (-40 to 82°C) (no permanent damage
4000 RPM shall occur)
Dial (Face Plate): 270° sweep with white numerals (over black back-
ATHA Series Alternator Signal Tachometer/Hourmeter ground)
3-40 pulses/engine revolution 12 VDC, 200 Hz to 2667 Hz @ Bezel: 304 stainless steel for bright and IS 513 E.E.E. CRCA steel for
4000 RPM black
Scale: 0-4000RPM
75
ATHI Series Ignition Signal Tachometer/Hourmeter Case Material: Plastic

2 - 10 cylinder, 4 cycle engines, 66.7 Hz to 333.3 Hz @ 4000 RPM Hourmeter Range: 99999.9 hours in 0.1 increments.
78
301
80
Bezel Styles
Dimensions
How to Order
Order the Tachometer or Tachometer/Hourmeter by model number.
Model Number Description Notes

Magnetic Sensor Tachometer 4000 RPM; 50 - 304 flywheel teeth 11-28 VDC
ATS-40 Bright Stainless Steel Bezel

ATS-40-A Black Stainless Steel Bezel
ATS-40-B SAE Bright Stainless Steel Bezel
ATS-40-C SAE Black Stainless Steel Bezel
Magnetic Sensor Tach/Hourmeter 4000 RPM; 50-304 flywheel teeth 11-28 VDC
ATHS-40 Bright Stainless Steel Bezel

ATHS-40-A Black Stainless Steel Bezel
ATHS-40-B SAE Bright Stainless Steel Bezel
ATHS-40-C SAE Black Stainless Steel Bezel
Alternator Signal Tachometer 4000 RPM; 3 - 40 pulses/rev 11-28 VDC
ATA-40 Bright Stainless Steel Bezel

ATA-40-A Black Stainless Steel Bezel
ATA-40-B SAE Bright Stainless Steel Bezel
Alternator Signal Tach/Hourmeter 4000 RPM; 3 - 40 pulses/rev 11-28 VDC
ATHA-40 Bright Stainless Steel Bezel

ATHA-40-A Black Stainless Steel Bezel
ATHA-40-B SAE Bright Stainless Steel Bezel
ATHA-40-C SAE Black Stainless Steel Bezel
Ignition Signal Tach/Hourmeter 4000 RPM; 1-5 pulses/engine rev
ATHI-40-A Black Stainless Steel Bezel
302
5
Section 75 Genset Controls
10
0810288 Keystart 9620 Series — Engine/Generator Controls�� 305
0810330 CANstart™ 9630 Series — Engine/Generator Controls�� 307
05195 Cascade Controller — Auto-Start/Stop �� 309
1211127 EMS-GC10 — Genset Controller Unit�� 311
15
0910470 Murphy Generator Control Panels (MGC)�� 313
1311257 MGC400 — Murphy Generator Control Panel �� 315
Battery Chargers
20
1010704 Sentinel 150 Series — Automatic Battery Charger�� 317
1010705 Sentinel 300P — Programmable Switch Mode Battery Chargers �� 321
25
30
40
50
55
70
75
78
303
80
304
5
sect. 40 & 75 0810288
rev. 2014/10/28
Keystart 9620 Series
10
Keystart 9620 and 9621 control modules provide
manual start/stop and automatic fault protection for
15
generators, pumps and other engine-driven applica-
tions. Outputs allow control of engine fuel (energized to
run), starter motor and preheat. The Keystart also has
an alarm output for remote or audible warning of faults.
Six LEDs and icons indicate engine status and faults.
20
Four switch inputs (closing to negative on fault) enable
automatic shutdown on engine low oil pressure, high
coolant temperature and auxiliary faults. Model 9621
has a fully adjustable engine overspeed shutdown
feature, configurable for either generator AC or
25
magnetic pickup speed signals. Charge alternator
excitation and a charge fail warning LED are standard.
Electrical connection is by quick-connect, spring-
clamp terminal blocks. A universal 7 to 30VDC power
supply permits operation with 12 or 24VDC engine
batteries, with standard engine crank-dip voltage
30
protection.
Keystarts (with the key removable only in the stop/reset
position) are mounted in the front through a standard
cutout and secured at the rear with quick-fit clips.
Epoxy resin case encapsulation gives superior vibration/
40
shock resistance and environmental protection.
Specifications Typical Connections

Power Supply
50
Operating voltage, steady state: 7 to 30VDC
Operating voltage, brown out/cranking: 5VDC minimum
Current consumption: <100mA
Inputs
Fault switch inputs: close to negative DC during fault
Generator AC input (model 9621 only):
55
70 - 270 VAC rms, <50 to >60 Hz nominal
Magnetic pickup input (model 9621 only):
3.5 - 21 VAC rms, <2000 to >6500 Hz nominal
Run (fuel): positive DC, NO relay contacts, 10A max @ 24VDC
Start (crank): positive DC, keyswitch contacts, 10A max @
70
24VDC
Alarm: negative DC (open collector transistor), 300 mA max
Speed calibration: to suit 0-1mA, 75 Ohm meter,
output=0.75mA at rated engine speed.
Adjustable settings
Preheat timer: 0 or 10 secs, default = 0 secs
75
Fault override timer: 2 to 20 secs (VR1), default = 10 secs

Overspeed trip level (model 9621 only): 100 to 130% (VR3) of
nominal calibrated speed, default = 110% (of 50 or 60 Hz)
Physical
Case material: polycarbonate / polyester
Overall dimensions: (w x h x d): 3.8 x 3.8 x 3.7 in.
78
(96 x 96 x 95mm)
Panel cut-out size: DIN 3.6 x 3.6 in. (92 x 92mm)
Weight: approx 0.7 lb. / 300g
Operating temperature: -31° to 131°F / -35° to 55°C
305
80
LED Indication
run (fuel) on - green
preheat on - amber
low oil pressure
high engine temperature
overspeed/aux 2 fault
charge fail
warning - red
aux 1 fault
shutdown - red
4 Position Keyswitch
Off/Reset.
latched shutdown fault.
Run.
and after the override time, keystart immediately Configuration
shuts down the engine on detection of a fault. Use a 3 mm/0.1 in. flat head screwdriver for potentiometers VR1-
VR3
Start/crank. All models:
Maintains the run output, and activates the start J1 & J4: preheat output timing
(crank) output. Shutdown fault inputs are disabled - J1 ON: no preheat
and the fault override timer is reset. This position - J1 OFF, J4 OFF: preheat 10 secs fixed, unaffected by crank
spring-returns to I (run) on release. - J1 OFF, J4 ON: preheat 10 second max, canceled by crank.
VR1: Fault override, 2-20 secs, clockwise to increase.
Auxiliary. Model 9621 only:
Keyswitch auxiliary output, positive DC J2 & J3: speed sensing source (pins 13 and 14):
- both links ON for generator AC, 50/60Hz
- both links OFF for magnetic pickup, 2000 - 6500Hz
VR2: Speed calibration. Set J2 and J3 correctly, run engine to
nominal speed, adjust VR2 to give (pin 11) calibration output of
0.75mA
VR3: Overspeed, 100 - 130% of VR2 setting, clockwise to increase
How to Order
Part Number Model / Description Notes

KEY9620 K2 KEY9620 (with overspeed protection)
KEY 9621 (with overspeed protection, selectable AC Keyswitch Type K2, rubberized
KEY9621 K2
generator or magnetic pickup sensing)*
65700256 Spare keyswitch (K2 type), includes key Accessories / Spares
00-02-0657 Keystart 9620/9621 Installation Instructions Further Information
*Factory default setting is for AC generator sensing, calibrated to either 50 or 60 Hz nominal. Non-standard (NS)
setting options are available to order.
306
5
sect. 40 & 75 0810330
rev. 2014/10/28
CANstart™ 9630 Series
10
CANstart™ 9631 and 9632 modules provide operator
start/stop control, panel gage driving, fault indication,
15
and auxiliary shutdown protection for ECU-controlled,
CAN bus SAE J1939 compatible engines. These
compact controllers can be used with generators,
pumps and other engine-driven applications.
Operator control is through a four-position keyswitch.
20
The key is common to all CANstarts and is removable
only in the stop/reset position. Six LEDs and icons
indicate engine/ECU status and faults. Two of these
LEDS (with associated inputs) provide for auxiliary fault
shutdown and charge alternator fail excitation.
CANstart has two protected (positive DC) FET outputs
25
for the control of ECU engine run and starter motor.
Three additional outputs drive analog panel gages
(Murphy, VDO or Datcon) based on ECU-transmitted
data for engine speed, oil pressure or coolant
temperature.
30
All units include adjustable engine overspeed
protection: model 9631 provides automatic overspeed
shutdown for variable speed applications; model 9632
is configured for fixed-speed 1500/1800 RPM genset
use.
DIP switches at the rear allow setup of control and
40
gage output options. Electrical connection is by
spring-clamp terminals, including a universal 8-32VDC
power supply for operation with 12 or 24VDC engine
batteries. Engine cranking supply brownout protection Specifications
is standard.
Power Supply
50
CANstart is panel-front mounted through a standard
Operating Voltage, steady state: 8 to 32 VDC
cutout and secured at the rear with quick-fit clips. Operating Voltage, brownout / cranking: 5 VDC minimum
Epoxy resin case gives superior vibration/shock Current consumption: < 100 mA
resistance and environmental protection. Inputs
CAN bus: SAE J1939 protocol, switchable 120 Ohm terminating
Typical Connection resistor
55
Auxiliary Shutdown (x2): close to negative DC during fault
Run (ECU), start (crank): positive DC (protected FET), 6A max @
32 VDC
Alarm: negative DC (open collector transistor), 250mA max @ 32
VDC
Oil pressure gage: suitable for Murphy, VDO 5 or 10 Bar,
70
Datcon 7 or 10 Bar.
Engine temperature gage: suitable for Murphy, VDO or Datcon
Tachometer: for use with charge alternator driven tachometers
Adjustable Settings
Model 9631 (variable speed engines)
Overspeed level: 1250 - 2800 RPM (50 RPM increments) or off
Model 9632 (fixed speed engines/gensets)
75
Nominal speed: 1500 or 1800 RPM

Overspeed level: 1 - 15% of nominal speed (1% increments) or
off
Physical
Electromagnetic capability: 2004/108/EC
Case Material: polycarbonate / polyester
Overall dimensions (w x h x d): 3.8 x 3.8 x 5.2 in. (96 x 96 x
78
131mm)
Panel cutout size: DIN 3.6 x 3.6 in. (92 x 92 mm)
Weight: approx. 0.6 lb / 240g
Operating Temperature: -4° to 167°F / -2° to 75°C
307
80
Connection
1 -DC power supply
2 +DC power supply
3 run (ECU) output, +DC, 6A max
4 start (crank) output, +DC, 6A max
5 alarm output, -DC, 250 mA max
6 charge fail (alternator WL)
9 oil pressure gage output
10 coolant temp gage output
11 tachometer output
12 CAN screen
4 Position Keyswitch 13 CAN high
Off/Reset. 14 CAN low
latched shutdown fault. S1 - S5 DIP Switch Settings
Run. Note: switch S6 reserved for future use.
and after the override time, Keystart immediately
shuts down the engine on detection of a fault.
Start/crank.
Maintains the run output and activates the start
(crank) output. Shutdown fault inputs are disabled
and the fault override timer is reset. This position
spring-returns to I (run) on release.
Auxiliary.
Keyswitch auxiliary output, positive DC
DP1 digital potentiometer setting (with S5 above)

Overspeed shutdown set point: see installation instructions
for details.
How to Order

CST9631: Keyswitch K2 (Type 2, rubberized)
CST9631 K2 Default overspeed setting is 1250 RPM. (For variable speed
engines, overspeed setting range 1250 - 2800 RPM.) Non-standard (NS)
CST9632: Keyswitch K2 (Type 2, rubberized) settings/options are
Default overspeed setting is 110% of 1500 or 1800 RPM (please available to order.
CST9632 K2
specify). (For fixed speed engines/gensets, overspeed setting
range 100-115% of 1500/1800 RPM.)
65700256 Spare keyswitch (K2 type), incl. key
Accessories and spare
parts
Various EG/EGS series Electric Gage & Swichgage
Various ATA/ATHA series tachometers & tachourmeters
308
5
sect. 40 & 75 05195
rev. 2014/10/30
Cascade Controller
10
Auto-Start/Stop
The Cascade controller offers automatic start and stop
15
control with easy configuration for a broad number of
applications.
This auto-start controller is designed to fit any
engine-driven application requiring a simple and
robust automatic start and stop sequence. Pumps,
20
compressors, grinders, power units and generators are
just a few of the industrial applications for the controller.
The Cascade controller is fully compatible with
all major engine types. Whether you are running
mechanical or J1939 engines, the controller will work
25
with your application.
Murphy offers unique features at a competitive price
with the Cascade controller.
Features Dimensions
30
• Durability: Encapsulated to protect it against dirt,
water and dust, along with a compression gasket
to fully seal it to the panel. Cascade is rated
NEMA4 and IP65
40
• Low Battery Blackouts: Operates in total blackout
for a minimum of two seconds
• Compatibility: Accepts MPU, AC Frequency and
ECU speed signals and can operate with standard
and J1939 engines
50
• Inputs and Outputs: The Cascade Inputs and
Outputs are ruggedly protected and fault tolerant.
• J1939 Ready: Works directly with Murphy’s J1939-
ready PowerView gages, just plug and go. No
sender is required.
55
• CD101 Cascade Configuration Tool: Allows quick
setup and loading of parameters into a Murphy
standard Cascade via a PC software tool.
70
75
78
309
80
Specifications
Power input: 9-35VDC continuous - operates during total black Outputs: 7 – 4 auxiliary, configurable (1A DC protected). 3 dedicated
out for 2 seconds minimum. outputs for crank, fuel/ECU, alternator excitation
Power consumption: Sleep Mode (Manual): 1mA typical; Sleep Crank attempts: 3, 5, 10, Continuous
mode (Automatic): 4mA typical. Running mode (manual): 20mA Crank Rest: 5-60 seconds, adjustable
typical; Running mode (Automatic): 24mA typical. Shutdown lockout time delay: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds
Operating/Storage temperature: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C) Crank disconnect speed setting: Field settable 0-9999 RPM (16-
Humidity: 0-100%, non-condensing 60Hz AC freq input).
Housing: UV stabilized black polycarbonate and epoxy encapsu- Overspeed/underspeed trip point setting: ±5 to 50% of nominal.
lation. Weather tight and includes sealing gasket to keep mois- Speed sensing inputs: Magnetic pickup (5-120VAC RMS / 0-10 kHz)
ture and debris out of enclosure. Properly mounted controller will and AC frequency (30-600VAC RMS / 16-80 Hz)
maintain NEMA4 / IP65 rating of enclosure. CAN bus interface: Directly reads engine speed and engine status data
Vibration: Rated to 6G from SAE-J1939 enabled engines
Impact: Rated to 10G MODBUS interface: In J1939 applications, drives PVA series
Inputs: Dedicated digital inputs for low oil pressure, high engine tem- analog gages
perature, remote start, DC charge fail/alternator fail. Two auxiliary inputs Shipping Weight: 1 lb. (453 g) approximately
are configurable for multiple functions. Shipping Dimensions: 5.1 x 6.7 x 1.6 inch (130 x 10 x 41 mm) ap-
proximately
How to Order

40700259 CD101 Cascade Controller Controller
40090045 CD101 Cascade Configuration Kit Accessories
310
5
sect. 75 1211127
rev. 2014/11/18
EMS-GC10
10
Genset Controller Unit
The EMS-GC10 Genset Controller provides flexible
control and monitoring for industrial genset applications.
Typical generator sets applications include backup
15
power, power supply for remote locations without a
connection to the power grid and mobile power for
remote locations. The controller supports programmable
logic up to 40 expressions, and can be configured for
specific functions unique to your applications. This is
20
accomplished through the M-Logic portion of the Utility
Software.
The EMS-GC10 supports Automatic Main Failure (AMF)
and generator breaker control.
The EMS-GC10 offers field-adjustable operating
25
parameters that can be changed through the controller
or an easy-to-use PC configuration tool called Utility
Software. It is also ideal for use with a remote modem
or in a SCADA system offering MODBUS RTU protocol
on the RS485 port.
30
Dimensions
40
50
55
70
75
78
311
80
Specifications
Accuracy: Class 2.0 to EN 60688 Connectors
Input DC Voltage: 6 VDC to 36 VDC AC voltage/current inputs: 3.5 mm2 (4 AWG) multi-stranded
AC Frequency: 30 to 70Hz Other: 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) multi-stranded
Magnetic Pickup Input Voltage: 2 to 70V peak, 0 to 10,000Hz
CAN Bus: SAE J1939 Compliant Environmental Specs
Analog Inputs: (3) from active transducer; 0(4) to 20 mA, with Generator Operating Voltage: 50 to 480V AC (+20%) phase-
Resistive Multi-Inputs (RMI) phase (UL/cUL 300VAC maximum)
Impedance: 50 Ω Operating Temperature: -4°F to 158°F (-20°C to 70°C)
Measuring Input Current: 1A or 5A AC from current transformer Storage Temperature: -40°F to 158°F (-40°C to 70°C)
Active Digital Input Voltage: (6) Dry Contact inputs (3 VDC
Supply with cable supervision) Environmental Sealing
Resistive Input: Resistor inputs internal 3V supply Front: IP65/NEMA type 1 (with gasket)
Relays: 240 Ω - 16mA Impedance: Terminals: IP20/NEMA type 1 to IEC/EN 60529
(3) Relay: 30V AC/DC 2A (UL/cUL listed: 30VDC 1A Resistive)
(2) Relay: 250 VAC/30VDC 2A (UL/cUL listed: 30VDC 2A Resistive) Relative Humidity
(2) Relay: 30V AC/DC 8A (UL-cUL listed: 30VDC 6A Resistive), 97% RH to IEC 60068-2-30, test Db
Status relay/config: 24VDC 1A resistive -20°C (-4°F) to IEC 60068-2-1
Display Interface: 128 x 64 pixel backlight STN, 5 line 70°C (158°F) to IEC 60068-2-2
Shipping Weight: 1.9 lb (0.9 kg) Maximum
Shipping Dimensions: 6.30 x 8.66 inch (160 x 220 mm)
How to Order

75700622 EMS-GC10 Controller
EMS-GC10 PC Configuration Tool (free download from Murphy
75333620
website)
75000277 EMS-GC10 PC Cable Interface USB-TTL
To order from website, go to http://www.fwmurphy.com/emsgc10
312
5
sect. 75 0910470
rev. 2014/10/03
Murphy Generator
10
Control Panels
Our Murphy Generator Control line features standard panels for all levels of use, from basic manual start to full-
featured auto-start.
15
Each standard panel is designed for maximum flexibility, allowing you to customize the instrumentation to fit your
specific application. You get plenty of options but with the short delivery time of a pre-engineered panel.
MGC50
20
25
30
MGC100
40
50
55
MGC150
70
75
78
313
80
How to Order

MGC50: Generator control panel unit Manual start
Specify Model MGC100: Generator control panel unit
Auto and manual start
Number MGC150: Generator control panel unit
MGC400: Generator control panel unit Auto start
314
5
sect. 75 1311257
rev. 2014/10/02
MGC400
10
Murphy Generator Control Panel
The MGC400 is a flexible genset control panel that
provides powerful control and monitoring for industrial
15
genset applications. The panel integrates Murphy’s
robust EMS-GC10 genset controller in a NEMA1 Type
2 enclosure with rubber shock mounts, an ON/OFF
switch, circuit breaker, emergency stop and engine
harness connector. The engine harness connector is
20
compatible with Murphy’s broad line of MIH harnesses
covering a wide range of electronic and mechanical
engines. Current transformers are also available through
our Industrial Panel Division.
The EMS-GC10 Genset Controller unit delivers field-
25
adjustable operating parameters but may require further
configuration using the utility software. The MGC400
panel is a complete generator monitoring, controlling Dimensions
and protection solution with Murphy standard
configuration. Custom software configurations for
30
variable engines types and models are also available.
The panel is also ideal for use with a remote modem
or a SCADA system via MODBUS RTU protocol over
RS485. Advanced local logic capabilities are provided
by a programmable logic tool (M-logic) built into the PC
40
configuration tool of the controller unit. This allows for
custom use of the digital I/O and predefining conditions
for new functions.
Features
50
• Rugged and Reliable Panel for Prime Mover,
Backup and Standby Power Applications
• Supports Gensets Ranging from 50 kw up to MW
sized
55
• Works with Mechanical and Electronic J1939
Engines
• Controls, Monitors and Protects both the Engine
and Generator
• Tier 4/Euro Stage IIIB Ready
70
• Easy-to-use PC Configuration Tool
75
78
315
80
Specifications
Technical Specifications Environmental Specifications

3 Phase Generator Monitoring for: Voltage, Current, Operating DC Voltage: 6 to 36V continuous
Frequency, Power, Reactive Power Operating Temperature: -4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)
Generator Protection: Storage Temperature: -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Over/Under Voltage (ANSI Code No. 59/27) Relative Humidity:
Over/Under Frequency (ANSI Code No. 81) 97% RH in accordance with IEC 60068-2-30, test Db
Overcurrent (ANSI Code No. 51) Enclosure Sealing: NEMA1 Type 2
Reverse/Overload Power (ANSI Code No. 32) NOTE: The EMS-GC10 has IP65 protection when it is mounted
Voltage Unbalanced (ANSI Code No. 60) or sealed to the panel using a gasket around the back side of the unit.
EMS-GC10 AC Input Voltage: 50 VAC up to 480 VAC (+20%) Physical Specifications
phase-to-phase (UL/cUL listed to 300 VAC maximum) Dimensions: 15.30 in x 11.34 in x 10.67 in
Measuring Operating Current: (388.5 mm x 288 mm x 271.1 mm)
1A or 5A AC (from a current transformer) Weight: 18 lb. (8.16 kg)
Display: 128 x 64 pixel backlit STN monochrome LCD, five lines;
capable for graphics, symbols and text
Real Time Clock: For date and time
Enclosure: Powder-coated Cold Rolled Steel
Mounts: Four rubber isolation shock mounts
Engine Harness Connector: 21 pin, Deutsch HDP24-24-21PE
How to Order

75700621 MGC400: Generator control panel unit Murphy standard configuration
Custom software configurations for variable engines types and models are also available.
To order from the website go to: www.fwmurphy.com
Details about Murphy Industrial Harnesses (MIH) solutions can be viewed at:
www.fwmurphy.com/products/panels/mih
Please contact our Industrial Panels Division for more information about supplying current transformers.
316
5
sect. 75 1010704
rev. 2014/10/05
Sentinel 150 Series
10
Automatic Battery Chargers
The Sentinel 150 line provides high performance
battery charging for continuous float charge and
15
standby power applications. Switch mode technology
provides major advances in power supply and battery
charger design, giving a compact and lightweight
construction, improved power efficiency, low heat
dissipation, wide supply voltage tolerance and low
20
output ripple.
The chargers are configured for fast, accurate charging ESNTL150 Enclosed
to give optimum battery life and reliability. The very SNTL150 Open Frame
smooth output (<1% ripple) allows charging of sealed * *
or vented batteries – e.g., Nickel Cadmium (NiCd), Lead
25
Acid Sealed (VRLA), vented and Planté cells – or use
as a stand-alone power supply. Factory calibration is *UL Tested (listed or recognized) to: UL1236 - Battery chargers for
optimized for each specific battery type. charging engine-starting batteries, and CSA22.2 No. 107.2 - Battery
chargers. See Specifications for details.
Features
30
All models feature an intelligent, multistage charge regime. During charge recovery mode, the Sentinel gives a
constant (maximum) current output. As the battery approaches peak charge, the output reverts to float charge
mode, maintaining an optimum cell voltage and supplying additional standing load current up to the rated
maximum. Output current is always limited to the rated maximum, even during high load (e.g., engine cranking),
40
short-circuit or reverse polarity connection.
AutoBoost
AutoBoost provides a temporary increase in output voltage, equalizing the charge between cells and maximizing
battery life and capacity. AutoBoost is triggered automatically when the battery falls below a preset voltage or can
be initiated manually through a momentary switch input. At the end of the Auto-Boost cycle, Sentinel automatically
50
reverts to normal float charge mode, preventing battery over-charge and gassing.
Alarm Outputs
Sentinel UL150 models include a self-diagnostic circuit for monitoring charge fail fault conditions (AC supply/fuse
failure, DC fuse failure or low/no charge current), with a solid-state relay output for driving a remote alarm or fault
55
annunciator. Enclosed NFPA models have NFPA 110 compliant alarms for AC failure, charge fail, high battery volts
and low battery volts.
Temperature Compensation
The optimum charge voltage for lead acid and NiCd batteries varies with ambient temperature. Sentinel can be
configured to sense battery temperature from a remote sensor and automatically compensate the output charge
voltage.
70
Installation and Connection
UL-recognized SNTLUL150 model uses an open frame circuit board and base/heatsink with protected cover, for
surface or DIN rail mounting in an existing control panel. UL-listed ESNTLUL150 models use a stainless steel, wall-
75
mounted case.
Electrical connection is by screw terminal blocks. Connection and cable access on ESNTL models is by a hinged
front plate and knock-out sections in the enclosure side.
78
317
80
Specifications
Power Supply Physical

Operating Voltage: 95 to 250 VAC Operating Temperature: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C)
Operating Frequency: 47 - 63 Hz Humidity: 20% to 90% RH
Electrical Safety: 2006/95/EC
DC Charge Output Electromagnetic compatibility:
Nominal voltage: 12 or 24 VDC 2004/108/EC (EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4)
Float/boost voltage: see Output Calibration table
Maximum current limit: 5A (12 and 24V models) or 10A (12V models) UL Approvals
Voltage ripple: <1% All (E)SNTLUL150 Models:
Line regulation: <2% BBGQ: UL1236, CSA22.2 no. 107.2
Load regulation: <2% ESNTLUL1501210xxNFPA models only:
BBHH: UL1236 SE
Alarm Outputs
Charge fail, mains AC fail:
1 x solid-state relay, + DC during normal charge, open circuit during fault
High and low battery voltage (ESNTLUL1501210xxNFPA only):
2 x solid-state relays, dry/volt-free contacts, closed on fault
Current rating (all relay outputs):
250 mA max @ 30VDC (resistive load), UL class 2
Electrical Connections
Notes:
1) AC input fusing (F1): All UL-approved 150 models include a replaceable circuit-board mount
TR5 fuse package. See charger label for fuse rating.
2) DC fusing (F2): all UL 150 models include an internal, electronic (self-resetting) output fuse.
3) Battery output is isolated from chassis.
4) Charge fail / mains AC fail alarm relay shown in de-energized (powered down) state.
5) High and low battery voltage alarm outputs (enclosed NFPA version only) not shown.
6) For all UL 150 models, AC supply input ground/earth connection is by M4 chassis stud
marked FG (frame ground).
318
Output Calibration
5
Calibration figures shown are at 20°C. If temperature compensation is enabled and remote
SNTL-RTC temperature sensor is connected, output voltage automatically varies by 3mV per cell per 1°C deviation
from 20°C, within the range -10 to 50°C. Increasing temperatures give decreasing outputs; decreasing temperatures
10
give increasing outputs.
Float Boost
Battery Type Volts Volts
(V DC) (V DC)
15
Vented lead acid (6 cells) 13.5 14.1
Calcium - Calcium (6 cells) 13.8 15.6
12V VRLA, AGM (6 cells) 13.5 14.4
VRLA, Gel (6 cells) 13.5 13.8
20
NiCd (10 cells) 14.1 14.5
Vented lead acid (12 cells) 27.0 28.2
Calcium - Calcium (12 cells) 27.6 31.2
VRLA, AGM (12 cells) 27.0 28.8
25
24V
VRLA, Gel (12 cells) 27.0 27.6
NiCd (18 cells) 25.6 26.1
NiCd (20 cells) 28.2 29.0
30
Dimensions
40
50
55
70
75
78
319
80
How to Order

SNTLUL1501205CDLA: Open-frame (protective cover) Sentinel
42703600 UL150, 5A/12V vented lead acid output, 110/120/220/240VAC
(50Hz/60Hz) input
(50Hz/60Hz) input
(50Hz/60Hz) input
ESNTLUL1501205CDLA: Enclosed Sentinel UL150, 5A/12V vented

42703603
lead acid output, 110/120/220/240VAC (50Hz/60Hz) input
ESNTLUL1502405CDLA: Enclosed Sentinel UL150, 5A/12V vented

42703604
lead acid output, 110/120/220/240VAC (50Hz/60Hz) input
ESNTLUL1501210CDLA: Enclosed Sentinel UL150, 10A/12V

42703605
vented lead acid output, 110/120/220/240VAC (50Hz/60Hz) input
SNTLUL1501210CDLANFPA: Enclosed Sentinel UL150 (NFPA 110

42703650 compliant alarm outputs and metering), 10A/12V vented lead acid
output, 110/120/220/240VAC (50Hz/60Hz) input
42703619: Remote temperature sensor with 9.8 feet / 3.0 meter

42703619 lead assembly, for automatic charge output temperature compen-
sation
For sealed lead-acid (VRLA, AGM, Gel or Calcium) and NiCd batteries, please consult your Enovation Controls’
representative.
320
5
sect. 75 1010705
rev. 2014/10/17
Sentinel 300P Series
10
Programmable Switch Mode Battery Chargers
Sentinel 300P battery chargers provide new levels
of DC power control, monitoring and protection
15
for stationary engine starting and standby battery
applications.
Advanced Sentinel charging features included as
standard:
• Switch mode charging technology: high power
20
efficiency and low heat dissipation, plus wide supply
voltage tolerance, in a compact and lightweight
package.
• Multistage charging: float, bulk, absorption and
AutoBoost stages ensure no compromise between rapid
25
charge recovery and long term battery capacity and life.
• Low output ripple: <1% ripple, beneficial for
vented lead acid & NiCd cells, essential for VRLA, and
configurable for use as a stand-alone DC power supply. * * * NFPA 110
• AutoBoost: triggered automatically on low charge compliant
30
levels, or manually by remote switch, AutoBoost * Tested and approved by UL to: UL1236 – Battery chargers for charging
temporarily increases the charge voltage before engine-starting batteries, and CSA22.2 No. 107.2 – Battery chargers
returning to float mode. Equalizing battery cell charge
without overcharge and gassing, AutoBoost maximizes Specifications
cell capacity and life.
40
• Temperature compensation: ensures batteries are Power supply
charged at the optimal voltage, which varies significantly Operating voltage: 95 – 250 V AC
Operating frequency: 47 – 63 Hz.
with ambient temperature. Sentinel can measure DC Charge Output
temperature with a battery-mounted sensor and adjusts Nominal voltage: programmable 12 or 24 V DC
output voltage to prevent under or over charging. Float/boost voltage: programmable, see ‘output calibration’ table
In addition, the Sentinel 300P includes:
50
Maximum current limit: 10 A
• Flexible configuration: microprocessor Voltage ripple: <1%
Line regulation: <2%
programmability for automatic or manual configuration Load regulation: <2%
of charge output voltages (12 or 24V nominal), cell Outputs x3 (x4 for non-CAN configurations):
types/numbers and application – all in one standard All models:
model. Programming is by circuit board links or PC- 1 x SPCO (RL1), 1 x SPNC (RL2), 1 x SPNO (RL3),
55
based software configuration and monitoring tool. dry/volt-free contacts (common feed for RL1, RL2 & RL3)
Standard models (non-CAN configurations):
• Inputs & outputs: for remote charger control, and 1 x SPNC (RL4), dry/volt-free contacts
signaling of charge fail, high/low battery volts and standard output functions (charge fail, AC fail, low battery volts,
mains fail faults. Standard output functions are NFPA high battery volts) are NFPA 110 compliant.
110 compliant. Non-standard input/output functions Rating (all relays): 1A max @ 30 VDC (resistive load), UL class 2
70
available to special order. Inputs x2:
Closed to negative DC to activate, configurable function
• Display, instrumentation and communication: options Physical
for backlit LCD readout, analogue metering, plus RS485 Operating temperature: –40 to +140°F / –40 to +60°C
and CAN 2.0B / SAE J1939 data communication, Display viewability (LCD models): 32 to 122°F / 0 to 50°C
configuration and control. Humidity: 20% to 90% RH
75
The Sentinel 300P is available either as an open-frame, Electrical safety: 2006/95/EC

Electromagnetic compatibility:
UL-recognized module for mounting in existing control 2004/108/EC, EN 55022 class B
panels, or as a UL-listed, wall-mounted stainless steel (EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-3)
enclosure with LCD and analogue metering options. UL approvals
Electrical connection is by screw terminal blocks. On All standard (E)SNTL300P models:
78
enclosed models, wiring harness access is by knock- BBGQ: UL1236, CSA22.2 no. 107.2
BBHH: UL1236 SE
out cable gland holes in the case side.
321
80
Electrical Connection
Notes:
1) AC input fusing (F1): replaceable, circuit board mounted fuse, rating as shown on the product label.
2) DC output fusing: all models include a self-resetting electronic output fuse.
3) DC output is isolated from chassis.
4) connection shown for standard configurations with output RL4. (RL4 is not available on units configured for CAN communication.)
Output Calibration
Battery type is selected by circuit board DIP switches or SNTL300P-PCSUITE configuration software.
Calibration figures at 20 deg C. If temperature compensation is enabled, and remote SNTL-RTC temperature
sensor connected, output voltage automatically varies by 3mV per cell per 1°C deviation from 20°C, within the
range –10 to +50°C. Increasing temperatures give decreasing outputs; decreasing temperatures give increasing
outputs.
float volts boost volts

Battery Type
(V DC) (V DC)
Wet (vented) lead acid, 6 cells 13.5 14.1
Calcium-Calcium, 6 cells 13.8 15.6
Lead acid hybrid Sb-Ca (Antimony-Calcium), 6 cells 13.5 14.7
12V
VRLA, AGM, 6 cells 13.5 14.4
VRLA, Gel, 6 cells 13.5 13.8
NiCd, 10 cells 14.1 14.5
Wet (vented) lead acid, 12 cells 27.0 28.2
Calcium-Calcium, 12 cells 27.6 31.2
Lead acid hybrid Sb-Ca (Antimony-Calcium), 12 cells 27.0 29.4
24V VRLA, AGM, 12 cells 27.0 28.8
VRLA, Gel, 12 cells 27.0 27.6
NiCd, 18 cells 25.6 26.1
NiCd, 20 cells 28.2 29.0
322
Dimensions
5
Open-frame SNTL300P Enclosed ESNTL300P
10
15
20
25
Optional clip for DIN rail mounting
(2 required for each charger)
part number 045-0001
30
Overall Overall
W 6.22 in. / 158 mm W 6.50 in. / 165mm
H 8.19 in. / 208 mm H1 11.81 in. / 300 mm
D 3.31 in. / 84 mm H2 3.15 in. / 80 mm
40
Fixing holes D1 4.92 in. / 125 mm
X 5.91 in. / 150 mm D2 5.12 in. / 130 mm
Y 5.91 in. / 150 mm Fixing holes:
Weight X 2.50 in. / 63.5 mm
50
2.5 lb. / 1.1 kg Y 11.25 in. / 285.5 mm
Weight:
4.4 – 4.6 lb. / 2.0 – 2.1 kg
55
Dimensions for reference only. Use actual product for mounting template. For safe heat dissipation, mount product in orientation
shown, with minimum air gap clearance of 1.5 in. / 40 mm above/below and 1.0 in. / 25 mm at each side.
70
75
78
323
80
How to Order
SNTL300P: Open-frame (protective cover) Sentinel 300P

42703850 Input supply 110/120/220/240VAC (50Hz/60Hz)
Output 10A @ 12/24V
42703852 SNTL300PC: As above, plus CAN/J1939 communication
ESNTL300PM: Enclosed Sentinel 300P

Input supply 10/120/220/240VAC (50Hz/60Hz)
42703879
Output 10A @ 12/24V
Analog ammeter and voltmeter
ESNTL300PCL: Enclosed Sentinel 300P

Input supply 110/120/220/240VAC (50Hz/60Hz)
42703877
Output 10A @ 12/24V
LCD readout, control/program buttons and CAN communications
42703875 ESNTL300PCLM: As above, plus analog ammeter and voltmeter
SNTL-RTC: Remote temperature sensor with 9.8 feet / 3.0

42703619 meter lead assembly, for automatic charge output temperature
compensation
SNTL300P-PCSUITE: Windows®-based software suite for all (E)
SNTL300P models.
42703898
Request by email with company name, details and valid
email address
SNTL300P-PCCONN: PC connection suite for all (E)SNTL300P
models. Includes SNTL300P-PCSUITE software on CD-ROM,
42703899
charger RS485 lead (6.5 feet / 2 meter), RS485/USB converter
and USB lead (3.2 feet / 1 meter)
324
5
Section 78 MurphyLink® J1939
PowerView™ Displays
10
1110920 PowerView™ PV25 — Engine and Diagnostic Display �� 327
1110823 PowerView™ PV101— Engine and Diagnostic Display�� 329
1411568 PowerView™ PV101-A-HAZ & PV101-C-HAZ�� 331
15
20
HelmView™ Displays
1211117 HelmView™ HVS450— Commercial Marine Display�� 341
1110871 HelmView™ HV750 — Commercial Marine Display�� 343
1211184 HelmView™ HVS780 — Commercial Marine Display �� 345
25
PowerView™ PVA Gages and Accessories
1010612 PowerView™ CAN Gages �� 347
02125 PowerView™ Analog Gages — PVA Series�� 349
30
03020 Wiring Harness Accessories — PowerView™ PV101 Module and PVA Analog Gages�� 353
PowerView™ — PVM Gages and Accessories

0710178 PowerView™ Gages — PVM Series�� 355
40
0710179 Wiring Harness Accessories — PowerView™ PV101 and PVM Gages�� 359
PowerView™ PVM Gages and Accessories

0910389 PVS-5 Power Supply�� 361
50
55
70
75
78
325
80
326
5
sect. 78 1110920
rev. 2014/09/27
PowerView™ PV25
10
Engine and Diagnostic Display
The PowerView 25 is an engine and diagnostic display
in an economical, compact package. This J1939-
15
compliant device provides electronic engine parameter
data, is simple to install, matches the PowerView line of
rugged displays and can be powered by 12-volt or 24-
volt systems.
The PV25 is equipped with two push buttons to quickly
20
access a convenient menu. In addition, a back-lit
graphic display and two LEDs indicate Active-fault
Dimensions
25
Indicator) and the OC (Occurrence Count) using the SAE
J1939 protocol.
0.50 in. (12.6 mm)
The PV25 displays up to 20 standard J1939
parameters in standard or metric units. The following are
some of the engine parameters of the PV25 displays:
30
Engine RPM Coolant Temperature
1.97 in.
Engine Oil Pressure ITA/Stage IIIB Parameters (50 mm)
1.47 in.
Engine Hours Active Service Codes (37.3 mm)
System Voltage Stored Service Codes
40
1.96 in. (49.9 mm)
Specifications
50
Tier 4 / Stage IIIB/IV Compliant Ready
Operating Voltage: 6 VDC minimum to 36 VDC maximum
Power Supply Operating Current:
460mA max @ 12 VDC 2.062 in.
810mA max @ 24 VDC (52 mm)
diameter
Reversed Polarity: Withstands reversed battery terminal polarity
55
HOLE CUTOUT 1.972 in.
Environmental (50 mm)
Operating Temperature: -40° to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)
Storage Temperature: -67° to 185°F (-55 to 85°C)
Sealing: IP68 .953 in.
(24 mm)
CAN Bus: SAE J1939 compliant
Connectors
4-pin AMP Mini-universal Mate-N-Lok Connector
0.125 in.
R 0.063 in.
70
(3 mm)
AMP Plug: P/N 172338-1 (1.6 mm)
AMP Socket: P/N 171639-1 (4 each, assumes 18 gage wire. See
AMP Plug specification to match socket and wire size.)
OR
75
Maximum Panel Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.6 mm)

Shipping Weight: (all models) 0.2 lb. (0.1 kg)
Shipping Dimensions: (all models) HOLE CUTOUT 2.062 in.
(52 mm)
3-7/8 x 2-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. diameter
(98.4 x 69.85 x 69.85 mm)
78
327
80
Bezel Options
Two Bezel styles are available. One is low profile, and both are constructed of ABS.
PV25 Bezel Styles

AB A-20 Style BB Low Profile SAE Style
†† ††
How to Order

78700541 PV25 Bezel type (flat lens) AB = A20 (Black)
Displays
78700571 PV25 Bezel type (flat lens) BB = Low Profile SAE (Black)
78000613 Wiring Harness PVW-PDA-12 PowerView 10 CAN & Power
78000614 Wiring Harness PA-30View 10 Loose Wiring Accessories
78000480 Terminating Resistor, PVMJRm
328
5
sect. 78 1110823
rev. 2014/09/27
PowerView™ PV101
10
The PowerView PV101 display is a multifunction tool
that enables equipment operators to view standard
15
engine and transmission parameters and active/stored
trouble codes. The display can show a single or a four-
parameter simultaneous display with text descriptions
for most common fault conditions. The enhanced alarm
indicators have ultra-bright alarm and shutdown LEDs.
20
The PV101-C and PV101-A have many features
including:
• Tier 3/Euro Stage III and earlier (PV101-A)
• Tier 4/Euro Stage IV (PV101-C) – Three icons
indicating Active Regeneration, Inhibit Regeneration
25
and Diesel Particulate Filter DPF Restricted. Menu
offers Auto DPF Regen and Request DPF Regen.
• OEM Menu - A password protected menu offers • Service Reminders – Five service reminders allow
access to MODBUS Setup, Engine Speed Control users to set hours for: Change Engine Oil, Air Filters,
ON/OFF and other critical menu items that require Hydraulic Oil, and Service Engine and Service
30
restricted access. Machine.
• TSC1 (Torque Speed Control) (PV101-C only) – • Select Source Address – Select the exact address
Allows users to set run speed via CAN if supported the PV101 will claim on the bus
by engine manufacturer • The ability to select CAN bus Data Rate
• Additional 4-Up Screen (PV101-C only) – Allows • PV101-C Configuration Tool (PV101-C only) – PC
user to have two 4-Up screens to toggle between.
40
tool allows users to create, view, edit and download
Second user configurable screen is defaulted to configurations for the PV101
show Tier 4 Parameters: DEF Level (Diesel Exhaust • The PV101-C Display Gages – Compatible with
Fluid Level), DPF Active Regen Status, Exhaust PVA and PVM gages as well as additional J1939 I/O
Filter Outlet Temp and Exhaust Filter Inlet Temp. modules
• Multiple language options − English, Spanish, • Displays more than 50 standard SAE J1939
50
German, Italian, French, Brazilian Portuguese, parameters
Chinese, Japanese, Czech and Russian • Shows helpful troubleshooting description for the
• Sender Input − Select between backlight dimmer supported parameters. Shows SPN, FMI and OC for
function or fuel level. Can be calibrated to use non- all faults
Murphy fuel senders.
55
Dimensions
Alarm-Yellow Shutdown-Red 2.062 in.
70
(52 mm)
diameter
1.972 in.
1.942 in. (50 mm)
3.489 in. (49 mm)
(89 mm)
75
1.992 in. .953 in.

(51 mm) (24 mm)
1.60 in. 0.125 in. R 0.062 in.

(41 mm) (3 mm) (1.6 mm)
0.83 in. 2.51 in.
4.30 in. (109 mm)
78
(21 mm) (64 mm)
329
80
Specifications
Operating Voltage: 8 - 32 VDC Auxiliary RS485 Communications Port
User configurable as MODBUS MASTER or MODBUS RTU
Reversed Polarity: Withstands reversed battery terminal polarity SLAVE
indefinitely within operating temperatures MASTER ACTIVE (default) drives optional PVA or PVM gages
SLAVE ACTIVE offers user adjustable communication parame-
Environmental ters
Operating Temperature: -40o to +185oF (-40o to +85oC)
Display Viewing Temperature: -20o to +185oF (-29o to +85oC) Resistive Input: user selectable as one of the following
Storage Temperature: -40o to +185oF (-40o to +85oC) Backlighting Potentiometer: 1 K Ohm, 1/4 W
Environmental Sealing: IP68, ± 5 PSI (± 34kPa) Murphy Fuel Sender: 33 Ohm full, 240 Ohm empty set standard
from factory for use with Murphy fuel sender. Programmable for
Power Supply Operating Current use with non-Murphy fuel senders.
(@ 14VDC) 52 mA min.: 300 mA max
(@ 32VDC) 1A max (with LCD heater) Shipping Weights (all models): 1 Lb. (450 g.)
CAN Bus: SAE J1939 compliant Shipping Dimensions (all models):

5 x 6 x 6 in. (127 x 152 x 152 mm)
Case: Polycarbonate/polyester
Clamp: PBT
Maximum Panel Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.6 mm)
Connectors: 6-pin Deutsch DT Series
Pinout
How To Order
Part Number Model Description Languages Available

78700439 PV101-C Murphy STD English, Spanish, French, Italian, German
78700497 PV101-C-M01 Murphy STD Russian English, Russian, French, German, Spanish
78700498 PV101-C-M02 Murphy STD Chinese English, Chinese
78700499 PV101-C-M03 Murphy STD Japanese English, Japanese
78700500 PV101-C-M04 Murphy STD Brazilian English, Brazilian Portuguese, French,
Portuguese German, Spanish
78700501 PV101-C-M05 Murphy STD Czech English, Czech, French, German, Spanish
78700435 PV101-C User Configuration Tool
Configuration Tool Kit
78700244 PV101-A Murphy STD English, Spanish, French, Italian, German
78700396 PV101-A-M01 Murphy STD Russian English, Russian, French, German, Spanish
78700409 PV101-A-M02 Murphy STD Chinese* English, Chinese

78700411 PV101-A-M03 Murphy STD Japanese* English, Japanese
*Added features not available in these language models.
330
5
sect. 78 1411568
rev. 2014/10/07
PowerView™ PV101-A-HAZ
10
& PV101-C-HAZ
The PowerView PV101 display is a multifunction tool
that enables equipment operators to view standard
15
engine and transmission parameters as well as active
and stored trouble codes. The device can show a single
parameter or display four parameters simultaneously.
Diagnostic capabilities include codes with text
description for most common fault conditions. The
20
enhanced alarm indicators have ultra-bright alarm and
shutdown LEDs (amber and red). The HAZ models
of the PV101-C and PV101-A have many features
including:
25
• ATEX Certified, Zone 2, Category 3G II 3G IIC T3 Ta = -10°C to 70°C (14°F to 158°F)
• Tier 4 Emissions Implementation (PV101-C only) – Three icons indicating Active Regeneration, Inhibit
Regeneration and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Restricted. Menu offers Auto DPF Regen and Request DPF
Regen.
• OEM Menu – A password protected menu offers access to MODBUS Setup, Engine Speed Control ON/OFF
30
and other critical menu items that require restricted access.
• TSC1 (Torque Speed Control) (PV101-C only) – Allows user to set run speed via CAN if supported by engine
manufacturer.
• Additional 4-Up Screen (PV101-C only) – Allows user to have two 4-Up screens to toggle between. Second user
configurable screen is defaulted to show Tier 4 parameters: DEF Level (Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level), DPF Active
40
Regen Status, Exhaust Filter Outlet Temp and Exhaust Filter Inlet Temp.
• Multiple language options − Russian, Czech, Brazilian Portuguese, Chinese and Japanese models have been
added to the line of existing languages (English, Spanish, French, German and Italian).
• Sender Input − Select between backlight dimmer function or fuel level. Can be calibrated to use non-Murphy
fuel senders.
50
• Service Reminders – Five service reminders allow users to set hours for: Change Engine Oil, Change Air Filters,
Change Hydraulic Oil, Service Engine and Service Machine.
• Select Source Address – Select which address the PV101 will claim on the bus.
• Select CAN bus Data Rate – Allows user to select CAN bus data rate.
• PV101-C Configuration Tool (PV101-C only) – PC tool allows users to create, view, edit and download
55
configurations for the PV101.
• The PV101-C Display Gauges – Compatible with PVA and PVM gauges, as well as additional J1939 I/O
modules.
The MurphyLink system includes the microprocessor-based PowerView Analog (PVA) Gauges for displaying critical
engine data broadcast by an electronic engine or transmission’s Engine Control Unit (ECU). Other components
70
include engine RPM, oil pressure, coolant temperature and system voltage. A combination audible alarm/relay unit
offers warning and shutdown alerts. Up to 32 components may be linked to the PowerView using a simple daisy
chain wire connection scheme using RS485. The PowerView and all connected components can be powered by
either 12- or 24-volt systems.
75
78
331
80
Specifications
Operating Voltage Maximum Panel Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.6mm)

12/24V (8-32 VDC minimum and maximum voltage) Resistive Input: (user selectable as one of the following)
Backlighting Potentiometer: 1K Ohm, 1/4 W
Reversed Polarity Murphy Fuel Sender: 33 Ohn full, 240 Ohm empty set from the factory
Withstands reversed battery terminal polarity indefinitely within operating or programmable to work with non-Murphy fuel senders.
temperatures.
Fuel Sender Input: 33 Ohm full, 240 Ohm empty set standard from
Environmental factory for use with Murphy Fuel Sender. Programmable for use with
ATEX Operating Temperature: -10°C to 70°C (+14°F to 158°F) non-Murphy fuel senders.
Storage Temperature: -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 185°F)
Environmental Sealing: IP68, ±5 PSI (±34.4 kPa) Shipping Weights (all models): 1 lb. (450g)
Shipping Dimensions (all models):
Power Supply Operating Current 5 x 6 x 6 in. (127 x 152 x 152 mm)
(@ 14VDC) 52 mA min: 300mA max
(@ 32VDC) 1A max (with LCD heater) Clamp: PBT
Connectors: 6-pin Deutsch DT Series
CAN bus: SAE J1939 compliant
Case: Polycarbonate / polyester
Product Dimensions
How To Order

English, Spanish, French, Italian
78700248 PV101-A-HAZ: Murphy Standard, Hazardous Environment
German
78700581 PV101-C-HAZ: Murphy Standard, Hazardous Environment
German
78700428 PV101 Shield: Impact Shield Assembly
78700430 HAZ Environment Kit: PV101-A-HAZ w/PV101 Shield
German
332
5
sect. 78 1311231
rev. 2014/09/27
PowerView ™ PV350
10
The PowerView 300 Series features robust,
multifunctional displays for advanced monitoring of
15
multiple electronic engines. The PV350 display in
this series monitors multiple engine and machine
parameters on an easy-to-read 3.8-inch (97mm) QVGA
monochrome LCD. The display is capable of handling
sophisticated engine diagnostics as well as basic
20
engine alarm/shutdown.
The PV350 display is customizable using the
PowerVision Configuration Studio®, an intuitive
tool designed to make personalization simple.
Using the software tool, users can tailor basic
25
graphics, designate screen layout and define custom
parameters.
This panel is equipped with five tactile push buttons
to quickly access a convenient menu. In addition, a
backlit, heated graphic display and two LEDs indicate
30
active-fault alarm or shutdown status.
Operating voltage: 6-36 VDC
40
Vibration and shock: 7.86 random vibe (5-2000Hz) and ±50g shock in 4.60 in. (116.84 mm)
three axes
Reversed polarity: withstand reversed battery terminal polarity
Operating temperature: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C)
Storage temperature: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C)
2.44 in. (62 mm)
50
4.324 in. (109.8 mm)
Communications: (2) CAN 2.0B; second CAN port is NMEA 2000 isolat-
ed; J1939 and NMEA 2000 protocol; proprietary messaging
EMC/EMI: 2004/108/EC and 2006/95/EC directives
EN61000-6-4:2001 (emission)
EN61000-6-2:2001 (immunity)
55
EN-501121-3-2 and EN 12895
Connectors: Deutsch DT series 6 pin; M12 for NMEA 2000 (micro-C)
Inputs: (1) resistive analog
Outputs: (1) 500 mA; switched low-side
SAE J1113/2, 4, 11, 12, 21, 24, 26 and 41 display 3.197 in. (81.2 mm)
70
Display: 3.8” (97 mm) QVGA (320x240 pixels); monochrome transflective
LCD with white LED backlight and heater 2.177 in.
Viewing angle: ±50° horizontally; +45°/-60° vertically
(55.28 mm)
Keys: 5 tactile push buttons
Alarms: Red and amber warning LEDs; capable of set points-triggered
75
output for external piezo buzzer or shutdown relay

78
0.892 in.
(22.65 mm)
333
80
Pinout
How To Order

78700545 PV350, Murphy Standard Display
78090100 Programming Kit, PV380-350 with dongle Accessories
78051077 Seal, PV380-350 gasket Service
78000752 PowerVision Configuration Studio® CD and license Software
334
5
sect. 78 1311242
rev. 2014/09/27
PowerView ™ PV380
10
Engine & Diagnostic Display
The PowerView 300 Series features robust,
multifunction displays for advanced monitoring of
15
multiple electronic engines. It’s capable of monitoring
multiple engines and machine parameters on an easy-
to-read 3.8-inch (97mm) QVGA monochrome LCD. The
display is capable of handling sophisticated engine
diagnostics as well as basic engine alarm/shutdown.
20
Customize the PV380 display using the PowerVision
Configuration Studio, an intuitive tool designed to make
customization simple. Using the software tool, users
can tailor basic graphics, designate screen layout and
define custom parameters.
25
The PV380 is equipped with five tactile push buttons to
quickly access a convenient menu. In addition, a backlit
and heated graphic display with LEDs indicate alarm or
shutdown status.
30
Operating Voltage: 6-36 VDC

Vibration and Shock: 7.86 random vibe (5-2000HZ) and ±50g 4.60 in. (116.84 mm)
40
shock in 3 axes
Reversed Polarity: withstands reversed battery terminal polarity
Operating Temperature: -40° to 185° F (-40° to 85° C)
2.44 in. (62 mm)
Storage Temperature: -40° to 185° F (-40° to 85° C)
4.324 in. (109.8 mm)

Communications: (1) CAN 2.0B; J1939 Protocol; Proprietary
50
Messaging; (1) RS-485 serial
EMC/EMI:
2004/108/EC and 2006/95/EC directives
EN61000-6-4:2001 (emission)
EN61000-6-2:2001 (immunity)
55
EN-501121-3-2 and EN 12895
Connectors: Deutsch DT Series 6 and 12 pin
Inputs: (4) resistive analog; (3) analog; 0-5V analog or digital; (1) 3.197 in. (81.2 mm)
frequency 2-10000Hz, 3.6-120VAC
Outputs: (1) 500 mA; switched low-side 2.177 in.
70
(1) 5V supply (70mA); protected (55.28 mm)
SAE J1113/2, 4, 11, 12, 21, 24, 26 and 41
Display: 3.8” (97mm) QVGA (320x240 pixels); monochrome trans-
flective LCD with white LED backlight and heater
Viewing Angle: ±50 horizontally; +45°/-60° vertically
75
Keys: 5 tactile push buttons

Alarms: Red and amber warning LEDs; capable of set point-trig-
gered output for external piezo buzzer or shutdown relay
78
0.892 in.
(22.65 mm)
335
80
Pinout
How To Order

78700539 PV380, Murphy Standard Display
78090100 Programming Kit, PV380-350 with dongle Accessories
78051077 Seal, PV380-350 gasket Service
78000752 PowerVision Configuration Studio CD and license
®
Software
336
5
sect. 78 1010638
rev. 2014/09/27
PowerView ™ PV450
10
The PowerView PV450 display features a freely
configurable design allowing custom software to be
15
quickly developed.
The display is compatible with PowerVision
Configuration Studio® software to enable quick and
easy changes to the programming.
The highly durable display features a full-color,
20
robust 4.3-inch bonded LCD for best-in-class sunlight
readability. The PV450’s rugged design makes it a great
solution for all types of environments and applications.
Dimensions
25
30
Gimbal Mount Pad
40
50
Specifications
Technical Input: (1) Resistive, 0-5 V or 4-20 mA (software configurable)
Display: Bonded 4.3” color transmissive TFT LCD (10-bit resolution)
Resolution: WQVGA, 480 x 272 pixels, 16-bit color Clock: Real time clock with built-in rechargeable Li-ion battery
55
Aspect Ratio: 16:9 backup (0.033 mWh)
Orientation: Landscape or portrait
Backlighting: LED, 500-650 cd/m2 (30,000 hr lifetime) Environmental
Microprocessor: Freescale i.MX357 32bit, 532Mhz Operating Temperature: -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F)
QNX Realtime Operating System Storage Temperature: -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F)
Flash Memory: 256 MB Protection: IP 66 and 67, front and back
70
RAM: 128 Mbytes DDR2 SDRAM Electromagnetic Compatibility:
Operating Voltage: 6-32 VDC, protected against reverse 2004/108/EC
polarity and load dump (CSA, 6-30 VDC) EN 61000-6-4 EN 501121-3-2
Power Consumption: 10W max. (CSA, 163 mA max @ EN 61000-6-2 (immunity) EN 12895
30VDC) J1113/2, 4, 11, 12, 21, 24, 26 and 41
CAN: (2) CAN 2.0B; optional NMEA 2000 isolation, isolation Vibration: Random vibration, 7.86 Grms (5-2000 Hz), 3 axes
75
with HVS450 Shock: ± 50G in 3 axes

Protocols: J1939, NMEA 2000, CAN open
RS-485: (1) MODBUS Master/Slave Specifications applicable to CSA-certified PV450 only
Video input (Optional): (2) NTSC/PAL input channels with one CSA Certification: Class I Div 2 Groups B, C & D; T4; IP66
displayed at a time CAN: (2) CAN 2.0B (transmission rates up to 1Mbps)
Connection: (4) Deutsch DT 6-pin connectors Protocols: J1939 and CAN open
78
Keyboard: (8) tactile buttons with white LED backlight Environmental Protection: IP 66 and 67
USB: 2.0 host, full speed
Output: (1) Open-drain, capable of sinking 500 mA
337
80
Pinout
How To Order
Part Number Model/Description Notes

78700436 PV450
78700538 PV450, J1939, NMEA, with Video
78700515 PV450, with Video Display
78700543 PV450-01-CSA, with Video (cCSAus)
78700544 PV450NV-01-CSA, (cCSAus)
78000831 PV450, Visor Kit
Accessories
78000814 PV450/PV750, Mounting Plug Kit
338
5
sect. 78 1211067
rev. 2014/09/27
PowerView ™ PV780
10
The PowerView PV780 display is a full-featured,
configurable display that shows integrated engine,
15
transmission and diagnostic information in an easy-to-
read operator interface. Equipment functionality can
be further integrated through the available I/O and
controlled via the CAN bus.
The PV780 features a full-color, 7-inch bonded LCD for
20
brighter, smoother graphics and best-in-class sunlight
readability. The rugged design makes this display a
great solution for extreme environments.
The PV780 display is compatible with PowerVision
Configuration Studio® which allows users to edit
25
CAN parameters, add OEM branding and create custom
equipment screens for a unique and
sophisticated user interface. Dimensions
Features include:
• CAN-based display with rich, full-color graphics
30
• Compatible with both mechanical and electronic 0.620 in. 1.959 in.
engines (15.74mm) (49.75mm)
• Rugged design for extreme environments
• Multiple languages
40
Specifications
8.869 in.
Tier 4 / Euro Stage IV Ready (225.27mm)
50
0.708 in.
Environmental (18mm)
Operating Temperature: -40°F to +185°F (-40°C to +85°C)
Storage Temperature: -40°F to +185°F (-40°C to +85°C) 4x Ø.189 in.
Protection: IP66 and 67, front and back. 8.869 in. (225.27 mm) (4.80mm)
EMC/EMI:
55
• 2004/108/EC and 2006/95/EC directives 1.191 in.
• EN 61000-4-3 (radiated EMF immunity radiated) (30.26mm)
• EN 61000-4-4 (EFT immunity power and I/O lines)
2.756 in. 5.138 in.
• EN 61000-4-5 (surges power lines)
(70mm) (130.50mm)
• EN 61000-4-6 (RF immunity)
• EN 61000-4-8 (magnetic field immunity)
• EN 60945 (ESD)
70
• EN 60945 (conducted emissions)
• HYBRID EN 60945 CISPR 11 CLASS B (radiated emissions) 8-32 x .25” deep
Electrical: brass inserts 4-places
75
•J1113-2, -4, -11, -13, -21, -26 and -41

Vibration: Random vibration, 7.86 Grms (5-2000 Hz), 3 axes
Shock: ±50G in 3 axes
Specifications are continued on the next page.
78
339
80
Specifications - continued
Technical Communications:
Display: Bonded print/glare-free glass and 7” (178mm) color transmissive • (2) CAN 2.0B according to ISO-11898-2; J1939 and CANopen
TFT LCD protocols; proprietary messaging
Resolution: WVGA, 800 x 480 pixels, 16-bit color • (1) RS-485 serial (MODBUS master/slave or PVA gage)
Viewing Angle: ±65o horizontal, +55o/-65o vertical • (1) USB host (OTG)
Orientation: Landscape or portrait Outputs:
Backlighting: LED, 1000 nit typical brightness 40,000 hr. minimum • (1) 500mA switched low-side
Contrast Ratio: 400:1 • (1) Frequency Out (2Hz - 3 kHz, Vbat rms square wave) for tach
Refresh Rate: 60 Hz Inputs:
Microprocessor: Freescale™ i.MX357, 32 bit, 532 MHz, ARM11 core • (3) Analog 0-5VDC, 4-20 mA, or resistive, 10-bit resolution
QNX® Realtime Operating System • (5) Discrete Digital, Active High
Flash Memory: 2 GB total, 1 GB available for data logging • (1) Frequency In (2Hz - 10 kHz), 5Vpk-pk min, 120Vpk-pk max
RAM: 128 Mbytes SRAM Mechanical
Operating Voltage: 6-36 VDC, reverse polarity protected Dimensions: 8.37 x 6.0 in. (212.5 x 152.3 mm) landscape
Video Inputs: 3 NTSC/PAL (single channel viewable) Unit Depth: 3.57 in. (90.8 mm)
Connectors: 2 AMPSEAL 23 Pin (AMP 770680-1 and AMP 770680-4) Case Material: PC/ABS, ISO 3795 (SAE J369, FMVSS 302) rated
Keyboard: 10 tactile pushbuttons with white LED backlight Mounting Options: Front mount, back mount or RAM mount
Touchscreen: (optional) projected capacitive Certifications:
USB: (1) USB 2.0 host (OTG, full speed) • CE
Real time clock: with Li-ion rechargeable battery backup • E-mark capable
Pinout
Connector 2 (Gray) Connector 1 (Black)

Pin Description Pin Description Pin Description Pin Description
1 Video Input 1 13 Frequency Input 1 Digital Input 1 13 Digital Input 2
2 Video Input 2 14 Frequency Return 2 Analog Input 3 14 Frequency Output 1
3 Video Input 3 15 no connect 3 Analog Input 2 15 Ignition In
4 RS-485 High 16 USB D- 4 Analog Input 1 16 no connect
5 RS-485 Low 17 USB D+ 5 CAN 1 L 17 no connect
6 no connect 18 USB 5V 6 CAN 1 H 18 CAN 2 L
7 no connect 19 USB GND 7 Battery 19 CAN 2 H
8 no connect 20 USB Shield 8 Ground 20 Digital Input 4
9 Video Input 1 GND 21 no connect 9 Analog Input 3 GND 21 Digital Input 5
10 Video Input 2 GND 22 no connect 10 Analog Input 2 GND 22 Digital Output
11 Video Input 3 GND 23 no connect 11 Analog Input 1 GND 23 no connect
12 USB ID 12 Digital Input 3
How To Order
Part number Description Note

78700560 PV780 Display, Murphy Standard Configuration
Displays
78700564 PV780 Touch Display (no configuration; bootloader only)
78090098 Programming Kit, PV780
78051181 Cover, PV780
78001053 Bracket Kit (screws included)
78001055 Harness, Gray Connector, USB
Accessories
78001056 Harness, Gray Connector, Flying Leads
78001057 Harness, Black Connector, Flying Leads
78001017 Harness, Black Connector, Development
78001018 Harness, Gray Connector, Development
78090069 Harness, PV750 Conversion, Power/CAN
Service
78051180 Bezel, PV780
340
5
sect. 78 1211117
rev. 2014/09/27
HelmView ™ HVS450
10
Commercial Marine Display
The HelmView HVS450 is a 4-inch display specifically
designed to meet the engine monitoring needs of
15
the commercial marine industry. Its durable design
and easy-to-use interface offer a complete view of
your vessel’s engines. Monitor propulsion, auxiliary,
transmission and genset engines all on one display.
It is equipped with the ability to switch between day
20
and night mode operations and even has a blackout
option. There are multiple screens to choose from, and
it features the ability to turn screens on/off to meet your
specific marine application needs. The HVS450 has the
ability to be connected to a video camera for monitoring Dimensions
25
the engine room or other important areas of the vessel.
It can utilize modern electronic engines and vessel
monitoring using a SAE J1939 CAN network.
This multifunctional, bonded screen allows you to
monitor multiple engines, transmissions, fuel usage
and more using only one device, thus greatly reducing
30
operating costs. It has eight tactile push buttons that
can easily be pressed with or without gloves. The
HVS450’s sunlight-viewable, full-color screen makes Gimbal Mount Pad
seeing lifelike gages, alarm warnings, service codes
and video easy to view in virtually any condition. The
40
HVS450 is fully programmed to display Diagnostic
Trouble Codes showing critical alarms and text
explanations.
The HVS450 display is compatible with the
PowerVision Configuration Studio® so custom software
50
configurations can be quickly developed. With the
PowerVision Configuration Studio, it is easy to define
the user interface screens, monitoring requirements and
specifications that are unique to the commercial marine
industry. The HVS450 paired with the PowerVision
55
Configuration Studio extends custom configuration from
only monitoring to equipment control, data logging and
additional alarming. You can even add custom graphics
and company branding to the user interface.
Display Parameters
70
The following are some of the parameters displayed by the HVS450 in Imperial or Metric units (when applicable,
consult engine or transmission manufacturer for SAE J1939 supported parameters).
Engine RPM Speed Over Ground*
75
Engine Hours Longitude and Latitude*

System Voltage Real Time Display*
% Engine Load at the Current RPM Instantaneous Fuel Usage
Coolant Temperature Trip Fuel
Oil Pressure Navigational Bearing
78
Transmission Oil Temperature Active Service Codes

Transmission Oil Level Stored Service Codes (when supported)
Tank Levels Video
Course Over Ground* *NMEA GPS Antennae required
341
80
Specifications
Technical Output: (1) Open-drain, capable of sinking 500 mA

Display: Bonded 4.3” color transmissive TFT LCD Input: (1) Resistive, 0-5 V, or 4-20 mA (software configurable) (10-bit
Resolution: WQVGA, 480 x 272 pixels, 16-bit color resolution)
Aspect Ratio: 16:9 Clock: Real time clock with built-in rechargeable Li-ion battery back-
Orientation: Landscape or portrait up (0.033 mWh)
Backlighting: LED, 500-650 cd/m2 (30,000 hr lifetime)
Microprocessor: Freescale i.MX357 32bit, 532Mhz Environmental
QNX Realtime Operating System Operating Temperature: -40° to +185°F (-40° to +85°C)
Flash Memory: 256 MB Storage Temperature: -40° to +185°F (-40° to +85°C)
RAM: 128 Mbytes DDR2 SDRAM Protection: IP 66 and 67, front and back
Operating Voltage: 6-32 VDC, protected against reverse polarity Electromagnetic Compatibility:
and load dump 2004/108/EC
Power Consumption: 10W max. EN 61000-6-4 EN 501121-3-2
CAN: (2) CAN 2.0B; optional NMEA 2000 isolation EN 61000-6-2 (immunity) EN 12895
Protocols: J1939, NMEA 2000, CAN open J1113/2, 4, 11, 12, 21, 24, 26 and 41
RS-485: (1) MODBUS Master/Slave Vibration: Random vibration, 7.86 Grms (5-2000 Hz), 3 axes
Video Input: (2) NTSC/PAL input channels - one displayed at a time Shock: ± 50G in 3 axes
Connection: (4) Deutsch DT 6-pin connectors
Keyboard: (8) tactile buttons with white LED backlight
USB: 2.0 host, full speed
Pinout
How To Order

Commercial marine configuration
78700563 HVS450, J1939, with video
and non-isolated CAN ports
Commercial marine configuration
78700538 HVS450, J1939, NMEA, with video with one NMEA 2000 isolated CAN
port
342
5
sect. 78 1110871
rev. 2014/09/27
HelmView ™ HV750
10
The HelmView HV750 is specifically designed to meet
the engine monitoring needs of the commercial marine
15
industry. Its durable design and easy-to-use interface
offers a complete view of your vessels engines. Monitor
propulsion, auxiliary, transmission and genset engines
on one display. It is equipped with the ability to switch
between day and night mode operations and even has
20
a blackout option. There are multiple screens to choose
from and the ability to turn screens on/off to meet your
specific marine application needs.
The HelmView 750 has the ability to be connected Dimensions
to a video camera for monitoring the engine room or
25
other important areas of the vessel. This multi functional
display allows you to monitor multiple engines,
transmissions, fuel usage and more using only one
device, greatly reducing operating costs. It has 10 tactile
push buttons that can easily be pressed with or without
30
gloves. The screen, a bonded LCD full-color seven-inch
screen, is sunlight viewable and makes seeing lifelike
gages, alarm warnings, service codes and video easy
to view in virtually any condition. The HelmView 750 is
fully programmed to display diagnostic trouble codes
40
showing critical alarms and text explanations.
The HelmView 750 display is compatible with the
PowerVision Configuration Studio® so custom software
configurations can be quickly developed. With the
PowerVision Configuration Studio, it is easy to define
50
the user interface screens, monitoring requirements and
specifications that are unique to the commercial marine
industry. The HelmView 750 paired with the PowerVision
only monitoring to equipment control, data logging
55
and additional alarming. You can even add custom
graphics and company branding to the user interface.
Display Parameters
The following are some of the parameters displayed by the HelmView HV750 in English or Metric units (when 70
applicable, consult engine or transmission manufacturer for SAE J1939 supported parameters).
Engine RPM Transmission Oil Temp Longitude and Latitude*

75
Engine Hours Transmission Oil Level Real Time Display*

System Voltage Tank Levels Instantaneous Fuel Usage
Engine Loadx Video Trip Fuel
Coolant Temp Course over Ground* Navigational Bearing
78
Oil Pressure Speed over Ground* Active and Stored Service Codesxx
Engine load percentage at the current RPM

x
*NMEA GPS Antennae required Stored service codes when supported
xx
343
80
Specifications
Technical Protocols: J1939, NMEA 2000 (GPS), CANOpen protocol support.

Display: 7 inch (178 mm) color transmissive TFT LCD Connection: 5 Deutsch DT 6-pin connectors
Resolution: WVGA, 800 x 480 pixels, 16-bit color Keyboard: 10 tactile pushbuttons with white LED backlight
Aspect Ratio: 16.9 USB: 2.0 host (full speed)
Orientation: Landscape Environmental
Backlighting: LED, 400-500 cd / mC (50,000 h lifetime) Operating Temperature: -40°F to +185°F (-40°C to +85°C)
Microprocessor: Freescale™ i.MX31, 32 bit, 400MHz Storage Temperature: -40°F to +185°F (-40°C to +85°C)
QNX Operating System Protection: IP67, front and back
Flash Memory: 2 GB Emissions: IEC 60945, 95/54/EC
RAM: 128 Mbytes SRAM Immunity: SAE J1113, ISO 11452
Operating Voltage: 8-35 VDC, protected against reverse polarity and Vibration: Random vibration, 7.86 Grms (5-2000 Hz), 3 axes
load dump Shock: +/- 50G in 3 axes
Power Consumption: 10w full backlight; 22w full backlight with heater Mechanical
(at temperatures below -10 °C) Dimensions: 8.37 x 6.0 in. (212.5 x 152.3 mm) landscape
CAN: 3 CAN ports according to CAN specification 2.0A or 2.0B; one port Unit Depth: 3.57 in. (90.8 mm)
isolated according to NMEA 2000 (GPS) Case material: Polycarbonate back case
RS485: 1 MODBUS Master/Slave port, PVA Gage Mounting Options: Front mount, rear mount, or optional gimbal mount
Video input: 3 NTSC/PAL (single channel viewable)
Pinout
How To Order

78-70-0525 HV750 ABS Type Approved Display
344
5
sect. 78 1211184
rev. 2014/09/27
HelmView ™ HVS780
10
The HelmView HVS780 is a full-featured, configurable
display that integrates electronic engine, transmission
15
and vessel information into an easy-to-read operator
interface. Operators can monitor multiple parameters,
including single or dual engines, fuel usage and much
more.
The HelmView HVS780 display features a full-color
20
7-inch bonded LCD screen for rugged environments.
The display screen is viewable in direct sunlight and
multiple night viewing blackout mode options. The
display bezel has 10 tactile push buttons that can
easily be pressed with or without gloves. In addition,
25
it comes pre-loaded with a standard marine software
configuration that features custom parameters and Dimensions
interface screens tailored for commercial marine
equipment.
Customize the HelmView display with Murphy’s 0.620 in.
30
1.959 in.
PowerVision Configuration Studio™ a powerful tool that (15.74mm) (49.75mm)
allows you to create custom configurations for unique
commercial marine applications - including tug boats,
fishing vessels, search and rescue, cargo and more.
The HelmView HVS780 paired with the PowerVision
40
only monitoring to equipment control, data logging and
additional alarming. You can even add custom graphics 8.869 in.
(225.27mm)
and company branding to the user interface. 0.708 in.
(18mm)
50
Display Parameters 8.869 in. (225.27 mm)
4x Ø.189 in.
(4.80mm)
The following are some of the parameters displayed by 1.191 in.

the HelmView HVS780 in English or Metric units (when (30.26mm)
55
applicable, consult engine or transmission manufacturer
2.756 in. 5.138 in.
for SAE J1939 supported parameters). (70mm) (130.50mm)
Engine RPM Course over Ground*

Engine Hours Speed over Ground*
System Voltage Longitude and Latitude*
70
8-32 x .25” deep
brass inserts 4-places
Engine Load x
Real Time Display*
Coolant Temp Instantaneous Fuel Usage
Oil Pressure Trip Fuel
75
Transmission Oil Temp Navigational Bearing

Transmission Oil Level Active Service Codes
Tank Levels Video
Stored Service Codes (when supported)
78
x
Engine load percentage at the current RPM
*NMEA GPS Antennae required
345
80
Specifications
Technical Output:
Display: 7 inch (178 mm) color transmissive TFT LCD • (1) 500mA switched low-side
Resolution: WVGA, 800 x 480 pixels, 16-bit color • (1) Frequency Out (0Hz - 5 kHz), 120Vpk-pk max Vbat rms square
Viewing Angle: ±65o horizontal, +55o/-65o vertical wave
Orientation: Landscape Inputs:
Backlighting: LED, 1000 nit typical brightness 40,000 hr. minimum • (3) Analog 0-5VDC, 4-20 mA, or resistive, 10-bit resolution
Contrast Ratio: 400:1 • (5) Discreet Digital 0-5V, Active High
Refresh Rate: 60 Hz • (1) Frequency In (2Hz - 10 kHz), 5Vpk-pk.min, 120Vpk-pk max
Microprocessor: Freescale™ i.MX357, 32 bit, 532 MHz, ARM11 core Environmental
QNX® Realtime Operating System Operating Temperature: -40°F to +185°F (-40°C to +85°C)
Flash Memory: 2 GB total, 1 GB available for data logging Storage Temperature: -40°F to +185°F (-40°C to +85°C)
RAM: 128 Mbytes SRAM Protection: IP66 and 67, front and back.
Operating Voltage: 6-36 VDC, reverse polarity protected Emissions: IEC 60945, 95/54/EC
Video input: 3 NTSC/PAL (single channel viewable) Immunity: SAE J1113
Communications: Vibration: Random vibration, 7.86 Grms (5-2000 Hz), 3 axes
• (2) CAN 2.0B with one isolated (NMEA compliant); J1939 and Mechanical
CANopen® protocols, proprietary messaging Dimensions: 9.75 x 6.23 in. (247.7 x 158.2mm) landscape
• (1) RS-485 serial (MODBUS master/slave) Unit Depth: 2.58 in. (65.49 mm)
Connectors: 2 AMPSEAL 23 Pin (AMP 770680-1 and AMP 770680-4) Case material: PC/ABS, ISO 3795 (SAE J369, FMVSS 302) rated
Keyboard: 10 tactile pushbuttons with white LED backlight Mounting Options: Front Mount, Back Mount or RAM Mount
Touchscreen: (optional) projected capacitive
USB: (1) USB 2.0 host (OTG, full speed)
Real time clock: with Li-ion rechargeable battery
Shock: ±50G in 3 axes
Pinout
Connector 2 (Gray) Connector 1 (Black)

Pin Description Pin Description Pin Description Pin Description
1 Video Input 1 13 Frequency Input 1 Digital Input 1 13 Digital Input 2
2 Video Input 2 14 Frequency Return 2 Analog Input 3 14 Frequency Output 1
3 Video Input 3 15 no connect 3 Analog Input 2 15 Ignition In
4 RS-485 High 16 USB D- 4 Analog Input 1 16 CAN 2 GND
5 RS-485 Low 17 USB D+ 5 CAN 1 L 17 CAN 2 Battery
6 no connect 18 USB 5V 6 CAN 1 H 18 CAN 2 L
7 no connect 19 USB GND 7 Battery 19 CAN 2 H
8 no connect 20 USB Shield 8 Ground 20 Digital Input 4
9 Video Input 1 GND 21 no connect 9 Analog Input 3 GND 21 Digital Input 5
10 Video Input 2 GND 22 no connect 10 Analog Input 2 GND 22 Digital Output
11 Video Input 3 GND 23 no connect 11 Analog Input 1 GND 23 no connect
12 USB ID 12 Digital Input 3
How To Order

78700561 HVS780 Display Display
78700752 PowerVision Configuration Studio
78091098 Programming Kit
78051181 Cover
78001053 Bracket Kit (screws included)
78001055 Harness, gray connector, USB Accessories
78001056 Harness, gray connector, flying leads
78001057 Harness, black connector, flying leads
78001017 Harness, black connector, development
78001018 Harness, gray connector, development
78090069 Harness, PV750 Conversion, Power/CAN
Service
78051180 Bezel
346
5
sect. 78 1010612
rev. 2014/09/27
PowerView ™ CAN Gages
10
The PowerView CAN Gages (PVCAN) are a series of intelligent gages
designed to display easy-to-read information broadcast over the SAE J1939
communications. These gages are designed to be wired directly to the
J1939 CAN bus without the need of another device driving them.
15
The PVCAN gage includes features such as a smooth stepper motor
operation for the 270-degree sweep pointer, an environmentally sealed case
with two Deutsch DT style connectors molded into the case and green LED
backlighting.
They are available for standard 2 1/6-inch (52mm) and 3 3/8-inch (86mm)
20
diameter hole sizes. In addition, its polycarbonate/polyester alloy cases
incorporate a D shape allowing panel cutouts that eliminate gage rotation
during installation.
All PowerView gages can be powered by 12- or 24-VDC systems.
25
Styles Specifications
Power Supply Input Voltage: 12/24V (8-
32VDC Minimum and Maximum Voltage)
Power Supply Operating Current:
30
Typically 70mA
Backlight Maximum Current: 45mA
Input: CAN (SAE J1939)
Operating Temperatures: -40°F to
185°F (-40°C to 85°C)
Storage Temperatures: -76°F to 185°F
40
(-60°C to 85°C)
Dial: White numerals over black back-
ground
Gage Accuracy: Better than ±1% of full
scale
Environmentally Sealed Enclosure:
IP68: ±5PSI (±34.4kPa).
50
Case Material: Polycarbonate/Polyester
(PC+PBT)
Clamp Material: Polyester (PBT)
Lens Material: Polycarbonate
Bezel Material: ABS
Maximum Panel Thickness: 3/8 in.
55
(9.6mm)
Connectors: 6-Pin Deutsch DT06 Series
70
75
78
347
80
Pinout PVCAN 20 and PVCAN 30 Series
How To Order

78000761 CANJR, Terminating Resistor
78000745 CANW-J-9, 9” Jumper Harness*
Accessories
78000747 CAN-J-24, 24” Jumper Harness*
78000124 PVW-P-12, 12” Power/CAN Harness
*According to recommended SAE J1939 wiring practices, any device on the CAN bus should be noded into the bus with a distance of no more
than 1 meter.
348
5
sect. 78 02125
rev. 2014/09/27
PowerView ™ Analog Gages
10
PVA Series
The PowerView Analog Gages (PVA) are a series of
intelligent gages designed to display easy-to-read
15
information transmitted by the PowerView. The PVA
gages communicate with the PowerView via a single
RS485 twisted pair MODBUS RTU serial link. The gages
can be daisy-chained using quick-connect harnesses
with watertight connectors.
20
The major feature of the PVA gages is its balance
between design and functionality. These modern gages
offer a selection of lens and bezel styles and colors.
The PVA gages also include features such as a smooth
stepper motor operation for the 270-degree sweep
Dimensions
pointer, an environmentally sealed case with two
25
Deutsch DT style connectors molded into the case and
PVA20/PVAA20 Series - Typical Gage Dimensions
green LED backlighting.
They are available for standard 2-1/6-inch (52mm)
and 3-3/8-inch (86mm) diameter mounting hole sizes.
In addition, the polycarbonate/polyester alloy cases
30
incorporate a D shape allowing panel cutouts that
eliminate gage rotation during installation.
The PowerView Audible Alarm (PVAA) alerts operators
to fault conditions via piezoelectric alarm and relay
contacts. It also has a temporary silencer button that
40
silences the audible tone for two minutes on warnings
and 30 seconds on shutdown conditions. All PowerView
gages can be powered by 12- or 24-VDC systems.
Specifications
50
Power Supply Input: 12/24V (8-32VDC min/max voltage)
Power Supply Operating Current: (@ 14VDC) =
PVA20, PVA35: 28 mA minimum: 52 mA maximum
PVAA20: 19 ma minimum; 46 mA maximum PVA35 Series - Typical Gage Dimensions
55
Backlight Maximum Current: 24 mA (Not valid for PVAA20)
Input: RS485 MODBUS RTU Data
Output: Analog readout
Operating Temperature: -40°F to 185°F (-40°C to 85°C)
Storage Temperature: -76°F to 185°F (-60°C to 85°C)
Dial: White text over black background
70
Indicating Pointer: Stepper motor Operation with 270° sweep
Gage Accuracy: Better than ± 1% of full scale
Environmentally Sealed Enclosure:
Sealing: IP68, ±5 psi (±34.4 kPa)
Case Materials: Polycarbonate/Polyester (PC+PBT)
Clamp Materials: Polyester (PBT)
Lens Material: Polycarbonate
75
Bezel Material: ABS

Maximum Panel Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.6mm)
Connectors: 6-pin Deutsch DT06 Series
The following items apply only to PVAA20
Sound Output Level: 90 dB @ 30cm
Relay Rated Load: 0.5A, 125VAC: 1A, 24VDC
78
Relay Maximum Switching Capacity: 62.5VA, 30W

External Audible Alarm Output: 28VDC, 30 mA maximum
current sink
Temporary Silence Button: Charge transfer technology
349
80
-
350
Pinout
5
10
15
20
How To Order
25
30
40
50
55
70
75
78
Shipping Weight: 1 lb. (450 g) All models

Shipping Dimensions: 6x6x6 in. (153x153x153mm) All models
351
80
How to Order
Wiring Harnesses and Accessories

For details see bulletin 0710179 - Wiring Harness Accessories for PVM Gages
358
5
sect. 78 0710179
rev. 2014/09/27
Wiring Harness Accessories
10
PowerView ™ PV101 and PVM Gages
Diagram
15
Use this easy-connect diagram to help you locate the wiring harness you need.
NOTE: The PV101 can support up yo five PVM gages in a distance less than 8.5 meters.
20
25
30
40
50
How to Order
55
Part Number Length Model: Description Diagram
PVW-P-length: CAN and power harness

12 in.
78000124 for PowerView module (includes 120Ω
(305 mm)
CAN resistor)
78000479
9 in. 70
(229 mm)
12 in.
78000490 PVWM-J-length: Gage harness
(305mm)
75
24 in.
78000503
(607 mm)
9 in.
78000481
(229 mm)
12 in. PVWM-JM-length: PowerView jumper
78
78000504
(305mm) harness
24 in.
78000505
(607 mm)
359
80
How to Order - continued
Part
Length Model: Description Diagram
Number
72 in.
78000157
(1.82 m)
144 in.
78000158
(3.65 m)
PVW-CH-length: PowerView CAN extension harness
240 in.
78000159
(6.10 m)
360 in.
78000160
(9.10 m)
72 in.
78000149
(1.82 m)
144 in.
78000150
(3.65 m) PVW-PH-length: PowerView battery power extension
240 in. harness
78000151
(6.10 m)
360 in.
78000152
(9.10 m)
PVMJR: Terminating Resistor (use on last PVM gage

78000480 –
in a series - not needed for PV101)
12 in.
78000511
(305 mm)
PVWM-K-length: PV101 - PVM Wiring Kit includes:

one PVW-P, four PVWN-J, one PVWM-JM, one
24 in. PVMJR
78000512
(607 mm)
PVW-PW-length: PowerView CAN & Power Loose

30 in.
78000125 Wiring (includes 120Ω CAN resistor)
(762 mm)
24 in.
78000127 PVW-CC-length: PowerView CAN Loose Wiring
(607 mm)
24 in.
78000126 PVW-PC-length: PowerView Power Loose Wiring
(607 mm)
00009510 – PVW-CT: CAN bus tee Wiring Harness
360
5
sect. 78 0910389
rev. 2014/09/27
PVS-5 Power Supply
10
External power is required to make the PVM gage line
compatible with existing MurphyLink products, such
as PV1000, Cascade, iGuard and eGuard. The PVS-5
power supply device supplies 5 volts of external power
15
and load dump protection for up to 6 PVM gages. The
maximum length of the power and data connection
between gages is 0.5 meters (8.5 meters total).
The unit may be installed inside a panel or behind a
dash.
20
25
Input Voltage: .038 in.
1.625 in. (41.28 mm) (1 mm)
6 VDC minimum to 32 VDC maximum
12/24 VDC nominal
Output Voltage: 5 VDC @ 450mA maximum
Reverse Polarity Protection: -36VDC and above
30
1.625 in. (41.28 mm)
Overcurrent Protection: 600mA @ 36VDA maximum
2.198 in.
Connector: AMP 1-770968-1 (55.83 mm)
Random Vibration: 5-2000 Hz
Operating Shock: 50G
40
Certification: CE
Case Material: Polyamide .25 in.
1.870 in. (47.5 mm) .694 in.
Dimensions: 2 x 2 x .75” (.694 mm) (17.63 mm)
Mounting Hole Dimensions: Two #8 screws, 1.625” offset
50
Wiring Diagram
55
70
75
Mating Connector - Tyco Electronics AMP Mini Universal Mate-N-Lok Plug Housing 4 Position,
AMP P/N 172338-1
Murphy P/N 00006935
78
361
80
How To Order

78700383 PVS-5 Power Supply
00006935 Murphy Mating Connector Accessory
9 inch Harness
78000479
PVM Gage Harnesses
12-inch Harness
78000490
24-inch Harness
78000503
362
5
Section 80 CAN I/O Modules
CAN/IO Modules
10
0810313 SenderCAN™ — SAE J1939 Input/Output Module�� 367
0810332 MeCAN™ — Mechanical Engine to J1939 CAN Interface�� 369
0810308 FuelCAN™ — Fuel Level Sender to J1939 Transmitter�� 371
1311322 PowerCore™ Intelligent Xpansion™ — IX3212 Power Distribution Module�� 373
15
0710175 XM500 — I/O Module�� 375
0610067 CANdrive™ — CAN bus J1939 to Electric Gage Interface �� 377
20
25
30
40
50
55
70
75
78
365
80
366
5
sect. 80 0810313
rev. 2014/09/27
SenderCAN ™
10
SAE J1939 Input and Output Module
The SenderCAN™ is a compact, encapsulated input
and output module for J1939 CAN bus systems.
SenderCAN allows the integration of analog and digital
15
measurement, control and indicating devices into
modern CAN and ECU-based engines and systems.
SenderCAN has up to four inputs and two outputs,
each of which is factory configured to OEM
requirements. Inputs can be set for use with resistive
20
sender or switch signals, which are translated into
J1939 CAN bus messages with appropriate PGN
address, data scaling and transmission rate. Outputs
can be configured to drive gages, lamps, relays or other Dimensions and Connections
control devices based on received J1939 data.
25
Standard versions are available for use with common
senders (for example, the FuelCAN and MeCAN), but negative/common - black*
SenderCAN is primarily intended for OEM-specified input 1 - violet
input 2 - orange
input, output and CAN bus requirements. Please note input 3 - white
that minimum order quantities or charges apply for input 4 - gray
30
output 1 - blue
custom solutions. output 2 - brown
SenderCAN is compact and light enough for inclusion 0.70in.
in most wiring harnesses but can also be surface 0.156 x 0.234in.
(18mm)
(4 x 6mm) 4 places
mounted. The case is fully sealed in epoxy resin for high
impact and environmental resistance.
40
Specifications
Power supply 0.73in.
(18.5mm)
Operating voltage: 7 to 35 VDC
3.78in.
Current consumption: 25mA (typ.)
50
(96.1mm)
Input/Output
Input range: OEM/application specific, -2 to +35 VDC max
Output: OEM/application specific, 250mA max.
4.21in.
CANbus: SAE J1939 protocol, optional 120 Ohm terminating resistor
(107mm)
Physical
55
Case material: High impact ABS, epoxy filled
Weight: Approx 60 g / 0.13 lb
Operating temperature: -40oF to +185oF / (-40o C to +85o C)
Environmental Sealing: IP65 case, exposed lead ends
Electromagnetic compatibility: 2004/108/EC
Electrical:
J1113-11 pulses 1c, 2a, 3a/b and 5a
EN 61000-4-2 ESD 70
EN 61000-4-3 Radiated disturbance
1.07in.
EN 61000-4-4 Fast transients (27.3mm)
EN 61000-4-5 High Energy transients
battery negative - black
75
EN 61000-4-6 Conducted RF disturbance battery positive - red

CISPR 16-1-2, 4.3 Conducted emissions CAN high - yellow
CISPR 16-2-3 Radiated emissions CAN low - green
* Wire lead not available for all configurations.

How To Order Standard lead length 4in. (100mm) approx.
78
Please contact your Murphy representative to discuss

requirements. Also see FuelCAN and MeCAN variants
literature.
367
80
368
5
sect. 80 0810332
rev. 2014/12/08
MeCAN ™
10
Mechanical Engine to J1939 CAN Interface
The MeCAN™ is a compact, encapsulated interface
15
module that translates resistive sender, fault switch and
speed signals into SAE J1939 CAN bus data. MeCAN
allows quick and simple integration of mechanical
engines into modern CAN bus systems. Applications
include the retrofit of older engine fleets with modern
20
digital instruments, controls and telemetry, engine
hour tracking and the development of standard control
panels for mechanical engines.
MeCAN has three sensor inputs and one output. Two
inputs are for oil pressure and coolant temperature
sensing, either by fault switches or resistive senders.
25
The third input measures engine speed using a Dimensions and Connections
magnetic pickup or charge alternator signal.
Input signals are translated into SAE J1939 CAN bus
messages with assigned PGN address, data scaling and pickup negative - yellow+green
transmission rate. The output can drive an alarm lamp pickup positive - violet
30
oil pressure input - orange
or buzzer or actuate a shut down relay if the pressure, coolant temp input - white
temperature or speed inputs deviate outside preset fault speed calib. 5K pot - gray
shutdown output - blue
limits.
A fourth input is connected to a speed calibration 0.156 x 0.234in.
0.70in.
potentiometer during setup mode only. DIP switches (18mm)
40
(4 x 6mm) 4 places
allow selection of normal/setup mode and two speed
input ranges. An LED gives indication of operating mode
and CAN bus activity.
MeCAN is compact and light enough for inclusion
in engine wiring harnesses but can also be surface 0.73in.
50
(18.5mm)
mounted. The case is fully sealed in epoxy resin for high
3.78in.
impact and environmental resistance. Two standard (96.1mm)
versions allow use with either fault switches or Murphy
ES series resistive senders. Custom solutions are also
available for non-standard, volume OEM requirements. 4.21in.
55
(107mm)
Messages Broadcast
PGN Description
61444 Engine RPM
65263 Oil Pressure 70
65262 Coolant Temperature
65271 Battery Voltage
1.07in.
65253 Engine Hours
75
(27.3mm)
battery positive - red
CAN high - yellow
CAN low - green
78
Standard lead length 4in. (100mm) approx.
369
80
Specifications
Power supply Physical

Operating voltage: 7 to 35 VDC Case material: High impact ABS, epoxy filled
Current consumption: 25mA (typ.) Weight: Approx 60 g / 0.13 lb
Inputs Operating temperature: -40°F to 185°F (-40°C to 85°C)
Maximum operating range: -2 to +35 VDC max. Environmental sealing: IP65 case (with DIP switch protective film intact),
Oil pressure, coolant temperature (model MEC301-1): exposed lead ends
for Murphy ES(2)P and ES(2)T series resistive senders Electromagnetic compatibility: 2004/108/EC
Oil pressure, coolant temperature (model MEC301-2): Electrical:
for fault switch, closing to negative DC on fault -J1113-11 pulses 1c, 2a, 3a/b and 5a
Speed (magnetic pickup): Opto-isolated, 3 – 30 Vrms, -EN 61000-4-2 ESD
adjustable 10 – 180 pulses per rev -EN 61000-4-3 Radiated disturbance
Speed calibration: 0 – 5 kOhm potentiometer (setup only) -EN 61000-4-4 Fast transients
Outputs (all ratings non-reactive) -EN 61000-4-5 High energy transients
Shutdown: Negative low-side or ground switch, 250mA max. -EN 61000-4-6 Conducted RF disturbance
CAN bus: SAE J1939 protocol with120 Ohm terminating resistor -CISPR 16-1-2, 4.3 conducted emissions
-CISPR 16-2-3 Radiated emissions
How To Order

E2501000 MeCAN, with terminating resistor
Use with pressure and temperature switches (output
closes to ground on fault)
Use with ES(2)P pressure and ES(2)T temperature
senders
370
5
sect. 80 0810308
rev. 2014/10/20
FuelCAN ™
10
Fuel Level Sender to J1939 Transmitter
The FuelCAN is a compact interface that translates
15
fuel level sender signals into SAE J1939 CAN bus
messages. The device allows integration of standard
senders into modern J1939/CAN bus engine instrument
and control systems.
FuelCAN modules have three inputs (only one of which
is connected at any one time): input 1 is configured for
20
use with Murphy ES series resistive fuel level senders;
inputs 2 and 3 can be used with fuel level senders
having compatible resistance ranges as shown below.
FuelCAN inputs can also be factory configured Dimensions and Connections
for use with other types of fuel level or resistive
25
senders. FuelCAN is compact and light enough to be
incorporated into most wiring harnesses but can also sender common - black
be surface mounted. The polycarbonate case is fully sender input 1 - violet
sealed in epoxy resin for high impact and environmental sender input 2 - orange
resistance. A rear facing LED indicates input/CAN bus sender input 3 - white
30
status.
Fuel level / approx. resistance, Ohms 0.70in.
0.156 x 0.234in.
(18mm)
Empty 1/4 1/2 3/4 Full (4 x 6mm) 4 places
Input 1
40
240 147 96 60 33.5
(Murphy)
Input 2 240 158 100 58 30
Input 3 10 56 95 138 180 0.73in.
(18.5mm)
50
3.78in.
Specifications (96.1mm)
Power supply
Operating voltage: 7 to 35 VDC 4.21in.
(107mm)
55
Current consumption: 25mA (typ.)
Inputs
Maximum operating range: -2 to +35 VDC
Input 1 sender range, Ohms: 240 (empty) to 33.5 (full)
Input 2 sender range, Ohms: 240 (empty) to 30 (full)
Input 3 sender range, Ohms: 10 (empty) to 180 (full)
Outputs
CAN bus: SAE J1939 protocol, PGN 65276 (00FEFC16)
70
-2 sec update rate
-120 Ohm terminating resistor optionally fitted
Physical 1.07in.
75
Case material: High impact ABS, epoxy filled (27.3mm)

Weight: Approx 60 g / 0.13 lb
Operating temperature: -40°F to 185°F (-40°C to 85°C) battery positive - red
Environmental sealing: IP65 case, exposed lead ends CAN high - yellow
Electromagnetic compatibility: 2004/108/EC CAN low - green
78
Standard lead length 4in. (100mm) approx.
371
80
Specifications - continued
Electrical: -EN 61000-4-5 High energy transients

-J1113-11 pulses 1c, 2a, 3a/b and 5a -EN 61000-4-6 Conducted RF disturbance
-EN 61000-4-2 ESD -CISPR 16-1-2, 4.3 Conducted Emissions
-EN 61000-4-3 Radiated disturbance -CISPR 16-2-3 Radiated Emissions
-EN 61000-4-4 Fast transients
How To Order

E2502000 FuelCAN
E2502100 FuelCAN, with terminating resistor
Please contact your Murphy representative to discuss requirements. Also see SenderCAN and MeCAN variants
literature.
NOTE: Minimum order quantities apply for custom solutions.
372
5
sect. 80 1311322
rev. 2014/09/27
PowerCore ™ Intelligent Xpansion ™
10
IX3212 – PDM
Murphy’s PowerCore™ Intelligent Xpansion™ Power
Distribution Module (PDM) expands CAN bus control
networks by replacing existing relay and fuse boxes
15
with more reliable solid-state switches that can directly
drive work lights, wiper motors, cooling fans, directional
DC motors and other high current loads.
Each of the 12 IX3212 outputs can switch or
proportionally control up to 15 A loads in 2.5 A
20
increments and feature built-in over-current detection
and shutdown capability. Outputs are paired to run up
to six electric motors with H-bridge direction control.
Twelve digital inputs monitor switched battery, ground
Features
and floating inputs. Additionally, eight analog inputs are
25
available with a 5V sensor supply.
Wiring length is reduced and costs are cut by remotely • (6) 15 A max per channel, 500
locating the IX module near loads and signals. The I/O Hz
is multiplexed using a CAN bus network which allows • (6) 15 A max, 100Hz
engineers to greatly simplify harness design for ease of • Channel overload set in 2.5 A
30
installation and improved reliability. increments
12 Outputs
For applications not requiring a CAN bus controller, • High-side, open-loop PWM
the inputs can directly trigger the outputs so there is no and directional DC motor
need for a separate controller. control (H-bridge) modes
The enclosure is fully sealed and potted to withstand • Off-state leakage current <0.1
40
wash down and protect from dust. mA
• 12 digital, tri-state, input
Models IX3212-12 impedance 7.7 kΩ
• 6 analog, 0-5 V, input
Analog 8
Inputs impedance 100 kΩ pull-down
50
Digital 12 20 Inputs
• 2 analog, resistive, input
Digital 12 impedance 2.2 kΩ pull-up
Outputs PWM 12 • 10 bit resolution on all analog
inputs
H-Bridge 6
Sensor Supply 5V @ 70 mA
55
Specifications 1 CAN 2.0B, 250 kbps, J1939
Communications
proprietary messaging
Operating Voltage: 8-32V (IX3212-24) for 12V and 24V systems Deutsch DTHD, DT and DTP Series
Total Current: 70 A maximum continuous • J1, J2 – DTHD06-1-4S
Dimensions: 245 mm (L) x 140 mm (W) x 50 mm (H)
70
Mating • J3 – DT06-12SA (Gray)
Mass: 0.9 kg (2.0 lb)
Operating Temperature: -40°F to 185°F (-40°C to 85°C)
Connectors • J4 – DT06-12SB (Black)
Storage Temperature: -40°F to 275°F (-40°C to 135°C) • J5 – DT06-12SC (Green)
Electrical and EMI/EMC: • J6 – DTP06-2S
2004/108/EC and 2006/95/EC directives Certifications CE mark
IEC 61000-4-3, -4-6 and -4-8
75
EN 60945 / CISPR 11
EN 61326-1
Shock: 30G, 3 cycles
Vibration: 5-25g, 50-2,000Hz, 72 hrs per axis
Sealing: IP66 and 67, SAE J1455 4.5.3 (10,300 kPa @ 50°C and
100 mm away for 15 min)
78
373
80
Connectors
Connector J1 Connector J4
Pin Name Function Pin Name Function
1 GND Ground (-) 1 DO1/PWM1 Digital Output 1 / PWM 1 (15A, 500Hz)

Connector J2 2 DO2/PWM2 Digital Output 2 / PWM 2 (15A, 500Hz)
Pin Name Function 3 DO3/PWM3 Digital Output 3 / PWM 3 (15A, 500Hz)
1 PWR Power (+) 4 DO4/PWM4 Digital Output 4 / PWM 4 (15A, 500Hz)
Connector J3 5 DO5/PWM5 Digital Output 5 / PWM 5 (15A, 500Hz)
Pin Name Function 6 DO6/PWM6 Digital Output 6 / PWM 6 (15A, 500Hz)
1 5V_GND 5V Sensor Ground (-) 7 AI3 Analog Input 3 (0-5V)
2 DI12 Digital Input 12 8 AI2 Analog Input 2 (Resistive)
3 DO7/PWM7 Digital Output 7 / PWM 7 (15A, 100Hz) 9 AI1 Analog Input 1 (Resistive)
4 DO8/PWM8 Digital Output 8 / PWM 8 (15A, 100Hz) 10 DI11 Digital Input 11
5 DO9/PWM9 Digital Output 9 / PWM 9 (15A, 100Hz) 11 DI2 Digital Input 2 (Source Address 1)
6 DO10/PWM10 Digital Output 10 / PWM 10 (15A, 100Hz) 12 DI1 Digital Input 1 (Source Address 0)
7 AI8 Analog Input 8 (0-5V) Connector J5
8 AI7 Analog Input 7 (0-5V) Pin Name Function
9 AI6 Analog Input 6 (0-5V) 1 CANLO CAN – (Green)
10 AI5 Analog Input 5 (0-5V) 2 DI3 Digital Input 3
11 AI4 Analog Input 4 (0-5V) 3 DI4 Digital Input 4
12 5V_PWR 5V Sensor Power (+) 4 DI5 Digital Input 5
Connector J6 5 DI6 Digital Input 6
Pin Name Function 6 5V_GND 5V Sensor Power (-)
1 DO12/PWM12 Digital Output 12 / PWM 12 (15A, 100Hz) 7 5V_PWR 5V Sensor Power (+)
2 DO11/PWM11 Digital Output 11 / PWM 11 (15A, 100Hz) 8 DI7 Digital Input 7
9 DI8 Digital Input 8
12 CANHI CAN + (Yellow)
Dimensions
How To Order

E2443053 IX3212-24, Power Distribution Module 12V or 24V Systems
78001026 Deutsch DTHD, DTP and DT, Connector Kit Plugs, Sockets and Keys
374
5
sect. 80 0710175
rev. 2014/09/27
XM500
10
I/O Module
The XM500 Module is a configurable Input/Output
15
(I/O) module designed to bring analog and digital inputs
and output onto the SAE J1939 CAN. The XM500
configuration tool provides a user-friendly interface
allowing the user to create or change the configuration
used on the XM500 module.
Your application may require monitoring of other
20
information which may not be provided by the OEM
engine or transmission electronic control unit (ECU),
such as fuel level, hydraulic oil pressure or a low
engine coolant level switch. The XM500 is ideally
Dimensions and Connections
suited to bring the additional information you need
25
onto the J1939 CAN Bus and can be configured to
broadcast fault codes and activate digital outputs per
input condition such as fuel level low, hydraulic oil
temperature high, etc. Because the XM500 broadcasts
information using the J1939 standard protocol, the
30
information can be displayed using standard J1939
display modules, such as the PowerView PV101.
Diagram
40
50
55
70
75
78
375
80
Specifications
Electrical Digital Outputs*: 2 Sinking (500 mA)

Power Input: 8 to 28VDC Product Weight: 10 ounces
Communication Ports: CAN J1939 Shipping Weight: 12 ounces
Operating Temperature: -40°F to 185°F (-40°C to 85°C) Shipping Dimensions: 4” x 6” x 2”
Digital Inputs: 4 - Ground or battery positive activation
*(Outputs are NOT reverse polarity protected. Damage will occur if B+ is connected to the outputs.
Damage incurred from improper installation is not covered under the Murphy limited warranty policy.)
Thermocouple Input1: Type K and Type J
Analog Inputs2:
1 - Battery Supply Voltage (dedicated)
7 - Configurable as 0-5VDC, 4-20mA, resistive senders3 or used as an additional digital input
Speed Sensing Input: Magnetic pickup (2 to 120VAC RMS from 30 to 10,000 Hz)
1
When the thermocouple input is used, only 5 resistive, 4-20 mA, or 0-5 VDC can be used instead of 7.
2
Analog inputs can be exchanged for digital inputs (battery ground activation only) for a total of 11 digital inputs.
3
Other resistive senders can be supported. Contact Murphy’s Industrial Panel Division for programming charges.
Connector Pins How To Order
Part
Description Notes
Number
78700420 XM500 Murphy Standard* Module
78700534 XM500 Configuration Tool Tool
6’ harness with terminating
30000669
resistor
6’ harness without
30000685
terminating resistor Wire
12’ harness with terminating Harness
30000670
resistor
12’ harness without
30000686
terminating resistor
Connector A (gray) Connector B (black)
Pin Description Pin Description * To determine other configurations, review XM500
1 Digital IN 2 1 Digital OUT 1 Config & Wiring documents at www.fwmurphy.com
2 Digital IN 3 2
3 Analog 6 3
4 Analog 4 4 CAN high
5 Analog 2 5 CAN low
6 J & K Type - 6 Battery +
7 J & K Type + 7 Battery -
8 Analog 1 8
9 Analog 3 9
10 Analog 5 10 Digital IN 4
11 Analog 7 11 Digital OUT 2
12 Digital IN 1 12 MAG pickup
376
5
sect. 80 0610067
rev. 2014/09/27
CANdrive ™
10
CAN bus J1939 to Electric Gage Interface
As part of the MurphyLink® family, CANdrive offers a
cost-effective instrument solution for modern electronic
15
engines. CANdrive modules read engine ECU CAN bus/
J1939 data, drive standard electric panel gages and
provide LED indication of status and faults.
CANdrive has three dedicated outputs for tachometer,
oil pressure and coolant temperature gages, with DIP
20
switch selectable compatibility for Murphy, VDO or
Datcon gages. For volume orders, the outputs can be
custom configured for other gage types, lamps, relays
or remote signaling.
CANdrive advantages include:
25
• the retrofitting of existing electric gage panels to Dimensions
new J1939 compatible engines
• the use of standard, economical electric gages
with new J1939 engines
• no need for installation of additional gage
30
senders, tachometer magnetic pickups and
wiring.
CANdrive is packaged in a compact, surface mounted
case with epoxy encapsulation for maximum durability
and environmental sealing. Electrical connection is via
a 12-way automotive type connector. Model CDV100F
40
has a forward facing connector and one power/
CAN status LED. Model CDV300R has eight LEDs for
indication of J1939-transmitted engine faults and status.
All models include a six-way DIP switch for flexible
configuration.
50
Diagram Models and Configuration
CDV100 Front CDV300 Front
Switch Position
Options 55
70
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5
on on on Murphy EG(S) temp. & pressure gages
off on on Datcon temp. & 0 – 7 bar pressure gages
75
off on off Datcon temp. & 0 – 10 bar pressure gages

on off on VDO temp. & 0 – 5 bar pressure gages
on off off VDO temp. & 0 – 10 bar pressure gages
on CAN 120 Ohm terminating resistor in circuit
NOTE: CAN bus J1939 networks typically have two
78
off CAN 120 Ohm terminating resistor removed

120 Ohm terminating resistors (one at each end) with
on 12V DC power supply
a shield/screen connected to ground/earth at one end
off 24V DC power supply
only. Check engine and ECU documentation for details.
377
80
Specifications
Power Supply Physical
Operating voltage: Electromagnetic compatibility: 2004/108/EC
12V range (switch S5 on/up): 7 to 16 VDC Case material: polycarbonate / polyester / epoxy encapsulation
24V range (switch S5 off/down): 19 to 30 VDC Overall dimensions (w x h x d):
Current consumption: 68 x 92 x 22mm / 2.7 x 3.8 x 0.9 in.
CDV100: 25 mA typ. (allow 50mm / 2.0 in. depth with connector)
CDV300: 50 mA typ. (2 LEDs lit) Weight: approx 80g / 0.2 lb
Inputs Temperature:
CAN bus: SAE J1939 protocol. Input has a 120 Ohm terminating Operation: –40 to +85°C / –40 to +185°F, 70% RH
resistor, removable by switch S4. Storage: –55 to +105°C / –67 to +221°F
Outputs (all ratings non-reactive) Environmental sealing: IP60
Oil pressure gage, engine temperature gage: (CDV300R: IP65 from front with optional CDVG gasket)
switch selectable for Murphy, VDO or Datcon gages: Vibration: 15g, 10 to 2000 Hz, 3 axes
see Gage Compatibility section for pressure/temperature verses Shock: 50g, 11 mS, 3 axes
equivalent sender resistance tables
Tachometer: pulsed DC, 119 Hz ±1% @ 1500 RPM
Gage Compatibility
Pressure Gage Compatibility Table: pressure versus approximate equivalent sender resistance (Ohms)
psi 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140
Pressure
bar 0 0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.4 4.1 4.8 5.5 6.2 6.9 7.6 8.3 9.0 9.7
Murphy ES series 240 205 171 143 123 103 88 74 60 47 33
Datcon 0 – 7 bar 240 195 160 140 115 100 82 68 55 43 35
Datcon 0 – 10 bar 240 215 190 168 150 135 118 107 97 87 77 67 58 50 42
VDO 0 – 5 bar 10 38 61 85 110 130 155 180
VDO 0 –10 bar 15 30 45 60 70 81 92 103 114 125 136 148 160 170 182
Temperature Gage Compatibility Table: temperature versus approximate equivalent sender resistance (Ohms)
o
C 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140
Temperature
o
F 104 122 140 158 176 194 212 230 248 266 284
Murphy ES series 1029 680 460 321 227 164 120 89 74 52 40
Datcon 360 160 80 50 38
VDO 282.4 190.0 134.0 95.2 69.1 51.2 38.5 29.4 22.7 18.0 14.5
How To Order
Part
Description Notes
Number
CDV100F, CANdrive™ J1939 to gage interface, 1 x CAN status LED, connector
79700104 CANdrive
forward
CDV300R, CANdrive™ J1939 to gage interface, 8 x status/fault LEDs, connector
79700105 CANdrive
rearward
78000437 CDV-PW-30, 8 way wiring harness, length 30 in./760mm
79701003 CDVG, optional sealing gasket for CDV300R
78700363 CDV100F plus CDV-PW-30 harness
Accessories
78700364 CDV300R, CDV-PW-30 and CDVG gasket
79701001 CANdrive connector plug shell
79701002 Connector pins for above (pack of 50)
00020618 CANdrive installation and operation
00020251 EG(S)21 series electric gage installation Documentation
00020258 AT series tachometer installation
378
rev. 2014/10/31
Terms and Conditions of Sale

Prices: Shortages:
Prices are stated in U.S. Dollars at User Net (List Price) Shortages in shipment must be reported within 15 days of
less applicable discount, or Net if so stated. Verbal quotes material receipt or of invoice date and must be accompanied
are subject to confirmation by a written quotation from by the packing list. We reserve the right to back order any
authorized personnel of Enovation Controls. Verbal quotations item unless you request that shipment be made in full, in
expire,unless an order is which case we will schedule the complete shipment at the
accepted the same day they are made. Written quotations earliest date possible.
automatically expire in 30 days unless otherwise stated in
writing. They can be terminated by written notice within that Terms of Payment and Reservation of Title:
period. Price changes Terms are net 30 days from date of invoice with approved
apply to all orders received after the effective date and will credit. Enovation Controls reserves the right to require full or
be billed at the latest price. Blanket orders with scheduled partial payment in advance of shipment where the financial
releases will be billed at the new price on the effective date. condition of the Purchaser does not justify continuance of
production or shipment on the terms of payment specified.
Taxes: Orders from Purchasers with unapproved credit ratings
All prices, published or quoted do not include applicable may be shipped C.O.D. with reservation of title in Enovation
local, state or federal taxes. Applicable taxes must be paid by Controls until purchase price shall be paid in full.
the Purchaser. Export terms will be quoted.
All prices are F.O.B. our plant, Tulsa, Oklahoma, or
Minimum Billing: Rosenberg, Texas.
All orders are subject to a net minimum billing.
Return of Equipment:
Orders: Material may be returned for credit only upon prior approval of
All orders must be bona fide commitments showing stipulated authorized Enovation Controls representative. Accepted items
quantities, complete item descriptions and required dates if require a Return Authorization Number, must be returned all
applicable. We reserve the right to make design changes or charges paid and be sufficiently packed to prevent damage
improvements without notice. during shipment. Items must be new and unused and must
have been purchased in the past six months. You must cite
Penalties and Delays: your purchase order number and our invoice or order number.
No penalty clause of any kind will be effective unless Items must be returned through the same channels as
approved in writing by an authorized officer of Enovation purchased. A 15 percent minimum re-stocking charge will be
Controls. The company will not be liable for any delay or made against all returns of Standard (Make-to-Stock) items.
damage caused by circumstances beyond Enovation Controls A higher re-stocking charge will apply to all Non-Standard
reasonable control, including fire, strike, acts of the Purchaser, (Assemble-to-Order) items. Custom (Make-to-Order) or
insurrection, acts of God, transportation failures, or inability to special purchase items are not returnable. Credit will apply to
obtain labor, materials or manufacturing facilities. future purchases and is not refundable.
Acceptance: Repairs:
No order is binding upon the company until accepted by an Repair services are available for selected products.
authorized official of Enovation Controls. Customers will be advised of applicable evaluation fees and
estimated repair charges prior to the return. Items returned
Cancellation and Alterations: for repair require a Return Authorization Number and must be
Any order or contract may be canceled or altered by the returned all charges paid.
Purchaser only upon payment of reasonable charges based
upon expenses already incurred and commitments made by Warranty:
Enovation Controls for the benefit of the Purchaser. All Enovation Controls manufactured products are warranted
against defects in materials and workmanship. The Warranty
Damage and Loss: statement is available upon request or is available on our
Murphy products are packed in specially designed cartons Website at www.fwmurphy.com/warranty. Repairs beyond the
to protect them from shipping damage. Responsibility for new product warranty carry a 90-day repair warranty.
delivery lies in the carrier upon our delivery to him and upon
his acceptance of the merchandise.
All shipments should be inspected upon receipt at destination Possession of a Murphy catalog
for damage, either visible or concealed. Claims for loss
or damage should be filed with the carrier immediately. and/or price list does not imply the
Enovation Controls will assist in so far as is practical in right to purchase as an authorized
securing satisfactory adjustment of claims. However, all
claims for loss and damage must be made by the Purchaser Murphy dealer.
to the carrier.
379
rev. 2014/10/31
Enovation Controls Limited Warranty

Enovation Controls supplied products are warranted to be of good quality materials and workmanship.
As with any monitoring or control system, the purchase, installation and use of Murphy control
instruments and other Murphy systems is NOT AN INSURANCE POLICY. You have purchased
dependable instrumentation and with normal care, it will provide long and faithful service and enhance
the preventive maintenance program on your valuable equipment.
Limited Warranty: Product Return

Enovation Controls Manufactured Products. Enovation Before returning any product customer believes is
Controls warrants all Enovation Controls manufactured defective, customer must provide to Enovation Controls
products that it determines to be defective in materials details of the warranty claim situation, a complete
and/or workmanship, under normal use, for a period of description of the product, details from the Model
TWO years, unless otherwise stated. Number label attached to each product, including Model
Number, part number and date code and obtain from
Non-Enovation Controls Manufactured Products. Enovation Controls a Warranty/Return Authorization
When Enovation Controls supplies product(s) Number (W&R Number).
manufactured by others, the warranty extended to
Enovation Controls will be passed through to Enovation Any claim for shortage or damage to shipment must be
Controls customer. accompanied by the packing slip within 15 days of
receipt or invoice date, whichever is later. Damages
During the warranty period, at its sole option, Enovation in shipment are the responsibility of the carrier, and
Controls will use reasonable efforts to repair or replace customer must make claim directly with the carrier.
any defective product; provided, however, that the
customer has returned the defective product to Limitation of Liability
Enovation Controls, shipping costs prepaid. Any repair ANY LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL,
or replacement, at Enovation Controls’ option, shall be SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES IS
the customer’s sole and exclusive remedy. We are not EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. ENOVATION CONTROLS’
responsible for damage caused by improper installation, LIABILITY IN ALL EVENTS SHALL NOT EXCEED
neglect or abuse and are limited under warranty to THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT
repairing or replacing the item only. We are not liable for THAT GIVES RISE TO ANY LIABILITY. ENOVATION
equipment on which this product is installed. CONTROLS’ REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR PAYMENT OF
SUCH AMOUNT SHALL BE THE FINAL AND EXCLUSIVE
Warranty Disclaimer REMEDY IN THE EXHAUSTION OR UNAVAILABILITY OF
ENOVATION CONTROLS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY ANY OTHER REMEDY SPECIFIED HEREIN AND SHALL
FOR, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY NOT BE CONSTRUED OR ALLEGED BY CUSTOMER
OR AFFIRMATION OF FACT, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, TO HAVE FAILED OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. THE
OTHER THAN AS SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY LIABILITY OF THE COMPANY SHALL CEASE WITH THE
STATEMENT, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION (1) EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY PERIOD MENTIONED
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY ABOVE.
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE; (2) ANY
WARRANTY OR AFFIRMATION OF FACT RELATED TO
MISUSE, IMPROPER SELECTION, RECOMMENDATION,
OR MISAPPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCT; AND (3)
ANY WARRANTY OR AFFIRMATION OF FACT THAT
THE CATALOGS, LITERATURE AND WEBSITES IT
PROVIDES ACCURATELY ILLUSTRATE AND DESCRIBE
PRODUCTS.
Murphymatic® Control Systems

If a customer is requesting on-site warranty review or
service assistance for a Murphymatic® control system,
we will engage the proper resources to evaluate the
request and to repair, adjust or replace the Murphymatic®
control system or component(s), in accordance with our
Service Philosophy and Limited Warranty.
380
rev. 2014/10/31
Warranty
Important Notice Regarding Product Repairs and
Warranty Claims Warranty Claim:
• Contact Enovation Controls to receive WR#
In order to provide you with the best service possible • Provide detailed explanation of the problem and why
and to expedite all product repairs and warranty claims, Warranty is claimed. Immediate replacement prior to
we are changing the processes required to complete the our evaluation will require that the customer purchase
repair or warranty claim. This will require certain actions a new unit. If the warranty claim is validated, a
and information on your part. Partial details follow. For credit will be issued against the new unit purchased.
complete details please contact your product Inside A customer purchase order is required prior to
Sales Representative. replacement.
• Evaluation fee may apply. If applicable, the fee may
WR Number: be applied to repairing the unit or to the purchase of
A Warranty/Repair Return Authorization Number (WR#) a new unit.
will be required prior to all product returns. This number
will allow both of us to track the product and to expedite Repairs (Non-Warranty):
processing of your request. Simply contact our Inside • Contact Enovation Controls to receive WR#
Sales team to request this number. They will ask certain • Some products may no longer be accepted for repair
questions that will identify your exact request so that or because of its design cannot be repaired. Others
we can fully comply. They will also advise you of certain are uneconomical to repair. In some cases, repair
procedural changes or conditions that may apply to your parts are available for the customer to make the
request, as outlined below. repair. Your product Sales Representative will advise
details when the WR# is requested.
Complaint/Request Details: • (Preferred but not required) Provide detailed
Effective Jan. 1, 2005, warranty claims require a detailed explanation of the problem.
explanation of the problem or complaint so that we can • An estimated repair charge is available for those
directly address your concerns. A large percentage of products that can be repaired. When an exact cost
times we are unable to find a problem with the product is required prior to the actual repair, an evaluation fee
because we don’t know the details of your complaint, will apply. The fee may be applied toward the final
and we thus don’t know what to look for. We evaluate the repair cost. A purchase order is required for either the
product against our specifications, but that may not estimated repair charge or the evaluation fee.
address your complaint. This explanation will be • If the actual cost to repair is greater than 65 percent
required for Warranty requests in order to receive the of the customer’s cost to purchase a new product,
return authorization (WR#). This explanation is also we will advise. The customer may then proceed with
recommended for repairs but is not required. See below the repair, purchase a new product, scrap the unit or
for Repairs. have it returned as is (at customer’s expense). If the
unit is scrapped or returned, an evaluation fee will
Evaluation Fee: apply.
Effective Jan. 1, 2005, we established an Evaluation
Fee to cover certain costs associated with diagnosing
product problems (or suspected problems). When you
request the WR#, your product Sales Representative
will advise you of this charge and when it applies. For
example, if our evaluation does not support a Warranty
Claim, the customer will be asked to pay the fee.
However, the fee can be applied to the cost of repair or NOTE: The evaluation fee is
against the purchase of a new unit. Likewise, the fee can $45 net (no discount).
be applied to the cost associated with a non-warranty
repair. If our evaluation supports the Warranty Claim, the
fee will be waived. Also see Repairs below.
381
Index
Numerals C
5T, 15T, 12T and 24T 123 CANdrive 377
20 and 25 Series Pressure Swichgage 9 CAN I/O Modules
20 and 25 Series Temperature Swichgage 43 CANdrive 377
20 and 25 Series Vacuum Swichgage 3 FuelCAN 371
20DP, 25DP, A20DP and A25DP Series Pressure IX3212 373
Swichgage 5 MeCAN 369
45APE Series 29 SenderCAN 367
601 Series CD Ignition 211 XM500 375
10705146 51 CANstart 191, 307
10705147 51 Cascade 193, 309
Centurion 251
A Centurion Configurable Control Panel 261

Centurion PLUS 255
Centurion PLUS Configurable Control Panel 265
A20 and A25 Series Pressure Swichgage 13 CKV series 273
A20 and A25 Series Temperature Swichgage 39 Clutch Controller
A20 and A25 Series Vacuum Swichgage 3 CO3 239
AEC101 195 Clutch Operator 239
AFR-1R 219 CO3 239
AFR-9R 221 Compressor Panels
AFR-64L 225 Centurion Configurable Control Panel 261
AFR-64R 223 Centurion PLUS Configurable Control Panel 265
Air/Fuel Ratio Controls Control Systems & Services 269
AFR-1R 219 TTD Annunciator Panel 259
AFR-9R 221 Controllers
AFR-64L 225 Centurion 251
AFR-64R 223 Centurion PLUS 255
Engine Integrated Control System 227 Control Systems & Services 269
Air Temperature Sensor 71 CS&S 269
Annunciators
EN204 Series 299
LCDT 243
S1501 249
D
Tattletale Annunicators and Magnetic Switches 139 Detonation Sensing Interface System 213
Tattletale Remote Alarm Annunciators 133 DF Series 77
TTD 245 Dial Level Swichgage 105
AT03069 237 Dial Temperature Swichgage 55
AT and ATH Series 301 Diesel Fuel Check Valves 273
Automatic Engine Controller 195 Diesel Fuel Shutoff Valve 275
Auto Start Controllers Differential Pressure Gage for Filter Restriction 5
AEC101 195 Digital Engine Controllers
Cascade 193 EMS Pro 201
EMS Pro Lite 203
B Direct Mount Pressure Switch 21

Direct Mount Temperature Swichgage
SDB Series 53
Battery Chargers Direct Mount Temperature Switch 47
Sentinel 150 Series 317 DSI 213
Sentinel 300P Series 321 Dual Temperature Swichgage 59
Bilge Level Switch Dump Valves 103
BLSK1 75 DVU Series 103
BLSK1 Series 75
Brushless Alternators 217
B-Series Murphygage Instrument 17
E HD9063 117
Hourmeters
EG Series 287 AT and ATH Series 301
EICS MTH6 113
See Engine Integrated Control System SHD30 and SHD30-45 Models 115
Electric Gage Fuel Senders 291 TM Series 121
Electric Gages HV750 343
AT and ATH Series 301 HVS450 341
EG Series 287 HVS780 345
EN204 299 Hydrostatic Head Level Switches
Electric Gage Temperature Senders 295 DF Series 77
TR Series 205
Electromechanical Fuel Shutoff Valves 277 I
Electronic Speed Switches 117 Ignition Coils 215
EMS-GC10 311 Ignition Controls
EMS Pro 201 601 Series CD Ignition 211
EMS Pro Lite 203 Brushless Alternators 217
EN204 Series 299 DSI 213
Engine and Generator Controls Ignition Coils 215
CANstart 191, 307 IntelliSpark 209
Keystart 189, 305 Industrial Harnessess 183
Engine Integrated Control System 227 Intelligent Xpansion 373
Engine Monitoring System Controller 201, 203 IntelliSpark 209
ML2000 Panel 181, 199 IX3212 373
MPC-20 181, 197, 199
Engine Throttle Controller
AT03069 237
Exhaust Pyrometers 51
K
Keystart 189, 305
F L
Flasher Alarm 147
FuelCAN 371 L129 Series 93
L150 and EL150K1 Series 81
L971 Series 95
G LCDT 243
Level Maintainers
Generator Control Panels LM300 85
MGC50 313 LM500/LM500-TF 83
MGC100 313 LR500 87
MGC150 313 LR857 89
MGC400 315 Level Switches
Genset Controls Crankcase
CANstart 307 L971 Level Switch 95
Cascade 309 Scrubber
EMS-GC10 311 LS200 99
MGC50 313 MLS Series 97
MGC100 313 Liquid Level Switches 97, 99
MGC150 313 LM300 Series 85
MGC400 315 LM500/LM500-TF 83
LR857 89
H LS200 Series 99
Lube Level Maintainer 83
Harnessess 183 Lube Level Swichgage 93
HelmView Displays
HV750 343
HVS450 341
HVS780 345
M PDM 373
Pneumatic Valves for Fuel Gas Shutoff 281
M25 & M50 Series 277 PowerCore
Magnetic Switches Intelligent Xpansion 373
Tattletale Annunciators Magnetic Switches 139 MPC-20 181, 197, 199
Marine Engine Panels Power Supply 217, 361
MLP Series 185 PowerView Analog Gages 349
MRP Series 185 PowerView CAN Gages 347
MDTM89 59 PowerView Displays
MeCAN 369 PV25 327
MGC50 313 PV101 329
MGC100 313 PV101-A-HAZ 331
MGC150 313 PV101-C-HAZ 331
MGC400 315 PV350 333
Mini-siren 147 PV380 335
ML25 Panels 171 PV450 337
ML100 Panels 175 PowerView Panels
ML150 Panels 177 MurphyLink Panels
ML300 Panels 179 See MurphyLink Panels
ML2000 Panel 181, 199 PowerView PVM Gages 355
MLP Series Panels 185 Pressure Transmitters
MLS Series 97 PXT-K 33
Model 12 Air Temperature Sensor 71 PSB Pressure Switch 21
Models M2582-P and M5180-P 281 PT167EX 31
MPC-20 181, 197, 199 Pulsation Dampener 283
MRP Series Panels 185 PV25 171, 173, 327
MT90 111 PV101 175, 177, 329
MTH6 113 PV101-A-HAZ 331
Murphygage PV101-C-HAZ 331
B-Series Instruments 17 PV350 179, 333
Murphy Industrial Harnessess 183 PV380 179, 335
MurphyLink Panels PV450 337
ML50 Panels 173 PVA Analog Gages 177, 349
ML100 Panels 175 PVCAN Gages 347
ML150 Panels 177 PVM Gages 355
ML300 Panels 179 PVS-5 361
ML2000 Panel 181, 199 PXT-K Series 33
Murphy Industrial Harnessess 183
Murphymatic
Electric Motor Controllers R
See Electric Motor Controllers: TR Series Rack Pullers
Engine Throttle Controller RP75 233
See Engine Throttle Controller: AT03069 RP Series 229
Remote Alarm Annunciators
O See Annunciators
RP75 233
OPLH/OPLHACS Series 105 RP Series 229
OPL Series 23 RTD 67
OS77D 117 RTDT 67
P S
Panels S1501 249
MurphyLink Panels SAH 147
See MurphyLink Panels SDB Series 53
PD8100 Series 283
Selectronic
Annunciators T
See Annunciators Tachometers
SenderCAN 367 AT and ATH Series 301
Senders MT90 111
CAN MTH6 113
FuelCAN 371 SHD30 and SHD30-45 Models 115
MeCAN 369 TC 67
SenderCAN 367 TDX6 63
Electric Gage TDXM 65
Fuel 291 Temperature Scanners/Pyrometers
Temperature 295 TDX6 63
Sensing Bulb 49 TDXM 65
Sentinel 150 Series 317 Temperature Sensors
Sentinel 300P Series 321 Model 12 Air Temperature Sensor 71
SHD30 and SHD30-45 115 Thermocouple, RTD and RTD Transmitter With
Shock and Vibration Control Switch 129 Thermowell – TC, RTD and RTDT Series 67
Shock and Vibration Switch 125 Thermocouple, Stainless Steel Tube Type 69
Siren 147 Thermocouple 67, 69
Smart Coils 215 Throttle Controller 237
Speed Switches Timers
HD9063, OS77D and SS300 Series 117 Models 5T, 15T, 12T and 24T 123
SPL and 45TE Series 55 Time Switches 123
SS300 117 TL7 147
SV Series 275 TM Series 121
Swichgage Transformer Relay Assemblies 205
Electric Gages TR Series 205
EG Series 287 TSB Temperature Switch 47
Level TTD 245
Float Actuated Oil Level 91 TTD Annunciator Panel 259
L129 Lube Level 93
L150 and EL150K1 Series 81
OLPH/OPLHACS Series Tank Level 105
Pressure
V
20 and 25 Series 9 Valves
45APE Series 29 Check/Relief Valves - Diesel Fuel
A20 and A25 Series 13 CKV series 273
Differential Pressure Gage 5 Level
OPL Series 23 DVU Series 103
PT167EX Lead Line Pressure 31 Pulsation Dampener
Shutdown Panel PD8100 Series 283
WO270 169 Shutoff Valves
Shutdown Panels M25 & M50 Series 277
W0156 and W0169 Series 165 Models M2582-P and M5180-P 281
WAI Series 149 SV Series 275
WD100 Series 153 Vibration Switches
WD300 Series 155 VS2 Series 125
WDU Series 157 VS94 Model 129
WHB Series 163 VS2 Series 125
WO168 and WO241 167 VS94 Model 129
Temperature
20 and 25 Series 43
A20 and A25 Series 39 W
MDTM89 Dual Temperature Gage 59
SDB Series Direct Mount 53
W0156 and W0169 Series 165
SPL and 45TE Series 55
WAI Series 149
TDX6 Temperature Scanner/Pyrometer 63
WD100 Series 153
Vacuum
WD300 Series 155
A20 and A25 Series 3
WDU Series 157
WHB Series 163
Wiring Harness
For PV101 and PVA Analog Gages 353
For PV101 and PVM Gauges 359
WO168 167
WO241 167
WO270 169
X
XM500 375
Notes
Notes
Notes
Notes
Distributed by:
In order to bring you the highest quality, full-featured products, we reserve

the right to change our specifications and designs at any time.
Specifications and performance data subject to change without notice.
Certified specifications and performance data available upon request.
All trademarks and service marks used in this document are the property
of their respective owners.
www.fwmurphy.com
Printed in the USA 1411597 12-14
Cover Backcover 2015.indd 2 12/8/14 12:03 PM

General Catalog 2015: Controls & Instrumentation

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

General Catalog 2015: Controls & Instrumentation

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

General Catalog 2015: Controls & Instrumentation

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GENERAL CATALOG 2015

Cover Backcover 2015.indd 1 12/8/14 12:03 PM

In order to consistently bring you the highest quality, full-featured products,

2” and 2.5” Swichgage® and Murphygage® Instruments

4.5” Swichgage® and Murphygage® Instruments

2” and 2.5” Swichgage® and Murphygage® Instruments

Accessories for 2” and 2.5” Gages

SDB Series Temperature Swichgage® Instruments

4.5” Swichgage® and Murphygage® Instruments

Digital Temperature Swichgage® Instrument

Section 15 Fluid Level

Level Switch System - Bilge

Level Switches - Tank Level

Level Swichgage® Instruments - Coolant

Level Swichgage® Instruments - Oil

Level Swichgage® Instruments - Lube

Level Switches - Crankcase

Level Switches - Scrubber

Level Valves - Scrubber

Level Swichgage® Instruments - Tank Level

Section 20 Vibration, Time and Overspeed

Section 25 Magnetic Switches & Annunciators

Remote Alarm / Annunciators

Section 30 Engine Panels

Engine Panel Accessories

MurphyLink® PowerView™ Panels

Marine Engine Panels

Engine and Generator Controls

Auto Start Controllers

Digital Engine Controller

Electric Motor Controllers

Air/Fuel Ratio Controls

Section 50 Compressor Controls and Panels

Check/Relief Valves — Diesel Fuel

Pulsation Dampener Valves

Section 70 Electric Gauges

Section 75 Genset Controls

Engine and Generator Controls

Section 78 MurphyLink® J1939

PowerView™ PVA Gages and Accessories

PowerView™ — PVM Gages and Accessories

PowerView™ PVM Gages and Accessories

Section 80 CAN I/O Modules

2” and 2.5” Swichgage® and Murphygage® Instruments

2” and 2.5” Vacuum Swichgage ®

Limit Contact Adjustment: by a 1/16 in. hex wrench

A20 Series Models A25 Series Models

Part Number Model and Description Notes

2” and 2.5” Differential Pressure Gage

pilot-duty circuit. A25DP Series: 11 oz. (0.29 kg)

becomes set, as pressure falls the switch resets. 20DPG, 25DPG,

20P A20DP 25DP A25DP

Port A connects to the input side of the filter. Pressure

Internal Wiring Ranges and Factory Settings

Ranges* Max. Static Max. Contact

2” and 2.5” Pressure Swichgage ®

Snap-Switch Rating (20PE and 25PE): SPDT, 3 A@ 30 VDC

pages for details). Unit Dimensions: 20 Series: 3 x 3 x 3 in. (76 x 76 x 76 mm); 25

Pressure Ranges and Factory Settings